703602
308
Zoom out
Zoom in
Previous page
1/330
Next page
GLA
Operator'sManual
Order no.P156001713Partno. 156 584 16 01 Edition A2017
É1565841601=ËÍ
1565841601
GLA Operator'sManual
Publication details
Internet
Further information about Mercedes-Benzvehi-
cles and about Daimler AG can be found on the
following websites:
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only)
http://www.mercedes-benz.ca (Canada only)
Editorial office
Daimler AG: not to be reprinted, translated or
otherwise reproduced, in whole or in part, with-
out written permission from Daimler AG.
Vehicle manufacturer
Daimler AG
Mercedesstrae 137
70327 Stuttgart
Germany
Symbols
In this Operator's Manual you will find the fol-
lowing symbols:
G
WARNING
Warning notes make you aware of dangers
which could pose athreat to your health or
life, or to the health and life of others.
H
Environmental note
Environmental notes provide you with infor-
mation on environmentally aware actions or
disposal.
!
Notes on material damage alert you to dan-
gers that could lead to damage to your vehi-
cle.
i
Practical tips or further information that
could be helpful to you.
X
This symbol indicates an instruction
that must be followed.
X
Several of these symbols in succession
indicate an instruction with several
steps.
(Y
page)
This symbol tells you where you can
find more information about atopic.
Dis‐
play
This text indicates amessage on the
multifunction display/multimedia dis-
play.
As at 14.10.2015
Welcome to the world of Mercedes-Benz
We urge you to read this Operator's Manual
carefully and familiarize yourself with the vehi-
cle before driving. For yourown safety and a
longer vehiclelife,follow the instructions and
warning notices in this Operator's Manual.
Ignoring them couldresult in damage to the
vehicleorpersonal injury to you or others.
Vehicle damage caused by failure to follow
instructions is not covered by the Mercedes-
Benz Limited Warranty.
The equipment or product designation of your
vehiclemay vary depending on:
R
Model
R
Order
R
Country specification
R
Availability
Mercedes-Benz therefore reservesthe right to
introduce changes in the following areas:
R
Design
R
Equipment
R
Technicalfeatures
The equipment in yourvehiclemay therefore
differfrom that showninthe descriptions and
illustrations.
The following are integralcomponents of the
vehicle:
R
Printed Operator's Manual
R
Maintenance Booklet
R
Equipment-dependent supplements
Keep these documents in the vehicleatall
times. If you sell the vehicle, alwayspassall
documents on to the new owner.
You can alsouse the Mercedes-Benz Guides
App:
Your Operator's Manual:
Digital form inside the vehicle
The DigitalOperator's Manual provides
comprehensive and specifically adapted
information on yourvehicle's equipment
and multimediasystem. It contains infor-
mative animations, individuallanguage
settings and an intuitive search function.
Booklet inside the vehicle
In addition to this manualand the afore-
mentioned digital media, you alsohave the
option to obtainacomprehensive printed
versionofthe Supplement for yourmulti-
mediasystem from yourauthorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Digital form via the Internet
The Operator's Manual on the Internet pro-
videseasy access to all information
regarding yourvehicleand multimediasys-
tem. It alsoprovides helpful animations,
interesting background information and a
widearrayofsearch options.
Digital form as an App
Using the Mercedes-Benz GuidesApp, you
can view all the information on yourvehicle
and multimediasystem via mobile Internet
or download it independently of network
access. Availablefor smartphones or tab-
lets.
You can alsouse the Mercedes-Benz Guides
App:
Please note that the Mercedes-Benz GuidesApp
may not yet be available in yourcountry.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Mercedes-Benz Canada,Inc.
ADaimler Company
1565841601
É1565841601=ËÍ
Index ....................................................... 4
Digital Operator's Manual .................. 24
Introduction........................................... 24
Operation ............................................... 24
Introduction ......................................... 25
Protecting the environment ...................25
Genuine Mercedes-Benzparts............... 25
Operator's Manual ................................. 26
Service and vehicle operation ................26
Operating safety .................................... 26
QR codes for the rescue card ................28
Data stored in the vehicle...................... 28
Informationoncopyright ....................... 29
At aglance ........................................... 31
Cockpit.................................................. 31
Instrument cluster................................. 32
Multifunctionsteering wheel................. 33
Center console...................................... 34
Doorcontrolpanel ................................. 37
Overhead controlpanel .........................38
Safety ................................................... 39
Panic alarm ............................................ 39
Occupant safety .................................... 39
Children in the vehicle ........................... 53
Pets in the vehicle ................................. 59
Driving safety systems ........................... 59
Protection against theft .........................67
Opening and closing ........................... 69
SmartKey ............................................... 69
Doors ..................................................... 75
Cargo compartment ...............................77
Sidewindows......................................... 81
Panorama roofwithpower tilt/sliding
panel ...................................................... 85
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors .... 90
Correct driver'sseatposition ................ 90
Seats ..................................................... 90
Steering wheel ....................................... 95
Mirrors................................................... 96
Memory function ................................... 98
Lights and windshield wipers .......... 100
Exterior lighting ................................... 100
Interior lighting .................................... 103
Replacing bulbs................................... 104
Windshield wipers ................................ 108
Climate control ................................. 112
Overview of climate control systems ... 112
Operating the climate control sys-
tems .................................................... 117
Air vents .............................................. 122
Drivingand parking .......................... 123
Notesonbreaking-in anew vehicle..... 123
Driving ................................................. 123
DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehicles
exceptMercedes-AMGvehicles) ......... 130
DYNAMIC SELECT controller
(Mercedes-AMGvehicles) .................... 131
Automatictransmission....................... 132
Refueling ............................................. 140
Parking ................................................ 143
Driving tips.......................................... 146
Driving systems ................................... 154
On-board computer and displays .... 183
Important safety notes ........................ 183
Displays and operation ........................ 183
Menusand submenus ......................... 186
Displaymessages ................................ 197
Warning and indicator lamps in the
instrument cluster ............................... 224
Multimediasystem ........................... 236
Generalnotes ...................................... 236
Important safety notes ........................ 236
Function restrictions ............................ 236
Operating system ................................ 237
Stowageand features ...................... 242
Loading guidelines............................... 242
Stowageareas ..................................... 242
2
Contents
Features.............................................. 250
Maintenanceand care ...................... 266
Engine compartment ........................... 266
ASSYST PLUS ...................................... 270
Care ..................................................... 271
Breakdown assistance ..................... 278
Where will Ifind...? .............................. 278
Flattire ................................................ 278
Battery (vehicle) .................................. 282
Jump-starting ....................................... 285
Towing and tow-starting ...................... 288
Fuses ................................................... 291
Wheels and tires ............................... 293
Important safety notes ........................ 293
Operation ............................................ 293
Winteroperation .................................. 295
Tirepressure ....................................... 296
Loading the vehicle .............................. 303
All aboutwheelsand tires................... 306
Changing awheel ................................ 312
Wheel and tire combinations ............... 316
Technical data ................................... 318
Information regarding technical data ... 318
Vehicleelectronics .............................. 318
Identification plates ............................. 319
Service products and filling capaci-
ties ...................................................... 320
Vehicledata......................................... 325
Vehicledatafor off-road driving .......... 326
Contents
3
1, 2, 3...
4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac-
tion System)
4MATIC
Display message ............................ 221
4MATIC (permanent four-wheel
drive) .................................................. 165
12 Vsocket
see Sockets
A
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Display message ............................ 198
Function/notes ................................ 60
Important safety notes .................... 60
Warninglamp .................................227
Acceleration
see Kickdown
Accident
Automatic measuresafter an acci-
dent ................................................. 53
Activatingmedia mode
General notes ................................ 241
Activating/deactivating cooling
with air dehumidification ................. 117
Active Brake Assist
Activating or deactivating .............. 192
Display message ............................ 203
Function/notes ................................ 61
ADAPTIVE BRAKE ................................. 67
Additional speedometer ................... 193
Additives (engine oil) ........................ 323
Address book
see also DigitalOperator's Man-
ual..................................................236
Adjustingthe volume
Audio20........................................ 237
COMAND ....................................... 237
Airbags
Deployment ..................................... 51
Display message ............................ 206
Front airbag (driver, front
passenger)....................................... 45
Important safety notes .................... 44
Introduction ..................................... 44
Knee bag .......................................... 45
Occupant Classification System
(OCS) ............................................... 46
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator
lamps ............................................... 40
Side impact airbag .......................... 45
Windowcurtainair bag .................... 46
Airvents
Important safety notes .................. 122
Rear............................................... 122
Setting the center airvents ........... 122
Setting the sidea
ir vents ...............122
Ai
r-conditioningsystem
see Climate control
Alarm
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 67
Switching off (ATA) .......................... 67
Switching the function on/off
(ATA) ................................................ 67
Alarm system
see ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
AMG
Adaptive sport suspension sys-
tem ................................................ 165
Performance Seat ............................ 94
AMG adaptive sport suspension
system
General Information ....................... 165
AMG menu (on-board computer) ..... 194
AMG Performance exhaustsys-
tem ..................................................... 129
Anti-lockbraking system
see ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
Anti-skid chains
see Snow chains
Approach/departure angle .............. 153
Ashtray ............................................... 252
Assistancedisplay (on-board com-
puter) ..................................................191
Assistancemenu (on-board com-
puter) ..................................................191
ASSYST PLUS
Displaying aservice message ........270
Driving abroad ............................... 271
Hiding aservice message .............. 270
Information about Service ............. 270
4
Index
Resettingthe serviceintervaldis-
play ................................................ 270
Service message ............................ 270
Special servicerequirements .........270
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system)
Activating/deactivating ................... 67
Function ...........................................67
Switching off the alarm .................... 67
ATTENTIONASSIST
Activating/deactivating ................. 192
Displaymessage ............................ 213
Function/notes............................. 178
Audio20
Driving dynamics display ............... 168
Switching on/off........................... 237
Audiomenu(on-board computer) .... 189
Audiosystem
see separate operating instructions
Authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
see Qualifiedspecialist workshop
Authorized workshop
see Qualifiedspecialist workshop
AUTO lights
Displaymessage ............................ 210
see Lights
Automatic car wash(care) ............... 271
Automatic engine start (ECO start/
stopfunction) .................................... 128
Automatic engine switch-off (ECO
start/stopfunction) .......................... 128
Automatic headlamp mode .............. 100
Automatic transmission
Accelerator pedalposition ............. 135
Changing gear............................... 135
DIRECTSELECT lever ..................... 132
Drive program................................ 136
Drive programdisplay .................... 132
Driving tips.................................... 135
DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehi-
clesexcept Mercedes-AMGvehi-
cles) ............................................... 130
DYNAMIC SELECT controller
(Mercedes-AMGvehicles) .............. 131
Emergency running mode.............. 140
Engaging drive position .................. 134
Engaging neutral ............................ 133
Engaging
park position
(Mercedes-AMGvehicles) .............. 134
Engaging park position automati-
cally ............................................... 133
Engaging reverse gear................... 133
Engaging the park position ............ 132
Holding the vehiclestationary on
uphill gradients .............................. 136
Kickdown....................................... 136
Manualshifting .............................. 138
Oil temperature (on-board com-
puter, Mercedes-AMGvehicles) ..... 194
Overview ........................................ 132
Problem (malfunction) ................... 140
Pulling away ................................... 127
Selector lever ................................ 134
Starting the engine ........................ 126
Steering wheelpaddleshifters ...... 138
Transmission position display ........ 134
Transmission position display
(DIRECT SELECT lever) ................... 132
Transmission positions .................. 135
Automatic transmissionemer-
gencymode ....................................... 140
B
Back button ....................................... 237
Backup lamp
Displaymessage ............................ 209
Bag hook ............................................ 247
BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 60
Basicsettings
see Settings
Battery (SmartKey)
Checking .......................................... 72
Important safety notes .................... 72
Replacing ......................................... 72
Battery (vehicle)
Charging ........................................ 284
Displaymessage ............................ 212
Important safety notes .................. 282
Jump starting ................................. 285
Belt
see Seatbelts
Blind SpotAssist
Activating/deactivating (on-
board computer) ............................ 192
Index
5
Display message ............................ 214
Notes/function.............................. 180
Blootooth
®
Connecting adifferent mobile
phone ............................................ 241
Blower
see Climate control
Bluetooth
®
Searching for amobilephone ........ 240
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual.................................................. 236
Telephony ...................................... 239
Brake Assist
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Brake assistance
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Brake fluid
Displaymessage ............................ 203
Notes............................................. 323
Brake forcedistribution
see EBD (electronicbrake force
distribution)
Brake lamp
Replacing bulbs............................. 107
Brake lamps
Displaymessage ............................ 208
Brakes
ABS .................................................. 60
BAS .................................................. 60
Brake fluid (notes) ......................... 323
Braking assistance appropriate to
the situation ..................................... 62
Displaymessage ............................ 198
EBD .................................................. 66
Hillstart assist............................... 127
HOLD function ............................... 162
Important safety notes .................. 148
Maintenance .................................. 149
Parking brake ................................ 144
Riding tips...................................... 148
Warning lamp ................................. 226
Brakingassistanceappropriate to
the situation
Function/notes................................ 62
Breakdown
Where will Ifind...? ........................ 278
see Flattire
see Tow-starting
see Towing away
Buttonsonthe steering wheel ......... 184
C
Calling up amalfunction
see Displaymessages
Car
see Vehicle
Care
Carwash........................................ 271
Carpets .......................................... 277
Display........................................... 275
Exhaustpipe.................................. 275
Exterior lights ................................ 274
Gear or selector lever .................... 276
Interior ........................................... 275
Matte finish ................................... 273
Notes............................................. 271
Paint .............................................. 272
Plastic trim .................................... 275
Power washer................................ 272
Rear viewcamera .......................... 274
Roof lining ...................................... 277
Seatbelt........................................ 276
Seatcover..................................... 276
Sensors ......................................... 274
Steering wheel............................... 276
Trimpieces.................................... 276
Washing by hand ........................... 272
Wheels........................................... 273
Windows........................................ 273
Wiperblades.................................. 274
Woodentrim .................................. 276
Cargocompartmentenlargement ... 245
Cargocompartmentfloor
Important safety notes .................. 249
Opening/closing ............................ 249
Stowagewell(under)..................... 249
Cargonet
Attaching ....................................... 248
Important safety information ......... 248
Cargotie downrings ......................... 247
CD
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual.................................................. 236
CD player (on-board computer) ........ 189
6
Index
Center console
Lower section..................................35
Upper section..................................34
Centrallocking
Automatic locking(on-board com-
puter) .............................................193
Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........69
Change of address .............................. 26
Change of ownership .......................... 26
Changing thebulb
Corneringlight function .................106
Child
Restraint system .............................. 55
Child seat
Forward-facing restraint system ...... 58
LATCH-type(ISOFIX) childseat
anchors ............................................ 56
On the front-passenger seat............ 57
Rearward-facing restraint system .... 57
Top Tether ....................................... 56
Child-proof locks
Important safety notes .................... 58
Rear doors ....................................... 59
Children
Specialseatbeltretractor ............... 54
Cigarette lighter ................................ 252
Cleaning
Mirror turn signal ........................... 274
Climate control
Air-conditioning system ................. 113
Automaticclimate control (dual-
zone) .............................................. 115
Controlling automatically............... 118
Cooling with airdehumidification .. 117
Defrosting the windows................. 120
Defrosting the windshield .............. 119
Generalnotes ................................ 112
Indicatorlamp................................ 118
Information aboutusing auto-
maticclimate control ..................... 116
Maximumcooling .......................... 120
Notesonusing the air-condition-
ing system ..................................... 114
Overview of sy
stems ...................... 112
Prob
lem with the rearwindow
defroster ........................................ 121
Problems with cooling with air
dehumidification ............................ 118
Refrigerant ..................................... 324
Refrigerant filling capacity ............. 325
Setting the airdistribution ............. 118
Setting the airvents ...................... 122
Setting the airflow ......................... 119
Setting the temperature ................ 118
Switching air-recirculation mode
on/off............................................ 121
Switching on/off........................... 117
Switching residualheaton/off...... 121
Switching the rearwindow
defroster on/off............................ 120
Switching the ZONE function
on/off............................................ 119
Cockpit
Overview .......................................... 31
Coffeecup symbol
see ATTENTIONASSIST
COMAND
Driving dynamics display ............... 168
Switching on/off........................... 237
COMAND display
Cleaning ......................................... 275
Combination switch .......................... 102
Compass
Calibrating ..................................... 264
Calling up ....................................... 263
Magneticfield zone maps.............. 264
Setting ........................................... 264
Connecting aUSB device
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual.................................................. 236
Consumptionstatistics (on-board
computer) .......................................... 186
Controller ........................................... 237
Convenience closingfeature .............. 83
Convenience opening feature ............ 82
Coolant (engine)
Checking the level ......................... 269
Displaymessage ............................ 211
Filling capacity ............................... 324
Important safety notes .................. 323
Temperature (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMGvehicles) ............... 194
Temperature gauge........................ 184
Warning lamp ................................. 232
Index
7
Cooling
see Climatecontrol
Copyright .............................................29
Corneringlight function
Changingthe bulb .......................... 106
Display message ............................ 208
Function/notes .............................102
Cover
see Roller sunblind
Cruisecontrol
Activationconditions ..................... 155
Cruise control lever....................... 155
Deactivating ................................... 156
Display message ............................ 216
Driving system ............................... 154
Function/notes .............................154
Important safety notes .................. 154
Setting aspeed.............................. 155
Storing and maintaining current
speed............................................. 155
Cup holder
Center console .............................. 250
Important safety notes .................. 250
Rearcompartment ......................... 251
Customer AssistanceCenter
(CAC) ..................................................... 27
Customer Relations Department ....... 27
D
Dashboard
see Cockpit
Dashboard lighting
see Instrument cluster lighting
Data
see Technical data
Daytime runninglamps
Display message ............................ 210
Function/notes .............................100
Switching on/off (on-board com-
puter) ............................................. 193
Declarations of conformity ................. 26
Diagnosticsconnection ......................27
Digital Operator's Manual
Help .................................................24
Introduction .....................................24
Digital speedometer .........................187
DIRECT SELECTlever
Automatic transmission ................. 132
Display messages
ASSYST PLUS ................................ 270
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 197
Driving systems .............................213
Engine ............................................ 211
General notes ................................ 197
Hiding (on-board computer) ........... 197
Lights ............................................. 208
Safety systems .............................. 198
SmartKey ....................................... 223
Tires............................................... 217
Vehicle ...........................................219
DistancePilot DISTRONIC
Activating ....................................... 158
Calling up aspeed......................... 159
Cruise control lever ....................... 158
DisplayMessage ............................ 215
Displays in the instrument cluster .. 161
Driving tips.................................... 162
Function/notes............................. 156
Important safety notes .................. 157
Setting aspeed .............................. 160
Setting the specified minimum
distance ......................................... 160
Stopping ........................................ 159
Storing aspeed .............................. 159
Switching off .................................. 160
Distance recorder ............................. 186
Distance warning(warning lamp) .... 234
Distance warnin
gfunction
Fu
nction/notes................................ 61
Warning lamp ................................. 234
Doors
Automaticlocking (on-board com-
puter) ............................................. 193
Automaticlocking (switch) ............... 76
Central locking/unlocking
(SmartKey)....................................... 69
Control panel ................................... 37
Displaymessage ............................ 222
Emergency locking ........................... 77
Emergency unlocking ....................... 76
Important safety notes .................... 75
Opening (frominside)...................... 75
Drinking and driving ......................... 146
8
Index
Drive program
Automatictransmission................. 136
Display...........................................134
Display (DIRECTSELECT lever) ...... 132
SETUP (on-board computer) .......... 195
Driver's door
see Doors
Driver's seat
see Seats
Driving abroad
Mercedes-Benz Service ................. 271
Driving dynamicsdisplay
Off-road program ........................... 168
Driving in mountainous terrain
Approach/departureangle............ 153
Driving off-road
see Off-road driving
Driving on flooded roads .................. 150
Driving safety system
Active Brake Assist .......................... 61
Braking assistance appropriate to
the situation..................................... 62
Driving safety systems
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) ....... 60
ADAPTIVE BRAKE .............................67
BAS (Brake Assist System) .............. 60
Distance warning function ............... 61
EBD (electronicbrake force distri-
bution) ............................................. 66
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Pro-
gram) ............................................... 63
Important safety information ........... 59
Overview.......................................... 59
STEER CONTROL ............................. 67
Drivingsystem
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC ............. 156
Off-road program........................... 167
Parking assistPARKTRONIC .......... 168
Parking Pilot .................................. 171
RACESTART(Mercedes-AMG
vehicles) ........................................ 164
Start-off assist............................... 163
Drivingsystems
AMG adaptive sport suspension
system ........................................... 165
ATTENTION ASSIST ........................ 178
Blind Spot Assist ............................ 180
Cruise control ................................ 154
Displaymessage............................ 213
HOLD function ............................... 162
Lane Keeping Assist ...................... 181
Lane Tracking package.................. 180
Rear viewcamera .......................... 175
Drivingtips
Automatictransmission ................. 135
Brakes ........................................... 148
Break-in period.............................. 123
Ch
ecking brake lining thickness .... 149
Di
stance PilotDISTRONIC ............. 162
Downhillgradient ........................... 148
Drinking and driving ....................... 146
Driving in winter ............................. 150
Driving on floodedroads ................ 150
Driving on sand .............................. 153
Driving on wetroads ...................... 150
Exhaustcheck ............................... 146
Fuel................................................ 146
General.......................................... 146
Hydroplaning ................................. 150
Icy roadsurfaces ........................... 150
Limitedbraking efficiency on sal-
ted roads ....................................... 149
Off-road driving .............................. 151
Snow chains .................................. 296
The first 1000 miles (1500km) ..... 123
Tire ruts ......................................... 153
Traveling uphill ............................... 153
Wet roadsurface ........................... 148
DSR(Downhill Speed Regulation)
Displaymessage ............................ 213
Function/notes............................. 166
DVD video
Operating (on-board computer) ..... 189
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual.................................................. 236
DYNAMICSELECT button
Climate control (3-zone automatic
climate control)............................. 117
Climate control (air-conditioning
system) .......................................... 114
DYNAMICSELECT button(allvehi-
cles except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles) .................................................... 130
DYNAMICSELECT controller
(Mercedes-AMGvehicles) ................. 131
Index
9
E
EASY-PACK tailgate
see Tailgate
EBD (electronic brake force distri-
bution)
Display message ............................ 200
Function/notes ................................ 66
ECO display
Function/notes .............................147
On-board computer ....................... 186
ECOstart/stop function
Automatic engine start .................. 128
Automatic engine switch-off .......... 128
Deactivating/activating ................. 129
General information ....................... 128
Important safety notes .................. 128
Introduction ................................... 127
ElectronicStability Program
see ESP
®
(ElectronicStability Program)
ElectronicTraction System
see ETS/4ETS (ElectronicTrac-
tion System)
Emergency
Automatic measuresafter an acci-
dent ................................................. 53
Emergency braking
see BAS (Brake Assist System)
Emergency release
Driver's door ....................................76
Vehicle .............................................76
Emergency Tensioning Devices
Activation......................................... 51
Emergency unlocking
Tailgate............................................ 81
Engine
Check Engine warning lamp ........... 231
Displaymessage ............................ 211
ECO start/stop function ................ 127
Engine number ............................... 320
Irregularrunning ............................ 129
Jump-starting ................................. 285
Starting problems .......................... 129
Starting the engine with the
SmartKey ....................................... 126
Starting with the Start/Stopbut-
ton ................................................. 126
Switching off .................................. 143
Tow-starting (vehicle)..................... 291
Engine electronics
Problem (malfunction) ................... 129
Engine oil
Adding ........................................... 268
Additives ........................................ 323
Checking the oill
evel ..................... 267
C
hecking the oillevel using the
dipstick .......................................... 267
Displaymessage ............................ 212
Filling capacity ............................... 323
Notesabout oilgrades................... 322
Notesonoil level/consumption .... 267
Temperature (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMGvehicles) ............... 194
Engine,starting
see Starting (engine)
Entering an address
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual.................................................. 236
ESC(ElectronicStability Control)
see ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program)
ESP
®
(ElectronicStability Pro-
gram)
AMG menu (on-board computer) ... 195
Characteristics ................................. 64
Deactivating/activating (button
in Mercedes-AMGvehicles) ............. 65
Deactivating/activating (except
MercedesAMG vehicles) ................. 64
Deactivating/activating (on-
board computer, except
Mercedes-AMGvehicles) ............... 191
Displaymessage ............................ 198
Function/notes................................ 63
Generalnotes .................................. 63
Important safety information ........... 63
Trailer stabilization ........................... 66
Warning lamp ................................. 228
ETS/4ETS (ElectronicTraction Sys-
tem) ...................................................... 63
Exhaust
see Exhaustpipe
Exhaustcheck ................................... 146
Exhaustpipe
Cleaning ......................................... 275
10
Index
Exterior lighting
Cleaning .........................................274
see Lights
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting ......................................... 96
Dipping (automatic) ......................... 97
Folding in whenlocking (on-board
computer) ...................................... 194
Folding in/out(automatically)......... 97
Folding in/out (electrically) ............. 96
Outofposition (troubleshooting)..... 97
Setting ............................................. 97
Storing settings (memory func-
tion) ................................................. 99
Storing the parking position ............. 98
Eyeglassescompartment ................. 243
F
Favorites
Overview ........................................ 238
Filler cap
see Refueling
Flat tire
MOExtended tires.......................... 279
Preparing the vehicle..................... 278
TIREFIT kit ...................................... 280
Floormats ........................................... 264
Foglamps
Switching on/off........................... 101
Frequencies
Mobilephone ................................. 318
Two-way radio ................................ 318
Front fog lamps
Displaymessage ............................ 209
Switching on/off........................... 101
Front-passenger seat
Folding the backrestforward/
back ............................................... 245
Fuel
Additives ........................................ 322
Consumption statistics .................. 186
Displaying the current consump-
tion ................................................ 187
Displaying the range...................... 187
Driving tips.................................... 146
E10 ................................................ 321
Fuelgauge ....................................... 32
Grade (gasoline)............................ 321
Important safety notes .................. 321
Problem (malfunction) ................... 142
Refueling ........................................ 140
Tank content/reserve fuel............. 321
Fuelfillerflap
Opening ......................................... 141
Fuellevel
Calling up the range(on-board
computer) ...................................... 187
Fueltank
Capacity ........................................ 321
Problem (malfunction) ................... 142
Fuses
Allocation chart ............................. 292
Before changing ............................. 291
Fusebox in the engine compart-
ment .............................................. 291
Fusebox in the front-passenger
footwell .......................................... 292
Important safety notes .................. 291
G
Garagedooropener
Clearing the memory ..................... 263
Generalnotes ................................ 260
Important safety notes .................. 261
Opening/closing the garagedoor..263
Problems whenprogramming ........262
Programming (button in the rear-
view mirror) ................................... 261
Synchronizing the rolling code ....... 262
Gasoline ............................................. 321
Gear indicator (on-board com-
puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 194
Genuine parts ...................................... 25
Glove box ...........................................243
Google™Local Search
see also DigitalOperator's Man-
ual.................................................. 236
H
Handbrake
see Parking brake
Handlingcontrolsystem
see ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program)
Index
11
Hazard warninglamps
Display message ............................ 222
Switching on/off ........................... 102
Head restraints
Adjusting .........................................92
Adjusting (manually) ........................ 93
Adjusting (rear)................................ 93
Headlamps
Fogging up .....................................103
see Automatic headlamp mode
Heating
see Climate control
High beam flasher .............................102
High-beam headlamps
Display message ............................ 209
Replacing bulbs .............................106
Switching on/off ........................... 102
Hill start assist .................................. 127
HOLD function
Activating ....................................... 163
Deactivating ................................... 163
Display message ............................ 213
Function/notes .............................162
Home address
see also DigitalOperator's Man-
ual..................................................236
Hood
Closing ...........................................267
Display message ............................ 222
Important safety notes .................. 266
Opening ......................................... 266
Horn ...................................................... 31
Hydroplaning ..................................... 150
I
Ignitionkey
see SmartKey
Ignitionlock
see Key positions
Immobilizer .......................................... 67
Indicator lamp
Replacing bulbs (rear) .................... 107
Indicator lamps
see Warning and indicator lamps
Indicators
see Turn signals
Instrument cluster
Overview .......................................... 32
Settings ......................................... 193
Warning and indicator lamps ........... 32
Instrument cluster lighting .............. 183
Interior lighting
Control ...........................................103
Overview ........................................ 103
Reading lamp ................................. 103
iPod
®
see also DigitalOperator's Man-
ual..................................................236
J
Jack
Storage location ............................ 278
Using ............................................. 314
Jump starting (engine) ......................285
K
Keypositions
Start/Stop button .......................... 124
KEYLESS-GO
Convenience closing feature ............ 83
Deactivation ..................................... 70
Locking ............................................ 70
Unlocking ......................................... 70
Kickdown
Driving tips ....................................136
Manual gearshifting ....................... 140
Kneebag .............................................. 45
L
Lamps
see Warning and indicator lamps
Lane detection (automatic)
see Lane Keeping Assist
Lane KeepingAssist
Activating/deactivating (on-
board computer) ............................ 192
Display message ............................ 214
Function/information.................... 181
LaneTrackingpackage ..................... 180
Lap time (RACETIMER) ...................... 195
LATCH-type (ISOFIX)child seat
anchors ................................................ 56
12
Index
License plate lamp(display mes-
sage) ...................................................209
Light function,active
Display message ............................ 210
Light sensor (display message) ....... 210
Lights
Automatic headlamp mode ............ 100
Cornering light function ................. 102
Fog lamps ...................................... 101
Foggedupheadlamps .................... 103
Hazard warning lamps ................... 102
High beamflasher .......................... 102
High-beam headlamps ................... 102
Lightswitch ................................... 100
Low-beam headlamps .................... 101
Parking lamps ................................ 101
Rearfog lamp ................................ 101
Setting exteriorlighting ................. 100
Standing lamps .............................. 101
Switching the daytime running
lamps on/off (on-board com-
puter) ............................................. 193
Turn signals ................................... 102
Loading guidelines ............................ 242
Locking
see Centrallocking
Locking (doors)
Automatic ........................................ 76
Emergency locking ........................... 77
From inside(central locking but-
ton) ..................................................75
Locking centrally
see Central locking
Locking verification signal(on-
boardcomputer) ...............................194
Low-beam headlamps
Display message ............................ 208
Replacing bulbs .............................105
Switching on/off ........................... 101
Lumbar support
Adjusting the 4-way lumbarsup-
port ..................................................93
M
M+S tires ............................................ 295
Malfunction message
see Display messages
Matte finish (cleaning instruc-
tions) .................................................. 273
mbrace
Call priority ....................................257
Display message ............................ 203
Downloading destinations
(COMAND) ..................................... 257
Downloading routes....................... 260
Emergency call .............................. 254
General notes ................................ 253
Geo fencing ................................... 260
Locating astolenvehicle ...............259
MB info call button ........................ 256
Remote fault diagnosis.................. 259
Remote vehiclelocking .................. 258
Roadsideassistance button ........... 255
Search &Send ............................... 257
Self-test ......................................... 254
Speed alert .................................... 260
System .......................................... 254
Triggering the vehiclealarm ........... 260
Vehicleremote unlocking .............. 258
Mechanical key
Function/notes................................ 71
Inserting .......................................... 72
Locking vehicle................................ 77
Removing ......................................... 71
Unlocking the driver'sdoor.............. 76
Memory card (audio) ......................... 189
Memory function ................................. 98
Messagememory (on-board com-
puter) .................................................. 197
Messages
see Displaymessages
Mirrorturn signal
Cleaning ......................................... 274
Mirrors
see Exterior mirrors
see Rear-viewmirror
see Vanity mirror (inthe sunvisor)
Mobilephone
Connecting (Bluetooth
®
inter-
face).............................................. 239
Connecting another mobile
phone ............................................ 241
Frequencies................................... 318
Installation ..................................... 318
Index
13
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 189
Transmission output (maximum) ....318
Modifying the programming
(SmartKey) ...........................................71
MOExtended tires .............................. 279
Mountingwheels
Lowering the vehicle...................... 316
Mounting anew wheel................... 315
Preparing the vehicle.....................313
Raising the vehicle ......................... 314
Removing awheel .......................... 315
Securing the vehicle against roll-
ing away ........................................ 313
MP3
Operation ....................................... 189
see also DigitalOperator's Man-
ual..................................................236
Multifunctiondisplay
Function/notes .............................185
Permanent display......................... 193
Multifunctionsteering wheel
Operating the on-board computer .. 184
Overview .......................................... 33
Music files
see also DigitalOperator's Man-
ual..................................................236
N
Navigation
Entering adestination .................... 238
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 187
see also DigitalOperator's Man-
ual..................................................236
Notes on breaking-inanew vehi-
cle ....................................................... 123
O
Occupant Classification System
(OCS)
Conditions ....................................... 47
Faults ............................................... 50
Operation ......................................... 47
System self-test ............................... 49
Occupant safety
Air bags...........................................44
Automatic measures after an acci-
dent ................................................. 53
Childreninthe vehicle..................... 53
Important safety notes.................... 39
Introduction to the restraint sys-
tem .................................................. 39
Occupant Classification System
(OCS) ............................................... 46
PASSENGER AIR BAG indicator
lamps ............................................... 40
Pets in the vehicle........................... 59
Restraint system warning lamp ........ 40
Seatbelt.......................................... 40
OCS
Conditions ....................................... 47
Faults ............................................... 50
Operation ......................................... 47
System self-test ............................... 49
Odometer ........................................... 186
Off-road driving
Approach/departure angle ............ 326
Checklist afterdriving off-road ...... 153
Checklist before driving off-road .... 152
Generalinformation ....................... 152
Important safety notes .................. 151
Maximumgradient climbing abil-
ity .................................................. 326
Traveling uphill ............................... 153
Off-road Program
Driving dynamics display ............... 168
Generalnotes ................................ 167
Off-road system
DSR ............................................... 166
Off roaddrive program.................. 167
Off-road 4ETS .................................. 63
Off-road ABS .................................... 60
Off-road ESP
®
.................................. 66
On-board computer
AMG menu ..................................... 194
Assistance graphicmenu ............... 191
Assistance menu ........................... 191
Audio menu ................................... 189
Convenience submenu .................. 194
Displaymessages .......................... 197
Displaying aservice message ........ 270
Factory settings ............................. 194
Important safety notes .................. 183
Instrument cluster submenu .......... 193
14
Index
Lighting submenu .......................... 193
Menu overview .............................. 186
Message memory .......................... 197
Navigation menu ............................ 187
Operation ....................................... 184
RACETIMER ................................... 195
Service menu .................................192
Settings menu ............................... 192
Standard display............................ 186
Telephone menu ............................ 189
Tripmenu ...................................... 186
Vehiclesubmenu ........................... 193
Video DVD operation ..................... 189
On-board diagnosticinterface
see Diagnostics connection
Opening and closingthe side trim
panels ................................................. 106
Operatingsafety
Declaration of conformity ................ 26
Operatingsystem
see On-board computer
Operation
Digital Operator's Manual................ 24
Operator's Manual
Vehicleequipment ........................... 26
Outside temperature display ........... 183
Overhead controlpanel ...................... 38
Override feature
Rear sidewindows........................... 59
P
Paint code number ............................ 319
Paintwork (cleaning instructions) ... 272
Panic alarm .......................................... 39
Panorama roofwithpower tilt/
sliding panel
Important safety notes .................... 85
Operating ......................................... 86
Operating the rollersunblindsfor
the sliding sunroof........................... 87
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 89
Reversing feature ............................. 86
Parcel shelf ........................................ 247
Parking
Important safety notes .................. 143
Parking brake ................................ 144
Parking position for the exterior
mirror on the front-passenger
side.................................................. 98
Rear viewcamera .......................... 175
Parking aid
see Exterior mirrors
see Rear viewcamera
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Deactivating/activating ................. 170
Driving system ............................... 168
Function/notes............................. 168
Important safety notes .................. 168
Problems (malfunctions)................ 171
Sensorrange................................. 169
Warning display ............................. 169
Parking brake
Applying automatically................... 145
Applying or releasing manually ...... 144
Displaymessage ............................ 200
Electric parking brake .................... 144
Emergency braking ........................ 145
Generalnotes ................................ 144
Releasing automatically................. 145
Warning lamp ................................. 231
Parking lamps
Switching on/off........................... 101
Parking Pilot
Canceling ....................................... 175
Detecting parking spaces .............. 172
DisplayMessage ............................ 214
Exiting aparking space .................. 174
Function/notes............................. 171
Important safety notes .................. 171
Parking .......................................... 173
PASSENGER AIRBAG
Displaymessage ............................ 206
Indicatorlamps ................................ 40
Problem (malfunction) ................... 206
Pets in the vehicle ............................... 59
Phone book
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual.
................................................. 236
Plas
tictrim (cleaning instruc-
tions) .................................................. 275
Powerwashers .................................. 272
Powerwindows
see Sidewindows
Index
15
Protection against theft
ATA (Anti-Theft Alarm system) ......... 67
Immobilizer ...................................... 67
Protection of the environment
General notes ..................................25
Pulling away
Automatic transmission ................. 127
General notes ................................ 127
Hill start assist ...............................127
Q
QR code
Mercedes-Benz Guide App ................. 1
Rescue card ..................................... 28
Qualifiedspecialist workshop ........... 27
R
RACESTART
Important safety notes .................. 164
RACESTART (Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles) .................................................... 164
RACETIMER(on-board computer) .... 195
Radio
Selecting astation......................... 189
see separate operating instructions
Radio mode
see also DigitalOperator's Man-
ual..................................................236
Radio-wave reception/transmis-
sioninthe vehicle
Declarationofconformity ................ 26
Rain closing feature (panorama
roof with power tilt/sliding panel) .... 87
Readinglamp ..................................... 103
Rear compartment
Setting the airvents ......................122
Rear fog lamp
Display message ............................ 209
Replacing bulbs .............................107
Switching on/off ........................... 101
Rear lamps
see Lights
Rear seat
Adjusting the angleofthe backr-
ests ................................................ 247
Rear seats
Folding the backrestforwards/
back ............................................... 246
Rear viewcamera
"Reverse parking" function ............ 177
Cleaning instructions ..................... 274
Display in the multimediasystem .. 176
Function/notes .............................175
General notes ................................ 175
Switching on/off ........................... 176
Rear window defroster
Problem (malfunction) ................... 121
Switching on/off ........................... 121
Rear window wiper
Replacing the wiper blade .............. 110
Switching on/off ........................... 108
Rear-viewmirror
Anti-glare (manual).......................... 96
Dipping (automatic) ......................... 97
Recycling
see Protectionofthe environment
Refrigerant (air-conditioning sys-
tem)
Important safety notes .................. 324
Refueling
Fuel gauge ....................................... 32
Important safety notes .................. 140
Refueling process.......................... 141
see Fuel
Re
mote control
Garage door opener....................... 260
Programming (garage door
opener) .......................................... 261
Replacing bulbs
Brake lamp ....................................107
High-beam headlamps ................... 106
Important safety notes .................. 104
Installing/removing the cover
(front wheel arch) .......................... 105
Low-beam headlamps .................... 105
Overview of bulbtypes.................. 104
Rearfog lamp ................................ 107
Turn signals (front) ......................... 106
Turn signals (rear) .......................... 107
Rescue card ......................................... 28
Reserve (fueltank)
see Fuel
16
Index
Reserve fuel
Displaymessage............................ 212
Warning lamp ................................. 231
see Fuel
Residual heat(climate control) ........ 121
Restraintsystem
Displaymessage ............................ 204
Introduction ..................................... 39
Warning lamp ................................. 231
Warning lamp (function) ................... 40
Reversegear(selectorlever) ........... 134
Reversingfeature
Panorama sliding sunroof................ 86
Roller sunblind ................................. 87
Sidewindows................................... 82
Tailgate ............................................ 78
Roadside Assistance (breakdown) .... 26
Rollersunblind
Panorama roofwithpower tilt/
sliding panel ..................................... 87
Roofcarrier ........................................ 249
Roofliningand carpets (cleaning
guidelines) ......................................... 277
Roofload(maximum) ........................ 325
Route guidance
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual.................................................. 236
S
Safety
Childreninthe vehicle..................... 53
see Occupant safety
Safety system
see Driving safety systems
SD card
Inserting ........................................ 241
Inserting/removing ........................ 241
Removing ....................................... 241
SD memory card
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual.................................................. 236
Search &Send
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual.................................................. 236
Seat belts
Adjusting the height ......................... 43
Cleaning ......................................... 276
Correct usage.................................. 42
Fastening ......................................... 43
Important safety guidelines............. 41
Introduction ..................................... 40
Releasing ......................................... 43
Warning lamp ................................. 224
Warning lamp (function) ................... 43
Seats
Adjusting (electrically) ..................... 92
Adjusting (manually) ........................ 91
Adjusting (Performance Seat) .......... 94
Adjusting the 4-waylumbarsup-
port.................................................. 93
Adjusting the headrestraint ............ 92
Cleaning the cover......................... 276
Correct driver'sseatposition ........... 90
Folding the backrest(rear com-
partment) forwards/back .............. 246
Important safety notes .................... 90
Seatheating problem ...................... 95
Storing settings (memory func-
tion) ................................................. 99
Switching seatheating on/off......... 94
Securing aload
see Securing cargo
Securing cargo .................................. 247
Selecting agear
see Automatictransmission
Selectorlever
Cleaning ......................................... 276
Sensors (cleaning instructions) ....... 274
Servicemenu(on-board com-
puter) .................................................. 192
Servicemessage
see ASSYST PLUS
Serviceproducts
Brake fluid ..................................... 323
Coolant (engine) ............................ 323
Engine oil....................................... 322
Fuel................................................ 320
Important safety notes .................. 320
Refrigerant (air-condi
tioning sys-
te
m) ............................................... 324
Washerfluid ................................... 324
Settingaspeed
see Cruise control
Setting the air distribution ............... 118
Index
17
Setting the airflow ............................119
Settingthe date/time format
see also DigitalOperator's Man-
ual..................................................236
Settingthe language
see also DigitalOperator's Man-
ual..................................................236
Settingthe time
see also DigitalOperator's Man-
ual..................................................236
Settings
Factory (on-board computer) ......... 194
On-board computer ....................... 192
SETUP (on-board computer) ............. 195
Side impact air bag .............................45
Side marker lamp (display mes-
sage) ................................................... 210
Side windows
Cleaning ......................................... 273
Convenienceclosing feature ............ 83
Convenienceopening feature ..........82
Important safety information ........... 81
Opening/closing .............................. 82
Problem(malfunction) .....................84
Resetting......................................... 84
Reversingfeature .............................82
SIRIUS services
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 236
Sliding sunroof
see Panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel
SmartKey
Changing the battery ....................... 72
Changing the programming .............71
Checkingthe battery .......................72
Convenience closingfeature ............ 83
Convenience opening feature .......... 82
Display message ............................ 223
Door central locking/unlocking
.......69
Importa
nt safety notes .................... 69
KEYLESS-GO start function .............. 71
Loss .................................................73
Mechanical key ................................ 71
Positions (ignition lock) ................. 124
Problem (malfunction) ..................... 73
Starting the engine ........................ 126
SmartKey positions (ignition lock) .. 124
SMS
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual .................................................. 236
Snow chains ...................................... 296
Sockets
Center console .............................. 253
General notes ................................ 253
Luggage compartment...................253
Rearcompartment ......................... 253
Sound
Switching on/off ........................... 237
Special seat beltretractor .................. 54
Specialist workshop ............................ 27
Speed, controlling
see Cruise control
Speedometer
Activating/deactivating the addi-
tional speedometer ........................ 193
Digital............................................ 187
In the Instrument cluster ................. 32
Segments ...................................... 183
Selecting the displayunit ...............193
SPORT handling mode
Deactivating/activating
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ................ 65
Warning lamp ................................. 229
Standinglamps
Display message ............................ 209
Switching on/off ........................... 101
Start-off assist
Activating ....................................... 163
Important safety notes .................. 163
Start/Stop button
Removing ....................................... 125
Starting the engine ........................ 126
Start/stop function
see ECO start/stop function
Starting (engine) ................................ 125
STEERCONTROL .................................. 67
Steering
Display message ............................ 222
Steering assi
stant STEERCON-
TROL
see
STEER CONTROL
Steering wheel
Adjusting (manually)........................ 95
18
Index
Button overview............................... 33
Buttons (on-board computer) ......... 184
Cleaning .........................................276
Important safety notes .................... 95
Paddle shifters ............................... 138
Steering wheel paddle shifters ........138
Stopwatch (RACETIMER) ................... 195
Stowage compartments
Armrest (front) ............................... 243
Armrest (under) .............................244
Center console .............................. 243
Center console (rear) ..................... 244
Cupholders ................................... 250
Eyeglasses compartment ...............243
Glove box ....................................... 243
Important safety information ......... 242
Map pockets .................................. 244
Stowagenet ................................... 244
Under driver's seat/front-
passenger seat.............................. 244
Stowagenet ....................................... 244
Summertires ..................................... 295
Sun visor ............................................ 251
Suspension setting
AMG adaptive sport suspension
system ........................................... 165
Switchingair-recirculationmode
on/off ................................................. 121
Switchingonmediamode
Via the device list .......................... 241
T
Tachometer ........................................ 183
Tail lamps
see Lights
Tailgate
Displaymessage ............................ 221
Emergency unlocking ....................... 81
Important safety notes .................... 77
Limiting the opening angle ............... 80
Obstruction detection...................... 78
Opening dimensions ...................... 325
Opening/closing (fromoutside) ....... 78
Opening/closing automatically
from inside ....................................... 80
Opening/closing automatically
from outside.................................... 79
Tank
see Fueltank
Tank content
Fuelgauge ....................................... 32
Technical data
Capacities ...................................... 320
Information .................................... 318
Tires/wheels ................................. 316
Vehicledata................................... 325
TELEAID
Call priority .................................... 257
Downloading destinations
(COMAND) ..................................... 257
Downloading routes ....................... 260
Emergency call.............................. 254
Generalnotes ................................ 253
Geofencing ................................... 260
Locating astolen vehicle............... 259
MB info callbutton ........................ 256
Remote vehiclelocking .................. 258
RoadsideAssistance button .......... 255
Search &Send ............................... 257
Self-test ......................................... 254
Speed alert .................................... 260
System .......................................... 254
Triggering the vehiclealarm ........... 260
VehicleHealth Check .................... 259
Vehicleremote unlocking .............. 258
Telephone
Accepting acall(multifunction
steering wheel) .............................. 190
Authorizing amobilephone (con-
necting) ......................................... 240
Connecting amobilephone (gen-
eralinformation) ............................ 239
Displaymessage ............................ 222
Introduction ................................... 189
Menu (on-board computer) ............ 189
Numberfrom the phone book........ 190
Redialing ........................................ 190
Rejecting/ending acall................. 190
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual.................................................. 236
Switching between mob
ile
pho
nes ........................................... 241
Temperature
Coolant .......................................... 184
Index
19
Coolant(on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMGvehicles) ...............194
Engine oil (on-board computer,
Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ...............194
Outside temperature ......................183
Setting (climate control) ................ 118
Transmissionoil (on-board com-
puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ..... 194
Through-loading feature ................... 245
Timing (RACETIMER) ......................... 195
Tire pressure
Calling up (on-board computer) ..... 300
Checking manually ........................ 299
Display message ............................ 217
Maximum ....................................... 299
Not reached (TIREFIT) .................... 281
Notes ............................................. 298
Reached (TIREFIT) .......................... 281
Recommended ............................... 296
Tire pressure losswarning system
General notes ................................ 299
Important safety notes .................. 299
Restarting ...................................... 300
Tire pressure monitor
Checking the tire pressure elec-
tronically ........................................ 302
Function/notes .............................300
General notes ................................ 300
Important safety notes .................. 301
Radio type approval for the tire
pressure monitor ........................... 303
Restarting ...................................... 302
Warning lamp ................................. 235
Warning message .......................... 302
Tiredness assistant
see ATTENTION ASSIST
TIREFIT kit .......................................... 280
Important safety notes .................. 280
Storage location ............................ 278
Tire pressure not reached .............. 281
Tire pressure reached .................... 281
Tires
Aspect ratio (definition) ................. 312
Averageweight of the vehicle
occupants (definition) .................... 310
Bar (definition) ............................... 310
Changing awheel .......................... 312
Characteristics .............................. 310
Checking .....................
................... 293
Curb weight (definition) ................. 311
Definition of terms ......................... 310
Direction of rotation...................... 313
Displaymessage ............................ 217
Distribution of the vehicleoccu-
pants (definition) ............................ 312
DOT (Department of Transporta-
tion) (definition) ............................. 310
DOT, Tire Identification Number
(TIN) ............................................... 310
GAWR(GrossAxle Weight Rating)
(definition) ..................................... 311
Generalnotes ................................ 316
GVW(GrossVehicleWeight) (def-
inition) ........................................... 311
GVWR (GrossVehicleWeight Rat-
ing)(definition) .............................. 311
Important safety notes .................. 293
Increased vehicleweightdue to
optionalequipment (definition) ...... 311
Information on driving .................... 293
Kilopascal(kPa)(definition) ........... 311
Labeling (overview) ........................ 307
Loadbearing index (definition) ...... 312
Loadindex ..................................... 309
Loadindex (definition) ................... 311
M+S tires....................................... 295
Maximumloadonatire (defini-
tion) ............................................... 311
Maximumloaded vehicleweight
(definition) ..................................... 311
Maximumpermissibletire pres-
sure (definition) ............................. 311
Maximumtire load ......................... 309
Maximumtire load (definition) ....... 311
MOExtended tires.......................... 295
Optionalequipment weight (defi-
nition) ............................................ 312
PSI (pounds persquare inch)(def-
inition) ........................................... 312
Replacing ....................................... 312
Service life ..................................... 294
Sidewall(definition) ....................... 312
Speed rating (definition) ................ 311
Storing ........................................... 313
Structure and characteristics
(definition) ..................................... 310
20
Index
Summer tires................................. 295
Temperature .................................. 307
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
(definition) ..................................... 312
Tire bead (definition) ...................... 312
Tire pressure (definition) ................ 312
Tire pressures (recommended)...... 311
Tire size (data)............................... 316
Tire size designation, load-bearing
capacity, speed rating .................... 307
Tire tread....................................... 294
Tire tread(definition) ..................... 312
Totalloadlimit (definition) ............. 312
Traction......................................... 306
Traction(definition) ....................... 312
Tread wear ..................................... 306
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards...................................... 306
Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Standards(definition) .................... 311
Wearindicator (definition) ............. 312
Wheel rim (definition) .................... 311
see Flattire
Tool
see Vehicletool kit
Top Tether ............................................ 56
Tow-starting
Emergency engine starting ............ 291
Important safety notes .................. 288
Installing the towing eye................ 289
Removing the towing eye............... 289
Towingatrailer
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Pro-
gram) ............................................... 66
Towingaway
Important safety guidelines........... 288
Installing the towing eye................ 289
Notesfor 4MATICvehicles ............ 290
Removing the towing eye............... 289
Transporting the vehicle................ 290
With both axles on the ground ....... 290
With front axleraised ..................... 289
Towingeye ......................................... 278
Traction system
see ETS/4ETS (Electronic Trac-
tion System)
Trafficreports
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual.................................................. 236
Transmission
see Automatictransmission
Transmissionposition display
(DIRECT SELECT lever) ......................
132
Transporting the vehicle .................. 290
Traveling uphill
Brow of hill ..................................... 154
Driving downhill............................. 154
Maximumgradient-climbing capa-
bility ............................................... 154
Trim pieces(cleaning instruc-
tions) .................................................. 276
Trip computer (on-board com-
puter) .................................................. 186
Trip odometer
Calling up ....................................... 186
Resetting (on-board computer) ...... 187
Trunk lid
see Tailgate
Trunk load (maximum) ...................... 325
Turn signals
Displaymessage ............................ 208
Replacing bulbs(front) ................... 106
Switching on/off........................... 102
Two-wayradio
Frequencies................................... 318
Installation ..................................... 318
Transmission output(maximum) .... 318
Type identificationplate
see Vehicleidentification plate
U
Unlocking
Emergency unlocking ....................... 76
From inside the vehicle(central
unlocking button) ............................. 75
Upshiftindicator (on-board com-
puter, Mercedes-AMG vehicles) ....... 194
USB devices
Connecting to the Media Inter-
face ............................................... 241
Index
21
V
Vanity mirror(in the sun visor) ........ 252
Vehicle
Correct use...................................... 27
Data acquisition ............................... 28
Displaymessage ............................ 219
Equipment ....................................... 26
Individualsettings .......................... 192
LimitedWarranty ............................. 28
Loading .......................................... 303
Locking (inanemergency) ............... 77
Locking (SmartKey).......................... 69
Lowering ........................................ 316
Maintenance .................................... 26
Parking for alongperiod................ 145
Pulling away ................................... 127
Raising ........................................... 314
Reporting problems ......................... 27
Securing from rolling away ............ 313
Transporting .................................. 290
Unlocking (inanemergency) ........... 76
Unlocking (SmartKey)...................... 69
Vehicledata................................... 325
Vehiclebattery
see Battery (vehicle)
Vehicledata
Roof load (maximum) ..................... 325
Trunk load (maximum) ................... 325
Vehicledata (off-road driving)
Approach/departure angle ............ 326
Maximumgradient climbing abil-
ity .................................................. 326
Vehicledimensions ........................... 325
Vehicleemergencylocking ................ 77
Vehicleidentificationnumber
see VIN
Vehicleidentificationplate .............. 319
Vehicletoolkit .................................. 278
Ventilation
Setting the vents ........................... 122
Video
Operating the DVD ......................... 189
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual.................................................. 236
VIN
Seat............................................... 320
Type plate ...................................... 319
W
Warning and indicator lamps
ABS ................................................ 227
Active Brake Assist ........................ 234
Brakes ........................................... 226
Check Engine ................................. 231
Coolant .......................................... 232
Distance warning ........................... 234
ESP
®
.............................................. 228
ESP
®
OFF ....................................... 229
Fueltank ........................................ 231
Overview .......................................... 32
Reserve fuel................................... 231
Restraint system ............................ 231
Seatbelt........................................ 224
SPORThandling mode................... 229
Tire pressure monitor .................... 235
Washer fluid
Displaymessage ............................ 222
Weather display (COMAND)
see also Digital Operator's Man-
ual.................................................. 236
Wheel and tire combinations
Tires ............................................... 316
Wheel bolt tighteningtorque ........... 316
Wheel chock ...................................... 313
Wheels
Changing awheel .......................... 312
Checking ........................................ 293
Cleaning ......................................... 273
Important safety notes .................. 293
Information on driving .................... 293
Interchanging/changing ................ 312
Mounting anew wheel................... 315
Removing awheel .......................... 315
Storing ........................................... 313
Tightening torque ........................... 316
Wheel size/tire size ....................... 316
Window curtainair bag
Displaymessage ............................ 205
Operation ......................................... 46
Windows
see Sidewindows
Windshield
Defrosting ...................................... 119
Windshieldwasher system
Adding washerfluid ....................... 269
22
Index
Important safety notes .................. 324
Windshield wipers
Displaymessage............................ 222
Problem (malfunction) ................... 111
Rear window wiper........................ 108
Replacing the wiperblades............ 109
Switching on/off........................... 108
Winter driving
Slippery roadsurfaces ................... 150
Snow chains .................................. 296
Winter operation
Generalnotes ................................ 295
Winter tires
M+S tires....................................... 295
Wiperblades
Cleaning ......................................... 274
Important safety notes .................. 109
Replacing (rear window)................ 110
Wooden trim (cleaning instruc-
tions) .................................................. 276
Workshop
see Qualifiedspecialist workshop
Z
ZONE function
Switching on/off........................... 119
Index
23
Introduction
The printedOperator's Manual providesinfor-
mation about thesafeoperation of your vehicle.
The Digital Operator's Manual providescompre-
hensiveand specifically adapted information on
your vehicle's equipmentand multimedia sys-
tem. You can call up theDigital Operator's Man-
ual via themultimedia system.
i
You will notincur any costswhen calling up
theDigital Operator's Manual. The Digital
Operator's Manual works without connecting
to theInternet.
Thereare three ways to access thetopicsofthe
Digital Operator's Manual:
R
Visualsearch
The visual search allows you to exploreyour
vehicle"virtually". Starting from either the
vehicleexteriorvieworinteriorview, you can
access manyofthe differenttopicscovered
by theDigital Operator's Manual. To access
thevehicleinteriorsection,select the"Vehi-
cle interior" view.
R
Keywordsearch
The keyword search allows you to search for a
keyword by enteringcharacters.
R
Contents
You can select individual sectionsinthe con-
tents.
i
The Digital Operator's Manual is deactiva-
tedfor safetyreasonswhile driving.
Operation
Calling up theDigital Operator's Man-
ual
X
Press the Ø buttoninthe center console.
The overview relating to thevehicleappears.
X
Selectthe "Operator's Manual" menuitemby
turning 3 or pressing 7 thecontroller.
X
Confirm 7 themessage about thewarning
and safetynotes.
The basic menufor theDigital Operator's
Manual appears.
Operating theDigital Operator's Man-
ual
General notes
Pleaseobservethe information about theoper-
ation of thecontroller (
Y page 237).
Content pages
The contentpages can be accessed by meansof
avisual search,akeyword search or usingthe
contents.
X
To scroll forwards/backwards: turn 3
thecontroller.
X
To displayinfull-screen or animation: slide
8 thecontroller to theleft :.
X
To select information texts or savebook-
marks: slide 9 thecontroller to the
right ;.
X
To select alink: slide 6 thecontroller
downwards =.
X
To exit acontent page: select % sym-
bol ?.
X
To call up thebasic menuofthe Digital
Operator's Manual: select Þ symbol A.
X
To switch functions to themultimedia
system using thebuttonsonthe center
console: press the $, %, Õ or Ø
button.
The selected menuappears. The Digital Oper-
ator's Manual remainsopen in theback-
ground.
24
Digital Operator's Manual
Protecting the environment
General notes
H
Environmental note
Daimler's declared policy is one of compre-
hensive environmental protection.
The objectives are for the natural resources
that form the basis of our existence on this
planet to be used sparingly and in amanner
that takes the requirements of both nature
and humanity into account.
You too can help to protect the environment
by operating your vehicle in an environmen-
tally responsible manner.
Fuel consumption and the rate of engine,
transmission, brake and tire wear are affected
by these factors:
R
operating conditionsofyour vehicle
R
your personal driving style
You can influence both factors. You should
bear the following in mind:
Operating conditions:
R
avoid short trips as these increase fuel con-
sumption.
R
always make sure that the tire pressures
are correct.
R
do not carry any unnecessary weight.
R
remove roof racks once you no longer need
them.
R
aregularly serviced vehicle will contribute
to environmental protection. You should
therefore adhere to the service intervals.
R
always have service work carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Personal driving style:
R
do not depress the accelerator pedal when
startingthe engine.
R
do not warm up the engine when the vehicle
is stationary.
R
drive carefully and maintain asafe distance
from the vehicle in front.
R
avoid frequent, sudden acceleration and
braking.
R
change gear in good time and use each gear
only up to Ô of its maximum engine speed.
R
switch off the engine in stationary traffic.
R
keep an eye on the vehicle's fuel consump-
tion.
Environmental concerns and recom-
mendations
Wherever the Operator's Manual requires you to
dispose of materials, first try to regenerate or re-
use them. Observe the relevant environmental
rules and regulations when disposing of materi-
als. In this way you will help to protect the envi-
ronment.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
H
Environmental note
Daimler AG also suppliesreconditioned major
assemblies and parts which are of the same
quality as new parts. They are covered by the
same Limited Warranty entitlements as new
parts.
!
Air bags and Emergency Tensioning Devi-
ces, as well as control units and sensors for
these restraint systems, may be installed in
the following areas of your vehicle:
R
doors
R
door pillars
R
door sills
R
seats
R
cockpit
R
instrumentcluster
R
center console
Do not install accessories such as audio sys-
tems in these areas. Do not carry out repairs
or welding. You could impair the operating
efficiency of the restraint systems.
Have aftermarket accessories installed at a
qualified specialist workshop.
You could jeopardize the operating safety of
your vehicle if you use parts, tires and wheels as
well as accessories relevant to safety which
have not been approved by Mercedes-Benz. This
could lead to malfunctionsinsafety-relevant
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
25
Introduction
Z
systems, e.g. the brake system. Use only genu-
ine Mercedes-Benz parts or parts of equalqual-
ity. Only use tires, wheels and accessories that
have been specifically approved for your vehi-
cle.
Genuine Mercedes-Benz parts are subject to
strict quality control. Every part has been spe-
cifically developed,manufactured or selected
for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
Therefore, only genuine Mercedes-Benz parts
should be used.
More than 300,000 different genuine
Mercedes-Benz parts are available for
Mercedes-Benz models.
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers maintain
asupply of genuine Mercedes-Benz parts for
necessary service and repair work. In addition,
strategically located parts delivery centers pro-
vide quick and reliable parts service.
Always specify the vehicle identification number
(VIN) when ordering genuine Mercedes-Benz
parts (
Y page 319).
Operator's Manual
Vehicle equipment
i
This Operator's Manual describes all models
and all standard and optional equipment of
your vehicle available at the time of going to
print. Country-specific differences are possi-
ble. Bear in mind that your vehicle may not
feature all functions described here. This also
applies to safety-relevant systems and func-
tions. The equipment in your vehicle may
therefore differ from that shown in the
descriptions and illustrations.
The original purchase agreement lists all sys-
tems installed in your vehicle.
Should you have any questions concerning
equipment and operation, please consult an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The Operator's Manual and Maintenance Book-
let are important documents and should be kept
in the vehicle.
Service and vehicleoperation
Maintenance
Always bring the Maintenance Booklet with you
when taking the vehicle to an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. Your customer service
advisor will enter every service into your Main-
tenanceBooklet on your behalf.
Roadside Assistance
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Pro-
gram offers technical help in the event of a
breakdown. Calls to the toll-free Roadside Assis-
tance Hotline are answered by our agents 24
hours aday, 365 days ayear.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes(1-800-367-6372)
(USA)
1-800-387-0100(Canada)
For additional information, refer to the
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance Program
brochure (USA) or the "Roadside Assistance"
section in the Service and Warranty Booklet
(Canada). You will find both in the vehicle docu-
ment wallet.
Change of address or change of own-
ership
In the event of achange of address, please send
us the "Notification of Address Change" in the
Service and Warranty Booklet or simply call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
(USA) at the hotline number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or
Customer Service Center (Canada) at
1-800-387-0100.This will assist us in contact-
ing you in atimely manner should the need arise.
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all liter-
ature in the vehicle so that it is available to the
next owner.
If you have purchased aused car, please send us
the "Notification of Used Car Purchase" in the
Service and Warranty Booklet or simply call the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
(USA) at the hotline number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372) or
Customer Service (Canada) at 1-800-387-0100.
Operating safety
Declarations of conformity
USA: "The wireless devices of this vehicle com-
ply with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is
subject to the two following two conditions: 1)
26
Operating safety
Introduction
These devices may not cause harmful interfer-
ence, and 2) These devices must accept any
interferencereceived, including interference
that may cause undesired operation. Changes
or modificationsnot expressly approved by the
party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment."
Canada: "The wireless devices of this vehicle
comply with IndustryCanada license-exempt
RSS standard(s). Operation is subject to the fol-
lowing two conditions: (1) These devices may
not cause interference, and (2) These devices
must accept any interference, including inter-
ferencethat may cause undesired operation of
the device."
Diagnostics connection
The diagnostics connection is only intended for
the connection of diagnostic equipment at a
qualified specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
If you connect equipment to adiagnostics
connection in the vehicle, it may affect the
operation of vehicle systems. As aresult, the
operating safety of the vehicle could be affec-
ted. There is arisk of an accident.
Only connect equipment to adiagnostics con-
nection in the vehicle, which is approved for
your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
G
WARNING
Objectsinthe driver's footwell can restrict the
pedal travel or obstruct adepressed pedal.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
jeopardized. There is arisk of an accident.
Make sure that all objectsinthe vehicle are
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
the driver's footwell. Install the floormats
securely and as specified in order to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals. Do not use
loose floormats and do not place floormats on
top of one another.
!
If the engine is switched off and equipment
on the diagnostics connection is used, the
starter battery may discharge.
Connecting equipment to the diagnostics con-
nection can lead to emissions monitoring infor-
mation being reset, for example. This may lead
to the vehicle failing to meet the requirementsof
the next emissions test during the main inspec-
tion.
Qualified specialist workshop
An authorized Mercedes-Benz Center is aquali-
fied specialist workshop. It has the necessary
specialist knowledge, tools and qualifications to
correctly carry out the work required on your
vehicle. This is especially the case for work rel-
evant to safety.
Observe the notes in the Maintenance Booklet.
Always have the following work carried out at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center:
R
work relevant to safety
R
service and maintenance work
R
repair work
R
alterations, installation work and modifica-
tions
R
work on electronic components
Correct use
If you remove any warning stickers, you or oth-
ers could fail to recognize certain dangers.
Leave warning stickers in position.
Observe the following information when driving
your vehicle:
R
the safety notes in this manual
R
technical data for the vehicle
R
traffic rules and regulations
R
laws and safety standards pertaining to motor
vehicles
Problems with your vehicle
If you should experienceaproblem with your
vehicle, particularly one that you believe may
affect its safe operation, we urge you to contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center immedi-
ately to have the problem diagnosed and recti-
fied. If the problem is not resolved to your sat-
isfaction,please discuss the problem again with
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or, if nec-
essary, contact us at one of the following
addresses.
In the USA
Operating safety
27
Introduction
Z
CustomerAssistanceCenter
Mercedes-BenzUSA,LLC
3Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
In Canada
CustomerRelationsDepartment
Mercedes-BenzCanada, Inc.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto,Ontario M4G 4C9
Limited Warranty
!
Follow theinstructionsinthismanual about
theproper operationofyour vehicle as well as
about possible vehicle damage. Damage to
your vehicle that arises from culpable contra-
ventions against these instructionsisnot cov-
eredeither by theMercedes-BenzLimited
Warrantyorbythe New or Used-Vehicle War-
ranty.
QR codes for therescue card
The QR codes are secured in thefuel fillerflap
and on theoppositeside on theB-pillar.Inthe
event of an accident, rescue services can use
theQRcodetoquickly findthe appropriate res-
cue cardfor your vehicle.The currentrescue
cardcontains themostimportant information
about your vehicle in acompactform, e.g.the
routing of theelectric cables.
You can findmoreinformationunder
www.mercedes-benz.de/qr-code.
Datastored in thevehicle
Datastorage
Awide range of electronic componentsinyour
vehicle contain datamemories.
Thesedatamemoriestemporarily or perma-
nently store technical informationabout:
R
thevehicle's operatingstate
R
incidents
R
malfunctions
In general, this technical informationdocu-
ments thestate of acomponent,amodule, a
system or thesurroundings.
Theseinclude, for example:
R
operatingconditions of system components,
e.g.fluid levels
R
thevehicle's status messages and those of its
individual components, e.g.number of wheel
revolutions/speed, decelerationinmove-
ment, lateral acceleration, acceleratorpedal
position
R
malfunctions and defectsinimportant system
components, e.g.lights, brakes
R
vehicle reactions and operatingconditions in
special driving situations,e.g.air bag deploy-
ment, interventionofstabilitycontrolsys-
tems
R
ambient conditions,e.g.outside temperature
This dataisofanexclusivelytechnical nature
and can be used to:
R
assistinrecognizing and rectifying malfunc-
tions and defects
R
analyzevehicle functions, e.g.after an acci-
dent
R
optimizevehicle functions
The datacannotbeused to trace thevehicle's
movements.
When your vehicle is serviced, technical infor-
mation can b
e read from theevent datamemory
and malfunctiondatamemory.
Services include, for example:
R
repair services
R
serviceprocesses
R
warranties
R
qualityassurance
The vehicle is read out by employees of theser-
vicenetwork (including themanufacturer) using
special diagnostic testers.Moredetailed infor-
mation is obtainedfromit, if required.
Afteramalfunctionhas been rectified, theinfor-
mation is deleted from themalfunctionmemory
or is continually overwritten.
When operatingthe vehicle,situations are con-
ceivable in whichthistechnical data, in connec-
tionwithother information(if necessary, under
consultation withanauthorized expert),could
be traced to aperson.
Examplesinclude:
R
accidentreports
R
damagetothe vehicle
R
witness statements
28
Datastored in thevehicle
Introduction
Furtheradditional functions that havebeencon-
tractually agreed upon with the customer allow
certain vehicle data to be conveyed by the vehi-
cle as well.The additional functions include, for
example,vehicle location in case of an emer-
gency.
COMAND/mbrace(Canada: TELEAID)
If the vehicle is equipped with COMAND or
mbrace, additional data aboutthe vehicle's
operation, the use of the vehicle in certain sit-
uations, and the location of the vehicle may be
compiled through COMAND or the mbrace sys-
tem.
For additional information please refertothe
COMAND User Manual or the Digital Operator's
Manual and/orthe mbrace Termsand Condi-
tions.
Event data recorders
Thisvehicle is equipped with an event data
recorder (EDR).Thisvehicle is equipped with an
event data recorder (EDR).The mainpurposeof
an EDR is to record, in certain crashornear
crash-like situations, such as an airbag deploy-
ment or hitting aroadobstacle, data that will
assist in understanding how avehicle'ssystems
performed. The EDR is designedtorecorddata
related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems
for ashortperiod of time, typically30seconds
or less.
The EDR in this vehicle is designedtorecord
such data as:
R
How varioussystems in your vehicle were
operating
R
Whether or not the driver and passenger
safety belts were buckled/fastened
R
How far (ifatall)the driver wasdepressing the
accelerator and/orbrake pedal and
R
How fastthe vehicle wastraveling.
These data can helpprovide abetter under-
standing of the circumstancesinwhich crashes
and injuries occur.NOTE: EDR data are recorded
by your vehicle only if anon-trivial crashsitua-
tion occurs; no data are recorded by the EDR
under normaldriving conditions and no personal
data (e.g.name,gender, ageand crashlocation)
are recorded.However, other parties,such as
lawenforcement could combine the EDR data
with the typeofpersonallyidentifying data rou-
tinelyacquired during acrashinvestigation.
Access to the vehicle and/orthe EDR is
needed
to
readdatathat is recorded by an EDR, and
specialequipment is required.Inaddition to the
vehicle manufacturer, other parties that have
the specialequipment, such as lawenforce-
ment, can readthe information by accessing the
vehicle or the EDR.
EDR data may be usedinciviland criminal mat-
ters as atool in accident reconstruction, acci-
dent claims and vehicle safety. Since the Crash
Data Retrieval CDR tool that is usedtoextract
data from the EDR is commerciallyavailable,
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC ("MBUSA")expressly
disclaims any and allliability arising from the
extraction of this information by unauthorized
Mercedes-Benz personnel.
MBUSA will not share EDR data with others
withoutthe consent of the vehicle owners or, if
the vehicle is leased,withoutthe consent of the
lessee.Exceptions to this representation
include responses to subpoenas by lawenforce-
ment; by federal,state or localgovernment; in
connectionwithorarising outoflitigation involv-
ing MBUSA or its subsidiariesand affiliates;or,
as required by law.
Warning: The EDR is acomponent of the
Restraint SystemModule. Tampering with, alter-
ing, modifying or removing the EDR component
may result in amalfunction of the Restraint Sys-
tem Moduleand other systems.
State laws or regulations regarding EDRs that
conflict with federal regulation are pre-empted.
Thismeans that in the event of such conflict, the
federal regulation governs. As of Febr
uary 2013,
13 statesha
veenactedlawsrelating to EDRs.
Informationoncopyright
General information
Information on license for free and open-source
software usedinyourvehicle and its electronic
components is available on the following web-
site:
http://www.mercedes-benz.com/opensource
Informationoncopyright
29
Introduction
Z
Registeredtrademarks
R
Bluetooth
®
is aregistered trademark of Blue-
tooth SIG Inc.
R
DTS™ is aregistered trademark of DTS, Inc.
R
Dolby
®
and MLP™are registered trademarks
of DOLBY Laboratories.
R
BabySmart™, ESP
®
and PRE-SAFE
®
are reg-
istered trademarks of DaimlerAG.
R
HomeLink
®
is aregistered trademark of John-
son Controls.
R
iPod
®
and iTunes
®
are registered trademarks
of AppleInc.
R
Logic7
®
is aregistered trademark of Harman
InternationalIndustries.
R
Microsoft
®
and Windowsmedia
®
are regis-
teredtrademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
R
SIRIUS
®
is aregistered trademark of Sirius
XM RadioInc.
R
HD Radio™ is aregistered trademark of iBiq-
uity Digital Corporation.
R
Gracenote
®
is aregistered trademark of
Gracenote,Inc.
R
ZAGAT Survey
®
and relatedbrands are regis-
teredtrademarks of ZagatSurvey,LLC.
30
Information on copyright
Introduction
Cockpit
Function Page
:
Steering wheel paddle shift-
ers
138
;
Combination switch 102
=
Instrumentcluster 32
?
Horn
A
DIRECT SELECT lever 132
B
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
warning display
169
C
Overhead control panel 38
Function Page
D
Climatecontrol systems 112
E
Ignition lock 124
F
Adjusts thesteering wheel 95
G
Cruisecontrol lever 155
H
Electric parking brake 144
I
Lightswitch 100
J
Diagnostics connection 27
K
Opensthe hood 266
Cockpit
31
At aglance
Instrumentcluster
Function Page
:
Speedometer withsegments 183
Warning and indicator lamps:
L Low-beam headlamps
101
T Parking lamps
101
K High-beam headlamps
102
÷ ESP
®
228
Electric parking brake
applied(red)
F (USAonly)
! (Canada only)
231
! Electric parking brake
(yellow)
231
· Distancewarning
234
å ESP
®
OFF
228
! ABSmalfunctioning
227
Brakes 226
$ (USAonly)
J (Canada only)
;
#! Turn signals
102
Function Page
=
Multifunction display 185
?
Tachometer 183
6 Restraintsystem
40
ü Seat belt notfastened
224
M SPORT handlingmode
(Mercedes-AMGvehicles)
229
R Rear fog lamp
101
N Foglamps
101
; CheckEngine
231
h Tirepressuremonitor
235
A
Coolanttemperature gauge 184
Warning and indicator lamps:
? Coolanttoo hot/cold
232
B
Fuellevel indicator
Warning and indicator lamps:
æ Reserve fuel
231
32
Instrumentcluster
At aglance
Multifunction steering wheel
Function Page
:
Multifunction display 185
;
Multimediasystem display
=
~ Rejects or ends acall
6 Makes or accepts acall
Further telephone functions 189
WXAdjusts volume
8 Mute
? Switchesonvoice-
operated controlofthe navi-
gationsystem or the Voice
Control System
Function Page
?
ò Opens the menu list
9:Selects amenu
a Confirmsthe selection
% Back
Operatesthe on-board com-
puter
184
? Switches off voice-
operatedcontrol of the navi-
gation system or the Voice
Control System
i In vehicles with multimediasystem Audio 20
youcan find further information:
R
on the multimediasystem in the Digital
Operator's Manual
R
on voice-operated control of the navigation
system in the manufacturer'soperating
instructions
i In vehicles with multimediasystem
COMAND youcan find further information:
R
on the multimediasystem in the Digital
Operator's Manual
R
on the DVD changer or single DVD drive in
the Digital Operator's Manual
R
on the Voice Control System in the sepa-
rate operating instructions
Multifunctionsteering wheel
33
At aglance
Center console
Center console, upper section
Function Page
:
Multimedia system (see the
separate operatinginstruc-
tions)
;
c Seat heating
94
Mercedes-AMGvehicles:
AMGadaptive sportsuspen-
sion system (leftside)
165
Mercedes-AMGvehicles:
adjuststhe exhaust flap of
theAMG performance
exhaust system (right side)
129
=
à Downhill Speed Regu-
lation
166
?
c Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC
170
Function Page
A
è ECO start/stopfunc-
tion
127
B
£ Hazard warning lamps
102
C
PASSENGER AIRBAG indica-
torlamp
40
D
DYNAMIC SELECT button 130
å Mercedes-AMGvehi-
cles: ESP
®
65
E
Activatesthe driving dynam-
ics display (vehicleswiththe
ON&OFFROAD package)
168
34
Center console
At aglance
Center console, lower section
Function Page
:
Ashtray 252
Cigarettelighter 252
Socket 253
Stowage compartment 242
;
Cup holder 250
=
Cup holder 250
Function Page
?
Stowage compartmentwith
Media Interface
242
A
Multimedia system control-
ler (see theseparate operat-
ing instructions)
Center console
35
At aglance
i
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
Function Page
:
Ashtray 252
Cigarette lighter 252
Socket 253
Stowage compartment 242
;
Selector lever 134
=
Manual gearshifting (perma-
nent setting)
138
Function Page
?
DYNAMIC SELECT controller 131
A
Cup holder 250
B
Stowage compartmentwith
Media Interface
242
C
Multimedia system control-
ler (see the separate operat-
ing instructions)
36
Center console
At aglance
Door controlpanel
Function Page
:
Opens thedoor 75
;
%&Unlocks/locks
the vehicle
75
=
r45= Saves
the seat and exterior mirror
settings
98
?
Adjusts the seats electrically 92
A
7 Z ö \
Adjusts and folds the exterior
mirrors in/out electrically
96
Function Page
B
W Opens/closes the side
windows
82
C
n Activates/deactivates
the override feature for the
side windows in the rear
compartment
59
D
q Opens the cargo com-
partment
80
Door control panel
37
At aglance
Overheadcontrol panel
Function Page
:
u Switches the rear com-
partmentinterior lighting
on/off
103
;
p Switches the right-
hand reading lamp on/off
103
=
| Switches the frontinte-
rior lighting/automatic inte-
rior lighting control off
103
?
ï MB Infocall button
(mbrace system)
256
A
Rear-view mirror 97
B
Setting the compass 263
C
Buttons for the garage door
opener
261
Function Page
D
G SOS button (mbrace
system)
254
E
F Roadside assistance
call button (mbrace system)
255
F
Eyeglasses compartment 243
G
3 Opens/closes the pan-
orama roof with power tilt/
sliding panel with roller sun-
blinds
86
H
c Switches the frontinte-
rior lighting on
103
I
p Switches the left-hand
reading lamp on/off
103
38
Overheadcontrol panel
At aglance
Panic alarm
X
To activate: press and hold the
! button : for approx. one second.
Avisual and audible alarm is triggered if the
alarm system is armed.
X
To deactivate: press ! button : again.
or
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function
or KEYLESSGO
X
Press the Start/Stop button.
The SmartKey must be in the vehicle.
Occupant safety
Introduction to the restraint system
The restraint system can reduce the risk of vehi-
cle occupants coming into contact with parts of
the vehicle's interior in the event of an accident.
The restraint system can also reduce the forces
to which vehicle occupants are subjected during
an accident.
The restraint system comprises:
R
seat belt system
R
air bags
R
child restraint system
R
child seat securing systems
The components of the restraint system work in
conjunction with each other. They can only
deploy their protective function if, at all times, all
vehicle occupants:
R
have fastened their seat belts correctly
(
Y page 42)
R
have adjusted their seat and head restraint
properly (
Y page 90).
As the driver, you also have to make sure that
the steering wheel is adjusted correctly.
Observe the information relating to the correct
driver's seat position (
Y page 90).
You also have to make sure that an air bag can
inflate properly if deployed(
Y page 44).
An air bag supplements acorrectly worn seat
belt. As an additional safety device, the air bag
increases the level of protection for vehicle
occupants in the event of an accident. For exam-
ple, if, in the event of an accident, the protection
offered by the seat belt is sufficient, the air bags
are not deployed. When an accident occurs, only
the air bags that increase protection in that par-
ticular accident situation are deployed. How-
ever, seat belts and air bags generally do not
protect against objectspenetrating the vehicle
from the outside.
Information on restraint system operation can
be found under "Triggering of the Emergency
Tensioning Devices and air bags" (
Y page 51).
For information on children traveling with you in
the vehicle and on child restraint systems, see
"Children in the vehicle" (
Y page 53).
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Modifications to the restraint system may
cause it to no longer work as intended. The
restraint system may then not perform its
intended protective function and may fail in an
accident or trigger unexpectedly, for example.
This poses an increased risk of injury or even
fatal injury.
Never modify parts of the restraint system.
Never tamper with the wiring, the electronic
components or their software.
If it is necessary to modify components of the
restraint system to accommodate aperson
with disabilities, contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center for details. USA only:
for further information contact our Customer
AssistanceCenter at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(18003676372).
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only use
driving aids which have been approved specifi-
cally for your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
Occupant safety
39
Safety
Z
Restraint system warninglamp
The functions of the restraint system are
checkedafterthe ignition is switched on and at
regular intervalswhile the engine is running.
Therefore, malfunctions can be detected in
goodtime.
The 6 restraint system warning lamp in the
instrument cluster lights up when the ignition is
switched on. It goesout no later than afew sec-
onds afterthe vehicleisstarted. The compo-
nents of the restraint system are in operational
readiness.
Amalfunction hasoccurred if the 6 restraint
system warning lamp:
R
doesnot light up afterthe ignition is switched
on
R
doesnot go outafterafew seconds with the
engine running
R
lights up againwhile the engine is running
G
WARNING
If the restraint system is malfunctioning,
restraint system components may be trig-
gered unintentionally or may not deployas
intended during an accident. Thiscan affect
for examplethe Emergency Tensioning
Device or the airbag.Thisposes an increased
riskofinjury or evenfatalinjury.
Have the restraint system checkedand
repaired in aqualified specialist workshopas
soonaspossible.
PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator lamp
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp : and
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp ; are
part of the Occupant Classification System
(OCS).
The indicator lamps display the statusofthe
front-passenger front airbag.
R
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 sec-
onds,subsequently both indicator lamps are
off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF):the
front-passenger front airbag is able to deploy
in the event of an accident.
R
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up:the front-
passenger front airbag is deactivated. It will
then not be deployedinthe event of an acci-
dent.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is
off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp shows the statusofthe front-passenger
front airbag.The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp may be litcontinuously or be off.
Depending on the person in the front-passenger
seat, the front-passenger front airbag must
either be deactivated or enabled; see the fol-
lowing points. Youmustmake sure of this both
before and during ajourney.
R
Childreninachild restraintsystem:
whetherthe front-passenger front airbag is
enabled or deactivated depends on the instal-
ledchild restraint system, and the ageand
size of the child.Therefore, be sure to observe
the notes on the "Occupant Classification
System (OCS)" (
Y page 46)and on "Chil-
dreninthe vehicle" (
Y page 53). There you
will also find instructions on rearward and
forwa
rd-facing child restraint systems on the
front-passenger seat.
R
Allotherpersons: depending on the classi-
fication of the person in the front-passenger
seat, the front-passenger front airbag is ena-
bled or deactivated (
Y page 46). Be sure to
observe the notes on "Seat
belts“ (
Y page 40)and "Airbags"
(
Y page 44). There youcan also find infor-
mation on the correct seatposition.
Seat belts
Introduction
Seatbelts are the most effective means of
restricting the movement of vehicleoccupants
in the event of an accident or the vehiclerolling
over. Thisreducesthe riskofvehicleoccupants
coming into contact with parts of the vehicle
interiororbeing ejectedfrom the vehicle. Fur-
thermore,the seatbelthelps to keep the vehicle
40
Occupantsafety
Safety
occupant in the best position in relation to the
air bag.
The seat belt system comprises:
R
Seat belts
R
Emergency TensioningDevices for the front
seat belts and the outer seat belts in the rear
R
Seat belt force limiters for the front seat belts
and the outer seat belts in the rear
If the seat belt is pulled out of the belt outlet
quickly or with ajerkymovement,the belt
retractor locks. The belt strap cannot be extrac-
ted any further.
The Emergency TensioningDevice tightensthe
seat belt in an accident,pulling the belt close
against the body. However it does not pull the
vehicle occupant back in the direction of the
backrest.
The Emergency TensioningDevice does not cor-
rect an incorrect seat position or the routing of
an incorrectly fastened seat belt.
When triggered, aseat belt force limiter helps to
reduce the force exerted by the seat belt on the
vehicle occupant.
The seat belt force limiters for the front seats are
synchronized with the front air bags, which
absorb part of the deceleration force. This can
reduce the force exerted on the vehicle occu-
pants during an accident.
!
If the front-passenger seat is unoccupied,
do not insert the belt tongue into the buckle of
the front-passenger seat. This may otherwise
lead to the triggering of the Emergency Ten-
sioning Device in the event of an accident,
which will then need to be replaced.
Important safety notes
The use of seat belts and child restraint systems
is required by law in:
R
all 50 states
R
the U.S. territories
R
the District of Columbia
R
all Canadian provinces
Even where this is not required by law, all vehicle
occupantsshould correctly fasten their seat
belts before starting the journey.
G
WARNING
If the seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot
perform its intended protective function. An
incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause
injuries, for example, in the event of an acci-
dent or when braking or changing direction
abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury
or even fatal injury.
Always ensure that all vehicle occupantshave
their seat belts fastened correctly and are sit-
ting properly.
G
WARNING
The seat belt does not offer the intended level
of protection if you have not moved the back-
rest to an almost vertical position. When brak-
ing or in the event of an accident,you could
slide underneath the seat belt and sustain
abdomen or neck injuries, for example. This
poses an increased risk of injury or even fatal
injury.
Adjust the seat properly before beginning
your journey. Always ensure that the backrest
is in an almost vertical position and that the
shoulder section of your seat belt is routed
across the center of your shoulder.
G
WARNING
Persons less than 5ft(1.50 m) tall cannot
wear the seat belt correctly without an addi-
tional and suitable restraint system. If the
seat belt is not worn correctly, it cannot per-
form its intended protective function. An
incorrectly fastened seat belt can also cause
injuries, for example, in the event of an acci-
dent or when braking or changing direction
abruptly. This poses an increased risk of injury
or even fatal injury.
For this reason, alwayssecure persons under
5ft(1.50 m) tall in suitable additional restraint
systems.
If achild younger than twelve years old and
under 5ft(1.50 m) in height is traveling in the
vehicle:
R
alwayssecure the child in achild restraint
system suitable for this Mercedes-Benz vehi-
cle. The child restraint system must be appro-
priate to the age, weight and size of the child
R
alwaysobserve the instructions and safety
notes on "Children in the vehicle"
(
Y page 53) in addition to the child restraint
Occupant safety
41
Safety
Z
system manufacturer's installation and oper-
ating instructions
R
always observe the instructions and safety
notes on the "Occupant classification system
(OCS)" (
Y page 46)
G
WARNING
The seat belts may not perform their intended
protective function if:
R
they are damaged,modified, extremely
dirty, bleached or dyed
R
the seat belt buckle is damaged or
extremely dirty
R
the EmergencyTensioning Devices, belt
anchorages or inertia reels have been modi-
fied.
Seat belts may be damaged in an accident,
although the damage may not be visible, e.g.
due to splinters of glass. Modified or damaged
seat belts may tear or fail, e.g. in an accident.
Modified EmergencyTensioning Devices
could accidentally trigger or fail to deploy
when necessary. This poses an increased risk
of injury or even fatal injury.
Never modify the seat belts, EmergencyTen-
sioning Devices, belt anchorages and inertia
reels. Make sure that the seat belts are
undamaged,not worn out and clean. Follow-
ing an accident, have the seat belts checked
immediately at aqualified specialist work-
shop.
Only use seat belts that have been approved for
your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz.
Sports seat or AMG Performance seat: this
seat is designed for the standard three-point
seat belt. If you install another multi-point seat
belt, e.g. sport or racing seat belts, the restraint
system cannot provide the best level of protec-
tion.
G
WARNING
If you feed seat belts through the opening in
the seat backrest, the seat backrest may be
damaged or may even break in the event of an
accident. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
Only use the standard three-point seat belt.
Never modify the seat belt system.
Proper use of the seat belts
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
(
Y page 41).
All vehicle occupants must be wearing the seat
belt correctly before beginning the journey. Also
make sure that all vehicle occupants are always
wearing the seat belt correctly while the vehicle
is in motion.
When fastening the seat belt, always make sure
that:
R
the seat belt tongue is only inserted to the belt
buckle belonging to that seat.
R
the seat belt is tight across your body.
Avoid wearing bulky clothing, e.g. awinter
coat.
R
the seat belt is not twisted.
Only then can the forces which occur be dis-
tributed over the area of the belt.
R
the shouldersection of the belt is always
routed across the center of your shoulder.
The shouldersection of the belt must not
come into contact with your neck or be routed
under your arm. Where possible,adjust the
seat belt to the appropriate height.
R
the lap belt passes tightly and as low down as
possible across your lap.
The lap belt must always be routed across
your hip joints and not across your abdomen.
This applies particularly to pregnant women.
If necessary, push the lap belt down to your
hip joint and pull it tight using the shoulder
section of the belt.
R
the seat belt is not routed across sharp, poin-
ted or fragile objects.
If you have such items located on or in your
clothing, e.g. pens, keys or eyeglasses, store
these in asuitable place.
R
only one person is using aseat belt at atime.
Infantsand children must never travel sitting
on the lap of avehicle occupant. In the event
of an accident, they could be crushed
between the vehicle occupant and seat belt.
R
objects are never secured with aseat belt if
the seat belt is also being used by one of the
vehicle's occupants.
Also ensure that there are never objects
between aperson and the seat, e.g. cushions.
42
Occupant safety
Safety
Seatbelts are only intended to secure and
restrainvehicleoccupants. Alwaysobserve the
"Loading guidelines" for securing objects, lug-
gage or loads(
Y page 242).
Fasteningand adjusting the seat belts
Observe the safety notes on the seatbelt
(
Y page 41)and the notes on correct useofseat
belts (
Y page 42).
Basic illustration
X
Adjust the seat(Y page 90).
The seatbackrestmustbeinanalmostver-
ticalposition.
X
Pull the seatbeltsmoothlyfrom the belt out-
let.
X
Engage seatbelttongue ; in belt buckle :.
X
If necessary,pullupwards on the shoulder
section of the seatbelttotighten the belt
across your body.
The shouldersection of the seatbeltmust
always be routed across the centerofthe shoul-
der. Adjust the belt outletifnecessary.
X
To raise: slidethe belt outletupwards.
The belt outletwillengage in various posi-
tions.
X
To lower: holdbeltoutletrelease = and slide
belt outletdownwards.
X
Let go of belt outletrelease = in the desired
positionand make sure thatthe belt outlet
engages.
All seatbelts except the driver's seatbeltare
equipped with aspecialseatbeltretractor to
securelyfasten child restraint systemsinthe
vehicle. Further informationcan be found under
"Special seatbeltretractor" (
Y page 54).
Releasingseatbelts
!
Make sure thatthe seatbeltisfully rolledup.
Otherwise, the seatbeltorbelttonguewillbe
trappedinthe door or in the seatmechanism.
Thiscould damage the door, the door trim
panel and the seatbelt. Damaged seatbelts
can no longer fulfilltheirprotective function
and must be replaced.Visit aqualified spe-
cialist workshop.
X
Press the release button in the belt buckle,
holdthe belt tonguefirmly and guidethe belt
back.
Beltwarning for the driverand front
passenger
The 7 seatbeltwarning lamp in the instru-
ment cluster is areminder thatall vehicleoccu-
pants must wear theirseatbelts. It maylight up
continuously or flash. In addition, theremay be
awarning tone.
Regardless of whetherthe driver'sseatbelthas
already been fastened,the 7 seatbeltwarn-
ing lamp lights up for sixseconds each time the
engine is started.If, aftersix seconds,the driver
or front-passenger seatbelthas not been fas-
tened and the doors are closed,the 7 seat
belt warning lamp lights up.Assoonasthe driv-
er'sand front-passenger seatbelts are fastened
or afront door is openedagain,the 7 seat
belt warning lamp goesout.
If the driver'sseatbeltisnot fastened afterthe
engine is started,anadditional warning tone will
sound. The warning tone switches off aftersix
seconds or once the driver'sseatbeltisfas-
tened.
If the vehicle's speed exceeds15mph
(25 km/h)once and the driver'sand front-
passenger seatbelts are not fastened,awarning
tone sounds. Awarning tone also sounds with
increasing intensity for 60 seconds or untilthe
driver or front passenger have fastened their
seatbelts.
If the driver or front passenger unfasten their
seatbelts during the journey,the seatbeltwarn-
ing is activatedagain.
Occupant safety
43
Safety
Z
Air bags
Introduction
The installation pointofanair bag can be rec-
ognized by theAIR BAGsymbol.
An air bag complements thecorrectly fastened
seat belt.Itisnosubstitutefor theseat belt.The
air bag provides additional protection in appli-
cable accidentsituations.
Not all air bags are deployed in an accident. The
differentair bag systems function independ-
entlyfromone another (
Y page 51).
However, no system available today can com-
pletely eliminate injuriesand fatalities.
It is also notpossibletorule out ariskofinjury
caused by an air bag due to thehigh speedat
whichthe air bag mustbedeployed.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you do notsit in thecorrect seat position,
theair bag cannotprotect as intended and
could evencauseadditional injury when
deployed. This poses an increased riskof
injury or evenfatal injury.
To avoidhazardous situations, always make
surethatall of thevehicle's occupants:
R
havefastenedtheir seat beltscorrectly,
includingpregnant women
R
are sitting correctlyand maintainthe great-
est possibledistancetothe air bags
R
follow thefollowinginstructions
Always makesurethatthere are no objects
between theair bag and thevehicle's occu-
pants.
R
Adjustthe seatsproperly before beginning
your journey. Always makesurethatthe seat
is in an almost upright position.The center of
thehead restraintmustsupport thehead at
about eye level.
R
Movethe driver's and front-passenger seats
as far backaspossible. The driver's seat posi-
tion mustallow thevehicletobedriven safely.
R
Only hold thesteering wheelonthe outside.
This allows theair bag to be fully deployed.
R
Always lean against thebackrest while driv-
ing.Donot lean forwardsorlean against the
door or side window. You may otherwise be in
thedeploymentarea of theair bags.
R
Always keep your feetinthe footwell in front
of theseat.Donot put your feetonthe dash-
board, for example. Your feetmay otherwise
be in thedeployment area of theair bag.
R
Forthisreason,always secure personsless
than 5ft(1.50m)tallinsuitablerestraint sys-
tems.Uptothisheight,the seat belt cannot
be worn correctly.
If achild is traveling in your vehicle,also
observe the followingnotes:
R
Alwayssecurechildren under twelve yearsof
ageand less than5ft (1.50m)tallinsuitable
child restraint systems.
R
Childrestraint systems shouldbeinstalledon
the rearseats.
R
Onlysecureachild in arearward-facing child
restraint systemonthe front-passengerseat
when the front-passengerfront airbag is
deactivated.Ifthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp is permanentlylit,the front-
passengerfront airbag is deactivated
(
Y page 40).
R
Alwaysobserve the instructions and safety
notesonthe "Occupant Classification System
(OCS)"(
Y page 46) and on "Children in the
vehicle" (
Y page 53)inadditiontothe child
restraint system manufacturer'sinstallation
and operating instructions.
Objects in the vehicle interior may prevent
an air bag from functioning
correctly. Be
fore
starting your journey and to avoid risks resulting
from the speed of the airbag as it deploys, make
sure that:
R
thereare no people,animals or objects
between the vehicleoccupants and an air
bag.
R
thereare no objects between the seat, door
and B-pillar.
R
no hard objects, e.g.coathangers, hang on
the grabhandles or coathooks.
R
no accessories, such as cup holders, are
attachedtothe vehiclewithinthe deployment
areaofanair bag, e.g.todoors,sidewindows,
rearsidetrim or side walls.
R
no heavy,sharp-edged or fragile objects are in
the pockets of your clothing. Store such
objects in asuitableplace.
44
Occupant safety
Safety
G
WARNING
If you modify the air bag cover or affix objects
such as stickers to it, the air bag can no longer
function correctly. There is an increased risk
of injury.
Never modify an air bag cover or affix objects
to it.
G
WARNING
Sensors to control the air bagsare located in
the doors. Modifications or work not per-
formed correctly to the doors or door panel-
ing, as wellasdamaged doors, can leadtothe
function of the sensors being impaired.The air
bagsmight therefore not function properly
anymore. Consequently,the air bagscannot
protect vehicleoccupants as they are
designed to do. There is an increased risk of
injury.
Never modify the doors or parts of the doors.
Always have work on the doors or door pan-
eling carriedout at aqualified specialist work-
shop.
Frontair bags
!
Do not place heavy objects on the front-
passenger seat. This couldcausethe system
to identify the seat as being occupied. In the
event of an accident, the restraint systems on
the front-passengerside may be triggered
and have to be replaced.
Driver's air bag : deploys in front of the steer-
ing wheel. Front-passengerfront air bag ;
deploys in front of and above the glove box.
When deployed, the front air bagsoffer addi-
tional head and thorax protection for the occu-
pants in the front seats.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
informs you about the status of the front-
passenger front air bag (
Y page40).
The front-passengerfront air bag willonly
deploy if:
R
the system, basedonthe OCS weight sensor
readings, detects that the front-passenger
seat is occupied (
Y page46). The
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp is
not lit (
Y page47)
R
the restraint system control unit predicts a
high accident severity
Kneebags
Driver's knee bag : deploys under the steering
column and front-passengerknee bag ; under
the glove box. The driver's and front-passenger
knee bagsare triggeredtogether with the front
air bags.
The driver's and front-passengerknee bags
offer additionalthigh, knee and lower leg pro-
tection for the occupants in the front seats.
Side impact air bags
G
WARNING
Unsuitable seat covers can obstruct or pre-
vent deployment of the air bagsintegrated
into the seats. Consequently,the air bags
cannot protect vehicleoccupants as they are
designed to do. In addition, the operation of
the occupant classification system (OCS)
couldbeadversely affected. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Occupant safety
45
Safety
Z
You should only use seat covers that have
been approvedfor the respectiveseat by
Mercedes-Benz.
Front side impact air bags : and rear side
impact air bags ; deploy nexttothe outer bol-
sterofthe seat backrest.
When deployed, the side impact air bag offers
additional thorax protection. It also offers addi-
tional pelvis protection for occupantsinthe
frontseats.However, it does not protect the:
R
head
R
neck
R
arms
In the eventofaside impact,the side impact air
bag is deployed on the side on which the impact
occurs.
The side impact air bag on the front-passenger
side deploys under the followingconditions:
R
the OCS systemdetects that the front-
passenger seat is occupied or
R
the seat belt buckle tongue is engagedinthe
belt buckle of the front-passenger seat
If the belt tongue is engagedinthe belt buckle,
the side impact air bag on the front-passenger
side deploys if an appropriate accident situation
occurs. In this case, deploymentisindependent
of whether the front-passenger seat is occupied
or not.
Window curtain air bags
Window curtain air bags : are integrated into
the side of the roof frameand deployed in the
area from the A-pillar to the C-pillar.
When deployed, the window curtain air bag
enhances the level of protection for the head.
However, it does not protect the chestorarms.
In the eventofaside impact,the window curtain
air bag is deployed on the side on which the
impact occurs.
If the systemdeterminesthat theycan offer
additional protection to that provided by the
seat belt, awindow curtain air bag may be
deployed in other accident situations
(
Y page 51).
Occupant Classification System
(OCS)
Introduction
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) cat-
egorizes the person in the front-passenger seat.
Depending on that result,the front-passenger
frontair bag and front-passenger knee bag are
eitherenabled or deactivated.
The systemdoes not deactivate:
R
the side impact air bag
R
the window curtain air bag
R
the Emergency TensioningDevices
46
Occupant safety
Safety
Requirements
To be classifiedcorrectly,the front passenger
mustsit:
R
with the seatbeltfastened correctly
R
in an almost upright position with theirback
against the seatbackrest
R
with theirfeetresting on the floor, if possible
If the front passenger doesnot observe these
conditions,OCS may produce afalse classifica-
tion, e.g. because the front passenger:
R
transfers theirweightbysupporting them-
selves on avehiclearmrest
R
sits in such away that theirweightisraised
from the seatcushion
If it is absolutely necessary to install achild
restraint system on the front-passenger seat, be
sure to observe the correct positioning of the
child restraint system. Neverplace objects
under or behind the child restraint system, e.g. a
cushion. The entirebaseofthe child restraint
system mustalwaysrestonthe seatcushionof
the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the
forward-facing child restraint system mustlie as
flataspossible against the backrest of the front-
passenger seat.
The child restraint system mustnot touch the
rooforbesubjectedtoaloadbythe head
restraint. Adjust the angle of the seatbackrest
and the headrestraint position accordingly.
Only then can OCSbeguaranteed to function
correctly.Alwaysobserve the child restraint sys-
tem manufacturer'sinstallation
and operating
i
nstructions.
OperationofOccupant Classification
System (OCS)
:
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp
;
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
The indicator lamps inform youwhetherthe
front-passenger front airbag is deactivated or
enabled.
X
Press the Start/Stopbutton once or twice, or
turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock.
The system carriesout self-diagnostics.
The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and PASSENGER
AIR BAG ON indicator lamps mustlight up simul-
taneously for approximately six seconds.
The indicator lamps display the statusofthe
front-passenger front airbag.
R
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON lights up for 60 sec-
onds,subsequently both indicator lamps are
off (PASSENGER AIR BAG ON and OFF):the
front-passenger front airbag is able to deploy
in the event of an accident.
R
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF lights up:the front-
passenger front airbag is deactivated. It will
then not be deployedinthe event of an acci-
dent.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp is
off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp shows the statusofthe front-passenger
front airbag.The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lamp may be litcontinuously or be off.
If the statusofthe front-passenger front airbag
changes whilethe vehicleisinmotion, an airbag
display message appears in the instrument clus-
ter (
Y page 206). Whenthe front-passenger
seatisoccupied, always payattention to the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF ind
icator lamp. Be
a
ware of the statusofthe front-passenger front
airbag both before and during the journey.
G
WARNING
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is lit, the front-passenger front airbag is
disabled. It will not be deployedinthe event of
an accident and cannotperform its intended
protectivefunction. Aperson in the front-
passenger seatcould then, for example, come
into contact with the vehicle's interior, espe-
ciallyifthe person is sitting too close to the
dashboard. Thisposes an increased riskof
injury or evenfatalinjury.
Whenthe front-passenger seatisoccupied,
always ensure that:
R
the classification of the person in the front-
passenger seatiscorrect and the front-
Occupantsafety
47
Safety
Z
passenger frontair bag is enabled or disa-
bled in accordance with the person in the
front-passenger seat
R
the front-passenger seat has been moved
back as far back as possible.
R
the person is seated correctly.
Make sure, both before and during the jour-
ney, that the status of the front-passenger
frontair bag is correct.
G
WARNING
If you secure achild in arearward-facing child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat
and the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator
lamp is off, the front-passenger frontair bag
may deploy in the event of an accident. The
child could be struck by the air bag. This poses
an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Make sure that the front-passenger frontair
bag has been disabled. The PASSENGER AIR
BAGOFF indicator lamp must be lit.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp
stays off, do not install arearward-facing child
restraint system on the front-passenger seat.
You can find more information on OCS under
"Problems with the Occupant Classification Sys-
tem" (
Y page 50).
G
WARNING
If you secure achild in aforward-facingchild
restraint system on the front-passenger seat
and you position the front-passenger seat too
close to the dashboard, in the event of an
accident, the child could:
R
come intocontact with the vehicle's inte-
rior if the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indi-
cator lamp is lit, for example
R
be struck by the air bag if the PASSENGER
AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp is off
This poses an increased risk of injury or even
fatal injury.
Always move the front-passenger seat as far
back as possible and fully retract the seat
cushion length. Always make sure that the
shoulder belt strap is correctly routed from
the vehicle belt sash guide to the shoulder
belt guide on the child restraint system. The
shoulder belt strap must be routed forwards
and downwards from the vehicle belt sash
guide. If necessary, adjust the vehicle belt
sash guide and the front-passenger seat
accordingly. Always observe the child
restraint system manufacturer's installation
instructions.
If OCS determines that:
R
the front-passenger seat is unoccupied, the
PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp
lights up after the system self-test and
remains lit. This indicates that the front-
passenger frontair bag is deactivated.
R
the front-passenger seat is occupied by a
child of up to twelve months old, in astandard
child restraint system, the PASSENGER AIR
BAGOFF indicator lamp lights up after the
system self-test and remains lit. This indi-
cates that the front-passenger frontair bag is
deactivated.
But even in the case of atwelve-month-old
child, in astandard child restraint system, the
PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp can
go out after the system self-test. This indi-
cates that the front-passenger frontair bag is
activated. The result of the classification is
dependenton, among other factors, the child
restraint system and the child's stature. It is
recommended that you install the child
restraint system on asuitable rear seat.
R
the front-passenger seat is occupied by aper-
son of smaller stature (e.g. ateenager or
small adult), the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF
indicator lamp lights up and remains lit after
the system self-test dependingonthe result
of the classification or, alternatively, goes out.
-
If the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator
lamp is off, move the front-passenger seat
as far back as possible. Alternatively, aper-
son of smaller stature can sit on arear seat.
-
If the PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator
lamp is lit, aperson of smaller stature
should not use the front-passenger seat.
R
the front-passenger seat is occupied by an
adult or aperson of adult stature, the
PASSENGER AIR BAGOFF indicator lamp
goes out after the system self-test. This indi-
cates that the front-passenger frontair bag is
activated.
48
Occupant safety
Safety
If childrenare traveling in the vehicle,besure to
observe the notes on "Childreninthe vehicle"
(
Y page 53).
When the occupant classification system (OCS)
is malfunctioning, the red 6 restraint system
warning lamp in the instrument cluster and the
PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp light
up simultaneously. The front-passenger front air
bag is deactivated in this case and does not
deploy during an accident. Have the Occupant
Classification System (OCS) checked and
repaired immediately at aqualifiedspecialist
workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that
you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for this purpose.
If the front-passenger seat, the seat cover or the
seat cushionare damaged, have the necessary
repairwork carried out at aqualifiedspecialist
workshop. Mercedes-Benz recommends that
you use an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for this purpose.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you only use seat accessoriesthat
have been approved by Mercedes-Benz.
If the driver's air bag deploys, this does not
mean that the front-passenger front air bag will
also deploy. The Occupant Classification Sys-
tem (OCS) categorizes the occupant in the front-
passenger seat. Depending on that result, the
front-passenger front air bag is either enabledor
deactivated.
System self-test
G
DANGER
If both the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF and
PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lampsdo
not light up during the system self-test, the
system is malfunctioning. The front-
passenger front air bag might be triggered
unintentionally or might not be triggered at all
in the event of an accident with high deceler-
ation. This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
In this case the front-passenger seat may not
be used.Donot install achild restraint system
on the front-passenger seat. Have the Occu-
pant Classification System (OCS) checked
and repaired immediately at aqualifiedspe-
cialist workshop.
G
WARNING
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit after the system self-test, the
front-passenger front air bag is disabled.Itwill
not be deployed in the event of an accident. In
this case, the front-passenger front air bag
cannot perform its intended protective func-
tion, e.g. when aperson is seated in the front-
passenger seat.
That person could,for example,come into
contact with the vehicle's interior, especially
if the person is sitting too close to the dash-
board.This poses an increased risk of injury or
even fatal injury.
When the front-passenger seat is occupied,
always ensure that:
R
the classification of the person in the front-
passenger seat is correct and the front-
passenger front air bag is enabled or disa-
bled in accordance with the person in the
front-passenger seat
R
the person is seated properlywith acor-
rectly fastened seatbelt
R
the front-passenger seat has been moved
as far back as possible
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp remains lit when it shouldnot, the front-
passenger seat may not be used.Donot
install achild restraint system on the front-
passenger seat. Have the Occupant Classifi-
cation System (OCS) checked and repaired
immediately at aqualifiedspecialist work-
shop.
G
WARNING
Objects betweenthe seat surface and the
child restraint system could affect OCS oper-
ation. This could resultinthe front-passenger
air bag not functioning as intended during an
accident. This poses an increased risk of
injury or even fatal injury.
Do not place any objects betweenthe seat
surface and the child restraint system. The
entire base of the child restraint system must
always rest on the seat cushionofthe front-
passenger seat. The backrest of the forward-
Occupant safety
49
Safety
Z
facing child restraint system must, as far as
possible,beresting on the backrest of the
front-passenger seat. Always comply with the
child restraint system manufacturer's instal-
lation instructions.
After the system self-test, the PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF or PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator
lampdisplaysthe status of the front-passenger
front air bag (
Y page47). If the front-passenger
front air bag is enabled, the PASSENGER AIR
BAG ON indicator lamplights up for 60 seconds
and then goes out.
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lampis
off, only the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lampshowsthe status of the front-passenger
front air bag.The PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF
indicator lampmay be lit continuously or be off.
For more information about the OCS, see "Prob-
lems with the Occupant Classification System"
(
Y page50).
Problems with the Occupant ClassificationSystem (OCS)
Be sure to observe the notes on "System self-test" (Y page49).
50
Occupant safety
Safety
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp
lights up and remains lit,
even though the front-
passenger seat is occu-
pied by an adult or aper-
son of astature corre-
sponding to that of an
adult.
The classification of the person on the front-passenger seat is incor-
rect.
X
Make sure the conditionsfor acorrect classification of the person
on the front-passenger seat are met (
Y page 47).
X
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains lit, the front-
passenger seat may not be used.
X
Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
The PASSENGER AIR
BAG OFF indicator lamp
does not light up and/or
does not stay on.
The front-passenger seat
is:
R
unoccupied
R
occupied with the
weight of achild up to
twelve months old in a
child restraint system
OCS is malfunctioning.
X
Make sure there is nothingbetween the seat cushion and the child
seat.
X
Make sure that the entire base of the child restraint system rests on
the seat cushion of the front-passenger seat. The backrest of the
forward-facing child restraint system must lie as flat as possible
against the backrest of the front-passenger seat. If necessary,
adjust the position of the front-passenger seat.
X
Make sure that the seat cushion length is fully retracted.
X
When installing the child restraint system, make sure that the seat
belt is tight. Do not pull the seat belt tight using the front-passenger
seat adjustment.This could result in the seat belt and the child
restraint system being pulled too tightly.
X
Check for correct installation of the child restraint system.
Make sure that the head restraint does not apply aload to the child
restraint system. If necessary, adjust the head restraint accord-
ingly.
X
Make sure that no objectsare applying additional weight onto the
seat.
X
If the PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp remains off and/or
the PASSENGER AIR BAG ON indicator lamp lights up, do not install
achild restraint system on the front-passenger seat. It is recom-
mended that you install the child restraint system on asuitable rear
seat.
X
Have OCS checked as soon as possible at an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
Deployment of Emergency Tensioning
Devices and air bags
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
The air bag parts are hot after an air bag has
been deployed. There is arisk of injury.
Do not touch the air bag parts. Have a
deployedair bag replaced at aqualified spe-
cialist workshop as soon as possible.
G
WARNING
Adeployedair bag no longer offers any pro-
tection and cannot provide the intended pro-
tection in an accident. There is an increased
risk of injury.
Have the vehicle towed to aqualified special-
ist workshop in order to have adeployedair
bag replaced.
It is important for your safety and that of your
passenger to have deployedair bags replaced
Occupant safety
51
Safety
Z
and to have any malfunctioningair bags
repaired. This will help to makesure theair bags
continue to perform their protective function for
thevehicle occupantsinthe eventofacrash.
G
WARNING
EmergencyTensioning Devices that have
deployed pyrotechnically are no longer opera-
tional and are unabletoperform their inten-
ded protective function.This posesan
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Havepyrotechnically triggered Emergency
Tensioning Devices replaced immediately at a
qualified specialist workshop.
If EmergencyTensioning Devices are triggered
or air bags are deployed, you will hear abang,
and asmall amountofpowder may also be
released. The 6 restraint system warning
lamp lightsup.
Only in rarecases will thebang affect your hear-
ing.The powder that is released generally does
notconstituteahealthhazard, but it may cause
short-term breathingdifficulties in peoplewith
asthma or other respiratory problems.Provided
it is safe to do so, you shouldleave thevehicle
immediately or open thewindow in ordertopre-
ventbreathingdifficulties.
Air bags and pyrotechnic EmergencyTensioning
Devices (ETDs)contain perchlorate material,
whichmay require special handlingand regard
for theenvironment. National guidelines must
be observed duringdisposal. In California, see
www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/
Perchlorate/index.cfm.
Method of operation
During thefirst stage of acollision,the restraint
system control unit evaluates important physi-
cal datarelating to vehicle decelerationoraccel-
eration,suchas:
R
duration
R
direction
R
intensity
Based on theevaluation of this data, the
restraint system control unit triggersthe Emer-
gency Tensioning Devices duringafrontal or
rear collision.
An EmergencyTensioning Devicecan only be
triggered, if:
R
theignition is switched on
R
thecomponentsofthe restraint system are
operational. You can findfurther information
under: "Restraintsystem warning lamp"
(
Y page 40)
R
theseat belt buckle tongue has engaged in
thebelt buckle of therespectivefront seat
The EmergencyTensioning Devices in therear
compartmentare triggered independently of the
lockstatus of theseat belts.
If therestraint system control unit detectsa
moresevere accident, further componentsof
therestraint system are activated independ-
ently of each other in certain frontal collision
situations:
R
Frontair bags as well as driver'sand front-
passenger knee bags
R
Window curtain air bag, if thesystem deter-
mines that deploymentcan offer additional
protection to that provided by theseat belt
The front-passenger frontair bag is activated or
deactivateddependingont
he person on th
e
front-passenger seat.The front-passenger front
air bag can only deployinanaccidentifthe
PASSENGER AIRBAG OFFindicator lamp is off.
Observethe informationonthe PASSENGER AIR
BAGindicator lamps (
Y page 40).
Your vehicle has two-stagefront air bags. During
thefirst deploymentstage, thefront air bag is
filledwith propellantgas to reducethe risk of
injuries.The frontair bag is fully deployed with
themaximum amountofpropellantgas if asec-
onddeploymentthreshold is reached within a
few milliseconds.
The activation threshold of theEmergencyTen-
sioning Devices and theair bag are determined
by evaluating therateofvehicle decelerationor
accelerationwhichoccurs at various points in
thevehicle.This process is pre-emptive in
nature. Deployment shouldtakeplace in good
timeatthe start of thecollision.
The rateofvehicle decelerationoracceleration
and thedirection of theforce are essentially
determinedby:
R
thedistribution of forces duringthe collision
R
thecollision angle
R
thedeformationcharacteristics of thevehicle
R
thecharacteristics of theobject with which
thevehicle has collided
52
Occupant safety
Safety
Factors which can only be seenand measured
afteracollision has occurred do not playadeci-
sive roleinthe deployment of an airbag.Nor do
they provide an indication of airbag deploy-
ment.
The vehicle can be deformed considerably,with-
outanair bagbeing deployed. Thisisthe case if
only parts which are relativelyeasilydeformed
are affected and the rate of deceleration is not
high. Conversely,air bags may be deployed even
though the vehicle suffers only minor deforma-
tion. Thisisthe case if, for example,very rigid
vehicle parts such as longitudinalbodymem-
bersare hit, and sufficient deceleration occurs
as aresult.
If the restraint system control unitdetects aside
impact or if the vehicle rolls over,the applicable
components of the restraint system are activa-
ted independently of each other depending on
the apparent typeofaccident.
R
Side impact airbagsonthe sidewhere the
impact takes place, independently of the
Emergency Tensioning Device and the use of
the seatbeltonthe driver's seatand outer
seats in the second row
The sideimpact airbag on the front-
passenger sidedeploysunder the following
conditions:
-
the OCS system detects that the front-
passenger seatisoccupied or
-
the seatbeltbuckle tongueisengaged in
the beltbuckle of the front-passenger seat
R
Window curtain airbag on the sideofimpact,
independently of the use of the seatbeltand
ind
ependently of whether the front-
passenger seatisoccupied
R
Emergency Tensioning Devices, if the system
determinesthat deployment can offeraddi-
tionalprotection in this situation
R
Window curtain airbagsonthe driver's and
front-passenger sideincertain situations
whenthe vehicle rolls over,ifthe system
determinesthat deployment can offeraddi-
tionalprotection to that providedbythe seat
belt
i
Not allair bags are deployed in an accident.
The different airbag systems workindepend-
ently of each other.
How the airbag system works is determined
by the severity of the accident detected,
especiallythe vehicle deceleration or accel-
eration and the apparent typeofaccident:
R
Frontal collision
R
Side impact
R
Rollover
Automatic measures after an acci-
dent
Immediately afteranaccident, the following
measures are implemented,depending on the
typeand severity of the impact:
R
the hazard warning lamps are activated
R
the emergency lighting is activated
R
the vehicle doors are unlocked
R
the front sidewindowsare lowered
R
the engine is switched off and the fuelsupply
is cut off
R
vehicles with mbrace: automatic emergency
call
Children in the vehicle
Important safety notes
Accident statistics show that childrensecured
in the rearseats are safer than childrensecured
in the front-passenger seat. For this reason,
Mercedes-Benz stronglyadvisesthat youinstall
achildrestraint system on arearseat. Children
are generally better protected there.
If achildyoungerthan twelve years old and
under 5ft(1.50 m) in height is traveling in the
vehicle:
R
always securethe child in achild restraint
systemsuitablefor Mercedes-Benz vehicles.
The child restraint systemmustbeappropri-
ate to the age, weight and size of the child
R
be sure to observe the instructions and safety
notesinthissectioninadditiontothe child
restraint systemmanufacturer's installation
instructions
R
be sure to observe the instructions and safety
notesonthe "Occupant classification system
(OCS)"(
Y page 46)
Children in the vehicle
53
Safety
Z
G
WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
cle, they couldset it in motion by, for example:
R
release the parking brake.
R
shift the automatic transmission out of the
parking position P.
R
start the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicleequip-
ment and become trapped. There is arisk of
an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, alwaystake the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
G
WARNING
If persons, particularlychildren are subjected
to prolonged exposure to extreme heator
cold, there is arisk of injury,possibly even
fatal.Never leave children unattended in the
vehicle.
G
WARNING
If the child restraint system is subjected to
direct sunlight, parts may get very hot. Chil-
dren may burn themselves on these parts,
particularlyonthe metal parts of the child
restraint system. There is arisk of injury.
If you leave the vehicle, taking the child with
you,alwaysensure that the child restraint
system is not exposedtodirect sunlight. Pro-
tect it with ablanket, for example. If the child
restraint system has been exposedtodirect
sunlight, let it cool downbefore securing the
child in it. Never leave children unattended in
the vehicle.
Always ensure that all vehicleoccupants have
their seat belts fastened correctly and are sitting
properly.Particular attention must be paidto
children.
Observe the safety notes on the seat belt
(
Y page41) and the notes on correct use of seat
belts (
Y page42).
Abooster seat may be necessary to achieve
properseat beltpositioning for children over
41 lbs (18 kg)until they reach aheight where a
three-point seat beltcan be properly fastened
without abooster seat.
Special seat beltretractor
G
WARNING
If the seat beltisreleased while driving, the
child restraint system willnolonger be
securedproperly.The special seat beltretrac-
tor is disabledand the inertia real drawsina
portion of the seat belt. The seat beltcannot
be immediatelyrefastened. There is an
increased risk of injury,possibly even fatal.
Stop the vehicleimmediately, paying atten-
tion to road and traffic conditions. Reactivate
the special seat beltretractor and secure the
child restraint system properly.
All seat belts except the driver's seat beltare
equipped with aspecial seat beltretractor.
When activated, the special seat beltretractor
ensuresthat the seat beltwillnot slacken once
the child restraint system has been secured.
Installing achild restraint system:
X
Always comply with the child restraint system
manufacturer's installation instructions.
X
Pullthe seat beltsmoothly from the beltout-
let.
X
Engage the seat belttongue in the beltbuckle.
Activating the special seat beltretractor:
X
Pullthe seat beltout fullyand let the inertia
reel retract it again.
Whilethe seat beltisretracting, you should
hear aratcheting sound.The special seat belt
retractor is activated.
X
Push the child seat restraint system downso
that the seat beltistight and does not loosen.
Removing achild restraint system and deacti-
vating the special seat beltretractor:
X
Always comply with the child restraint system
manufacturer's installation instructions.
X
Press the release button of the beltbuckle,
hold the belttongue firmly and guide it back
towardsthe beltoutlet.
The special seat beltretractor is deactivated.
54
Children in the vehicle
Safety
Child restraint system
The use of seat beltsand infant and child
restraint systems is required by law in:
R
all 50 states
R
theU.S.territories
R
theDistrict of Columbia
R
all Canadian provinces
When installing arearward-facing child restraint
system on thecenterrear seat,fold therear seat
arm restback as far as it goes.
You can obtain further informationabout the
correctchild restraint system from any author-
izedMercedes-BenzCenter.
G
WARNING
If thechild restraint system is installed incor-
rectly on asuitable seat,itcannotprotect as
intended. The child cannotthenberestrained
in theevent of an accident, heavybraking or
suddenchanges of direction.Thereisan
increased riskofinjury, possibly evenfatal.
Makesure that you observethe child restraint
system manufacturer'sinstallationinstruc-
tions and thenotes on use. Pleaseensure,
that thebase of thechild restraint system is
always restingcompletely on theseat cush-
ion.Never placeobjects, e.g.cushions, under
or behindthe child restraint system. Only use
child restraint systems withthe original cover
designedfor them. Only replace damaged
covers withgenuine covers.
G
WARNING
If thechild restraint system is installed incor-
rectly or is notsecured, it can comeloosein
theevent of an accident, heavybraking or a
suddenchangeindirection.The child
restraint system couldbethrown about,strik-
ing vehicle occupants.Thereisanincreased
riskofinjury, possibly evenfatal.
Always install child restraint systems prop-
erly, eveniftheyare notbeingused. Make
sure that you observethe child restraint sys-
temmanufacturer'sinstallationinstructions.
You will findfurther informationonstowing
objects, luggageand loads securely under
"Loading guidelines" (
Y page 242).
G
WARNING
Child restraint systems or their securingsys-
tems whichhave been damaged or subjected
to aload in an accidentcan no longer protect
as intended. The child cannotthenbe
restrainedinthe event of an accident, heavy
braking or suddenchanges of direction.There
is an increased riskofinjury, possibly even
fatal.
Replacechild restraint systems whichhave
been damaged or subjected to aload in an
accidentassoon as possible. Havethe secur-
ing systems on thechild restraint system
checked at aqualified specialist workshop,
before you install achild restraint system
again.
Securingsystems for child restraint systems
include:
R
theseat belt system
R
theLATCH-type (ISOFIX) securingrings
R
Top Tether anchorage points
If it is absolutely necessary to carry achild on
thefront-passenger's seat,besure to observe
theinstructionson“OccupantClassification
System(OCS)” (
Y page 46). This includes infor-
mation on deactivatingthe front-passenger's air
bag.
All child restraint systems must meetthe fol-
lowingstandards:
R
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards
213and 225
R
Canadian Motor Vehicle SafetyStandards
213and 210.2
Astatementbythe child restraint manufacturer
of compliance withthese standards can be
foundonthe instruction label
on thechild
r
estraint system. You will also findthe state-
mentinthe instruction manual providedwiththe
child restraint system.
Observethe warning labels in thevehicle inte-
rior and on thechild restraint system.
Children in thevehicle
55
Safety
Z
LATCH-type(ISOFIX) child seat secur-
ing system
G
WARNING
LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint systems
do not offer sufficient protective effect for
children whose weight is greater than 48 lbs
(22 kg)who are secured usingthe safety belt
integrated in thechild restraint system. In the
eventofanaccident, achild mightnot be
restrained correctly. This poses an increased
risk of injury or even fatal injury.
If thechild weighs morethan48lbs (22 kg),
onlyuse LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
systems with whichthe child is also secured
with thevehicle seat belt.Alsosecure the
child restraint system with theTop Tether
belt,ifavailable.
Always comply with themanufacturer'sinstal-
lationand operatinginstructionsfor thechild
restraint system used.
Before everytrip, makesure that theLATCH-
type (ISOFIX) child restraint system is engaged
correctly in bothLATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing
rings
!
When installing thechild restraint system,
makesure that theseat belt for themiddle
seat does not get trapped. The seat belt could
otherwise be damaged.
X
Install theLATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
system on bothLATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing
rings :.
ISOFIXisastandardized securingsystem for
specially designed child restraint systems on
therear seats. LATCH-type (ISOFIX) securing
rings for two LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child restraint
systems are installedonthe left and rightofthe
rear seats.
Non-LATCH-type (ISOFIX) child seatsmay also
be used and can be installedusingthe vehicle's
seat belt system. Install thechild seat according
to themanufacturer'sinstructions.
Top Tether
Introduction
Top Tether provides an additional connection
between thechild restraint system secured with
aLATCH-type (ISOFIX) system and thevehicle.
This helps reducethe risk of injury even further.
If thechild restraint system is equipped with a
Top Tether belt,thisshould always be used.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If therear seat backrests are not locked, they
could fold forwards in theeventofanacci-
dent, heavy braking or sudden changes of
direction. As aresult, child restraint systems
cannot perform their intended protective
function.Rear seat backrests that are not
locked can also cause additional injuries,e.g.
in theeventofanaccident. This poses an
increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
Always lock rear seat backrests after instal-
ling aTop Tether belt.Observe thelockveri-
ficationindicator. Adjust therear seat backr-
estssothattheyare in an uprightposition.
If therear backrestisnot engaged and locked,
thered lock verificationindicator will be visible
(
Y page 245).
56
Children in thevehicle
Safety
Top Tether anchorages
The TopTetheranchoragesare locatedonthe
rearsideofthe rearseatbackrests.
Vehicleswithadjustableheadrestraints:
X
Moveheadrestraint : upwards.
X
Route TopTetherbelt ? under head
restraint : between the two head restraint
bars.
Vehicleswithout adjustableheadrestraints:
X
Top Tether belt with onebeltstrap: route
TopTetherbelt ? centrallyoverhead
restraint :.
or
X
Top Tether belt with two belt straps: route
one TopTetherbelt ? to the left and one to
the right past the side of head restraint :.
Allvehicles:
X
Install the LATCH-type (ISOFIX)child restraint
system with TopTether. Alwayscomply with
the child restraint system manufacturer's
installationinstructions when doing so.
X
HookTop Tetherhook = of TopTether
belt ? into TopTetheranchorage ;.
Make sure that:
R
TopTetherhook = is hooked into Top
Tetheranchorage ; as shown.
R
TopTetherbelt ? is not twisted.
R
TopTetherbelt ? is routed between the
rearseatbackrestand the cargo compart-
ment coverifthe cargo compartment cover
is installed.
X
Tension TopTetherbelt ?.Alwayscomply
with the child restraint system manufactur-
e
r'sinstallationinstructions when doing so.
Vehicleswithadjustableheadrestraints:
X
Moveheadrestraint : back down again
slightlyifnecessary (
Y page 93). Make sure
thatyou do not interfere with the correct rout-
ing of TopTetherbelt ?.
Childrestraintsystem on the front-
passengerseat
General notes
Accident statistics showthatchildren secured
in the rearseats aresafer thanchildren secured
in the front-passengerseat. For thisreason,
Mercedes-Benz stronglyadvises thatyou install
the child restraint system on arearseat.
If it is absolutely necessary to installachild
restraint system on the front-passengerseat,
always observe the instructions and safety
notesonthe "Occupant Classification System
(OCS)"(
Y page 46).
Youcan thusavoid the risks thatcould ariseas
aresultof:
R
an incorrectly categorizedpersoninthe front-
passengerseat
R
the unintentionaldeactivationofthe front-
passengerfront airbag
R
the unsuitable positioning of the child
restraint system,e.g.too close to the dash-
board
Rearward-facingchild restraintsystem
If it is absolutely necessary to installarearward-
facing child restraint system on the front-
passengerseat, always make sure thatthe
front-passengerfront airbag is deactivated.
Onlyifthe PASSENGER AIR BAG OFF indicator
lamp is permanentlylit (
Y page 40)isthe front-
passenger front air bag deactivated.
Children in the vehicle
57
Safety
Z
Alwaysobserve the child restraint system man-
ufacturer's installationand operating instruc-
tions.
Forward-facingchild restraintsystem
If it is absolutely necessary to installaforward-
facing child restraint system on the front-
passengerseat, always move the front-
passengerseatasfar back as possible. Fully
retract the seatcushion length. The entire base
of the child restraint system must always reston
the seatcushion of the front-passenger seat.
The backrestofthe child restraint system must
lieasflataspossibleagainst the backrestofthe
front-passenger seat. The child restraint system
must not touch the rooforbesubjected to aload
by the headrestraint. Adjust the angle of the
seatbackrestand the headrestraint position
accordingly. Alwaysmakesurethatthe shoul-
derbeltstrapiscorrectlyrouted from the vehi-
cle belt outlettothe shoulderbeltguide on the
child restraint system.The shoulderbeltstrap
must be routed forwards and downwards from
the vehiclebeltoutlet. If necessary,adjustthe
vehiclebeltoutletand the front-passenger seat
accordingly.
Alwaysobserve the child restraint system man-
ufacturer's installationand operating instruc-
tions.
Child-proof locks
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If children aretraveling in the vehicle, they
could:
R
open doors,thusendangering otherpeople
or roadusers
R
exitthe vehicleand be caught by oncoming
traffic
R
operate vehicleequipment and become
trapped
There is ariskofanaccident and injury.
Alwaysactivate the child-proof locks and
override feature if children aretraveling in the
vehicle. Whenleaving the vehicle, always take
the key with youand lock the vehicle. Never
leavechildren unattended in the vehicle.
Override feature for:
R
the reardoors (Y page 59)
R
the rearsidewindows (Y page 59)
G
WARNING
If youleave children unsupervised in the vehi-
cle,they could set it in motion by,for example:
R
release the parking brake.
R
shift the automatic transmission outofthe
parking position P.
R
start the engine.
In addition, they mayoperate vehicleequip-
ment and become trapped. There is ariskof
an accident and injury.
Whenleaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKeywithyou and lock the vehicle. Never
leavechildren unsupervised in the vehicle.
G
WARNING
If persons, particularly children aresubjected
to prolongedexposure to extreme heator
cold, thereisariskofinjury,possiblyeven
fatal. Never leavechildren unattended in the
vehicle.
G
WARNING
If the child restraint system is subjected to
direct sunlight, parts mayget veryhot. Chil-
drenmay burn themselves on theseparts,
particularly on the metalparts of the child
restraint system.There is ariskofinjury.
If youleave the vehicle, taking the child with
you, always ensure thatthe child restraint
system is not exposedtodirect sunlight. Pro-
tect it with ablanket, for example. If the child
restraint system hasbeenexposedtodirect
sunlight, letitcooldownbefore securing the
child in it. Never leavechildren unattended in
the vehicle.
58
Children in the vehicle
Safety
Child-proof locks for thereardoors
You secure each door individually withthe child-
proof locks on therear doors. Adoor secured
withachild-proof lockcannotbeopened from
inside thevehicle.When thevehicle is unlocked,
thedoor can be opened from theoutside.
X
To activate: pressthe child-proof locklever
up in thedirection of arrow :.
X
Makesure that thechild-proof locks are work-
ing properly.
X
To deactivate: pressthe child-proof lock
leverdown in thedirection of arrow ;.
Overridefeature for therearsidewin-
dows
X
To activate/deactivate: pressbutton :.
If indicator lamp ; is lit,operationofthe rear
side windows is disabled. Operationisonly
possible usingthe switches in thedriver's
door.Ifindicator lamp ; is off,operationis
possible usingthe switches in therear com-
partment.
Petsinthe vehicle
G
WARNING
If you leave animals unattendedorunsecured
in thevehicle,theycouldpressbuttons or
switches, for example.
As aresult, they could:
R
activatevehicle equipmentand become
trapped, for example
R
activateordeactivate systems,thereby
endangering other road users
Unsecured animals couldalso be flungaround
thevehicle in theevent of an accidentorsud-
den steering or braking,thereby injuringvehi-
cle occupants.Thereisariskofanaccident
and injury.
Never leave animals unattendedinthe vehi-
cle.Always secure animals properlyduring
thejourney, e.g.use asuitable animal trans-
portbox.
Driving safety systems
Overview of driving safety systems
In this section, you will findinformationabout
thefollowingdriving safety systems:
R
ABS(Anti-lock Braking System)
(
Y page 60)
R
BAS(Brake Assist System) (Y page 60)
R
ActiveBrake Assist (Y page 61)
R
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program)
(
Y page 63)
R
EBD(Electronic Brake force Distribution)
(
Y page 66)
R
ADAPTIVEBRAKE (Y page 67)
R
STEERCONTROL (Y page 67)
Important safety notes
If you fail to adapt your driving style or if you are
inattentive, thedriving safety systems can nei-
ther reducethe riskofanaccidentnor override
thelaws of physics.Drivingsafety systems are
merely aids designedtoassistdriving.You are
responsible for maintaining thedistancetothe
Driving safety systems
59
Safety
Z
vehicleinfront, for vehiclespeed, for braking in
good time, and for staying in lane. Always adapt
yourdriving style to suitthe prevailing road and
weather conditions and maintainasafe distance
from the vehicleinfront. Drive carefully.
The driving safety systems described only work
as effectivelyaspossible when there is ade-
quate contact between the tires and the road
surface. Please pay specialattention to the
notes on tires, recommendedminimumtire
tread depths, etc. (
Y page293).
In wintry driving conditions, alwaysuse winter
tires (M+S tires) and if necessary,snow chains.
Only in this way willthe driving safety systems
described in this section work as effectivelyas
possible.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System)
General information
ABS regulates brake pressure in such away that
the wheels do not lock when you brake. This
allows you to continue steering the vehiclewhen
braking.
The ! ABS warning lamp in the instrument
cluster lights up when the ignitionisswitched
on. It goes out when the engine is running.
ABS works from aspeedofabout 5mph
(8 km/h),regardlessofroad-surface conditions.
ABS works on slippery surfaces, even when you
only brake gently.
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (
Y page59).
G
WARNING
If ABS is faulty, the wheels could lock when
braking. The steerability and braking charac-
teristics may be severelyimpaired. Addition-
ally, further driving safety systems are deac-
tivated. There is an increaseddangerofskid-
ding and accidents.
Drive on carefully.Have ABS checked imme-
diately at aqualified specialist workshop.
When ABS is malfunctioning, other systems,
including driving safety systems,willalso
become inoperative. Observe the information
on the ABS warning lamp (
Y page227) and dis-
playmessages which may be showninthe
instrument cluster (Y page198).
Braking
X
If ABS intervenes: continue to depress the
brake pedalvigorouslyuntil the braking sit-
uation is over.
X
To make afull brake application: depress
the brake pedalwith full force.
If ABS intervenes when braking, you willfeel a
pulsing in the brake pedal.
The pulsating brake pedalcan be an indication
of hazardous road conditions, and functions as a
remindertotake extra care while driving.
Off-road ABS
An ABS system specificallysuited to off-road
terrain is activated automatically once the off-
road programisactivated (
Y page167).
At speeds below20mph (30 km/h),the front
wheels lock cyclicallyduring braking. The dig-
ging-in effect achieved in the process reduces
the stopping distance on off-road terrain. This
limits steering capability.
BAS (Brake Assist System)
General information
BAS operates in emergency braking situations.
If you depress the brake pedalquickly, BAS
automatically boosts the braking force, thus
shortening the stopping distance.
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (
Y page59).
G
WARNING
If BAS is malfunctioning, the braking distance
in an emergency braking situation is
increased. There is arisk of an accident.
In an emergency braking situation, depress
the brake pedalwith full force. ABS prevents
the wheels from locking.
60
Driving safety systems
Safety
Braking
X
Keepthe brake pedalfirmly depresseduntil
the emergency braking situationisover.
ABS prevents the wheels from locking.
The brakes will functionasusual once you
release the brake pedal. BAS is deactivated.
Active Brake Assist
General information
i
Observethe "Important safety notes"sec-
tion(
Y page 59).
Active Brake Assist consists of adistance warn-
ing functionwithanautonomousbraking func-
tionand braking assistance appropriate to the
situation.
Active Brake Assist can helpyou to minimize the
riskofacollision with the vehicletraveling in
front or reduce the effects of such acollision.
If Active Brake Assist detects thatthereisarisk
of collision, youwillbewarned visuallyand
acoustically. If youdonot react to the visualand
audiblecollision warning,autonomousbraking
can be initiated in critical situations. If youapply
the brake yourselfinacritical situation, Adap-
tive Brake Assist supports youwithbraking
assistance appropriate to the situation.
Important safety notes
Detectionofhazardoussituations can be par-
ticularly impaired by:
R
thereisdirtonthe sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
R
thereissnow or heavy rain
R
thereisinterference by otherradar sources
R
thereare strong radar reflections, for exam-
pleinparking garages
R
anarrow vehicleistraveling in front, e.g.a
motorbike
R
avehicleistraveling in front on adifferent line
R
new vehicles or afterservicing is carriedout
on the Active Brake Assist system
Observethe important safety notes in the
"Breaking-in notes"section (
Y page 123).
Following damage to the front end of the vehicle,
have the configuration and operationofthe
radar sensor checked at aqualified specialist
workshop.Thisalsoapplies to collisions at low
speedswhere no visible damage to the front of
the vehicleisapparent.
Activating/deactivating
Active Brake Assist is active afterevery ignition
cycle.
Youcan activate or deactivate Active Brake
Assist (
Y page 192)inthe on-board computer.
Whendeactivated, the distance warning func-
tionand the autonomousbraking functionare
also deactivated.
If Active Brake Assist is deactivated, the æ
symbolappears in the assistance graphicdis-
play.
If youhaveactivatedDSR, Active Brake Assist is
deactivated. For further informationonDSR,
see (
Y page 166).
Distance warning function
General information
The distance warning functioncan helpyou to
minimize the riskofafront-end collision with a
vehicleahead or reduce the effects of such a
collision. If the distance warning function
detects thatthereisariskofacollision, youwill
be warned visuallyand acoustically.
Important safety notes
i
Observethe "Important safety notes"sec-
tionfor driving safety systems(
Y page 59).
G
WARNING
The distance warning functiondoesnot react:
R
to people or animals
R
to oncoming vehicles
R
to crossing traffic
R
when cornering
Thus, the distance warning functioncannot
provideawarning in allcritical situations.
There is ariskofanaccident.
Alwayspay carefulattentiontothe traffic sit-
uationand be ready to brake.
G
WARNING
The distance warning functioncannotalways
clearlyidentify objects and complextraffic
situations.
Driving safety systems
61
Safety
Z
In such cases, the distance warning function
may:
R
give an unnecessary warning
R
not give awarning
There is arisk of an accident.
Alwayspay careful attention to the traffic sit-
uationand do not rely solelyonthe distance
warning function.
Function
Starting at aspeed of approximately 4mph
(7 km/h), the distance warning function warns
you if you rapidly approach avehicle in front. An
intermittent warning tone willthen sound, and
the · distance warning lamp willlight up in
the instrument cluster.
X
Brake immediately in order to increase the
distance from the vehicle in front.
or
X
Take evasive action, provideditissafe to do
so.
Due to the nature of the system, particularly
complicated but non-critical driving conditions
may also cause the system to display awarning.
With the help of the radarsensor system, the
distance warning function can detect obstacles
that are in the path of yourvehicle for an exten-
ded period of time.
Up to aspeed of approximately 44 mph
(70 km/h), the distance warning function can
also react to stationary obstacles,such as stop-
ped or parked vehicles.
Autonomous braking function
If the driver does not react to the distance warn-
ing signal in acritical situation, Active Brake
Assist can assist the driver with the autonomous
braking function.
The autonomousbraking function:
R
gives the driver more time to react to critical
driving situations
R
can help the driver to avoid an accident or
R
reduces the effects of an accident
Vehicles without Distance PilotDISTRONIC:
the autonomousbraking function is available in
the following speed ranges:
R
4-65mph (7 -105 km/h)for moving objects
R
4-31mph (7 -50km/h)for stationary
objects
Vehicles with Distance PilotDISTRONIC: the
autonomousbraking function is available in the
following speed ranges:
R
4-124 mph (7 -200 km/h)for moving
objects
R
4-31mph (7 -50km/h)for stationary
objects
Due to the nature of the system, particularly
complicated but non-critical driving conditions
may also cause the Autonomous Braking Func-
tion to intervene.
Braking assistanceappropriate to the
situation
General information
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion (
Y page 59).
With the help of the radarsensor system, Adap-
tive Brake Assist can detect obstaclesthat are in
the path of yourvehicle for an extended period
of time.
If Adaptive Brake Assist detects arisk of colli-
sion with the vehicle in front, it calculates the
brake pressure necessary to avoid acollision. If
you applythe brakes forcefully, the braking
assistance adapts to the situation and automat-
icallyincreases the brake pressure to adegree
appropriate to the traffic situation.
Braking assistance appropriate to the situation
providesbraking assistance in hazardous situa-
tions at speedsabove 4mph (7 km/h). It uses
radarsensor technology to assess the traffic
situation.
Situation-dependent braking assistance is capa-
ble of reacting to moving objects that have
already been recognized as such at least once
over the period of observation, up to vehicle
speedsofaround 155 mph (250 km/h).
Braking assistance appropriate to the situation
can also detect stationary objects, up to vehicle
speedsofaround 44 mph 70 km/h.
X
Keep the brake pedaldepressed until the
emergency braking situation is over.
ABS prevents the wheelsfrom locking.
62
Driving safety systems
Safety
The brakes will work normally again if:
R
you release the brake pedal.
R
there is no longer any danger of acollision.
R
no obstacle is detected in front of your vehi-
cle.
Brakingassistance appropriate to the situation
is then deactivated.
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Importantsafety notes" sec-
tion for driving safety systems (
Y page 59).
G
WARNING
Adaptive Brake Assist does not react:
R
to people or animals
R
to oncoming vehicles
R
to crossingtraffic
R
when cornering
As aresult, Adaptive Brake Assist may not
intervene in all critical conditions. There is a
risk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
uation and be ready to brake.
G
WARNING
Adaptive Brake Assist cannot alwaysclearly
identify objectsand complex traffic situa-
tions.
In such cases, Adaptive Brake Assist might:
R
intervene unnecessarily
R
not intervene
There is arisk of an accident.
Always pay careful attention to the traffic sit-
uation and be ready to brake. Terminate the
intervention in anon-critical driving situation.
Due to the nature of the system, complex but
non-critical driving conditions may also cause
Active Brake Assist to intervene.
Even if Active Brake Assist is not available due to
amalfunction in the radar sensor system, the
brake system is still availablewith full brake
boosting effect and BAS.
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program)
General notes
i
Observe the "Importantsafety notes" sec-
tion (
Y page 59).
ESP
®
monitors driving stability and traction, i.e.
power transmission between the tires and the
road surface.
If ESP
®
detectsthat the vehicle is deviating from
the direction desired by the driver, one or more
wheels are braked to stabilize the vehicle. The
engine output is also modified to keep the vehi-
cle on the desired course within physical limits.
ESP
®
assists the driver when pulling away on
wet or slippery roads. ESP
®
can also stabilize
the vehicle during braking.
ETS/4ETS (Electronic Traction System)
i
Observe the "Importantsafety notes" sec-
tion (
Y page 59).
ETS traction control is part of ESP
®
.Onvehicles
with 4MATIC, 4ETS is part of ESP
®
.
Traction control brakes the drive wheels indi-
vidually if they spin. This enables you to pull
away and accelerate on slippery surfaces, for
example if the road surface is slippery on one
side. In addition, more drive torque is transfer-
red to the wheel or wheels with traction.
Traction control remains active, even if you
deactivate ESP
®
.
Offroad4ETS (Electronic Traction Sys-
tem)
A4ETS system specifically suited to off-road
terrain is activated automatically once the off-
road program is activated (
Y page 167).
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Importantsafety notes" sec-
tion (
Y page 59).
G
WARNING
If ESP
®
is malfunctioning, ESP
®
is unable to
stabilize the vehicle. Additionally, further driv-
ing safety systems are deactivated. This
increases the risk of skidding and an accident.
Driving safety systems
63
Safety
Z
Driveoncarefully. HaveESP
®
checked at a
qualified specialistworkshop.
Vehicleswithout 4MATIC: when towing your
vehiclewiththe front axleraised, it is important
thatyou observe the notesonESP
®
(Y page 289).
If the å ESP
®
OFF warning lamp lights up
continuously,ESP
®
is deactivated.
If the ÷ ESP
®
warning lamp and the å
warning lamp arelit continuously,ESP
®
is not
availabledue to amalfunction.
Observe the informationonwarning lamps
(
Y page 228)and displaymessageswhich may
be shown in the instrument cluster
(
Y page 198).
Onlyuse wheels with the recommendedtire
sizes. OnlythenwillESP
®
functionproperly.
Characteristics of ESP
®
General information
If the ÷ ESP
®
warning lamp goes outbefore
beginning the journey,ESP
®
is automatically
active.
If ESP
®
intervenes,the ÷ ESP
®
warning lamp
flashesinthe instrument cluster.
If ESP
®
intervenes:
X
Do not deactivate ESP
®
under any circum-
stances.
X
Onlydepress the accelerator pedalasfar as
necessary when pulling away.
X
Adapt your drivingstyle to suit the prevailing
roadand weather conditions.
ECOstart/stopfunction
The ECO start/stopfunctionswitches the
engine off automaticallywhenthe vehiclestops
moving.The engine starts automaticallywhen
the driver wants to pull away again. ESP
®
remains in its previously selectedstatus. Exam-
ple: if ESP
®
wasdeactivated beforethe engine
wasswitched off,ESP
®
remains deactivated
when the engine is switched on again.
Deactivating/activatingESP
®
(except
MercedesAMGvehicles)
Important safety notes
i
Observe the "Important safety notes" sec-
tion(
Y page 59).
Youcan select between the following states of
ESP
®
:
R
ESP
®
is activated.
R
ESP
®
is deactivated.
G
WARNING
If youdeactivate ESP
®
,ESP
®
no longersta-
bilizes the vehicle. There is an increased risk
of skidding and an accident.
Onlydeactivate ESP
®
in the situations descri-
bedinthe following.
The spinning of the wheels results in acutting
action for better tractiononloose surfaces.
It maybebesttodeactivate ESP
®
in the follow-
ing situations:
R
when using snow chains
R
in deep snow
R
on sand or gravel
i
Activate ESP
®
as soonasthe situations
describedabove no longerapply.ESP
®
will
otherwisenot be able to stabilize the vehicleif
the vehiclestarts to skidorawheel starts to
spin.
!
Avoidspinning the driven wheels for an
extendedperiodwithESP
®
deactivated.You
could otherwisedamagethe drivetrain.
Deactivating/activatingESP
®
Youcan deactivate or activate ESP
®
via the on-
boardcomputer(
Y page 191).
ESP
®
deactivated:
The å ESP
®
OFF warning lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up.
ESP
®
activated:
The å ESP
®
OFF warning lamp in the instru-
ment cluster goes out.
64
Driving safetysystems
Safety
Characteristics when ESP
®
is deactivated
If ESP
®
is deactivatedand oneormorewheels
start to spin,the ÷ ESP
®
warning lamp in the
instrumentclusterflashes. In suchsituations,
ESP
®
will notstabilizethe vehicle.
If you deactivate ESP
®
:
R
ESP
®
no longer improvesdriving stability.
R
Enginetorque is no longer limited and the
drivewheels are able to spin.
R
Tractioncontrol is still activated.
R
STEER CONTROL is no longer active
R
ESP
®
still provides support when you brake
firmly.
Deactivating/activatingESP
®
(MercedesAMGvehicles)
Important safety notes
i
Observethe "Important safety notes" sec-
tion(
Y page 59).
You can selectbetween thefollowingstatesof
ESP
®
:
R
ESP
®
is activated.
R
SPORT handlingmode is activated.
R
ESP
®
is deactivated.
G
WARNING
When SPORT handlingmode is activated,
there is agreaterrisk of skiddingand acci-
dents.
Only activateSPORT handlingmode in thesit-
uations describedinthe following.
G
WARNING
If you deactivate ESP
®
,ESP
®
no longer sta-
bilizes thevehicle.Thereisanincreased risk
of skiddingand an accident.
Only deactivate ESP
®
in thesituations descri-
bed in thefollowing.
In thefollowingsituations,itmay be betterto
activateSPORT handlingmode or deactivate
ESP
®
:
R
when usingsnowchains
R
in deep snow
R
on sandorgravel
R
on specially designated roads when thevehi-
cle's own oversteering and understeering
characteristics are desired
DrivinginSPORT handlingmode or without
ESP
®
requires an extremely qualified and expe-
rienced driver.
i
Activate ESP
®
as soon as thesituations
describedabovenolonger apply. ESP
®
will
otherwise notbeable to stabilizethe vehicle if
thevehicle startstoskidorawheel startsto
spin.
!
Avoid spinningthe driven wheels for an
extended period with ESP
®
deactivated. You
couldotherwise damage thedrivetrain.
Deactivating/activatingESP
®
X
To activate SPORThandling mode: briefly
pressbutton :.
The M SPORT handlingmode warning
lamp in theinstrumentclusterlightsup. The
SPORT handling mode
message appearsin
themultifunction display.
X
To deactivateSPORThandling mode:
briefly pressbutton :.
The M SPORT handlingmode warning
lamp in theinstrumentclustergoes out.
X
To deactivateESP
®
: pressbutton : until
the å ESP
®
OFFwarning lamp lightsupin
theinstrumentcluster.
The ÷ OFF
message appearsinthe multi-
function display.
X
To activate ESP
®
: briefly pressbutton :.
The å ESP
®
OFFwarning lamp in the
instrumentclustergoes out.The ÷ ESP
®
ON message appearsinthe multifunction dis-
play.
Driving safety systems
65
Safety
Z
Characteristics of activated SPORThan-
dlingmode
If SPORT handlingmode is activated and oneor
morewheels start to spin,the ÷ ESP
®
warn-
ing lamp in theinstrumentclusterflashes. ESP
®
only stabilizes thevehicle to alimited degree.
When SPORT handlingmode is activated:
R
ESP
®
only improvesdriving stabilitytoalimi-
teddegree.
R
Tractioncontrol is still activated.
R
The engine's torque is only restricted to a
limited degree and thedrivewheels may start
to spin.
The spinningofthe wheels results in acutting
action for bettertraction on loosesurfaces.
R
ESP
®
still provides support when you brake
firmly.
Characteristics when ESP
®
is deactivated
If ESP
®
is deactivatedand oneormorewheels
start to spin,the ÷ ESP
®
warning lamp in the
instrumentclusterdoes notflash.Insuchsitua-
tions,ESP
®
will notstabilizethe vehicle.
If you deactivate ESP
®
:
R
ESP
®
no longer improvesdriving stability.
R
Enginetorque is no longer limited and the
drivewheels are able to spin.
The spinningofthe wheels results in acutting
action for bettertraction on loosesurfaces.
R
Tractioncontrol is still activated.
R
ActiveBrake Assist is no longer available; nor
is it activated if you brakefirmly with assis-
tance from
ESP
®
R
ESP
®
still provides support when you brake
firmly.
Off-road ESP
®
An ESP
®
system specifically suited to off-road
terrain is activated automatically once theoff-
road program is activated (
Y page 167).
Offroad ESP
®
interveneswith adelay if there is
oversteering or understeering,thusimproving
traction.
ESP
®
trailer stabilization
General information
If your vehicle/trailer combinationbeginsto
swerve, ESP
®
assists you in this situation. ESP
®
slows thevehicle down by braking and limiting
theengine output until thevehicle/trailer com-
binationhas stabilized.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If road and weather conditionsare poor,
trailer stabilizationwill notbeable to prevent
thevehicle/trailer combinationfromswerv-
ing.Trailers with ahigh centerofgravity can
tip overbefore ESP
®
can detect this. Thereis
arisk of an accident.
Always adapt your driving style to theprevail-
ing road and weather conditions.
If your vehicle with trailer (vehicle/trailer com-
bination) beginstolurch, you can only stabilize
thevehicle/trailer combinationbydepressing
thebrakefirmly.
ESP
®
trailer stabilizationisactive abovespeeds
of about 65 km/h.
ESP
®
trailer stabilizationdoes notwork if ESP
®
is deactivatedordisabledbecause of amalfunc-
tion.
EBD (electronic brakeforce distribu-
tion)
General information
EBDmonitors and controls thebrakepressure
on therear wheels to improve driving stability
while braking.
Important safety notes
i
Observethe "Important safety notes" sec-
tion(
Y page 59).
G
WARNING
If EBDismalfunctioning, therear wheels can
lock, e.g.underfull braking.This increases the
risk of skiddingand an accident.
66
Driving safety systems
Safety
You should therefore adapt your drivingstyle
to the differenthandlingcharacteristics. Have
the brakesystemchecked at aqualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Observe information regarding indicator and
warninglamps (
Y page 227)aswell as display
messages (
Y page 200).
ADAPTIVE BRAKE
ADAPTIVE BRAKE enhances braking safetyand
offers increased braking comfort.Inaddition to
the braking function,ADAPTIVE BRAKE also has
the HOLDfunction (
Y page 162) and hill start
assist (
Y page 127).
STEER CONTROL
Generalinformation
STEER CONTROL helps you by transmitting a
noticeable steeringforcetothe steeringwheel
in the direction required for vehicle stabilization.
This steeringassistanceisprovided in particular
if:
R
both right wheels or both left wheels are on a
wet or slippery road surfacewhen you brake
R
the vehicle begins to skid
Important safetynotes
i
Observe the "Importantsafetynotes" sec-
tion (
Y page 59).
No steeringassistanceisprovided from STEER
CONTROL, if:
R
ESP
®
is malfunctioning
R
the steeringismalfunctioning
If ESP
®
is malfunctioning, you will be assisted
further by the electrical power steering.
Protection against theft
Immobilizer
The immobilizer preventsyour vehicle from
being started without the correctSmartKey.
X
To activatewith theSmartKey: remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X
To activatewith KEYLESS-GO start-func-
tion or KEYLESS-GO: switchthe ignition off
and open the driver's door.
X
To deactivate: switchonthe ignition.
When leaving the vehicle, always takethe
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Anyone
can startthe engineifavalid SmartKey has been
left inside the vehicle.
i
The immobilizer is always deactivatedwhen
you startthe engine.
In the eventthat the enginecannot be started
(yet the vehicle's battery is charged), the sys-
tem is not operational. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-BenzCenter or call
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)or
1-800-387-0100(in Canada).
ATA (anti-theft alarmsystem)
X
To arm: lock the vehicle with the SmartKeyor
KEYLESS-GO.
Indicator lamp : flashes. The alarm system
is armed after approximately 15 seconds.
X
To disarm: unlock the vehicle with the Smart-
Key or KEYLESS-GO.
or
X
Insert the SmartKeyintothe ignition lock.
Avisual and audible alarm is triggered if the
alarm system is armed and you open:
R
adoor
R
the vehicle with the mechanical key
R
the tailgate
R
the hood
Protection against theft
67
Safety
Z
X
To switchthe alarm off with the Smart-
Key: press the % or & button on the
SmartKey.
The alarm is stopped.
or
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function
or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop but-
ton from the ignition lock (
Y page 124).
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock.
The alarm is stopped.
X
To stopthe alarm using KEYLESS-GO:
grasp the outsidedoorhandle. The SmartKey
must be outsidethe vehicle.
The alarm is stopped.
or
X
Press the Start/Stop button on the dash-
board.The SmartKey must be insidethe vehi-
cle.
The alarm is stopped.
The alarm is not switched off, evenifyou close
the open door thattriggered it, for example.
i
If the alarm continuesfor more than
30 seconds,the mbrace emergency callsys-
tem automaticallynotifiesthe Customer
Assistance Center. Thisisdoneeither by text
message or data connection.
The emergency callsystem sendsthe mes-
sage or data provided that:
R
youhavesubscribed to the mbrace service.
R
the mbrace service hasbeenactivated
properly.
R
the necessary mobilephone network is
available.
68
Protectionagainsttheft
Safety
SmartKey
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
R
open the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
R
get out and disrupt traffic.
R
operate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
R
release the parking brake.
R
shifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P
R
Start the engine.
There is arisk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
G
WARNING
If you attach heavy or large objectstothe
SmartKey, the SmartKey could be uninten-
tionally turned in the ignition lock. This could
cause the engine to be switched off. There is a
risk of an accident.
Do not attach any heavy or large objectstothe
SmartKey. Remove any bulky key rings before
insertingthe SmartKey into the ignition lock.
!
Keep the SmartKey away from strongmag-
netic fields. Otherwise, the remote control
function could be affected.
Strong magnetic fields can occur in the vicin-
ity of powerful electrical installations.
Do not keep the SmartKey:
R
with electronic devices, e.g. amobile phone
or another SmartKey.
R
with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil.
R
inside metallic objects, e.g. ametal case
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO startfunction: do
not keep the SmartKey in the cargo compart-
ment.Otherwise, the SmartKey may not be
detected, e.g. when startingthe engine using
the Start/Stop button.
SmartKey functions
:
& To lock the vehicle
;
F To open the tailgate
=
% To unlock the vehicle
X
To unlock centrally: press the % button.
If you do not open the vehicle within approx-
imately 40 seconds of unlocking:
R
the vehicle is locked again.
R
anti-theft protection is reactivated.
X
To lock: press the & button.
The SmartKey centrally locks/unlocks:
R
the doors
R
the tailgate
R
the fuel filler flap
The turn signals flash once when unlocking and
three times when locking.
When the locator lighting is activated via the
multimedia system, it lights up when it is dark
after the vehicle is unlocked with the remote
control (see the separate operating instruc-
tions).
You can also set an audible signal to confirm
that the vehicle has been locked. The audible
signal can be activated and deactivated using
the on-board computer (
Y page 194).
X
To open the tailgate automatically from
outside the vehicle: press and hold the F
button until the tailgate opens (
Y page 79).
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO
startfunction:
X
To close the tailgate automatically from
outside the vehicle: if the SmartKey is loca-
SmartKey
69
Opening and closing
Z
ted in the immediate vicinity of the vehicle,
press the F button on the SmartKey
(
Y page 79).
When the tailgate closesyou can thenrelease
the button.
KEYLESS-GO
General notes
Bearinmindthatthe engine can be started by
any of the vehicleoccupants if there is aSmart-
Key in the vehicle.
Lockingand unlocking
Youcan start, lock or unlock the vehicleusing
KEYLESS-GO. To do this, youonlyneedcarry the
SmartKeywithyou.You can combine the func-
tions of KEYLESS-GOwiththoseofaconven-
tional SmartKey. Unlock the vehiclebyusing
KEYLESS-GO, for instance,and lock it using the
& button on the SmartKey.
The driver's door and the door at which the han-
dleisused, must both be closed. The SmartKey
must be outside the vehicle. When locking or
unlocking with KEYLESS-GO, the distance
between the SmartKeyand the corresponding
door handlemustnot be greaterthan3ft(1m).
Acheck which periodically establishesaradio
connectionbetween the vehicleand the Smart-
Key determineswhether avalid SmartKeyisin
the vehicle. Thisoccurs, for example:
R
when startingthe engine
R
whiledriving
R
when the externaldoorhandles aretouched
R
duringconvenience closing
X
To unlockthe vehicle: touch the innersur-
face of the door handle.
X
To lock the vehicle: touch sensorsurface :
or ;.
Make sure thatyou do not touch the inner
surface of the door handle.
X
Convenienceclosing feature: touch
recessedsensorsurface ; for an extended
period.
Furtherinformation on the convenience clos-
ing feature(
Y page 83).
X
To unlockthe tailgate: pull tailgate han-
dle :.
Deactivatingand activating
If youdonot intend to usethe vehiclefor alon-
gerperiodoftime, youcan deactivate KEYLESS-
GO.The SmartKey willthenuse verylittle power,
therebyconserving battery power. For the pur-
posesofactivation/deactivation, the vehicle
must not be nearby.
X
To deactivate: press the & button on the
SmartKeytwice in rapidsuccession.
Thebattery check lamp of the SmartKey
flashestwice brieflyand lights up once,then
KEYLESS-GOisdeactivated (
Y page 72).
X
To activate: press any button on the Smart-
Key.
or
X
Insert the SmartKeyinto the ignition lock.
KEYLESS-GOand allofits associated features
areavailable again.
70
SmartKey
Opening and closing
KEYLESS-GO startfunction
Generalnotes
Bear in mindthatthe enginecan be started by
any of thevehicleoccupantsifthere is aSmart-
Key in thevehicle.
Changing thesettings of thelocking
system
You can changethe settingsofthe locking sys-
tem. This meansthatonlythe driver's door and
thefuel filler flap are unlockedwhen thevehicle
is unlocked. This is useful if you frequentlytravel
on your own.
X
To change thesetting: press and hold the
% and & buttons simultaneouslyfor
approximately six seconds until thebattery
indicator lamp flashes twice (
Y page 72).
If thesetting of thelocking system is changed
within thesignal range of thevehicle, pressing
the & or % button:
R
locks or
R
unlocks thevehicle
The SmartKey nowfunctionsasfollows:
X
To unlock: press the % buttononce.
X
To unlock centrally: press the % button
twice.
X
To lock centrally: press the & button.
The KEYLESS-GO function is changed as fol-
lows:
X
To unlock thedriver's door: touch theinner
surfaceofthe door handle on thedriver's
door.
X
To unlock centrally: touch theinner surface
of thedoor handle on thefront-passenger
door or therear door.
X
To lock centrally: touch theouter sensor
surfaceonone of thedoor handles.
X
To restorethe factory settings: press and
hold the % and & buttons simultane-
ouslyfor appr
oximately six seconds until the
b
attery checklamp flashes twice
(
Y page 72).
Mechanical key
Generalnotes
If thevehiclecan no longer be lockedor
unlockedwiththe SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO,
use themechanical key.
If you use themechanical keytounlockand
open thedriver's door or thetrunk lid, theanti-
theft alarm system will be triggered (
Y page 67).
There are several ways to turnoff thealarm:
X
To deactivate thealarm withthe key: press
the % or & buttononthe key.
or
X
Insertthe SmartKey intothe ignition lock.
or
X
To deactivate thealarm withKEYLESS-GO:
press theStart/Stopbuttoninthe ignition
lock. The SmartKey mustbeinthe vehicle.
or
X
Lockorunlockthe vehicleusingKEYLESS-
GO. The SmartKey mustbeoutside thevehi-
cle.
If you unlockthe vehicleusingthe mechanical
key, thefuel filler flap will notbeunlockedauto-
matically.
X
To unlock thefuelfiller flap: insert the
SmartKey intothe ignition lock.
Removing themechanicalkey
SmartKey
71
Opening and closing
Z
X
Push release catch : in the direction of the
arrow and at the same time remove mechan-
ical key ; from the SmartKey.
For further information about:
R
Unlocking the driver's door (Y page 76)
R
Unlocking the cargo compartment
(
Y page 81)
R
Locking the vehicle (Y page 77)
Inserting the mechanical key
X
Push mechanical key ; completely into the
SmartKey until it engages and release
catch : is back in its basic position.
SmartKey battery
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Batteries contain toxic and corrosive substan-
ces. If batteries are swallowed, it can result in
severe health problems. There is arisk of fatal
injury.
Keep batteries out of the reach of children. If
abattery is swallowed, seek medical attention
immediately.
The SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate
material, which may require special handling
and regard for the environment.National guide-
lines must be observed during disposal. In Cal-
ifornia, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/index.cfm.
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have the
battery replaced at aqualified specialist work-
shop.
Checking the battery
X
Press the & or % button.
The battery is working properly if battery
check lamp : lights up briefly.
The battery is discharged if battery check
lamp : does not light up briefly.
X
Change the battery (Y page 72).
i If the SmartKey battery is checked within
the signal reception range of the vehicle,
pressing the & or % button:
R
locks or
R
unlocks the vehicle
i
You can get abattery at any qualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Replacing the battery
You require aCR2025 3Vcell battery.
X
Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey
(
Y page 71).
X
Press mechanical key ; into the opening in
the SmartKey in the direction of the arrow
until battery tray cover : opens. When doing
so, do not hold cover : shut.
X
Remove battery tray cover :.
72
SmartKey
Opening and closing
X
Repeatedly tap theSmartKey against your
palm until battery = falls out.
X
Insertthe newbattery withthe positive ter-
minal facing upwards. Use alint-free cloth to
do so.
X
Makesurethatthe surfaceofthe battery is
free of lint, grease and other contaminants.
X
Insertthe fronttabsofbattery tray cover :
and then press to close it.
X
Insertmechanical keyintothe SmartKey
(
Y page 72).
X
Checkthe function of all SmartKey buttons on
thevehicle.
Problemswith theSmartKey
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
You cannotlockor
unlock thevehicleusing
theSmartKey.
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GOorKEYLESS-GOstart function:
tryagain to lock/unlockthe vehicleusingthe remotecontrolfunc-
tion of theSmartKey. Pointthe tipofthe SmartKey at thedriver's
door handle from close range and press the % or & button.
If this does notwork:
X
Checkthe SmartKey battery (Y page 72) and replace it if necessary
(
Y page 72).
X
Unlock(Y page 76)orlock(Y page 77) thevehicleusingthe
mechanical key.
There is interferencefromapowerful source of radiowaves.
X
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GOorKEYLESS-GOstart function:
tryagain to lock/unlock thevehicleusingthe remotecontrolfunc-
tion of theSmartKey. Pointthe tipofthe SmartKey at thedriver's
door handle from close range and press the % or & button.
If this does notwork:
X
Unlock(Y page 76) or lock(Y page 77)the vehicleusingthe
mechanical key.
The SmartKey is faulty.
X
Unlock(Y page 76)orlock(Y page 77) thevehicleusingthe
mechanical key.
X
Havethe SmartKey checkedataqualified specialist workshop.
SmartKey
73
Opening and closing
Z
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
You can no longer lock or
unlock the vehicle using
KEYLESS-GO.
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X
Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 72) and replace it if necessary
(
Y page 72).
If this does not work:
X
Unlock (Y page 76) or lock (Y page 77) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
There is interference from apowerful source of radio waves.
X
Unlock (Y page 76) or lock (Y page 77) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
KEYLESS-GO is malfunctioning.
X
Lock/unlock the vehicle using the remote control function of the
SmartKey.
X
Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at aqualified specialist
workshop.
If the vehicle can also not be locked/unlocked using the remote con-
trol function:
X
Unlock (Y page 76) or lock (Y page 77) the vehicle using the
mechanical key.
X
Have the vehicle and SmartKey checked at aqualified specialist
workshop.
The engine cannot be
started using the Smart-
Key.
The on-board voltage is too low.
X
Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. seat heating or interior
lighting, and try to start the engine again.
If this does not work:
X
Check the starter battery and charge it if necessary (Y page 284).
or
X
Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 285).
or
X
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
The engine cannot be
started using the Start/
Stop button. The Smart-
Key is in the vehicle.
The vehicle is locked.
X
Unlock the vehicle and try to start the vehicle again.
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X
Check the SmartKey battery (Y page 72) and replace it if necessary
(
Y page 72).
If this does not work:
X
Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
There is interference from apowerful source of radio waves.
X
Start your vehicle with the SmartKey in the ignition lock.
74
SmartKey
Opening and closing
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
You have lost aSmart-
Key.
X
Have the SmartKey deactivated at aqualified specialist workshop.
X
Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X
If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
You have lost the
mechanical key.
X
Report the loss immediately to the vehicle insurers.
X
If necessary, have the locks changed as well.
Doors
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
R
open the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
R
get out and disrupt traffic.
R
operate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
R
release the parking brake.
R
shifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P
R
Start the engine.
There is arisk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
You should preferably place luggage or loads in
the cargo compartment. Observe the loading
guidelines (
Y page 242).
Unlocking and opening doors from
the inside
X
To unlock and open afront door: pull door
handle ;.
If the door is locked, locking knob : pops up.
The door is unlocked and opens.
X
To unlock arear door: pull up locking
knob :.
The door is unlocked and can be opened.
X
To open arear door: pull door handle ;.
You can open adoor from inside the vehicle
even if it has been locked. You can only open the
rear doors from inside the vehicle if they are not
secured by the child-proof locks (
Y page 59).
If the vehicle has previously been locked with
the SmartKey from the outside, opening adoor
from the inside will trigger the anti-theft alarm
system. Switch off the alarm (
Y page 67).
Centrally locking and unlocking the
vehicle from the inside
You can centrally lock or unlock the vehicle from
the inside. This can be useful if you wish to lock
the vehicle before pulling away,for example.
Doors
75
Opening and closing
Z
X
To unlock: press button :.
X
To lock: press button ;.
If allthe doors and the tailgate are closed,the
vehiclelocks.
Meanwhile, the fuelfillerflapwillnot be locked
or unlocked.
Youcannotunlock the vehiclecentrallyfrom the
insideifthe vehiclehas been locked with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO.
Youcan open adoorfrom insidethe vehicle
evenifithas been locked.You can open the rear
doors from insidethe vehicleunless they are
secured by the child-proof lock (
Y page 59).
If the vehiclehas previously been locked with
the SmartKey from the outside, opening adoor
from the insidewilltrigger the anti-theftalarm
system.Switch off the alarm (
Y page 67).
If alocked door is openedfrom the inside, the
previous unlock status of the vehiclewillbe
takeninto consideration if:
R
the vehiclewas locked using the locking but-
ton for the centrallocking,or
R
if the vehiclewas locked automatically
The vehiclewillbefully unlockedifithad previ-
ouslybeenfully unlocked. If onlythe driver's
door hadbeenpreviously unlocked, onlythe
door which hasbeenopenedfrom the insideis
unlocked.
Automaticlocking feature
X
To deactivate: press and holdbutton : for
approximatelyfiveseconds untilatone
sounds.
X
To activate: press and holdbutton ; for
approximatelyfiveseconds untilatone
sounds.
If youpress one of the two buttons and do not
hearatone, the relevant setting hasalready
been selected.
The vehicleislocked automaticallywhenthe
ignition is switched on and the wheels are turn-
ing.
Youcould therefore lock yourselfout if:
R
the vehicleisbeing pushed.
R
the vehicleisbeing towed.
R
the vehicleisonarollerdynamometer.
Youcan also switch the automatic locking func-
tiononand off using the on-board computer
(
Y page 193).
Unlockingthe driver's door(mechan-
ical key)
If the vehiclecan no longer be locked or
unlockedwiththe SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO,
usethe mechanical key.
If youuse the mechanical key to unlock and
open the driver'sdoor, the anti-theftalarm sys-
tem will be triggered (
Y page 67).
X
Take the mechanical key outofthe SmartKey
(
Y page 71).
X
Insert the mechanical key into the lock of the
driver'sdoorasfar as it will go.
76
Doors
Opening and closing
X
Turn the mechanical key counter-clockwise
as far as it will go to position 1.
The door is unlocked.
X
Turn the mechanical key back and remove it.
X
Insert mechanical key into the SmartKey
(
Y page 72).
Locking the vehicle (mechanical key)
If the vehicle can no longer be locked with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, use the mechanical
key.
X
Open the driver's door.
X
Close the front-passenger door, the rear
doors and the tailgate.
X
Press the lockingbutton on the driver’s door
(
Y page 75).
X
Check whether the lockingknobs on the
front-passenger door and the rear doors are
still visible. Press down the lockingknobs by
hand, if necessary.
X
Close the driver's door.
X
Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey
(
Y page 71).
X
Insert the mechanical key into the lock of the
driver's door as far as it will go.
X
Turn the mechanical key clockwise as far as it
will go to position 1.
X
Turn the mechanical key back and remove it.
X
Make sure that the doors and the tailgate are
locked.
X
Insert mechanical key into the SmartKey
(
Y page 72).
i
If you lock the vehicle as described above,
the fuel filler flap is not locked. The anti-theft
alarm system is not armed.
Cargo compartment
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped dur-
ing automatic closing of the tailgate. More-
over, people, e.g. children, may be standingin
the closing area or may enter the closing area
during the closing process. There is arisk of
injury.
Make sure that nobody is in the vicinityofthe
closing area during the closing process.
Use one of the following options to stop the
closing process:
R
press the F button on the SmartKey.
R
pull or press the remote operating switch
on the driver's door.
R
press the close button or STOP button on
the tailgate.
R
pull the handle on the tailgate.
G
WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. If the tailgate
is open when the engine is running, particu-
larly if the vehicle is moving, exhaust fumes
could enter the passenger compartment.
There is arisk of poisoning.
Turn off the engine before opening the tail-
gate. Never drive with the tailgate open.
Cargo compartment
77
Opening and closing
Z
G
WARNING
If objects, luggage or loads are not securedor
not securedsufficiently,they couldslip,tip
over or be flung around and thereby hit vehicle
occupants. There is arisk of injury,particu-
larlyinthe event of sudden braking or asud-
den change in direction.
Always store objects so that they cannot be
flung around. Secure objects, luggage or
loads against slipping or tipping before the
journey.
!
The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear
when opened.Therefore, make sure that
there is sufficient clearance above and behind
the tailgate.
The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be
found in the "Vehicle data"section
(
Y page325).
You should preferably place luggage or loads in
the cargo compartment. Observe the loading
guidelines (
Y page242).
Do not leave the SmartKey in the cargo com-
partment. You couldotherwise lock yourself
out.
The tailgate can be:
R
opened and closed manually from outside
R
vehicleswith EASY-PACK tailgate: open/
close automatically from the outside
R
vehicleswith EASY-PACK tailgate: open/
close automatically from the inside
R
vehicleswith EASY-PACK tailgate and
with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO start
function: closed with the remote operating
switch on the SmartKey
R
released with the emergency release from the
inside
Tailgate obstacle detection with
reversing feature
On vehicles with an EASY-PACK tailgate, the
tailgate is equipped with automatic obstacle
recognitionwith areversing feature. If asolid
object blocks or restricts the tailgate when auto-
matically opening or closing, this procedure is
stopped. If the tailgate is stoppedduring the
closing process,the tailgate automatically
opens again slightly. The automatic obstruction
detection with reversing feature is only an aid.It
is not asubstitute for yourattentiveness when
opening and closing the tailgate.
G
WARNING
The reversing feature does not respond:
R
to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. fingers
R
over the last1/3 in (8 mm) of the closing
movement
The reversing feature cannot prevent some-
one from becoming trappedinthese situa-
tions in particular. There is arisk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure.
If somebody becomes trapped:
R
press the F button on the SmartKey,or
R
pullorpress the remote operating switch
on the driver's door or
R
press the closing button/STOP button in
the tailgate or
R
pullthe handleonthe tailgate
Opening and closing manually
Opening
X
Press the % button on the SmartKey.
X
Pullhandle :.
X
Raise the tailgate.
78
Cargo compartment
Opening and closing
Closing
X
Pull thetailgatedown usinghandle :.
X
Allow thetailgatetodropintothe lock.
X
Lockthe vehicle if necessary withthe &
buttononthe SmartKey or withKEYLESS-GO.
Opening/closing automatically from
outside
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Partsofthe body couldbecome trapped dur-
ing automatic closingofthe tailgate. More-
over, people, e.g.children, may be standing in
theclosingarea or may enterthe closingarea
duringthe closingprocess. Thereisariskof
injury.
Makesure that nobody is in thevicinity of the
closingarea duringthe closingprocess.
Use oneofthe followingoptionstostopthe
closingprocess:
R
pressthe F buttononthe SmartKey.
R
pull or pressthe remoteoperatingswitch
on thedriver'sdoor.
R
pressthe close buttonorSTOPbuttonon
thetailgate.
R
pull thehandle on thetailgate.
G
WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases suchascarbon monoxide. If thetailgate
is open when theengineisrunning, particu-
larly if thevehicle is moving,exhaust fumes
couldenter thepassenger compartment.
Thereisariskofpoisoning.
Turn off theenginebefore opening thetail-
gate. Never drivewiththe tailgateopen.
!
The tailgateswings upwardsand to therear
when opened. Therefore, makesure that
there is sufficient clearance aboveand behind
thetailgate.
Two warning tonessoundwhile thetailgateis
opening or closing.
The opening dimensionsofthe tailgatecan be
foundinthe "Vehicle data" section
(
Y page 325).
Opening automatically
You can open thetailgateautomaticallywiththe
SmartKey or thehandle in thetailgate.
X
Press and hold the F buttononthe Smart-
Key until thetailgateopens.
or
X
If thetailgateisunlocked, pull thehandle and
let it go again immediately.
Closing automatically
Vehicles with EASY-PACK tailgate: you can
also close thetailgateautomaticallyfromout-
side.
X
To close: pressbutton : on thetailgate.
or
X
Vehicles with EASY-PACK tailgate and
KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-GO startfunc-
tion: if theSmartKey is locatedinthe imme-
diatevicinity of thevehicle,pressthe F
buttononthe SmartKey.
You can release thebuttonassoon as the
tailgatestartstoclose.
Cargo compartment
79
Opening and closing
Z
X
To stopthe closingprocess:press but-
ton : on the tailgate again.
or
X
Pull the handleinthe tailgate.
or
X
Press the F button on the SmartKey until
the tailgate stops.
or
X
Press or pull the remote operating switch on
the driver's door.
Opening/closing automaticallyfrom
inside
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Parts of the body could become trappeddur-
ing automatic closing of the tailgate.More-
over, people,e.g.children, maybestanding in
the closing areaormay enter the closing area
during the closing process.There is ariskof
injury.
Make sure thatnobodyisinthe vicinity of the
closing areaduring the closing process.
Use one of the following options to stop the
closing process:
R
press the F button on the SmartKey.
R
pull or press the remote operating switch
on the driver's door.
R
press the closing or locking button on the
tailgate.
R
pull the handleonthe tailgate
G
WARNING
Combustionengines emitpoisonousexhaust
gases such as carbonmonoxide. If the tailgate
is open when the engine is running,particu-
larly if the vehicleismoving, exhaustfumes
could enter the passenger compartment.
There is ariskofpoisoning.
Turn off the engine before opening the tail-
gate. Never drive with the tailgate open.
!
The tailgate swingsupwards and to the rear
when opened. Therefore, make sure that
thereissufficient clearance above and behind
the tailgate.
Twowarning tones sound whilethe tailgate is
opening or closing.
The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be
found in the "Vehicle data" section
(
Y page 325).
Opening and closingautomatically
Youcan open the tailgate from the driver'sseat
when the vehicleisstationary and unlocked.
It is onlypossibletoclose the tailgate from the
driver'sseatonvehicles with the EASY-PACK
tailgate.
X
To open: pull remote operating switch for the
tailgate : untilthe tailgate opens.
X
To close: turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2
in the ignition lock (
Y page 124).
X
Press and holdthe remote operating switch
for tailgate : untilthe tailgate is completely
closed.
Limiting the opening angle of the tail-
gate
General notes
!
Make sure thereissufficient clearance to
open the tailgate fully when setting the open-
ing angle.The tailgate could otherwise be
damaged.Ideally,set the opening angle out-
side.
Youcan limit the opening angle of the tailgate.
Thiscould be useful, for example, if thereis
insufficient space above the tailgate.Itispos-
sibletolimit the tailgate in the top half of its
opening range.
80
Cargocompartment
Opening and closing
To open the tailgate fully, pull the handle on the
outside of the tailgate again after it has stopped
automatically. This does not delete the stored
position.
Activating
X
To open the tailgate: pull the handle on the
tailgate.
X
To stop the opening process at the
desired position:
R
press the closing button in the tailgate, or
R
pull the handle on the outside of the tailgate
again, or
R
press the tailgate button on the key.
X
To store the position: press and hold the
closing button in the tailgate until two short
tones sound.
The opening angle limiter is activated. The
tailgate will now stop in the stored position
when opening.
Deactivating
X
Press and hold the closing button in the tail-
gate until you hear ashort tone.
Emergency release
General notes
!
The tailgate swings upwards and to the rear
when opened. Therefore, make sure that
there is sufficient clearance above and behind
the tailgate.
The opening dimensions of the tailgate can be
found in the "Vehicle data" section
(
Y page 325).
If the tailgate can no longer be unlocked:
R
using the SmartKey, or
R
using the remote operating switch in the door
control panel:
Use the emergencyrelease on the inside of the
tailgate.
You can reach the emergencyrelease via the
cargo compartment.
Opening
X
Fold the rear seat backrest forwards
(
Y page 246).
X
Take the mechanical key out of the SmartKey
(
Y page 71).
X
Insert mechanical key ; into opening : in
the trim and push it in.
X
Open the tailgate.
X
Insert the mechanical key into the SmartKey
(
Y page 72).
Side windows
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
While opening the side windows, body parts
could become trapped between the side win-
dow and the door frame as the side window
moves. There is arisk of injury.
Make sure that nobody touches the side win-
dow during the opening procedure. If some-
body becomes trapped, release the switch or
pull the switch to close the side window again.
G
WARNING
While closing the side windows, body parts in
the closing area could become trapped. There
is arisk of injury.
When closing make sure that no parts of the
body are in the closing area. If somebody
becomes trapped, release the switch or press
the switch to open the side window again.
Side windows
81
Opening and closing
Z
G
WARNING
If children operate the side windows they
couldbecome trapped, particularlyifthey are
left unsupervised. There is arisk of injury.
Activate the overridefeature for the rear side
windows. When leaving the vehicle, always
take the SmartKey with you and lock the vehi-
cle. Never leave children unsupervised in the
vehicle.
Side window reversing feature
The side windows are equipped with an auto-
matic reversing feature. If asolidobject blocks
or restricts aside windowfrom traveling
upwards during the automatic closing process,
the side windowopens again automatically.Dur-
ing the manualclosing process,the side window
only opens again automatically after the corre-
sponding switch is released.The automatic
reversing feature is only an aid and is no substi-
tute for yourattention when closing aside win-
dow.
G
WARNING
The reversing feature does not react:
R
to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. smallfin-
gers
R
while resetting
This means that the reversing feature cannot
prevent someone being trappedinthese sit-
uations. There is arisk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure. If
someone becomestrapped, press the switch
to open the side windowagain.
Opening and closing the side win-
dows
The switches for all side windows are located on
the driver's door. There is alsoaswitch on each
door for the corresponding side window.
The switches on the driver's door take prece-
dence.
:
Front left
;
Front right
=
Rearright
?
Rearleft
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignitionlock (
Y page124).
X
To open manually: press and hold the cor-
responding switch.
X
To open fully: press the switch beyond the
point of resistance and release it.
Automatic operation is started.
X
To close manually: pullthe corresponding
switch and hold it.
X
To close fully: pullthe switch beyond the
point of resistance and release it.
Automatic operation is started.
X
To interrupt automatic operation: press/
pullthe corresponding switch again.
i
If you press/pull the switch beyond the
point of resistance, automatic operation is
started in the corresponding direction. You
can stop automatic operation by pressing/
pulling the switch again.
i
You can continue to operate the side win-
dowsafter you switch off the engine or
remove the SmartKey.This function remains
active for five minutes or until the driver's or
front-passengerdoor is opened.
i
When the overridefeature for the side win-
dowsisactivated (
Y page59),the side win-
dowscannot be operated from the rear.
Convenience opening
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO,the KEYLESS-
GO start function, Exclusive package or
AMG Exclusive package: you can ventilate the
vehiclebefore you start driving.
82
Side windows
Opening and closing
The SmartKey can also be used to carry out the
following functions simultaneously:
R
unlock the vehicle
R
open the side windows
R
open the panorama roof with power tilt/slid-
ing panel and the roller sunblind
The convenienceopening feature can only be
operated using the SmartKey.
The "convenience opening" feature is also avail-
able when the vehicle is unlocked.
X
Vehicles with Exclusive package or AMG
Exclusive package but without KEYLESS-
GO and the KEYLESS-GO startfunction: for
the following operations, point the tip of the
SmartKey at the door handle on the driver's
door. The SmartKey must be close to the driv-
er's door handle.
i
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEY-
LESS-GO startfunction: the SmartKey must
be in close proximitytothe vehicle.
X
Press and hold the % button until the side
windows and the panorama sunroof are in the
desired position.
If the roller sunblind of the panorama roof
with power tilt/sliding panel is closed, the
roller sunblind is opened first.
X
Press and hold the % button once more
until the panorama roof with power tilt/slid-
ing panel reaches the desired position.
X
To interrupt convenience opening: release
the % button.
Convenience closing feature
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
When the convenienceclosing feature is oper-
ating, parts of the body could become trapped
in the closing area of the side window and the
sliding sunroof. There is arisk of injury.
Observe the complete closing procedure
when the convenienceclosing feature is oper-
ating. Make sure that no body parts are in
close proximityduring the closing procedure.
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, the KEYLESS-
GO startfunction, Exclusive Package or
AMG Exclusive Package: at the same time you
can:
R
lock the vehicle
R
close the side windows
R
close the panorama roof with power tilt/slid-
ing panel
On vehicles with apanorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel, you can then close the roller
sunblind.
i Notes on the automatic reversing feature
for:
R
the side window (Y page 82)
R
the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel (
Y page 86)
R
the roller sunblind (Y page 87)
Using the SmartKey
X
Vehicles with Exclusive package or AMG
Exclusive package but without KEYLESS-
GO and the KEYLESS-GO startfunction: for
the following operations, point the tip of the
SmartKey at the door handle on the driver's
door. The SmartKey must be close to the driv-
er's door handle.
i
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEY-
LESS-GO startfunction: the SmartKey must
be in close proximitytothe vehicle.
X
Press and hold the & button until the side
windows and the panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel are fully closed.
X
Make sure that all the side windows and the
panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
are closed.
On vehicles with apanorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel:
X
Press and hold the & button again until the
roller sunblind of the panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel closes.
X
To interrupt convenience closing: release
the & button.
Using KEYLESS-GO
The driver's door and the door at which the han-
dle is used, must both be closed. The SmartKey
must be outside the vehicle. The gap between
Side windows
83
Opening and closing
Z
the SmartKeyand the corresponding door han-
dleshouldnot be greaterthan3ft (1 m).
X
Touch recessedsensorsurface : on the
door handleuntilthe side windows and the
panorama roofwithpower tilt/sliding panel
arefully closed.
i
Make sure youonlytouch recessedsensor
surface :.
X
Make sure thatall the side windows are
closed.
X
Make sure thatall the side windows and the
panorama roofwithpower tilt/sliding panel
areclosed.
On vehicles with apanorama roofwithpower
tilt/sliding panel:
X
Touch recessedsensorsurface : on the
door handleagain untilthe rollersunblind of
the panorama roofwithpower tilt/sliding
panel closes.
X
To interrupt convenienceclosing: release
recessedsensorsurface : on the door han-
dle.
Resetting the side windows
If asidewindowcan no longerbeclosedfully,
youmustreset it.
X
Close allthe doors.
X
Turn the SmartKeytoposition 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (
Y page 124).
X
Pull the corresponding switch on the door
controlpanel untilthe side windowiscom-
pletely closed(
Y page 82).
X
Holdthe switch for an additional second.
If the side windowopens againslightly:
X
Immediately pull the corresponding switch on
the door control panel untilthe side windowis
completelyclosed(
Y page 82).
X
Holdthe switch for an additional second.
X
If the respectivesidewindowremains closed
after the button is released, thenithas been
setcorrectly. If thisisnot the case, repeatthe
steps above again.
Problems with the side windows
G
WARNING
If youclose asidewindowagain immediatelyafter it hasbeenblockedorreset, the side window
closeswithincreasedormaximum force. The reversing featureisthennot active. Parts of the
body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This posesanincreasedriskofinjury or
evenfatal injury.
Make sure thatnoparts of the body areinthe closing area.Tostop the closing process, release
the switch or push the switch againtoreopenthe side window.
84
Side windows
Openingand closing
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Aside window cannot be
closed because it is
blocked by objects, e.g.
leaves in the window
guide.
X
Remove the objects.
X
Close the side window.
Aside window cannot be
closed and you cannot
see the cause.
If aside window is obstructed during closing and reopens again
slightly:
X
Immediately after the window blocks, pull the correspondingswitch
again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed with increased force.
If aside window is obstructed again during closing and reopens again
slightly:
X
Immediately after the window blocks, pull the correspondingswitch
again until the side window has closed.
The side window is closed without the automatic reversing feature.
Panoramaroof with power tilt/sliding
panel
Important safety notes
In the following section, the term "sliding sun-
roof" refers to the panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel.
G
WARNING
While opening and closing the sliding sunroof,
body parts in close proximity could become
trapped. There is arisk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the opening and closing pro-
cedures.
If somebody becomes trapped:
R
release the switch immediately, or
R
during automatic operation, push the
switch briefly in any direction
The opening or closing procedure will be stop-
ped.
G
WARNING
If children operate the sliding sunroof they
could become trapped, particularly if they are
left unsupervised. There is arisk of injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
G
WARNING
At high speeds the raised sliding sunroof auto-
matically lowers slightly at the rear. This could
trap you or other persons. There is arisk of
injury. Make sure that nobody reaches into
the sweep of the sliding sunroof whilst the
vehicle is in motion.
If somebody becomes trapped, immediately
pull back the sliding sunroof switch. The slid-
ing sunroof lifts during opening.
!
Only open the sliding sunroof if it is free of
snow and ice. Otherwise, malfunctions may
occur.
Do not allow anything to protrude from the
sliding sunroof. Otherwise, the seals could be
damaged.
!
The weather can change abruptly. It could
start to rain or snow. Make sure that the slid-
ing sunroof is closed when you leave the vehi-
cle. The vehicle electronics can be damaged if
water enters the vehicle interior.
i
Resonance noises can occur in addition to
the usual airflow noises when the sliding sun-
roof is open. They are caused by minor pres-
Panoramaroof with power tilt/sliding panel
85
Opening and closing
Z
sure fluctuations in the vehicle interior.
Change the position of the sliding sunroof or
open aside window slightly to reduce or elim-
inate these noises.
Sliding sunroof reversing feature
In the following section, the term "sliding sun-
roof" refers to the panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel.
The sliding sunroof is equipped with an auto-
matic reversing feature. If asolid object blocks
or restrictsthe sliding sunroof during the closing
process, the sliding sunroof opens againauto-
matically.However, the automatic reversing
feature is only an aid and does not relieve you of
the responsibility of paying attention when clos-
ing the sliding sunroof.
G
WARNING
The reversing feature does not react:
R
to soft, light and thin objects, e.g. small fin-
gers
R
over the last 1/6 in (4 mm) of the closing
movement
R
during resetting
R
when closing the sliding sunroof againman-
ually immediately after automatic reversing
This means that the reversing feature cannot
prevent someone being trapped in these sit-
uations. There is arisk of injury.
Make sure that no body parts are in close
proximity during the closing procedure.
If somebody becomes trapped:
R
release the switch immediately,or
R
press the switch in any direction during the
automatic closing process
The closing process is stopped.
Operating the panoramaroof with
power tilt/sliding panel
Opening and closing
:
To raise
;
To open
=
To close/lower
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
can only be operated when the roller sunblind is
open.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (
Y page 124).
X
Press or pull the 3 switch in the corre-
sponding direction.
If you press/pull the 3 switch beyond the
point of resistance, automatic operation is star-
ted in the corresponding direction. You can stop
automatic operation by pressing/pulling the
switch again.
After opening the sliding sunroof, the roller sun-
blind closes slightly automatically. This reduces
drafts in the vehicle interior.
If the sliding sunroof is raised at the rear, it low-
ers slightly automatically at higher speeds. The
noise level in the vehicle interior is reduced as a
result.
At low speeds it raises againautomatically.
You can also temporarily deactivate automatic
lowering. To do so, press the 3 switch. The
sliding sunroof raises againautomatically.
You can continue to operate the sliding sunroof
after switching off the engine or removing the
SmartKey from the ignition lock. This function
remains active for five minutes or until you open
afront door.
The sliding sunroof cannot be opened if aroof
carrier is installed. In order to allow ventilation
of the vehicle interior, you can raise the sliding
sunroof.
86
Panoramaroof with power tilt/sliding panel
Opening and closing
If contact is made with aroof carrier approved
by Mercedes-Benz, the sliding sunroof lowers
slightly but remains raisedatthe rear.
Rain-closing feature
The rain-closing feature is only available for vehi-
cles with arain sensor.
When the SmartKey is in position 0 in the igni-
tion lock or is removed, the sliding sunroof
closes automatically:
R
if it starts to rain.
R
at extreme outsidetemperatures.
R
after six hours.
R
if there is amalfunction in the powersupply.
The panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel
remains raisedatthe rear in order to allow ven-
tilation of the vehicle interior.
If the panorama roof with powertilt/sliding
panel is obstructed whilebeing closed by the
rain-closing feature, it opens again slightly. The
rain-closing feature is then deactivated.
The panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel
does not close if:
R
it is raisedatthe rear.
R
it is blocked.
R
no rain is falling on the area of the windshield
being monitored by the rain sensor. If the
vehicle is under abridge or in acarport, for
example,the field of the sensor may be cov-
ered.
Operating the rollersunblind for the
panorama roof with powertilt/sliding
panel
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Parts of the body could become trapped
betweenthe rollersunblind and frame or slid-
ing sunroof during automatic opening or clos-
ing. There is arisk of injury.
When opening or closing, make sure that no
body parts are in the sweep of the rollersun-
blind.
If somebodybecomes trapped:
R
release the switch immediately,or
R
during automatic operation, push the
switch brieflyinany direction
The opening or closing procedure willbestop-
ped.
The rollersunblind shields the vehicle interior
from sunlight. The rollersunblind can only be
opened and closed when the panorama roof
with powertilt/sliding panel is closed.
Rollersunblind reversingfeature
The rollersunblind is equipped with an auto-
matic reversing feature. If asolid object blocks
or restricts the rollersunblind during the closing
process, the rollersunblind opens again auto-
matically. However, the automatic reversing
feature is only an aid and does not relieve you of
the responsibility of paying attention when clos-
ing the rollersunblind.
G
WARNING
The reversing feature does not react:
R
to soft, lightand thin objects, e.g. small fin-
gers
R
when closing the rollersunblind again man-
ually immediately after automatic reversal
This means that the reversing feature cannot
prevent someone being trapped in these sit-
uations. There is arisk of injury.
When closing the rollersunblind, make sure
that no body parts are in the sweep area.
If somebodybecomes trapped:
R
release the switch immediately,or
R
press the switch in any direction during the
automatic closing process
The closing process is stopped.
Panorama roof with powertilt/sliding panel
87
Opening and closing
Z
Opening and closing
:
To open
;
To open
=
Closing
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (
Y page 124).
X
Press or pull the 3 switch in the corre-
spondingdirection.
If you press/pull the 3 switch beyond the
point of resistance, automatic operation is star-
ted in the correspondingdirection. You can stop
automatic operation by pressing/pulling the
switch again.
After opening the panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel, the roller sunblind automati-
cally closes slightly. This reduces drafts in the
vehicle interior.
Resetting the panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel or the roller
sunblind
Reset the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel or the roller sunblind, if the panorama roof
with power tilt/sliding panel or the roller sun-
blind does not move smoothly.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (
Y page 124).
X
Pull the 3 button repeatedly to the point of
resistance in the direction of arrow : until
the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel is fully closed.
X
Keep the 3 switch pulled for an additional
second.
X
Pull the 3 switch repeatedly to the point of
resistance in the direction of arrow : until
the roller sunblind is fully closed.
X
Keep the 3 switch pulled for an additional
second.
X
Make sure that the panorama roof with power
tilt/sliding panel and the roller sunblind can
be fully opened and closed again.
X
If this is not the case, repeat the steps above.
88
Panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
Opening and closing
Problems with the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel
G
WARNING
If you do not reset the sliding sunroof after amalfunction or voltage supply interruption, then the
backing up function will malfunction or not work. The sliding sunroof closes with increased or
maximum force. Parts of the body could be trapped in the closing area in the process. This poses
an increased risk of injury or even fatal injury.
In such or similar situations always make sure that no parts of the body are in the closing area.
Always reset the sliding sunroof after amalfunction or voltage supply interruption.
!
If the sliding sunroof still cannot be opened or closed as aresult of amalfunction,contact a
qualified specialist workshop.
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The panorama roof with
power tilt/sliding panel
cannot be closed and
you cannot see the
cause.
If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is obstructed during
closing and reopens again slightly:
X
Immediately after it blocks, pull the 3 switch down again to the
point of resistance until the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel is closed.
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed with more
force.
If the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is obstructed again
during closing and reopens again slightly:
X
Immediately after it blocks, pull the 3 switch down again to the
point of resistance until the panorama roof with power tilt/sliding
panel is closed.
The panorama roof with power tilt/sliding panel is closed without
the automatic reversing feature.
Panoramaroof with power tilt/sliding panel
89
Opening and closing
Z
Correct driver's seat position
G
WARNING
You couldlose control of your vehicle if you do
thefollowingwhile driving:
R
adjust thedriver'sseat,head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
R
fasten theseat belt
Thereisariskofanaccident.
Adjust thedriver'sseat,head restraint,steer-
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before starting theengine.
Observethe followingwhen adjusting steering
wheel :,seat belt ; and driver'sseat =:
R
you are as far away from thedriver'sair bag as
possible
R
you are sittinginanormalupright position
R
your thighs are slightly supported by theseat
cushion
R
your legs are notentirely stretched and you
can depress thepedals properly
R
theback of your head is supported at eye level
by thecenterofthe head restraint
R
you can hold thesteering wheel withyour
armsslightly bent
R
you can moveyour legs freely
R
you can see all thedisplays in theinstrument
clusterclearly
R
you should have agood overview of traffic
conditions
R
theseat belt is pulled snugly against thebody
and is routed across thecenterofyour shoul-
der and across your hips in thepelvic area
Further related subjects:
R
Adjustingthe seatsmanually (Y page 91)
R
Adjustingthe seatselectrically
(
Y page 92)
R
Adjustingthe steering wheel manually
(
Y page 95)
R
Fasteningthe seat belt correctly
(
Y page 43)
R
Adjustingthe rear-view mirror and exterior
mirrors(
Y page 96)
R
Vehicles with amemory function: saving
theseat,steering wheel and exterior mirror
settings usingthe memory function
(
Y page 98)
Seats
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Children couldbecome trapped if they adjust
theseats, particularly when unattended.
Thereisariskofinjury.
When leaving thevehicle,always takethe
SmartKey withyou and lockthe vehicle.Never
leave childrenunsupervised in thevehicle.
The seatscan still be adjusted when there is no
SmartKey in theignition lock.
G
WARNING
When you adjust aseat,you or other vehicle
occupants couldbecome trapped, e.g.onthe
seat guide rail. Thereisariskofinjury.
Makesure when adjusting aseat that no one
has any body partsinthe sweep of theseat.
Observethe safety noteson"Air bags"
(
Y page 44)and "Children in thevehicle"
(
Y page 53).
G
WARNING
If thedriver'sseat is notengaged,itcould
moveunexpectedly while thevehicle is in
90
Seats
Seats, steeringwheel and mirrors
motion. This could cause you to lose control of
the vehicle. There is arisk of an accident.
Always make sure that the driver'sseat is
engagedbefore starting the vehicle.
G
WARNING
You could lose control of yourvehicleifyou do
the following while driving:
R
adjust the driver'sseat, head restraint,
steering wheelormirrors
R
fasten the seat belt
There is arisk of an accident.
Adjust the driver'sseat, head restraint, steer-
ing wheeland mirror and fasten yourseat belt
before starting the engine.
G
WARNING
If you adjust the seat height carelessly,you or
other vehicleoccupants could be trappedand
thereby injured. Children in particular could
accidentally press the electricalseat adjust-
ment buttons and become trapped. There is a
risk of injury.
Whilemoving the seats, make sure that your
hands or other body parts do not get under the
lever assembly of the seat adjustment sys-
tem.
!
To avoiddamage to the seats and the seat
heating, observe the following information:
R
keep liquidsfrom spilling on the seats. If
liquid is spilled on the seats, dry them as
soon as possible.
R
if the seat covers are damp or wet, do not
switch on the seat heating. The seat heat-
ing should alsonot be used to dry the seats.
R
clean the seat covers as recommended;
see the "Interior care" section.
R
do not transport heavy loads on the seats.
Do not place sharp objects on the seat
cushions, e.g. knives, nailsortools. The
seats should only be occupied by passen-
gers, if possible.
R
when the seat heating is in operation, do
not cover the seats with insulating materi-
als,e.g. blankets, coats, bags,seat covers,
child seats or booster seats.
!
Make sure that there are no objects in the
footwellunder or behind the seats when mov-
ing the seats back. There is arisk that the
seats and/or the objects could be damaged.
i Further related subjects:
R
cargo compartment enlargement (folding
down the rear seats) (
Y page 245)
Adjusting the seats manually
Vehicles without the seating comfort
package
Seat fore-and-aft adjustment:
X
Lift handle : and slidethe seat forwards or
backwards.
X
Release lever : again.
Make sure that you hear the seat engage in
position.
Backrest angle:
X
Relieve the pressure on the backrest.
X
Turn handwheel = forwards or backwards.
Seat height:
X
Pullhandle ; upwards or push it down
repeatedly until the seat has reachedthe
desired height.
Seats
91
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
Vehicles with the seatingcomfort pack-
age
Seatfore-and-aft adjustment:
X
Lifthandle : and slidethe seatforwardsor
rearwards.
X
Releaselever : again.
Make sure thatyou hearthe seatengage in
position.
Backrest angle:
X
Relieve the pressure on the backrest.
X
Turn handwheel A forwardsorbackwards.
Seatheight:
X
Pull handle ? upwards or push it down
repeatedly untilthe seathas reachedthe
desired height.
Seatcushion angle:
X
Adjust the angle so thatyourthighs are lightly
supported.
X
Turn handwheel = forwardsorbackwards.
Seatcushion length:
X
Lifthandle ; and slidethe front part of the
seatcushion forwardsorbackwards.
X
Releaselever ; again.
The seatcushion engages.
Adjustingthe seats electrically
:
Seatheight
;
Seatcushion angle
=
Seatfore-and-aft adjustment
?
Backrest angle
i
Youcan storethe seatsettings using the
memory function(
Y page 98).
Adjustingthe headrestraints
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Youcould lose controlofyourvehicleifyou do
the following whiledriving:
R
adjustthe driver'sseat, headrestraint,
steering wheelormirrors
R
fasten the seatbelt
There is ariskofanaccident.
Adjust the driver'sseat, headrestraint, steer-
ing wheeland mirror and fasten your seatbelt
before starting the engine.
G
WARNING
If the headrestraints are not installedornot
adjusted correctly, they cannotprovidepro-
tection as intended. There is an increased risk
of injury in the headand neck area, e.g.inthe
event of an accident or when braking.
Alwaysdrive with the headrestraints instal-
led. Before driving off, make sure for every
vehicleoccupant thatthe centerofthe head
restraint supports the back of the headat
abouteye level.
92
Seats
Seats, steering wheel andmirrors
Using the fore-and-aft adjustment, adjust the
head restraint so that it is as close as possible to
your head.
General notes
For vehicles with sports seats you cannot adjust
the front head restraints or the outer rear head
restraints.
Adjusting the head restraints manually
Adjusting the head restraint height
X
To raise: pull the head restraint up to the
desired position.
X
To lower: press release catch : in the direc-
tion of the arrow and push the head restraint
down to the desired position.
Adjusting the fore/aft position of the
head restraint
With this function you can adjust the distance
between the head restraint and the back of the
seat occupant's head.
X
To move forwards: pull the head restraint
forwards in the direction of the arrow until it
engages.
There are several notches.
X
To move backwards: press and hold release
button : and push the head restraint back-
wards.
X
When the head restraint is in the desired posi-
tion, release the button and make sure that
the head restraint is engaged in position.
Rear seat head restraints
Adjusting the rear seat head restraint
height
X
To raise: pull the head restraint up to the
desired position.
X
To lower: press release catch : and push
the head restraint down until it is in the
desired position.
Adjusting the 4-way lumbar support
You can adjust the contour of the front seat
backrests individually to provide optimum sup-
port for your back.
Seats
93
Seats, steering wheeland mirrors
Z
:
Raises thebackrest contour
;
Softensthe backrest contour
=
Lowers thebackrest contour
?
Hardensthe backrest contour
AMG Performance Seat
Vehicles withelectrically adjustable seats: to
adjust thecontourofthe seat and for improved
lateral support,you can individually adjust the
frontseats.
Adjusting thesidebolsters of theseatcush-
ion
X
To set thesidebolsters of theseatcush-
ion narrower: press button :.
X
To set thesidebolsters of theseatcush-
ion wider: press button ;.
Adjusting thesidebolsters of theseatback-
rest
X
To set thesidebolsters of theseatback-
restnarrower: press button =.
X
To set thesidebolsters of theseatback-
restwider: press button ?.
Switchingthe seatheating on/off
Switchingon/off
G
WARNING
Repeatedly switching on theseat heating can
causethe seat cushion and backrest pads to
become veryhot.The healthofpersonswith
limitedtemperature sensitivityoralimited
abilitytoreacttoexcessively high tempera-
tures may be affectedortheymay evensuffer
burn-like injuries. There is ariskofinjury.
Therefore,donot switch theseat heating on
repeatedly.
The three red indicator lampsinthe buttonindi-
catethe heating level you haveselected.
The system automatically switches down from
level 3 to level 2 after approximately eight
minutes.
The system automatically switches down from
level 2 to level 1 after approximately ten
minutes.
The system automatically switches off approx-
imately 20 minutesafter it is set to level 1.
X
Turn theSmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock(
Y page 124).
X
To switch on: press button : repeatedly
until thedesired heating level is set.
X
To switch off: press button : repeatedly
until all theindicator lampsgoout.
i
If thebattery voltageistoo low, theseat
heating may switch off.
94
Seats
Seats,steering wheel and mirrors
Problems with the seat heating
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The seat heating has
switched off prematurely
or cannot be switched
on.
The on-board voltage is too low because too many electrical consum-
ers are switched on.
X
Switch off electrical consumers that you do not need, such as the
rear window defroster or interior lighting.
Once the battery is sufficiently charged, the seat heating will switch
back on automatically.
Steering wheel
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
You could lose control of your vehicle if you do
the following while driving:
R
adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,
steering wheel or mirrors
R
fasten the seat belt
There is arisk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, head restraint,steer-
ing wheel and mirror and fasten your seat belt
before startingthe engine.
G
WARNING
Children could injure themselves if they
adjust the steering wheel. There is arisk of
injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
Adjusting the steering wheel
G
WARNING
If the steering wheel is unlocked while the
vehicle is in motion, it could change position
unexpectedly. This could cause you to lose
control of the vehicle. There is arisk of an
accident.
Before startingoff, make sure the steering
wheel is locked. Never unlock the steering
wheel while the vehicle is in motion.
:
Release lever
;
Adjuststhe steering wheel height
=
Adjuststhe steering wheel position (fore-
and-aft adjustment)
X
Push release lever : down completely.
The steering column is unlocked.
X
Adjust the steering wheel to the desired posi-
tion.
X
Push release lever : up completely.
The steering column is locked.
X
Check if the steering column is locked. When
doing so, try to push the steering wheel up or
down or try to move it in the fore-and-aft
direction.
Steering wheel
95
Seats, steering wheeland mirrors
Z
Mirrors
Rear-view mirror
X
Anti-glare mode: flick anti-glare lever : for-
wards or back.
Exterior mirrors
Adjusting the exterior mirrors
G
WARNING
You couldlose control of yourvehicleifyou do
the following while driving:
R
adjust the driver's seat, headrestraint,
steering wheelormirrors
R
fasten the seat belt
There is arisk of an accident.
Adjust the driver's seat, headrestraint, steer-
ing wheeland mirror and fasten yourseat belt
before starting the engine.
G
WARNING
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side reduces the size of the image. Visible
objects are actually closer than they appear.
This means that you couldmisjudge the dis-
tance from road users traveling behind, e.g.
when changing lane.There is arisk of an acci-
dent.
For this reason, alwaysmake sure of the
actualdistance from the road users traveling
behind by glancing over yourshoulder.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignitionlock (
Y page124).
X
Exterior mirror on the front-passenger side:
press button ;.
Exterior mirror on the driver's side:press but-
ton :.
The indicator lamp in the corresponding but-
ton lights up in red.
The indicator lamp goes out again after some
time. You can adjust the selected exterior
mirror using button = as long as the indicator
lamp is lit.
X
Press button = up, down, or to the right or
left until you have adjusted the exterior mirror
to the correct position. You should have a
good overview of traffic conditions.
The convex exterior mirrors provide alarger field
of vision.
After the engine has been started, the exterior
mirrors are automatically heated at low outside
temperatures. Heating takes amaximumoften
minutes.
i
You can alsoheatupthe exterior mirrors
manually by switching on the rear window
defroster.
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
electrically
This function is only available in Canada.
96
Mirrors
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 or 2 in the
ignition lock (
Y page 124).
X
Briefly press :.
Both exterior mirrors fold in or out.
i
Make sure that the exterior mirrors are
alwaysfolded out fully while driving. They
could otherwise vibrate.
i
If you are driving faster than 30 mph
(47 km/h), you can no longer fold in the exte-
rior mirrors.
Resetting the exterior mirrors
This function is only availableinCanada.
If the battery has been disconnected or com-
pletely discharged, the exterior mirrors must be
reset. The exterior mirrors will otherwise not
fold in when you select the "Fold in mirrors when
locking" function in the on-board computer
(
Y page 194).
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 124).
X
Briefly press :.
Folding the exterior mirrors in or out
automatically
This function is only availableinCanada.
If the "Fold in mirrors when locking" function is
activated in the on-board computer
(
Y page 194):
R
the exterior mirrors fold in automatically as
soon as you lock the vehicle from the outside.
R
the exterior mirrors fold out again automati-
cally as soon as you unlock the vehicle and
then open the driver's or front-passenger
door.
i
If the exterior mirrors have been folded in
manually, they do not fold out.
Exterior mirror pushed out of position
If an exterior mirror has been pushed out of
position, proceed as follows:
X
Vehicles without electrically folding exte-
rior mirrors: move the exterior mirror into
the correctposition manually.
X
Vehicles with electrically folding exterior
mirrors (Canada only): press and hold mir-
ror-folding button (
Y page 96) until you hear a
click and the mirror engages audiblyinto posi-
tion.
The mirror housing is engaged again and you
can adjust the exterior mirrors as usual
(
Y page 96).
Automatic anti-glaremirrors
G
WARNING
Electrolyte may escape if the glass in an auto-
matic anti-glare mirror breaks. The electrolyte
is harmful and causes irritation.Itmust not
come into contact with your skin, eyes, res-
piratory organs or clothingorbeswallowed.
There is arisk of injury.
If you come into contact with the electrolyte,
observe the following:
R
Rinse off the electrolyte from your skin
immediately with water.
R
Immediately rinse the electrolyte out of
your eyes thoroughly with clean water.
R
If the electrolyte is swallowed, immediately
rinse your mouth out thoroughly. Do not
induce vomiting.
R
If electrolyte comes into contact with your
skin or hair or is swallowed, seek medical
attention immediately.
R
Immediately change out of clothingwhich
has come into contact with electrolyte.
R
If an allergic reaction occurs, seek medical
attention immediately.
The "Automatic anti-glare mirrors" function is
only availableifthe vehicle is equipped with the
"Mirrors package".
Mirrors
97
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
The rear-view mirror and the exterior mirror on
the driver's side automatically go into anti-glare
mode if:
R
the ignition is switched on and
R
incident light from headlamps strikes the sen-
sor in the rear-view mirror
The mirrors do not go into anti-glare mode if
reverse gear is engaged or if the interior lighting
is switched on.
Parking position for the exterior mir-
ror on the front-passenger side
Setting and storing the parking position
You can set the front-passenger side exterior
mirror such that you can see the rear wheel on
that side as soon as you engage reverse gear.
You can store this position.
:
Button for the driver's side exterior mirror
;
Button for the front-passenger side exterior
mirror
=
Button for the exterior mirror setting
?
Memory button M
X
Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 124).
X
Press button ;.
X
Engage reverse gear.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side moves to the default parking position.
X
Use button = to adjust the exterior mirror to
aposition that allows you to see the rear
wheel and the curb.
The parking position is stored.
i
If you shift the transmission to another posi-
tion, the front-passenger side exterior mirror
returnstothe driving position.
Calling up astored parking position set-
ting
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 124).
X
Adjust the front-passenger side exterior mir-
ror using the corresponding button
(
Y page 96).
X
Engage reverse gear.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger
side moves to the stored parking position.
The exterior mirror on the front-passenger side
moves back to its original position:
R
as soon as you exceed aspeed of 9mph
(15 km/h)
R
about ten seconds after you have disengaged
reverse gear
R
when you use button : to select the exterior
mirror on the driver's side
Memory function
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you use the memory function on the driver's
side while driving, you could lose control of
the vehicle as aresult of the adjustments
being made. There is arisk of an accident.
Only use the memory function on the driver's
side when the vehicle is stationary.
G
WARNING
When the memory function adjusts the seat,
you and other vehicle occupants–particularly
children –could become trapped. There is a
risk of injury.
While the memory function is making adjust-
ments, make sure that no one has any body
parts in the sweep of the seat. If somebody
becomes trapped, immediately release the
memory function position button.The adjust-
ment process is stopped.
G
WARNING
Children could become trapped if they acti-
vate the memory function, particularly when
unattended. There is arisk of injury.
98
Memory function
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
When leaving the vehicle, alwaystake the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
The memory function can be used at any time,
e.g. even when the SmartKey is not in the igni-
tion lock.
Storing settings
With the memory function, you can store up to
three differentsettings, e.g. for three different
people.
The following settings are stored as asingle
memory preset:
R
seat and backrestposition
R
driver's side: position of the exterior mirrors
on the driver's and front-passenger sides
X
Adjust the seat (Y page 92).
X
Adjust the exterior mirror on the driver's side
(
Y page 96).
X
Briefly press the M memory button and then
press preset position button 1, 2 or 3 within
three seconds.
The settings are stored in the selected preset
position. Atonesounds when the settings
have been completed.
Calling up astored setting
X
Press and hold the relevant preset position
button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat and exterior
mirrors are in the stored position.
i
The setting procedure is interrupted as soon
as you release the storage position button.
Memoryfunction
99
Seats, steering wheel and mirrors
Z
Exteriorlighting
General notes
For reasonsofsafety, Mercedes-Benzrecom-
mends that you drivewith thelightsswitched on
even duringthe daytime. In somecountries,
operationofthe headlamps varies due to legal
requirementsand self-imposedobligations.
Settingthe exteriorlighting
Settingoptions
Exterior lighting can be set usingthe:
R
light switch
R
combinationswitch (Y page 102)
R
on-board computer(Y page 193)
Light switch
Operation
1 W
Left-handstanding lamps
2 X
Right-hand standing lamps
3 T
Parking lamps,licenseplateand
instrumentclusterlighting
4 Ã
Automatic headlampmode, controlled
by thelight sensor
5L
Low-beam/high-beam headlamps
B R
Rear fog lamp
C N
Fog lamp (only vehicleswith frontfog
lamps)
If you hear awarning tone when you leave the
vehicle,the lightsmay still be switched on.
X
Turn thelight switch to the à position.
The exteriorlighting (exceptthe parking/stand-
ing lamps)switches off automaticallyifyou:
R
remove theSmartKey from theignition lock
R
open thedriver'sdoor with theSmartKey in
position 0 in theignition lock
Automatic headlamp mode
à is thefavoredlight switch setting. The light
settingisautomaticallyselectedaccording to
thebrightnessofthe ambient light (exception:
poor visibilitydue to weather conditionssuchas
fog,snoworspray):
R
SmartKey in position 1 in theignition lock: the
parking lamps are switched on/offautomat-
icallydependingonthe brightnessofthe
ambient light.
R
Withthe engine running: if you have switched
on the DaytimeRunningLights
function
via theon-board computer, thedaytime run-
ninglamps or theparking lamps and low-
beam headlamps are switched on or off auto-
maticallydependingonthe brightnessofthe
ambient light.
X
To switch on theautomatic headlamp
mode: turnthe light switch to the à posi-
tion.
G
WARNING
When thelight switch is set to Ã,the low-
beam headlamps may notbeswitched on
automaticallyifthere is fog,snoworother
causes of poor visibilitydue to theweather
conditionssuchasspray. Thereisarisk of an
accident.
In suchsituations,turnthe light switch to
L.
The automatic headlampfeature is only an aid.
The driver is responsible for thevehicle's light-
ing at all times.
Canada only:
The daytime runninglamps improve thevisibility
of your vehicle duringthe day. The daytime run-
ninglamps function is required by law in Can-
ada. It cannottherefore be deactivated.
When theengine is runningand thevehicle is
stationary: if you movethe selectorleverfroma
driveposition to P,the daytime runninglamps/
low-beam headlamps go out after three
minutes.
100
Exterior lighting
Lightsand windshield wipers
When the engine is running, the vehicle is sta-
tionary and in bright ambient light: if you turn the
light switch to the T position, the daytime
running lamps and parking lamps are switched
on.
If the engine is running and you turn the light
switch to the L position, the manual settings
take precedence over the daytime running
lamps.
USA only:
The daytime running lamps improve the visibility
of your vehicle during the day. To do this, the
daytime running lamps function must be
switched on using the on-board computer
(
Y page 193).
If the engine is running and you turn the light
switch to the T or L position, the manual
settings take precedence over the daytime run-
ning lamps.
Low-beam headlamps
Even if the light sensor does not detect that it is
dark, the parking lamps and low-beam head-
lamps come on when the ignition is switched on
and the light switch is set to the L position.
This is aparticularly useful function in the event
of rain and fog.
X
To switch on the low-beam headlamps:
turn the SmartKey in the ignition lock to posi-
tion 2 or start the engine.
X
Turn the light switch to L.
The green L indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up.
Front fog lamps
In conditions where visibility is poor due to fog,
snow or rain, the fog lamps improve visibility as
well as making it easier for other road users to
see you. They can be operated together with the
parking lamps or with the parking lamps and
low-beam headlamps.
X
To switch on the fog lamps: turn the Smart-
Key in the ignition lock to position 2 or start
the engine.
X
Turn the light switch to L or Ã.
X
Press the N button.
The green N indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up.
X
To switch off the fog lamps: press the N
button.
The green N indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster goes out.
Rear fog lamp
The rear fog lamp improves visibility of your
vehicle for the traffic behind in the event of thick
fog. Please take noteofthe country-specific
regulations for the
use of rear fog lamps.
X
To switch on the rear fog lamp: turn the
SmartKey in the ignition lock to position 2 or
start the engine.
X
Turn the light switch to L or Ã.
X
Press the R button.
The yellow R indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up.
X
To switch off the rear fog lamp: press the
R button.
The yellow R indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster goes out.
Parking lamps
!
If the batterycharge is very low, the parking
lamps or standinglamps are automatically
switched off to enable the next engine start.
Always park your vehicle safely and in awell lit
area, in accordance with the relevant legal
stipulations. Avoid using the T parking
lamps over aperiod of several hours. If pos-
sible, switch on the right-hand X or left-
hand W standinglamps.
X
To switch on: turn the light switch to T.
The green T indicator lamp in the instru-
ment cluster lights up.
Standing lamps
Switching on the standinglamps ensures the
corresponding side of the vehicle is illuminated.
X
To switch on the standing lamps: the
SmartKey should not be in the ignition lock or
it should be in position 0.
X
Turn the light switch to W (left-hand side of
the vehicle) or X (right-hand side of the
vehicle).
Exterior lighting
101
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
Combination switch
X
To indicatebriefly: pressthe combination
switch briefly to thepressure pointinthe
direction of arrow ; or ?.
The correspondingturnsignal flashes three
times.
X
To indicate: pressthe combinationswitch
beyondthe pressure pointinthe direction of
arrow ; or ?.
X
To switch on thehigh-beamheadlamps:
turnthe light switch to L or Ã.
X
Press thecombinationswitch beyondthe
pressure pointinthe direction of arrow :.
The high-beam headlamps only switch on in
the à positionifthe low-beam headlamps
are on.
The blue K indicator lamp in theinstru-
mentclusterlightsupwhen thehigh-beam
headlamps are switched on.
X
To switch off thehigh-beamhead-
lamps:move thecombinationswitch back to
its normal position.
The blue K indicator lamp in theinstru-
mentclustergoes out.
X
To switch on thehigh-beamflasher: pull
thecombinationswitch in thedirection of
arrow =.
Hazard warning lamps
X
To switch on thehazardwarning lamps:
pressbutton :.
All turnsignals flash. If you nowswitch on a
turnsignal usingthe combinationswitch,only
theturnsignal lamp on thecorresponding
side of thevehicle will flash.
X
To switch off thehazardwarning lamps:
pressbutton :.
The hazard warning lamps automaticallyswitch
on if:
R
an air bag is deployed or
R
thevehicle deceleratesrapidly from aspeed
of above45mph (70 km/h) and comes to a
standstill
The hazard warning lamps switch off automati-
cally if thevehicle reaches aspeedofabove
6mph (10 km/h) again after afull brakeappli-
cation.
The hazard warning lamps still operate if the
ignition is switched off.
Cornering lightfunction
The corneringlight function improvesthe illu-
minationofthe road overawide angle in the
102
Exterior lighting
Lightsand windshield wipers
direction you are turning, enabling better visi-
bility in tight bends, for example. It can only be
activated when the low-beam headlamps are
switched on.
Active:
R
if you are driving at speeds below 25 mph
(40km/h) and switch on theturnsignal or
turnthe steering wheel
R
if you are driving at speeds between 25 mph
(40 km/h) and 45 mph (70 km/h) and turn
thesteering wheel
The cornering lamp may remain lit for ashort
time, but is automatically switched off after no
morethanthree minutes.
Headlampsfogged up on theinside
Certain climatic and physical conditionsmay
causemoisturetoforminthe headlamp. This
moisturedoes notaffect thefunctionalityofthe
headlamp.
Interior lighting
Overview of interior lighting
Frontoverheadcontrol panel
:
p Switches theleft-hand frontreading
lamp on or off
;
c Switches thefront interiorlighting on
=
v Switches therear interiorlighting on or
off
?
| Switches thefront interiorlighting/
automatic interiorlighting control off
A
p Switches theright-handfront reading
lamp on or off
B
Switches theautomatic interiorlighting con-
trol on
Rearcompartment control panel
Vehicleswith apanoramaroofwith power tilt/slid-
ing panel
:
p Switches thereading lamp on or off
Vehicleswithout apanoramaroofwith power tilt/
slidingpanel
:
p Switches theleft-hand reading lamp
on/off
;
p Switches theright-handreading lamp
on/off
Interior lighting control
General notes
In ordertoprevent thevehicle's battery from
discharging,the interiorlighting functionsare
automatically deactivatedafter sometime
except when theSmartKey is in position 2 in the
ignition lock.
The color and brightnessfor theambient lighting
may be set via themultimedia system; see the
separate operatinginstructions.
Interior lighting
103
Lightsand windshield wipers
Z
Automaticinterior lighting control
X
To switch on: set theswitch to center posi-
tion B.
X
To switch off: set theswitch to the |
position.
The interior lighting automatically switches on if
you:
R
unlockthe vehicle
R
open adoor
R
remove theSmartKey from theignition lock
The interior lightisactivated for ashort while
when theSmartKey is removedfromthe ignition
lock. This delayedswitch-off can be adjusted via
themultimedia system; see theseparateoper-
ating instructions.
Replacing bulbs
Important safety notes
Xenon bulbs:
G
DANGER
Xenon bulbs carry ahigh voltage. You can get
an electric shock if you remove thecover of
theXenon bulb and touch theelectrical con-
tacts.There is ariskoffatal injury.
Never touch thepartsorthe electrical con-
tacts of theXenon bulb. Always haveworkon
theXenon bulbs carriedout at aqualified spe-
cialist workshop.
If your vehicleisequipped withXenon bulbs,you
can recognizethisbythe following: theconeof
lightfromthe Xenon bulbs moves from thetop
to thebottomand backagain when you start the
engine. Forthistobeobserved, thelights must
be switched on before starting theengine.
Headlamps and lights are an important aspect of
vehiclesafety. You mustthereforemakesure
that these function correctlyatall times.Have
theheadlamp setting checkedregularly.
Other bulbs:
G
WARNING
Bulbs, lampsand connectors can get veryhot
when operating.Ifyou changeabulb, you
could burn yourself on these components.
There is ariskofinjury.
Allow these componentstocooldown before
changing abulb.
Do notuse abulb if it has been dropped or if its
glasstubehas been scratched.
The bulb may explodeif
R
you touch it
R
it is hot
R
you dropit
R
you scratch it
Use bulbs only in closed lampsthathavebeen
designed for this purpose.Onlyinstallspare
bulbs of thesametypeand thespecifiedvolt-
age.
Marks on theglasstubereduce theservicelife
of thebulbs.Donot touch theglasstubewith
your bare hands. If necessary, clean theglass
tubewhen cold withalcohol or spirit and rub it
off withalint-free cloth.
Protect bulbs from moisture during operation.
Do notallow bulbs to come intocontactwith
liquids.
Besidesthe Xenon bulbs,there are other bulbs
that you cannotreplace yourself.Replaceonly
thebulbs listed (
Y page 104). Havethe bulbs
that you cannotchangeyourself replacedata
qualified specialist workshop.
If you require assistancereplacing bulbs,con-
sult aqualified specialist workshop.
If thenew bulb still does notlightup, consult a
qualified specialist workshop.
Headlamps and lights are an important aspect of
vehiclesafety. You mustthereforemakesure
that these function correctlyatall times.Have
theheadlamp setting ch
eckedregularly.
Overview of bulbtypes
You can replace thefollowingbulbs.The bulb
typecan be foundinthe legend.
104
Replacingbulbs
Lightsand windshield wipers
Vehicles with halogenheadlamps
:
Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W
;
High-beam headlamps/daytime running
lamps/parking lamps/standing lamps:
H15 55 W/15 W
=
Low-beam headlamps: H15 55 W
Vehicles with Bi-Xenon headlamps
:
Cornering lamp: H7 55 W
Tail lamps (vehicles with halogenheadlamps)
:
Backup lamp: W16W
;
Turn signal lamp: PY 21 W
=
Brake lamp: W16W
?
Rearfog lamp: H21W
Replacing front bulbs
Removing and installingthe coverinthe
front wheelhousing
You must remove the cover of the front wheel
housing before you can change the front turn
signal lamp.
X
To remove: switch off the lights.
X
Turn the front wheelsinwards.
X
Slide cover : up and remove it.
X
To install:insert cover : againand slide it
down until it engages.
Low-beam headlamps (halogenhead-
lamps)
X
Remove the cover in the front wheel housing
(
Y page 105).
X
Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and
remove it.
X
Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and
pull out.
X
Pull the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
X
Insert the new bulb into bulb holder ;.
X
Insert bulb holder ; and turn it clockwise.
Replacing bulbs
105
Lights and windshieldwipers
Z
X
Press on housing cover : and turn it to the
right.
X
Replace the cover in the frontwheel housing
(
Y page 105).
High-beam headlamps/daytime run-
ning lamps/parking lampsand stand-
ing lamps(halogen headlamps)
X
Switchoff the lights.
X
Open the hood.
X
Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and
remove it.
X
Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and
pull out.
X
Insert the new bulb and engage it to the stop.
X
Press on housing cover : and turn it to the
right.
Turnsignals (halogen headlamps)
X
Switchoff the lights.
X
Open the hood.
X
Turn bulb holder : counter-clockwise and
pull out.
X
Turn the bulb counter-clockwise and pull it
out of bulb holder :.
X
Insert the new bulb into bulb holder :.
X
Insert bulb holder : and turn it clockwise
until it engages.
Cornering light function (Xenon bulbs)
X
Switchoff the lights.
X
Open the hood.
X
Turn housing cover : counter-clockwise and
remove it.
X
Turn bulb holder ; counter-clockwise and
pull out.
X
Pull the bulb out of bulb holder ;.
X
Insert new bulb into bulb holder ;.
X
Insert bulb holder ; and turn it clockwise.
X
Press on housing cover : and turn it to the
right.
Replacing rear bulbs
Opening and closing the side trim pan-
els
Left-hand side trim panel
You must open the side trim panel in the cargo
compartment before you can replace the bulbs
in the tail lamps.
106
Replacing bulbs
Lights and windshield wipers
X
To open: turn release knob : counter-clock-
wise and remove side trim panel ;.
X
To close: insert side trim panel ; and turn
release knob : clockwise.
Right-hand side trim panel
Youmustopenthe side trim panel in the cargo
compartment before youcan replace the bulbs
in the taillamps.
X
To open: release right-hand trim panel : at
the top and folditdowninthe direction of the
arrow.
X
To close: replace side paneling :.
Tail lamps
Due to theirlocation, have the bulbsinthe
backup lamp (vehicleswithhalogen headlamps)
and rearfog lamp in the tailgate changed at a
qualified specialist workshop.
X
Switch off the lights.
X
Openthe cargo compartment.
X
Openthe side trim panel (Y page 106).
X
Releaseand remove connector ;.
X
Holdthe taillampand unscrew fender nut :.
X
Remove the taillamp.
Tail lamps
X
Loosen screws = using ascrewdriver.
X
Remove the bulb holderfrom the taillamp.
Bulbholder
?
Turn signals
A
Brake lamp
X
Turn signal: press the bulb gentlyinto the
bulb holder, turn it counter-clockwiseand
remove it from the bulb holder.
X
Insert the new bulb into the bulb holderand
turn it clockwise.
X
Brake lamp: remove the corresponding bulb
from the bulb holder.
X
Insert the new bulb into the bulb holder.
X
Insert the bulb holderinto the taillampand
screwitfirmly into place using screws =.
X
Insert the taillampinto the vehicle.
X
Tightenfender nut : and re-establishcon-
tact with connector ;.
X
Close the side trim panel (Y page 106).
Replacingbulbs
107
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
Windshield wipers
Switchingthe windshield wipers
on/off
!
Do not operate the windshield wipers when
the windshield is dry, as this coulddamage
the wiper blades. Moreover, dustthat has col-
lected on the windshield can scratch the glass
if wiping takes place whenthe windshield is
dry.
If it is necessary to switch on the windshield
wipers in dry weather conditions, alwaysuse
washer fluidwhenoperating the windshield
wipers.
!
If the windshield wipers leave smears on the
windshield after the vehiclehas been washed
in an automatic car wash, waxorother resi-
duesmay be the reason for this. Clean the
windshield using washer fluidafter washing
the vehicleinanautomatic car wash.
Combinationswitch
1
$ Windshieldwiper off
2
Ä Intermittent wipe, low (rainsensor set
to low sensitivity)
3
Å Intermittent wipe, high (rainsensor
set to high sensitivity)
4
° Continuous wipe, slow
5
¯ Continuous wipe, fast
B
í Single wipe/î Wipes the wind-
shield using washer fluid
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Turn the combination switch to the corre-
sponding position.
!
Vehicles with arainsensor: if the windshield
becomesdirty in dry weather conditions, the
windshield wipers may be activated inadver-
tently. This couldthen damage the windshield
wiper blades or scratch the windshield.
For this reason, you should alwaysswitch off
the windshield wipers in dry weather.
Vehicles with arain sensor: in the Ä or Å
position, the appropriate wiping frequency is
automatically set according to the intensity of
the rain. In the Å position, the rain sensor is
more sensitive than in the Ä position, caus-
ing the windshield wiper to wipemore fre-
quently.
If the wiper blades are worn, the windshield will
no longerbewiped properly.This couldprevent
you from observing the traffic conditions.
Switchingthe rear window wiper on/
off
Combinationswitch
:
è Switch
2
ô Wipes with washer fluid
3
I Switches on intermittent wiping
4
0 Switches off intermittent wiping
5
ô Wipes with washer fluid
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Slideswitch : on the combination switch to
the corresponding position.
When the rear window wiper is switched on,
the è symbol appears in the assistance
graphic in the instrument cluster. Further
information on the assistance graphic
(
Y page191).
108
Windshieldwipers
Lights and windshield wipers
Replacing the wiper blades
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If the windshield wipersbegin to move while
youare changing the wiper blades, youcould
be trapped by the wiper arm.There is ariskof
injury.
Alwaysswitch off the windshield wipersand
ignition before changing the wiper blades.
!
To avoid damaging the wiper blades, make
sure that youtouch only the wiper arm of the
wiper.
!
Neveropenthe hood/tailgate if awiper arm
hasbeenfolded away from the windshield/
rearwindow.
Neverfoldawindshield wiper arm withouta
wiper bladebackonto the windshield/rear
window.
Holdthe windshield wiper arm firmly when
youchange the wiper blade. If yourelease the
wiper arm withoutawiper bladeand it falls
onto the windshield/rearwindow,the wind-
shield/rear window may be damaged by the
force of the impact.
Mercedes-Benz recommendsthat youhave
the wiper blades changed at aqualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Changingthe windshield wiper blades
Removingthe wiper blades
X
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO or KEY-
LESS-GOstart function: remove the Smart-
Key from the ignition lock.
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-
GO start function: switch off the engine.
X
Foldthe wiper arm away from the windshield.
X
Holdontothe wiper arm with one hand. With
the otherhand, turn wiper bladeindirection
of arrow : away from the wiper arm as far as
it will go.
X
Slide catch ; in the direction of arrow =
untilitengages in the removal position with a
noticeable click.
X
Remove the wiper bladeinthe direction of
arrow ? away from the wiper arm.
Installing the wiper blades
X
Insert the new wiper bladeinto the wiper arm
in the direction of arrow :.
Windshieldwipers
109
Lights and windshield wipers
Z
X
Slide catch ; in the direction of arrow =
untilitengages in the locking position with a
noticeable click.
X
Make sure that the wiper bladeisseated cor-
rectly.
X
Foldthe wiper arm back onto the windshield.
X
Remove protectivefilm : of the service indi-
catoronthe tip of the wiper blade.
If the color of the service indicator changes from
black to yellow,the wiper blades shouldbe
replaced.
i
The duration of the color change varies
depending on the usageconditions.
Replacing the rear windowwiper blade
Removingawiper blade
X
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO or KEY-
LESS-GOstart function: remove the Smart-
Key from the ignition lock.
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or KEYLESS-
GO start function: switch off the engine.
X
Foldwiper arm ? away from the rearwindow.
X
Press both release clips ;.
X
Foldwiper blade : in the direction of
arrow = away from wiper arm ?.
X
Remove wiper blade : in the direction of
arrow A.
Installing awiper blade
X
Position new wiper blade : with recess B
on lug A.
X
Foldwiper blade : in the direction of
arrow = onto the wiper arm,untilretaining
clips ; engage in bracket ?.
X
Make sure that wiper blade : is seated cor-
rectly.
X
Foldthe wiper arm back onto the rearwin-
dow.
110
Windshieldwipers
Lights and windshield wipers
Problems with the windshield wipers
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The windshield wipers
are jammed.
Leaves or snow, for example, may be obstructing the windshield wiper
movement.The wiper motor has been deactivated.
X
For safety reasons, you should remove the SmartKey from the igni-
tion lock.
X
Remove the cause of the obstruction.
X
Switch the windshield wipers back on.
The windshield wipers
fail completely.
The windshield wiper drive is malfunctioning.
X
Select another wiper speed on the combination switch.
X
Have the windshield wipers checked at aqualified specialist work-
shop.
The windshield washer
fluid from the spray noz-
zles no longer hits the
center of the windshield.
The spray nozzles are misaligned.
X
Have the spray nozzles adjusted at aqualified specialist workshop.
Windshield wipers
111
Lights and windshieldwipers
Z
Overview of climatecontrol systems
General notes
Observe the settings recommended on the fol-
lowing pages. The windows could otherwise fog
up.
To preventthe windows from fogging up:
R
switch off climate control only briefly
R
switch on air-recirculation mode only briefly
R
switch on the cooling with air dehumidifica-
tion function
R
switch on the defrost windshield function
briefly, if required
The air-conditioningsystem or dual-zoneauto-
matic climate control regulates the temperature
and the humidity of the vehicle interior and fil-
ters undesirable substances from the air.
The air-conditioningsystem or dual-zoneauto-
matic climate control can only be operated
when the engineisrunning. Optimum operation
is only achieved with the side windows and pan-
orama roof with power tilt/sliding panel closed.
If you start the engine using your smartphone,
the last selected climate control setting is reac-
tivated (
Y page 125).
The residual heat function can only be activated
or deactivated with the ignition switched off
(
Y page 121).
Always keep the ventilation flaps behind the
side trim panel in the cargo compartment clear
(
Y page 106). Otherwise the vehicle will not be
ventilated correctly.
i
Ventilate the vehicle for abrief period during
warm weather, e.g. using the convenience
opening feature (
Y page 82). This will speed
up the cooling process and the desired inte-
rior temperature will be reached more
quickly.
i
The integrated filter filters out most parti-
cles of dust and soot and completely filters
out pollen. It also reduces gaseous pollutants
and odors. Aclogged filter reduces the
amount of air supplied to the vehicle interior.
For this reason, you should alwaysobserve
the interval for replacing the filter, which is
specified in the Maintenance Booklet. As it
depends on environmental conditions,e.g.
heavy air pollution, the interval may be
shorter than stated in the Maintenance Book-
let.
i
It is possible that under certain circumstan-
ces the residual heat function may be activa-
ted automatically an hour after the SmartKey
has been removed in order to dry the
auto-
matic
climate control. The vehicle is then ven-
tilated for 30 minutes.
112
Overview of climatecontrol systems
Climatecontrol
Air-conditioningsystem control panel
USAonly
:
Sets thetemperature (Y page 118)
;
Defroststhe windshield (Y page 119)
=
Sets theair distribution (Y page 118)
?
Switches air-recirculation modeon/off(Y page 121)
A
Sets theairflow (Y page 119)
B
Switches coolingwithair dehumidification on/off (Y page 117)
C
Switches therear window defrosteron/off(Y page 120)
Canada only
:
Sets thetemperature (Y page 118)
;
Defroststhe windshield (Y page 119)
=
Sets theair distribution (Y page 118)
?
Switches air-recirculation modeon/off(Y page 121)
A
Sets theairflow (Y page 119)
Overview of climatecontrolsystems
113
Climatecontrol
B
Switches cooling with airdehumidification on/off (Y page 117)
C
Switches the rearwindow defrosteron/off (Y page 120)
Notesonusing the air-conditioning
system
Air-conditioning system
Below,you can find anumber of notes and rec-
ommendations to helpyou usethe air-condi-
tioning system optimally.
R
Switch on the air-conditioning system by turn-
ing control knob A clockwise to the desired
position (except position 0).
R
Set the temperature to 72 ‡(22 †).
R
Recommendation for avoiding misted
windows at lowexteriortemperatures or
in rain: switch on the ¿ cooling with dehu-
midification function (
Y page 117).
Set airdistribution to ¯ and if possible
switch off P and O (
Y page 118).
Deactivate air-recirculation mode e
(
Y page 121).
Set airflowcontrol A to asetting between 3
and 6 (
Y page 119).
R
Recommendation for rapid coolingor
heating of the vehicle interior: brieflyset
airflowcontrol A to asetting between 3 and
6 (
Y page 119).
R
Recommendation for aconstantvehicle
interior temperature: set airflowcontrol A
to asetting between 1 and 3 (
Y page 119).
R
Recommendation for air distributionin
winter: select the O and ¯ settings
(
Y page 118).
Recommendation for air distributionin
summer: select the P or P and ¯
settings (
Y page 118).
R
Only usethe "Windshielddefrosting" function
brieflyuntilthe windshield is clear again.
R
Only useair-recirculation modebriefly, e.g. if
there are unpleasant outsideodors or when in
atunnel.T
he windowsco
uld otherwise fog up,
since no freshair is drawn into the vehiclein
air-recirculation mode.
R
If youchange the settings of the climate con-
trol system, the climate statusdisplay
appears for approximately three seconds at
the bottomofthe screen in the multimedia
system display;see separate operating
instructions.You will see the current settings
of the various climate control functions.
DYNAMICSELECT button(except
Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
You can choose between various drive programs
with the DYNAMIC SELECT button
(
Y page 130).
If youhaveselected drive program E:
R
when heating, the electrical heater booster is
deactivated and in the warming-up phase
heatoutputisreduced
R
the rearwindow defrosterrunning time is
reduced
Depending on the configuration, climate set-
tings may also be influenced in the drive pro-
gram I.
If youhaveselected drive program C or S,cli-
mate settings are not influenced.
ECOstart/stop function
During automatic engine switch-off, the climate
control system only operatesatareducedcapa-
city.Ifyou require the fullclimate control output,
youcan switch off the ECO start/stop function
by pressing the ECO button (
Y page 129).
114
Overviewofclimate control systems
Climate control
Control panel for dual-zone automatic climatecontrol
USAonly
:
Setsthe temperature, left (Y page 118)
;
Setsclimate control to automatic (Y page 118)
=
Defroststhe windshield (Y page 119)
?
Increases theairflow (Y page 119)
A
Setsthe air distribution (Y page 118)
B
Display
C
Switches air-recirculation modeon/off(Y page 121)
D
Activates/deactivatesclimate control (Y page 117)
E
Setsthe temperature, right(Y page 118)
F
Activatesordeactivatesmaximum cooling(Y page 120)
G
Switches coolingwithair dehumidification on/off(Y page 117)
H
Reduces theairflow (Y page 119)
I
Switches therear window defrosteron/off(Y page 120)
J
Switches theZONE function on/off(Y page 119)
Overview of climatecontrol systems
115
Climate control
Canada only
:
Setsthe temperature, left (Y page 118)
;
Setsclimate control to automatic (Y page 118)
=
Defroststhe windshield (Y page 119)
?
Increases theairflow (Y page 119)
A
Setsthe air distribution (Y page 118)
B
Display
C
Switches air-recirculationmode on/off(Y page 121)
D
Activates/deactivatesclimate control (Y page 117)
E
Setsthe temperature, right(Y page 118)
F
Switches theresidual heat on or off (Y page 121)
G
Switches cooling with air dehumidification on/off(Y page 117)
H
Reduces theairflow (Y page 119)
I
Switches therear window defroster on/off(Y page 120)
J
Switches theZONE function on/off(Y page 119)
Optimumuse of 3-zone automatic cli-
mate control
Climatecontrol system
The followingcontainsinstructionsand recom-
mendationstoenable you to get themostout of
your dual-zone automatic climate control.
R
Activate climate control usingthe à and
¿ buttons. The indicator lamps in the
à and ¿ buttonslight up.
R
Set thetemperatureto72‡(22 †).
R
Only use the"Windshield defrosting" function
briefly until thewindshield is clear again.
R
Only use air-recirculation modebriefly, e.g.if
there are unpleasantoutside odorsorwhen in
atunnel. The windows could otherwise fog up,
since no fresh air is drawn intothe vehicle in
air-recirculation mode.
R
Use theZONE function to adopt thetemper-
aturesettings on thedriver'sside for the
front-passenger side as well. The indicator
lamp in the á buttongoes out.
R
Use theresidual heat function if you want to
heat or ventilate thevehicle interiorwhen the
ignition is switched off.The residual heat
function can only be activated or deactivated
withthe ignition switched off.
R
If you changethe settings of theclimate con-
trol system, theclimate status display
appearsfor approximately three seconds at
thebottomofthe screeninthe multimedia
system display; see separate operating
116
Overview of climatecontrol systems
Climatecontrol
instructions.You will see the current settings
of the various climatecontrol functions.
DYNAMIC SELECT button (except
Mercedes-AMGvehicles)
You can choose betweenvarious drive programs
with the DYNAMICSELECTbutton
(
Y page 130).
If you have selected drive program E:
R
when heating, the electrical heaterbooster is
deactivatedand in the warming-up phase
heat output is reduced
R
the rear window defroster running timeis
reduced
Dependingonthe configuration, climateset-
tings may also be influenced in the drive pro-
gram I.
If you have selected drive program C or S,cli-
mate settings are not influenced.
ECO start/stop function
Duringautomatic engineswitch-off, the climate
control system only operates at areduced capa-
city. If you require the full climatecontrol output,
you can switchoff the ECO start/stopfunction
by pressing the ECO button (
Y page 129).
Operating theclimate control sys-
tems
Activating/deactivating climate con-
trol
General notes
When the climatecontrol is switched off,the air
supply and air circulation are also switched off.
The windows could fog up. Therefore, switchoff
climatecontrol only briefly
Air-conditioning system
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 124).
X
To switch on: turn control A clockwise to
the desiredposition (except position 0)
(
Y page 113).
X
To switch off: turn control A counter-clock-
wise to position 0 (
Y page 113).
Dual-zone automatic climate control
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 124).
X
To activate: press the à button.
The indicator lamp in the à button lights
up. Airflow and air distribution are set to auto-
matic mode.
or
X
Press the ^ button.
The indicator lamp in the ^ button goes
out. The previously selected settings are
restored.
X
To deactivate: press the ^ button.
The indicator lamp in the ^ button lights
up.
i
Dual-zoneautomatic climatecontrol: switch
on climatecontrol primarily using the Ã
button.
Switchingcooling with air dehumidi-
fication on/off
General notes
If you deactivatethe "Cooling with air-dehumid-
ification" function,the air insidethe vehicle will
not be cooled. The air insidethe vehicle will also
not be dehumidified. The windows can fog up
more quickly. Therefore, only deactivatethe
"Cooling with air-dehumidification" function
briefly.
The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function
is only available when the engineisrunning. The
air insidethe vehicle is cooledand dehumidified
accordingtothe temperature selected.
Condensationmay drip fromthe underside of
the vehicle when it is in coolingmode. This is
normal and not asign that there is amalfunc-
tion.
Activating/deactivating
X
Press the ¿ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¿ button lights
up or goes out.
The indicator lamp in the button indicates that
the respective function is activated. The
"Cooling with air dehumidification" function
has adelayed switch-off feature.
Operating theclimate control systems
117
Climate control
Problems with the "Cooling with air dehumidification" function
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The indicator lamp in the
¿ button flashes
three times or remains
off. The "Cooling with air
dehumidification" func-
tion cannot be switched
on.
Cooling with air dehumidification has been deactivated due to amal-
function.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
Setting climate control to automatic
General notes
The automatic climate control function is only
available in conjunction with dual-zone auto-
matic climate control.
In automatic mode, the set temperature is main-
tained automatically at aconstant level. The
system automatically regulates the temperature
of the dispensed air, the airflow and the air dis-
tribution.
The "Cooling with air dehumidification" function
is activated automatically in automatic mode.
Setting climate control to automatic
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 124).
X
Set the desired temperature.
X
To activate: press the à button.
The indicator lamp in the à button lights
up. Automatic air distribution and airflow are
activated.
X
To switch to manualmode:press the É
or Ë button.
or
X
Press the K or I button.
The indicator lamp in the à button goes
out. Automatic air distribution and airflow are
deactivated.
Setting the temperature
Air-conditioning system
You can set the temperature for the entire vehi-
cle. The set temperature is automatically main-
tained at aconstant level.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 124).
X
To increase or reduce: turn control : coun-
ter-clockwise or clockwise (
Y page 113). Only
change the temperature settinginsmall
increments. Start at 72 ‡(22 †).
Dual-zone automatic climate control
Differenttemperatures can be set for the driv-
er's and front-passenger sides. The set temper-
ature is automatically maintained at aconstant
level.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 124).
X
To increase or decrease: turn control : or
E counter-clockwise or clockwise
(
Y page 115). Only change the temperature
settinginsmall increments. Start at 72
(22 †).
Setting the air distribution
Air-conditioning system
Air distribution settings
¯
Directsair through the defroster vents
P
Directsair through the center and side air
vents
O
Directsair through the footwell air vents
118
Operating the climate control systems
Climatecontrol
i
You can also activate several air distribution
settings simultaneously. To do this,press
multiple air distribution buttons.The air is
thendirected through various vents.
i
Regardless of the air distribution setting,
airflow is always directed through the side air
vents. The side air vents can only be closedif
the adjusters are turned clockwise until they
engage.
Setting theair distribution
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 124).
X
Press one or more of the P, O, ¯
buttons.
The corresponding indicator lamp lightsup
briefly.
Dual-zone automatic climate control
Air distribution settings
¯
Directsair through the defrostervents
P
Directsair through the center and side air
vents
O
Directsair through the footwell air vents
S
Directsair through the center,side and
footwell vents
b
Directsair through the defroster, center
and side air vents
a
Directsair through the defrosterand
footwell vents
_
Directsair through the defroster, center,
side and footwell vents
i
Regardless of the air distribution setting,
airflow is always directed through the side air
vents. The side air vents can only be closedif
the adjusters are turned clockwise until they
engage.
Setting theair distribution
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 124).
X
Press the É or Ë button repeatedly
until the desired symbol appears in the dis-
play.
Setting theairflow
Air-conditioning system
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 124).
X
To increase or reduce: turn control A coun-
ter-clockwise or clockwise (
Y page 113).
Dual-zone automatic climate control
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 124).
X
To increase or reduce:press the K or
I button.
Switching theZONEfunction on/off
This function is only available with dual-zone
automatic climatecontrol.
X
To activate: press the á button.
The indicator lamp in the á button lights
up.
The temperature settingfor the driver's side
is not adoptedfor the front-passenger side.
X
To deactivate: press the á button.
The indicator lamp in the á button goes
out.
The temperature settingfor the driver's side
is adoptedfor the front-passenger side.
Defrosting thewindshield
Generalnotes
You can use this function to defrost the wind-
shield or to clear afoggedupwindshield and
side windows.
i
You should only selectthe "Windshield
defrosting" function until the windshield is
clear again.
Switching the"Windshield defrosting"
function on or off
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 124).
X
To activate: press the ¬ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button lights
up.
Operating theclimatecontrol systems
119
Climatecontrol
The climate control system switches to the
following functions:
R
high airflow
R
high temperature
R
air distribution to the windshield and front
side windows
R
air-recirculation mode off
i
The "Windshield defrosting" function auto-
matically sets the blower output to the opti-
mum defrosting effect.Asaresult, the airflow
may increase or decrease automatically after
the ¬ button is pressed.
i
You can adjust the blower output manually
while the "Windshield defrosting" function is
in operation:
R
Air-conditioning system: turn airflow con-
trol A counter-clockwise or clockwise
(
Y page 113).
R
Dual-zoneautomatic climate control: press
the ó or ô button.
X
To deactivate: press the ¬ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes
out. The previously selected settings are
restored. Air-recirculation mode remains
deactivated.
or
X
Dual-zoneautomatic climate control: press
the à button.
The indicator lamp in the ¬ button goes
out. Airflow and air distribution are set to
automatic mode.
or
X
Air-conditioning system: turn temperature
control : counter-clockwise or clockwise
(
Y page 113).
Dual-zoneautomatic climate control: turn
temperature control : or E counter-clock-
wise or clockwise (
Y page 115).
MAX COOL maximum cooling
The MAX COOL function is only availableinvehi-
cles for the USA.
MAX COOL is only operational when the engine
is running.
X
To activate: press the Ù button.
The indicator lamp in the button lights up.
X
To deactivate: press the Ù button.
The indicator lamp goes out. The previously
selected settings are restored.
When you activate MAX COOL, climate control
switches to the following functions:
R
maximum cooling
R
maximum airflow
R
air-recirculation mode on
Defrosting the windows
Windows fogged up on the inside
Air-conditioning system
X
Activate the ¿ "Cooling with air dehumid-
ification" function.
X
If the windows continue to fog up, activate the
¬ "Windshield defrosting" function.
i
You should only select this setting until the
windshield is clear again.
Dual-zone automatic climate control
X
Activate the ¿ "Cooling with air dehumid-
ification" function.
X
Activate automatic mode Ã.
X
If the windows continue to fog up, activate the
¬ "Windshield defrosting" function.
i
You should only select this setting until the
windshield is clear again.
Windows fogged up on the outside
X
Activate the windshield wipers.
X
Set the air distribution to P or O.
i
You should only select this setting until the
windshield is clear again.
Rear window defroster
General notes
The rear window defroster has ahigh current
draw. You should thereforeswitch it off as soon
as the rear window is clear. Otherwise, the rear
window defroster switches off automatically
after several minutes.
120
Operating the climate control systems
Climate control
If the battery voltage is too low, the rear window
defroster may switch off.
Activating/deactivating
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 124).
X
Press the ¤ button.
The indicator lamp in the ¤ button lights
up or goes out.
Problems with the rear window defroster
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The rear window
defroster has deactiva-
ted prematurely or can-
not be activated.
The battery has not been sufficiently charged.
X
Switch off any consumers that are not required, e.g. reading lamps,
interior lighting or the seat heating.
When the battery is sufficiently charged, the rear window defroster
can be activated again.
Switching air-recirculationmode
on/off
General notes
You can deactivate the flow of fresh air if
unpleasant odors are entering the vehicle from
outside. The air already inside the vehicle will
then be recirculated.
If you switch on air-recirculation mode, the win-
dows can fog up more quickly, in particular at
low temperatures. Only use air-recirculation
mode brieflytoprevent the windowsfrom fog-
ging up.
The operation of air-recirculation mode is the
same for all control panels.
Activating/deactivating
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 124).
X
To activate: press the e button.
The indicator lamp in the e button lights
up.
Dual-zone automatic climate control: air-
recirculation mode is activated automatically:
R
at high outsidetemperatures
R
at high levelsofpollution
When air-recirculation mode is activated auto-
matically, the indicator lamp in the e button
is not lit. Outside air is addedafter about
30 minutes.
X
To deactivate: press the e button.
The indicator lamp in the e button goes
out.
i Air-recirculation mode deactivates auto-
matically:
R
after approximately five minutes at outside
temperaturesbelowapproximately 45
(7 †)
R
after approximately five minutes if the
"Cooling with air dehumidification" func-
tion is deactivated
R
after approximately 30 minutes at outside
temperaturesabove approximately 45
(7 †) if the cooling with air dehumidifica-
tion function is activated
Switching the residual heat on or off
General notes
The residual heat function is only available in
vehiclesfor Canada with dual-zone automatic
climate control.
It is possible to make use of the residual heat of
the engine to continue heating the vehicle for
approximately 30 minutes after the engine has
been switched off. The heating time depends on
the set interior temperature.
i
The blower willrun at alow speed regardless
of the airflow setting.
Operating the climatecontrol systems
121
Climate control
i
If you activate the residual heat function at
high temperatures, only the ventilation willbe
activated. The blower runs at mediumspeed.
i
You cannot use the ventilation to cool the
vehicle interior to atemperature lowerthan
the outsidetemperature.
Activating/deactivating
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 0 in the ignition
lock or remove it (
Y page 124).
X
Press the Ì button.
The indicator lamp in the Ì button lights
up or goes out.
The indicator lamp in the button indicates that
the respective function is activated.
i Residualheat is deactivated automatically:
R
after approximately 30 minutes
R
when the ignition is switched on
R
if the battery voltage drops
Air vents
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Very hot or very cold air can flow from the air
vents. This could resultinburns or frostbite in
the immediate vicinity of the air vents. There
is arisk of injury.
Make sure that all vehicle occupants always
maintain asufficient distance to the air out-
lets. If necessary,redirect the airflow to
another area of the vehicle interior.
In order to ensure the direct flow of fresh air
through the air vents into the vehicle interior,
please observe the following notes:
R
keep the air inlet between the windshield and
the hood free of blockages, such as ice, snow
or leaves.
R
never cover the air vents or air intake grilles in
the vehicle interior.
i
For optimal climate control in the vehicle,
open the air vents completely and set the
adjusters to the central position.
Setting the air vents
:
Side window defroster vent
;
Side air vent
3
Side air vent open
4
Side air vent closed
X
To open aside air vent: turn the adjuster in
side air vent ; to the left in position 3.
X
To close aside air vent: turn the adjuster in
side air vent ; clockwise as far as it willgoto
position 4.
i
The center and rear air vents are adjusted in
the same way.
122
Airvents
Climate control
Notesonbreaking-in anew vehicle
Important safety notes
Thesensorsystemofsomedriving and driving
safety systems adjusts automaticallywhile a
certaindistance is being driven after the vehicle
hasbeendeliveredorafter repairs. Full system
effectiveness is not reacheduntilthe end of this
teach-inprocedure.
New and replaced brake pads and discs only
reach their optimum braking effect after several
hundred kilometers of driving. Compensate for
thisbyapplyinggreaterforce to the brake pedal.
The first 1000 miles (1500km)
Themoreyou look after the engine when it is
new,the moresatisfied youwillbewithits per-
formance in the future.
R
Youshouldtherefore drive at varying vehicle
and engine speeds for the first 1000 miles
(1500 km).
R
Avoidheavy loads, e.g.driving at full throttle,
during thisperiod.
R
Changegearingoodtime, beforethe tach-
ometer needleis Ô of the waytothe red area
of the tachometer.
R
Do not manuallyshift to alower gear to brake
the vehicle.
R
Try to avoiddepressing the accelerator pedal
beyond the point of resistance(kickdown).
R
Ideally,for the first 1000 miles(1500 km),
driveinprogram E.
Additional breaking-in notesfor Mercedes-AMG
vehicles:
R
Do notdrivefaster than 85 mph (140km/h)
for thefirst 1,000 miles (1,500 km).
R
Only allow theengine to reachamaximum
engine speedof4,500 rpm briefly.
R
Change gear in good time.
After1,000 miles (1,500 km), you can increase
theengine speedgradually and bringthe vehicle
to full speed.
You shouldalso observethese notesonbreak-
ing-in if theengine or partsofthe drivetrain on
your vehicle have been replaced.
Always observethe maximum permissible
speed.
Driving
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Objectsinthe driver'sfootwell can restrict the
pedal travel or obstructadepressedpedal.
The operatingand road safety of thevehicle is
jeopardized. Thereisarisk of an accident.
Makesure that all objectsinthe vehicle are
stowed correctly, and that they cannotenter
thedriver'sfootwell. Install thefloormats
securely and as specified in ordertoensure
sufficient clearance for thepedals.Donot use
loosefloormats and do notplace floormats on
topofone another.
G
WARNING
Unsuitable footwear can hinder correctusage
of thepedals,e.g.:
R
shoeswith thick soles
R
shoeswith high heels
R
slippers
Thereisarisk of an accident.
Wear suitable footwear to ensure correct
usage of thepedals.
G
WARNING
If you switch off theignition while driving,
safety-relevantfunctionsare only available
with limitations,ornot at all. This couldaffect,
for example, thepower steering and thebrake
boostingeffect.You will require considerably
moreeffort to steer and brake. Thereisarisk
of an accident.
Do notswitch off theignition while driving.
G
WARNING
If theparking brakehas notbeen fully
released when driving,the parking brakecan:
R
overheat and causeafire
R
lose its hold function.
Thereisarisk of fireand an accident. Release
theparking brakefully before driving off.
Driving
123
Driving and parking
Z
!
Do not warm up the engine with the vehicle
stationary. Drive off immediately.Avoid high
engine speeds and driving at full throttle until
the engine has reached its operating temper-
ature.
Only shift the automatic transmission to the
desired drive position when the vehicle is sta-
tionary.
Where possible,avoid spinning the drive
wheels when pulling awayonslippery roads.
You could otherwise damage the drive train.
!
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: avoid full-load
operation and engine speeds greater than
5000 rpm when the engine is cold. This helps
to protect the engine and avoids uncomfort-
able driving.
SmartKey positions
SmartKey
g
To remove the SmartKey
(shift the transmission to position P)
1
Power supplyfor some consumers, such as
the windshieldwipers
2
Ignition (power supplyfor all consumers)
and drive position
3
To start the engine
i
The SmartKey can be turned in the ignition
lock even if it is not the correct SmartKey for
the vehicle. The ignition is not switched on.
The engine cannot be started.
Start/Stop button
General notes
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO are equipped with
SmartKeys featuring the integrated KEYLESS-
GO function and adetachable Start/Stop but-
ton.
Acheck which periodically establishes aradio
connection between the vehicle and the Smart-
Key determines whether avalid SmartKey is in
the vehicle. This occurs, for example, when
starting the engine.
When you insert the Start/Stop button into the
ignition lock, the system needs approximately
two seconds recognition time. You can then use
the Start/Stop button.
Pressing the Start/Stop button several times in
succession corresponds to the different Smart-
Key positions in the ignition lock. This is only the
case if you are not depressing the brake pedal.
If you depress the brake pedal and press the
Start/Stop button, the engine starts immedi-
ately.
To start the vehicle without actively using the
SmartKey:
R
the Start/Stop button must be inserted in the
ignition lock.
R
the SmartKey must be in the vehicle.
R
the vehicle must not be locked with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO (
Y page 70)
Do not keep the KEYLESS-GO key:
R
with electronic devices, e.g. amobile phone
or another SmartKey.
R
with metallic objects, e.g. coins or metal foil.
R
inside metallic objects, e.g. ametal case
This can affect the functionality of KEYLESS-GO.
If you lock the vehicle with the SmartKey remote
control or with KEYLESS-GO, after ashort time:
R
you will not be able to switch on the ignition
with the Start/Stop button.
R
you will no longer be able to start the engine
with the Start/Stop button until the vehicle is
unlocked again
If you lock the vehicle centrally using the button
on the front door (
Y page 75), you can continue
to start the engine with the Start/Stop button.
The engine can be switched off while the vehicle
is in motion by pressing and holding the Start/
Stop button for three seconds. This function
124
Driving
Driving and parking
operates independently of the ECO start/stop
automatic engine switch-off function.
Key positions with the Start/Stop button
:
Start/Stop button
;
Ignition lock
As soon as the ignition is switched on, all the
indicator lamps in the instrument cluster light
up.
For further information on situations in which an
indicator lamp either fails to go out after the
engine is started or lights up while driving,
please refer to "Warning and indicator lamps in
the instrument cluster" (
Y page 226).
If Start/Stop button : has not yet been
pressed, this corresponds to the SmartKey
being removed from the ignition.
X
To switch on the power supply: press
Start/Stop button : once.
The power supply is switched on. You can now
activate the windshield wipers, for example.
The power supply is switched off again if:
R
the driver's door is opened and
R
you press Start/Stop button : twice when in
this position
X
To switch on the ignition: press Start/Stop
button : twice.
The ignition is switched on.
If you press Start/Stop button : once when
in this position, the ignition is switched off
again.
Removing the Start/Stop button
You can remove the Start/Stop button from the
ignition lock and start the vehicle as normal
using the SmartKey.
You can only switch between Start/Stop button
mode and SmartKey operation when the vehicle
is stationary.
You must also engage park position P.
X
Remove Start/Stop button : from ignition
lock ;.
You do not have to remove the Start/Stop but-
ton from the ignition lock when you leave the
vehicle. You should, however, alwaystake the
SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle. As
long as the SmartKey is in the vehicle:
R
the vehicle can be started using the Start/
Stop button
R
the electrically powered equipment can be
operated
Starting the engine
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If children are left unsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
R
open the doors, thus endangering other
people or road users.
R
get out and disrupt traffic.
R
operate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehicle in
motion if, for example, they:
R
release the parking brake.
R
shifting the automatic transmission out of
park position P
R
Start the engine.
There is arisk of an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, alwaystake the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Always keep the SmartKey out of
reach of children.
G
WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
is arisk of fatal injury. Therefore never leave
the engine runninginenclosed spaces with-
out sufficient ventilation.
Driving
125
Driving and parking
Z
G
WARNING
Flammable materials introduced through
environmental influence or by animals can
ignite if in contact with the exhaust system or
parts of the engine that heatup. There is arisk
of fire.
Carry out regular checks to make sure that
there are no flammable foreignmaterials in
the engine compartment or in the exhaust
system.
General notes
During acold start, the engine runs at higher
speeds to enablethe catalytic converter to
reach its operating temperature. The sound of
the engine may change during this time.
Automatic transmission
X
Shift the transmission to position P
(
Y page132).
The transmission position display in the mul-
tifunction display shows P (
Y page132).
i
You can start the engine in transmission
position P and N.
Starting procedure with the SmartKey
To start the engine using the SmartKey instead
of the Start/Stop button, pullthe Start/Stop
button out of the ignitionlock.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 3 in the ignition
lock and release it as soon as the engine is
running (
Y page124).
Starting procedure with the Start/Stop
button
The Start/Stop button can be used to start the
vehiclemanually without inserting the SmartKey
into the ignitionlock. The Start/Stop button
must be inserted in the ignitionlock and the
SmartKey must be in the vehicle. This mode for
starting the engine operates independently of
the ECO start/stop automatic engine start func-
tion.
You can start the engine if avalidSmartKey is in
the vehicle. Switch off the engine and always
take the SmartKey with you when leaving the
vehicle, even if you only leave it for ashort time.
Pay attention to the important safety notes.
X
Depress the brake pedaland keep it
depressed.
X
Press the Start/Stop button once
(
Y page124).
The engine starts.
Starting procedure via smartphone
Observe the important safety notes on starting
the engine (
Y page125).
You can alsostart yourengine via yoursmart-
phone from outside the vehicle. In this case, the
previouslyselected climate control setting is
activated. In this way you can cool or heat the
interior of the vehiclebefore starting the jour-
ney.
Only start the engine via yoursmartphone if it is
safe to start and run the engine where yourvehi-
cle is parked.
Observe the legalstipulations in the area where
yourvehicleisparked.Engine start via smart-
phone may be limited to certain countries or
regions.
You can execute amaximumoftwo consecutive
starting attempts via yoursmartphone. If you
insert the SmartKey into the ignitionlock, you
can carry out two more starting attempts.
Once you have started the engine, you can
switch the engine off via yoursmartphone at any
time.
You can only start the engine via yoursmart-
phone if:
R
the SmartKey is in the ignitionlock
R
park position P is selected
R
the accelerator pedalisnot depressed
R
the anti-theft alarm system is not activated
R
the panicalarm is not activated
R
the hazard warning lampsare switched off
R
the hood is closed.
R
the doors are closed and locked
R
the windows and sliding sunroof are closed
Also make sure that:
R
the fuel tank is sufficiently filled
R
the starter battery is sufficiently charged
G
WARNING
Limbs couldbecrushedortrappedifthe
engine is started unintentionally during ser-
126
Driving
Driving and parking
vice or maintenance work. There is arisk of
injury.
Always secure the engine against uninten-
tional starting before carrying out mainte-
nance or repair work.
Make sure that the engine cannot be started via
yoursmartphone before carrying out mainte-
nance or repairs. You can prevent an engine
start via yoursmartphone, for example, if you:
R
switch on the hazard warning lamps
R
do not lock the doors
R
open the hood
Pulling away
General notes
G
WARNING
If the engine speedisabove the idling speed
and you engage transmission position D or R,
the vehiclecould pullawaysuddenly.There is
arisk of an accident.
When engaging transmission position D or R,
alwaysfirmly depress the brake pedaland do
not simultaneously accelerate.
Depress the accelerator carefully when pulling
away.
The vehiclelocks centrally once you have pulled
away. The locking knobs in the doors drop down.
You can open the doors from the insideatany
time.
You can alsodeactivate the automatic locking
feature (
Y page193).
It is only possible to shift the transmission from
position P to the desired position if you depress
the brake pedal. Only then can the parking lock
be deactivated.
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles): if you do not depress the brake pedal, the
DIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved but the
parking lock remains engaged.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: if you do not depress
the brake pedal, the selector lever can still be
moved but the parking lock remains engaged.
At transmission fluidtemperatures below Ò4‡
(Ò20 †), you can only shift out of park position P
into another transmission position when the
engine is running.
i
Upshifts take place at higherengine speeds
after acold start. This helpsthe catalytic con-
verter to reach its operating temperature
more quickly.
Information on the automatic release of the
electric parking brake (
Y page145).
Hill start assist
Hill start assist helpsyou when pulling awayfor-
wardsorinreverse on an uphill gradient. It holds
the vehiclefor ashort time after you have
removed yourfoot from the brake pedal. This
gives you enoughtime to move yourfoot from
the brake pedaltothe accelerator pedaland to
depress it before the vehiclebegins to roll.
G
WARNING
After ashort time, hill start assist willnolon-
ger brake yourvehicleand it couldroll away.
There is arisk of an accident and injury.
Therefore, quickly move yourfoot from the
brake pedaltothe accelerator pedal. Never
leave the vehiclewhen it is held by hill start
assist.
Hill start assist is not active if:
R
you are pulling awayonalevel road or on a
downhill gradient.
R
the transmission is in position N.
R
the electric parking brake is applied.
R
ESP
®
is malfunctioning.
Further information on holding the vehiclesta-
tionary on uphill gradients (
Y page136).
ECOstart/stop function
Introduction
The ECO start/stop function switches the
engine off automatically if the vehicleisstopped
under certain conditions.
The engine starts automatically when the driver
wants to pullawayagain. The ECO start/stop
function thereby helpsyou to reduce the fuel
consumptionand emissions of yourvehicle.
Driving
127
Driving and parking
Z
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If theengineisswitched off automatically and
you exit thevehicle, theengineisrestarted
automatically. The vehiclemay beginmoving.
Thereisariskofaccidentand injury.
If you wish to exit thevehicle, always turnoff
theignition and secure thevehicleagainst
rollingaway.
General notes
:
ECO start/stopdisplay
The ECO start/stopfunction is activated when-
everyou start theengineusingthe SmartKey or
theStart/Stopbutton.
If theenginehas been switched off automati-
callybythe ECO start/stopfunction,the è
ECO symbol is shown in themultifunction dis-
play.
Mercedes-AMGvehicles: theECO start/stop
function is only available in driveprogram C.
Automaticengineswitch-off
If thevehicleisbraked to astandstill in D or N,
theECO start/stopfunction switches off the
engineautomatically.
The ECO start/stopfunction is operational
when:
R
theindicator lamp in theECO buttonislit
green.
R
theoff-road program is deactivated.
R
theoutside temperature is within therange
that is suitable for thesystem.
R
theengineisatnormaloperating tempera-
ture.
R
theset temperature for thevehicleinterior
has been reached.
R
thebattery is sufficientlycharged.
R
thesystem detects that thewindshield is not
fogged up when theair-conditioning system is
switched on.
R
thehoodisclosed.
R
thedriver'sdoor is closed and thedriver's
seat belt is fastened.
All of thevehicle's systems remain active when
theengineisstoppedautomatically.
The HOLD function can also be activated if the
enginehas been switched off automatically. It is
then notnecessarytocontinue applyingthe
brakes during theautomatic stop phase. When
you depress theacceleratorpedal,the engine
startsautomatically and thebraking effectof
theHOLDfunction is deactivated.
Automatic engineswitch-off can takeplacea
maximum of four times in arow (initial st
op, then
th
ree subsequentstops).
Automaticenginestart
The enginestartsautomatically if:
R
you switch off theECO start/stopfunction by
pressingthe ECO button
R
in transmission position D or N thebrake
pedal is releasedand theHOLDfunction is not
active
R
you depress theacceleratorpedal
R
you engage reversegear R
R
you movethe transmission out of position P
R
you activatethe off-road program
R
you unfasten your seat belt or open thedriv-
er'sdoor
R
thevehiclestartstoroll
R
thebrakesystem requiresthis
R
thetemperature in thevehicleinterior devi-
atesfromthe set range
R
thesystem detects moisture on thewind-
shield when theair-conditioning system is
switched on
R
thebattery's condition of charge is toolow
Shifting thetransmission to position P does not
start theengine.
128
Driving
Driving and parking
Deactivating or activating theECO
start/stop function
X
To deactivate: press ECObutton :.
Indicator lamp ; goesout.
X
To activate: press ECObutton :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up.
If indicator lamp ; is off, theECO start/stop
function has beendeactivated manually or as
theresult of amalfunction.The enginewill then
notbeswitched offautomatically when thevehi-
clestops.
AMG performance exhaust system
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
You can choosebetween differentAMG Per-
formanceexhaustsystem volumesusingthe
position of theexhaustflap.
Each time you start theenginewiththe Smart-
Key or theStart/Stopbutton, thequietest set-
ting is activated.
Settingthe volume:
X
Press button :.
If you selectthe loudest setting,indicator
lamp ; lights up.
Problemswiththe engine
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The enginedoesnot
start.
The HOLD function or DistancePilotDISTRONIC is activated.
X
Deactivatethe HOLD function (Y page 162) or DistancePilot
DISTRONIC (
Y page 160).
X
Trytostart theengineagain.
The enginedoesnot
start.The starter motor
can be heard.
R
There is amalfunction in theengineelectronics.
R
There is amalfunction in thefuelsupply.
Before attemptingtostart theengineagain:
X
Turnthe SmartKey backtoposition 0 in theignition lock.
or
X
Press theStart/Stopbuttonrepeatedly until all indicator lampsin
theinstrument cluster go out.
X
Trytostart theengineagain (Y page 125). Avoid excessivelylong
and frequent attemptstostart theengineasthese will drain the
battery.
If theenginedoesnot start after severalattempts:
X
Consult aqualified specialistworkshop.
Driving
129
Driving andparking
Z
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The engine does not
start. You cannot hear
the starter motor.
The on-board voltage is too low because the battery is too weak or
discharged.
X
Jump-start the vehicle (Y page 285).
If the engine does not start despite attemptstojump-start it:
X
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
The starter motor was exposed to athermal load that was too high.
X
Allow the starter motor to cool down for approximately two minutes.
X
Try to start the engine again.
If the engine still does not start:
X
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
The engine is not running
smoothly and is misfir-
ing.
There is amalfunction in the engine electronics or in amechanical
componentofthe engine management system.
X
Only depress the accelerator pedal slightly.
Otherwise, non-combusted fuel may get into the catalytic converter
and damage it.
X
Have the cause rectified immediately at aqualified specialist work-
shop.
The coolant temperature
gauge shows avalue
above 248 ‡(120 †).
The coolant warning
lamp may also be on and
awarning tone may
sound.
The coolant level is too low. The coolant is too hot and the engine is no
longer being cooled sufficiently.
X
Stop as soon as possible and allow the engine and the coolant to
cool down.
X
Check the coolant level (Y page 269). Observe the warning notes
as you do so and add coolant if necessary.
DYNAMIC SELECTbutton (all vehicles
except Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Use the DYNAMIC SELECT button to change the
drive program. Depending on the drive program
selected the following vehicle characteristics
will change:
R
the drive (engine and transmission manage-
ment)
R
the steering.
R
the availability of the ECO start/stop function
R
the climate control
Each time you start the engine with the Smart-
Key or the Start/Stop button, drive program C is
activated. For further information about starting
the engine, see (
Y page 125).
X
Press DYNAMIC SELECT button : as many
times as necessary until the desired drive
program is selected.
The selected drive program appears in the
multifunction display.After five seconds the
display goes out and the status icon of the
selected drive program appears.
130
DYNAMIC SELECT button (all vehicles except Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Driving and parking
In addition, the current drive program settings
are displayedbrieflyinthe multimedia system
display.
i
In afew countries, the ECO start/stop func-
tion is deactivated at the factory due to the
available fuel grade.Inthis case, the ECO
start/stop function is not available in any
drive program, regardless of the display in the
multimedia system display.
Available drive programs:
C Comfort Comfortable and economi-
cal driving characteristics
S Sport Sporty driving characteris-
tics
I Individual Individual settings
Off-road
Optimal driving characteris-
tics for easily negotiableoff-
road terrain
E Economy Particularly economical
driving characteristics
Additional information for drive programs
(
Y page 136).
You can also change gear yourself using the
steering wheel paddle shifters. For further infor-
mation on the manualdrive program
(
Y page 138).
DYNAMIC SELECT controller
(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Use the DYNAMIC SELECT controller to change
the drive program. Depending on the drive pro-
gram selected the following vehicle character-
istics willchange:
R
the drive
R
the transmission management
R
ESP
®
R
the suspension (vehicles with AMG adaptive
sport suspension system)
R
the availability of the ECO start/stop function
R
the availability of gliding mode
Each time you start the engine with the Smart-
Key or the Start/Stop button, drive program C is
activated. For further information aboutstarting
the engine, see (
Y page 125).
X
Turn DYNAMIC SELECT controller : as many
times as necessary until the desireddrive
program is selected.
The selected drive program appears in the
multifunction display. After five seconds the
display goes out and the status icon of the
selected drive program appears.
The drive program indicator on DYNAMIC
SELECT controller : lights up in red.
Available drive programs:
I Individual Individual settings
C Comfort Comfort-oriented, opti-
mum-economy engine and
transmission settings
S Sport Sporty engine and trans-
missionsettings
S+ Sport Plus Particularly sporty trans-
missionsettings
Race
Maximumsportiness and
engine and transmission
settings suitable for the
racetrack
Additional information for drive programs
(
Y page 136).
You can also change gear yourself using the
steering wheel paddle shifters. For further infor-
mation on the manualdrive program
(
Y page 138).
DYNAMIC SELECTcontroller(Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
131
Driving and parking
Z
Automatictransmission
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If theenginespeedisabovethe idlingspeed
and you engage transmission position D or R,
thevehiclecould pull away suddenly. There is
ariskofanaccident.
When engagingtransmission position D or R,
always firmly depress thebrakepedal and do
notsimultaneously accelerate.
G
WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to neu-
tral position N when you switch off theengine.
The vehiclemay rollaway. There is ariskofan
accident.
Afterswitching off theengine, always switch
to parking position P.Preventthe parked vehi-
cle from rollingaway by applyingthe parking
brake.
DIRECT SELECT lever
Overview of transmission positions
j
Park position withparking lock
k
Reverse gear
i
Neutral
h
Drive
All vehicles (exceptMercedes-AMG vehi-
cles): theDIRECT SELECT lever is on theright of
thesteering column.
Forinformation on theselector lever in
Mercedes-AMGvehicles (
Y page 134).
The DIRECT SELECT lever always returnstoits
original position.The currenttransmission posi-
tion P, R, N or D appearsinthe transmission
position display in themultifunction display
(
Y page 132).
Transmission position and drive pro-
gram display
The currenttransmission position and drive pro-
gram appear in themultifunction display.
:
Transmission position
;
Gear
=
Drive program display
The arrows in thetransmission position display
showhow and intowhichtransmission positions
you can shiftusingthe DIRECT SELECT lever.
If thetransmission position display in themul-
tifunction display is notworking,you should pull
away carefully to checkwhether thedesired
transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you
should select transmission position D and drive
program E or S.
Engaging park position P
!
If theenginespeedistoo high or thevehicle
is moving,donot shiftthe automatic trans-
mission directlyfrom D to R,from R to D or
directlyto P.The automatic transmission
could otherwise be damaged.
X
Push theDIRECT SELECT lever in thedirection
of arrow P.
Transmission position display P is shown in
themultifunction display.
When you haveengagedpark position P,make
surethatthe transmission position display
shows P in themultifunction display.
You can only engage park position P when the
vehicleisstationary.
Depressing thebrakeand pushing theDIRECT
SELECT lever up or down disengages thepark-
ing lock. The transmission is in N neutral.
132
Automatic transmission
Driving andparking
At transmission fluid temperaturesbelow Ò4‡
(Ò20†),you can onlyshift outofparkposition P
into another transmission positionwhenthe
engine is running.
In order to shift from park position P directlyinto
R or D:
R
depress the brake pedaland
R
push the DIRECT SELECTlever up or down
past the first point of resistance
Engagingpark position Pautomatically
Park position P is automaticallyengaged if:
R
youswitch off the engine using the SmartKey
and remove the SmartKey
R
youswitch off the engine using the SmartKey
or using the Start/Stop button and open the
driver's door or front-passenger door
R
youopenthe driver's door when the vehicleis
stationaryorwhendriving at averylow speed
and the transmission is in position D or R
Undercertain conditions, the automatic trans-
mission shifts automaticallytotransmission
position P if the HOLD functionorDistance Pilot
DISTRONICisactivated.Observethe informa-
tiononthe HOLD function(
Y page 163) and on
Distance PilotDISTRONIC(
Y page 159).
EngagingreversegearR
!
Onlyshift the automatic transmission to R
when the vehicleisstationary.
X
Depressthe brake and keepitpressed.
X
Push the DIRECT SELECTlever up past the
first point of resistance.
The ECO start/stopfunctionisnot available
when reversegearisengaged.Further informa-
tiononthe ECO start/stopfunction
(
Y page 128).
Shiftingtoneutral N
G
WARNING
If children areleftunsupervised in the vehicle,
they could:
R
open the doors,thusendangering other
people or roadusers.
R
get outand disrupt traffic.
R
operate the vehicle's equipment.
Additionally, children could set the vehiclein
motion if, for example, they:
R
release the parking brake.
R
shifting the automatic transmission outof
park position P
R
Startthe engine.
There is ariskofanaccident and injury.
Whenleaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKeywithyou and lock the vehicle. Never
leavechildren or animals unattended in the
vehicle. Alwayskeepthe SmartKeyout of
reach of children.
X
If the transmission is in position D or R:push
the DIRECT SELECTlever up or down to the
first point of resistance.
X
If the transmission is in position P:depress
the brake pedaland push the DIRECT SELECT
lever up or down to the first point of resist-
ance.
If youswitch the engine off with the transmis-
sion in position R or D,the automatic transmis-
sion shifts to N automatically.
With the SmartKey: if youthen open the driv-
er'sdoororthe front-passenger door or remove
the SmartKeyfrom the ignition, the automatic
transmission shifts to P automatically.
With the Start/Stopbutton: if youthen open
the driver's door or the front-passenger door,
the automatic transmission shifts to P automat-
ically.
If youwantthe automatic transmission to
remaininneutral N,e.g.w
henha
ving the vehicle
cleanedinanautomatic car wash with atowing
system:
X
Vehicles with the Start-Stop button:
remove the Start-Stop button from the igni-
tionlock.
X
Insert the SmartKeyinto the ignition lock.
X
Allvehicles: switch the ignition on.
X
Depressthe brake pedaland keepit
depressed.
X
Shift to neutral N.
X
Releasethe brake pedal.
X
Releasethe electricparking brake.
X
Switch off the ignition and leavethe SmartKey
in the ignition lock.
Automatictransmission
133
Driving andparking
Z
Engaging drive position D
X
If thetransmission is in position R or N:push
theDIRECT SELECT leverdown past thefirst
pointofresistance.
X
If thetransmission is in position P:depress
thebrakepedal and push theDIRECT SELECT
leverdown past thefirst pointofresistance.
Selector lever (Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles)
Overview of transmission positions
j
Park position with parking lock
k
Reverse gear
i
Neutral
h
Drive
Transmission position and drive pro-
gram display
The currenttransmission position and drivepro-
gram appear in themultifunction display.
:
Transmission position display
;
Drive program display
If thetransmission position display in themul-
tifunctiondisplay is notworking,you shouldpull
away carefully to check whether thedesired
transmission position is engaged. Ideally, you
should selecttransmission position D and drive
program C or S.
Engaging park position P
X
When thevehicle is stationary, pressbut-
ton :.
Engaging reversegear R
!
Only shiftthe automatic transmission to R
when thevehicle is stationary.
X
Depressthe brakeand keep it pressed.
X
Push theselectorleverforwards past thefirst
pointofresistance.
134
Automatic transmission
Driving and parking
Transmission positions
B
Park position
Thisprevents the vehiclefromrolling
away when stopped.
Onlyshift the transmission into posi-
tion P when the vehicleisstationary.
The parkinglockshouldnot be used
as abrake when parking. Always
applythe electronic parkingbrake in
additiontothe parkinglockinorder
to securethe vehicle.
If the vehicleelectronics aremalfunc-
tioning,the transmission maybe
locked in position P.Havethe vehicle
electronics checked immediatelyata
qualified specialistworkshop.
Park position P is automatically
engaged if:
R
youswitch off the engine using the
SmartKeyand remove the Smart-
Key
R
youswitch off the engine using the
SmartKeyorusing the Start/Stop
button and open the driver's door
or front-passengerdoor
R
the driver's door is openedwhen
the vehicleisstationaryordriving
at verylow speedand the trans-
mission is in position D or R
C
Reversegear
Onlyshift the transmission into posi-
tion R when the vehicleisstationary.
A
Neutral
Do not shift the transmission to N
whiledriving. Otherwise, the auto-
matic transmission could be dam-
aged.
No poweristransmitted fromthe
engine to the drive wheels.
Releasing the brakes will allowyou to
movethe vehiclefreely, e.g.topush
it or tow it.
If ESP
®
is deactivated or faulty: shift
the transmission to position N if the
vehicleisindangerofskidding,e.g.
on icy roads.
If youswitch the engine off with the
transmission in position R or D,the
automatic transmission shifts to N
automatically.
!
Rolling in neutral N can damage
the drive train.
7
Drive
The automatic transmission changes
gear automatically. All forward gears
areavailable.
Driving tips
Changinggear
The automatic transmission shifts to the indi-
vidualgears automaticallywhenitisintrans-
mission position D.Thisautomatic gear shifting
behaviorisdeterminedby:
R
the selecteddrive program
R
the positionofthe accelerator pedal
R
the roadspeed
Accelerator pedalposition
Your style of drivinginfluences how the auto-
matic transmission shifts gear:
R
little throttle:early upshifts
R
morethrottle:lateupshifts
Automatictransmission
135
Driving andparking
Z
Holding the vehicle stationary on uphill
gradients
G
WARNING
If the clutch overheats, the electronic man-
agement system is automatically deactivated.
This interrupts the power transmission. The
vehiclemay,for example, roll backwards on
gradients. There is arisk of an accident.
Never hold the vehiclestationary on uphill
gradients by depressing the accelerator.
The clutch may overheat if you hold the vehicle
stationary on uphill gradients by depressing the
accelerator pedal. If the clutch overheats, a
warning tone sounds.
All vehicles(except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles): the Stop Vehicle Shift to 'P'
Leave Engine Running display message
appears in the multifunction display.You will
only be abletocontinue yourjourney once the
clutch has cooleddownand the display mes-
sage in the multifunction display has disap-
peared.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the Trans. Oil
Overheated Drive on with Care display
message appears in the multifunction display.
Do not hold the vehiclestationary on uphill gra-
dients by depressing the accelerator pedal.
Instead, only ever hold the vehiclestationary on
uphill gradients by:
R
depressing the brake pedal
R
activating the HOLD function
R
engaging the electric parking brake
Kickdown
Use kickdown for maximumacceleration.
X
Depress the accelerator pedalbeyond the
pressure point.
The automatic transmission shifts to alower
geardepending on the engine speed.
X
Ease off the accelerator pedalonce the
desired speedisreached.
The automatic transmission shifts back up.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: it is only possible to
use kickdown in the automatic drive program
and the temporary manualdrive program M.
When manualdrive program M is permanently
activated, kickdown is not possible.
For further information on kickdown in manual
drive program M (
Y page140).
Rocking the vehicle free
Shifting the transmission repeatedly between
gears D and R may help to free the vehicleifit
has become stuck in slush or snow. The vehi-
cle's engine management system limits the
speedtoamaximumof5mph (9 km/h) when
shifting back and forth. To shift back and forth
between transmission positions D and R,move
the DIRECT SELECT leverupand downpastthe
point of resistance.
Drive programs
Allvehicles(except Mercedes-AMG
vehicles)
Drive program C(Comfort)
Drive program C is characterized by the follow-
ing:
R
the vehicledelivers comfortable, economical
handling characteristics.
R
the vehiclepulls awaymore gently in forward
and reverse gears, unless the accelerator
pedalisdepressed fully.
R
the vehiclehas improved driving stability,for
exampleonslippery road surfaces.
R
optimalfuel consumption resulting from the
automatic transmission shifting up sooner.
The vehicleisdriveninthe low engine speed
range and the wheels are less likelytospin.
Drive program S(Sport)
Drive program S is characterized by the follow-
ing:
R
sporty engine settings.
R
the automatic transmission shifts up later.
The fuel consumption possibly being higher
as aresult of the later automatic transmission
shift points.
Drive program I(Individual)
In drive program I the following properties of the
drive programcan be selected:
R
the drive (engine and transmission manage-
ment)
R
the steering
136
Automatic transmission
Driving and parking
R
the availability of the ECO start/stopfunction
R
the climate control
Informationabout configuringdrive program I
with the multimedia systemcan be found in the
DigitalOperator'sManual.
i
To permanentlyselect the gearsindrive
program I using the steering wheelpaddle
shifters, select the M (manual) setting for the
drive.
Offroad driveprogram
The Off-road drive programischaracterized by
the following:
R
the vehicleexhibits optimal drivingcharac-
teristics on easily negotiable off-roadterrain.
Drive program E(Economy)
Drive program E is characterized by the follow-
ing:
R
comfort-oriented engine settings.
R
optimal fuel consumption resulting fromthe
automatic transmission shiftingupsooner.
R
the vehiclepulls away moregently in forward
and reversegears,unlessthe accelerator
pedalisdepressedfully.
R
the vehiclehas improved drivingstability, for
exampleonslipperyroadsurfaces.
R
the automatic transmission shiftingup
sooner. Thisresults in the vehiclebeing driven
at lowerengine speeds and the wheels being
less likelytospin.
R
gliding modeisactivated automaticallywhen
engine-internalconditions arefulfilled and
the accel
erator is not depressed. At the same
ti
methe transmission’sclutch opens and the
vehiclerolls freelyusing its kinetic energy.As
aresultgreat distances can be completed
withoutthe engine brake and fuel consump-
tionreduced.
i The availability of gliding modedepends on
various factors,including the following:
R
the engine and transmission temperature
R
the downhillgradient
R
the vehiclespeed
R
performing regular adaptation functions
When youdepress the brake pedal, gliding
modeisdeactivated,depending on pedal
pressure.
When youactivate cruisecontrolorDistance
PilotDISTRONIC, gliding modeisnot availa-
ble.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles
Drive program I(Individual)
In drive program I the following propertiesofthe
drive programcan be selected:
R
the drive (engine management)
R
the transmission management
R
the suspension(vehicleswithAMG adaptive
sport suspensionsystem)
R
ESP
®
Informationabout configuringdrive program I
with the multimedia systemcan be found in the
DigitalOperator'sManual.
Drive program C(Comfort)
Drive program C is characterizedbythe follow-
ing:
R
the vehicledelivers comfortable, economical
handling characteristics.
R
the vehiclepulls away moregently in forward
and reversegears,unlessthe accelerator
pedalisdepressedfully.
R
the vehiclehas improved drivingstability, for
exampleonslipperyroadsurfaces.
R
optimal fuel consumption resulting fromthe
automatic transmission shiftingupsooner.
Thevehicleisdriven in the lowengine speed
range and the wheels arelesslikelytospin.
R
gliding modeisavailable.
R
the ECO start/stopfunctionisavailable.
Drive program S(Sport)
Drive program S is characterizedbythe follow-
ing:
R
the vehicleexhibits sporty drivingcharacter-
istics.
R
the automatic transmission shifts up later.
Thefuelconsumption possibly
being higher
as aresultofthe later automatic transmission
shift points.
R
the suspensionexhibits stiff springing and
damping settings(vehicleswithAIR adaptive
sport suspensionsystem).
R
gliding modeisnot available.
R
the ECO start/stopfunctionisnot available.
Automatictransmission
137
Driving andparking
Z
Drive program S+ (SportPlus)
Drive program S+ is characterized by thefol-
lowing:
R
thevehicleexhibits particularlysportydriving
characteristics.
R
theautomatictransmissionshiftsuplater.
R
thefuelconsumption possiblybeinghigher as
aresult of thelater automatictransmission
shift points.
R
thesuspensionexhibits particularlystiff
springingand dampingsettings(vehicles with
AMGadaptive sport suspensionsystem).
R
glidingmodeisnot available.
R
theECO start/stopfunction is notavailable.
Drive program RACE (vehicles withAMG
adaptive sportsuspension system)
The RACE drive programischaracterized by the
following:
R
thevehicleexhibits drivingcharacteristics
suitable forthe racetrack.
R
all vehiclesystems are set formaximum
sportiness.
R
theautomatictransmissionshiftsuplater.
R
thefuelconsumption possiblybeinghigher as
aresult of thelater automatictransmission
shift points.
R
thesuspensionexhibits particularlyhard
springingand dampingsettings.
R
glidingmodeisnot available.
R
theECO start/stopfunction is notavailable.
Manualgearshifting
General notes
You can changegear yourself usingthe steering
wheelpaddleshifters.The transmissionmustbe
in position D.
Dependingonwhichsteeringwheelpaddle
shifter is pulled, theautomatictransmission
immediately shiftsintothe next gear down or
up, if permitted.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: to use manual shift-
ing, you havetwo options:
R
temporarysetting
R
permanentsetting
If you activatemanual gearshifting, themulti-
function display will showthe currentgear
instead of transmissionposition D.
If manual gearshiftingisdeactivated, thegears
will be selected automatically.
Temporarysetting
X
To activate: shift theDIRECT SELECT lever to
position D.
X
Pull steeringwheelpaddleshifter : or ;.
Temporary setting will be active foracertain
amount of time. Under certain conditionsthe
minimum amount of time is extended, e.g. in the
caseoflateralacceleration,during an overrun
phaseorwhen drivingonsteep terrain.
X
To deactivate: pull steeringwheelpaddle
shifter ; and holditinplace.
or
X
Use theDIRECT SELECT lever to switch the
transmissionposition.
or
X
Allvehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehicles):
use theDYNAMICSELECTbuttontochange
thedrive program.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: use theDYNAMIC
SELECT controller to changethe drive pro-
gram.
138
Automatic transmission
Driving andparking
Permanent setting (Mercedes-AMG
vehicles)
X
To activate: shift the selector lever to posi-
tion P.
X
Press button :.
X
To deactivate: press button :.
or
X
If position D(automatic transmission) is
selected for the transmission in drive pro-
gram I:shift to drive program I with the
DYNAMICSELECT controller.
Shifting gears
!
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: the automatic
transmission does not shift up automatically
even when the engine limiting speed for the
current gear is reached. When the engine lim-
iting speed is reached, the fuel supply is cut to
prevent the engine from overrevving. Always
make sure that the engine speed does not
reach the red area of the tachometer. There is
otherwise arisk of engine damage.
X
To shift up: pull steering wheel paddle
shifter ;.
The automatic transmission shifts up to the
next gear.
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles): if the maximum engine speed on the
currently engaged gear is reached and you
continue to accelerate, the automatic trans-
mission automatically shifts up in order to
prevent engine damage.
X
To shift down: pull steering wheel paddle
shifter :.
The automatic transmission shifts down to
the next gear.
Automatic down shifting occurs when coast-
ing.
If the engine exceeds the maximum engine
speed when shifting down, the automatic
transmission protectsagainst engine damage
by not shifting down.
Shift recommendation
The gearshift recommendations assist you in
adopting an economical driving style. The rec-
ommended gear is shown in the multifunction
display.
X
Shift to recommended gear ; according to
gearshift recommendation : when shown in
the multifunction display.
Upshifting (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
!
The automatic transmission does not shift
up automatically even when the engine limit-
ing speed for the current gear is reached.
When the engine limiting speed is reached,
the fuel supply is cut to prevent the engine
from overrevving. Always make sure that the
engine speed does not reach the red area of
the tachometer. There is otherwise arisk of
engine damage.
Automatic transmission
139
Driving and parking
Z
Beforethe engine speed reaches the red area,
an upshift indicator will be showninthe multi-
function display.
X
Shift to recommendedgear : whenmes-
sage ; is showninthe multifunction display.
Kickdown
X
For maximum acceleration, depress the
accelerator pedal beyond the pressure point.
The automatic transmission shifts to alower
geardepending on the engine speed.
X
Shift back up once the desiredspeed is
reached.
During kickdown, youcannot shift gears using
the steering wheel paddleshifters.
If youapply fullthrottle,the automatic trans-
missionshifts up to the next gearwhenthe
maximum engine speed is reached.Thispre-
vents the engine from overrevving.
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: it is only possible to
use kickdown in temporary manual drive pro-
gram M.Whenmanual drive program M is per-
manently activated, kickdown is not possible.
Problems with the transmission
Problem
Possible causes/consequencesand M Solutions
The transmission has
problemsshifting gear.
The transmission is losing oil.
X
Have the transmission checkedataqualified specialist workshop
immediately.
The acceleration ability
is deteriorating.
The transmission no lon-
ger shifts into allofthe
gears.
Reversegearcan no lon-
ger be engaged.
The transmission is in emergency mode.
X
Stop the vehicle.
X
Shift the transmission to position P.
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Wait at least ten seconds before restarting the engine.
X
Shift the transmission to position D.
X
Have the transmission checkedataqualified specialist workshop
immediately.
Refueling
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Fuelishighly flammable. If youhandle fuel
incorrectly,there is ariskoffire and explo-
sion.
You mustavoid fire,openflames, creating
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
and,ifapplicable, the auxiliary heating before
refueling.
G
WARNING
Fuelispoisonousand hazardoustohealth.
There is arisk of injury.
140
Refueling
Drivingand parking
You must make sure that fuel does not come
intocontactwith your skin,eyes or clothing
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel
vapors.Keep fuel away from children.
If you or others comeintocontactwith fuel,
observethe following:
R
Wash away fuel from skin immediately
using soap and water.
R
If fuel comes intocontactwith your eyes,
immediately rinse themthoroughly with
clean water. Seek medical assistancewith-
out delay.
R
If fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-
tance without delay. Do not inducevomit-
ing.
R
Immediately change out of clothing which
has comeintocontactwith fuel.
G
WARNING
Electrostatic buildup can create sparksand
ignitefuel vapors.There is arisk of fire and
explosion.
Always touchthe vehicle body beforeopening
the fuel filler flap or touching the fuel pump
nozzle. Anyexisting electrostatic buildup is
thereby discharged.
!
Do not use diesel to refuel vehicles with a
gasolineengine. Do not switchonthe ignition
if you accidentally refuel with the wrongfuel.
Otherwise, the fuel will enter the fuel system.
Even small amountsofthe wrongfuel could
result in damage to the fuel systemand the
engine. Notify aqualified specialistworkshop
and have the fuel tankand fuel lines drained
completely.
!
Overfilling the fuel tankcould damage the
fuel system.
!
Take care not to spill any fuel on painted
surfaces. You could otherwise damage the
paintwork.
!
Use afilter when adding fuel from afuel can.
The fuel lines and/or the fuel injection system
could otherwise be blocked by particles from
the fuel can.
Do not get intothe vehicle again during the refu-
eling process. Otherwise, electrostatic charge
could build up again.
If you overfill the fuel tank, fuel could spray out
when the fuel pump nozzle is removed.
For further information on fuel and fuel quality
(
Y page 320).
Refueling
Generalinformation
Pay attention to the importantsafetynotes
(
Y page 140).
The fuel filler flap is unlocked/locked automat-
ically when you unlock/lock the vehicle with the
SmartKey.
The position of the fuel filler cap is displayed
æ in the instrumentcluster. The arrow on the
filling pump indicates the side of the vehicle.
Opening thefuel filler flap
:
To open the fuel filler flap
;
Tire pressure table
=
To insertthe fuel filler cap
?
Instruction label for fuel type to be refueled
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function
or KEYLESSGO
X
Open the driver's door.
The vehicle electronics now have status 0.
This is the same as the SmartKey havingbeen
removed.
X
Press the fuel filler flap in the direction of
arrow :.
The fuel filler flap swings up.
Refueling
141
Driving and parking
Z
X
Turn the fuel filler cap counterclockwise and
remove it.
X
Insert the fuel filler cap into the holder on the
inside of fuel filler flap ;.
X
Completely insert the filler neck of the fuel
pump nozzle into the tank,hook in place and
refuel.
X
Only fill the tank until the pump nozzle
switches off.
Do not add any more fuel after the pump stops
filling for the first time. Otherwise, fuel may leak
out.
Closing the fuel filler flap
X
Replace the cap on the filler neck and turn
clockwise until it engages audibly.
X
Close the fuel filler flap.
Close the fuel filler flap before lockingthe vehi-
cle.
If you are driving with the fuel filler cap open, the
8 reserve fuel warning lamp flashes. Ames-
sage appears in the multifunction display
(
Y page 212).
In addition, the ; Check Engine warning
lamp may light up (
Y page 231).
For further information on warning and indicator
lamps in the instrument cluster, see
(
Y page 231).
Problems with fuel and the fuel tank
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Fuel is leaking from the
vehicle.
The fuel line or the fuel tank is faulty.
G
WARNING
Risk of explosion or fire.
X
Apply the electric parking brake.
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Remove the SmartKey from the ignition lock.
or, in vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function or KEYLESSGO
X
Open the driver's door.
The vehicle electronics now have status 0.This is the same as the
SmartKey having been removed.
X
Do not restart the engine under any circumstances.
X
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
The fuel filler flap cannot
be opened.
The fuel filler flap is not unlocked.
X
Unlock the vehicle (Y page 69).
The SmartKey battery is discharged or nearly discharged.
X
Unlock the vehicle using the mechanical key (Y page 71).
The fuel filler flap is unlocked, but the opening mechanism is jammed.
X
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
142
Refueling
Driving and parking
Parking
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with
hot parts of the exhaust system or exhaust
gas flow. There is arisk of fire.
Park the vehicle so that no flammable mate-
rials come into contact with parts of the vehi-
cle which are hot. Take particular care not to
park on dry grassland or harvested grain
fields.
G
WARNING
If you leave children unsupervised in the vehi-
cle, they could set it in motion by, for example:
R
release the parking brake.
R
shift the automatic transmission out of the
parking position P.
R
start the engine.
In addition, they may operate vehicle equip-
ment and become trapped. There is arisk of
an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Never
leave children unsupervised in the vehicle.
!
Always secure the vehicle correctly against
rolling away.Otherwise, the vehicle or its driv-
etrain could be damaged.
To ensure that the vehicle is secured against
rolling away unintentionally:
R
the electric parking brake must be applied.
R
the transmission must be in position P and the
transmission position display must show P.
R
the SmartKey must be removed from the igni-
tion lock.
R
on uphill or downhill gradients, the front
wheels must be turned towards the curb.
Switching off the engine
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
The automatic transmission switches to neu-
tral position N when you switch off the engine.
The vehicle may roll away.There is arisk of an
accident.
After switching off the engine, always switch
to parking position P.Prevent the parked vehi-
cle from rolling away by applying the parking
brake.
Automatic transmission
X
Apply the electric parking brake.
X
All vehicles (except Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles): shift the transmission to position P.
X
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: press button :.
X
With the SmartKey: turn the SmartKey to
position 0 in the ignition lock and remove it.
The immobilizer is activated.
X
With the Start/Stop button: press the
Start/Stop button (
Y page 124).
The engine stops and all the indicator lamps in
the instrumentcluster go out.
When the driver's door is closed, this corre-
sponds to SmartKey position 1.When the
driver's door is open, this corresponds to
SmartKey position 0:"Key removed".
If you switch the engine off with the transmis-
sion in position R or D,the automatic transmis-
sion shifts to N automatically.
With the SmartKey: if you then open the driv-
er's door or the front-passenger door or remove
Parking
143
Driving and parking
Z
the SmartKeyfromthe ignition, the automatic
transmission shifts to P automatically.
With the Start/Stopbutton: if youthenopen
the driver's door or the front-passengerdoor,
the automatic transmission shifts to P automat-
ically.
If youwantthe automatic transmission to
remaininneutral N,e.g.whenhavingthe vehicle
cleanedinanautomatic car wash with atowing
system:
X
Vehicleswiththe Start-Stopbutton:
remove the Start-Stop button fromthe igni-
tionlock.
X
Insert the SmartKeyinto the ignition lock.
X
Allvehicles: switch the ignition on.
X
Depressthe brake pedaland keepit
depressed.
X
Shift to neutral N.
X
Releasethe brake pedal.
X
Releasethe electricparking brake.
X
Switch off the ignition and leavethe SmartKey
in the ignition lock.
Electric parking brake
General notes
G
WARNING
If youleave children unsupervised in the vehi-
cle,theycould setitinmotion by,for example:
R
release the parking brake.
R
shift the automatic transmission outofthe
parking position P.
R
start the engine.
In addition, theymay operate vehicleequip-
ment and become trapped.There is ariskof
an accident and injury.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKeywithyou and lock the vehicle. Never
leavechildren unsupervised in the vehicle.
The functionofthe electric parking brake is
dependent on the on-board voltage. If the on-
boardvoltageislow or there is amalfunctionin
the system, it maynot be possibletoapply the
releasedparking brake.
X
If thisisthe case, onlyparkthe vehicleon
level ground and secureittoprevent it rolling
away.
X
Shift the automatic transmission to position
P.
It maynot be possibletorelease an applied
parking brake if the on-board voltageislow or
there is amalfunctioninthe system. Contact a
qualified specialistworkshop.
The electric parking brake performs afunction
testatregular intervals whilethe engine is
switched off.The soundsthatcan be he
ardwhile
thi
sisoccurring arenormal.
Applyingorreleasing manually
X
To engage: push handle :.
When the electric parking brake is applied,
the red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
only) indicator lamp lights up in the instru-
ment cluster.
Theelectric parking brake can also be applied
when the SmartKeyisremoved.
X
To release: pull handle :.
The red F (USA only) or ! (Canada
only) indicator lamp in the instrument cluster
goes out.
Theelectric parking brake can onlybe
released:
R
when the SmartKeyisinposition 1 or 2 in
the ignition lock (
Y page 124)or
R
if the ignition wasswitched on using the
Start/Stop button
144
Parking
Driving andparking
Applyingautomatically
The electric parking brakeisautomatically
appliedwhen thetransmission is in position P
and:
R
theengineisswitched off or
R
thedriver is notwearing aseat belt and the
driver's door is opened
To preventthe electric parking brakefrombeing
automatically applied, pull handle :.
The electric parking brakeisalso engagedauto-
matically if:
R
DistancePilotDISTRONICbringsthe vehicle
to astandstill or
R
theHOLDfunction is keepingthe vehiclesta-
tionary
R
Parking Pilotiskeepingthe vehiclestationary
In addition,atleast oneofthe followingcondi-
tionsmustbefulfilled:
R
theengineisswitched off
R
thedriver is notwearing aseat belt and the
driver's door is opened
R
there is asystem malfunction
R
thepowersupply is insufficient
R
thevehicleisstationary for alengthy period
The red F (USAonly) or ! (Canada only)
indicator lamp in theinstrumentclustergoes
out.
The electric parking brakeisnot automatically
engagedifthe engineisswitched off by theECO
start/stopfunction.
Releasing automatically
Your vehicle's electric parking brakeisauto-
matically releasedifall of thefollowingcondi-
tionsare met:
R
theengineisrunning.
R
thetransmission is in position D or R.
R
theseat belt has been fastened.
R
you depress theacceleratorpedal.
If thetransmission is in position R,the tailgate
mustbeclosed.
If your seat belt is notfastened, thefollowing
conditionsmustbefulfilled to automatically
release theelectric parking brake:
R
thedriver's door is closed.
R
you haveshiftedout of transmission position
P or you havepreviously driven fasterthan
2mph (3 km/h).
Ensurethatyou do notdepress theaccelerator
pedal unintentionally. Otherwise theparking
brakewill be releasedand thevehiclewill start
to move.
Emergency braking
The vehiclecan also be braked during an emer-
gency by usingthe electric parking brake.
X
Whiledriving, push handle : of theelectric
parking brake(
Y page 144).
The vehicleisbraked as longasyou keep
handle : of theelectric parking brake
pressed. The longer theelectric parking brake
handle : is depressed, thegreaterthe brak-
ing force.
During braking:
R
awarning tone sounds
R
the ReleaseParkingBrake message
appears
R
thered F (USAonly) or ! (Canada
only) indicator lamp in theinstrumentcluster
flashes
When thevehiclehas been braked to astand-
still, theelectric parking brakeisengaged.
Parking thevehicle for along period
If you leavethe vehicleparked for longer than
four weeks, thebattery may be damaged by
exhaustive discharging.
If you leavethe vehicleparked for longer than six
weeks, thevehiclemay suffer damageasa
result of lack of use.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop and seek
advice.
i
You can obtain information about trickle
chargers from aqualified specialist work-
shop.
Parking
145
Driving and parking
Z
Drivingtips
General notes
Important safetynotes
G
WARNING
If you switch offthe ignition whiledriving,
safety-relevant functionsare only available
withlimitations, or notatall. Thiscould affect,
forexample, thepowersteeringand thebrake
boostingeffect. You will require considerably
more effort to steer and brake.There is arisk
of an accident.
Do notswitch offthe ignition whiledriving.
G
WARNING
If you operatemobile communication equip-
mentwhiledriving, you will be distracted from
traffic conditions. You could also losecontrol
of thevehicle. There is ariskofanaccident.
Only operatethisequipmentwhen thevehicle
is stationary.
Observethe legalrequirements forthe country
in whichyou are driving. Some jurisdictionspro-
hibitthe driver from usingamobile phone while
drivingavehicle.
If you makeacallwhiledriving, always use
hands-free mode. Only operatethe telephone
when thetraffic situation permits. If you are
unsure,pull over to asafelocation and stop
beforeoperatingthe telephone.
Bear in mindthatataspeed of only 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), thevehicle coversa
distanceof44ft(approximately 14 m) per sec-
ond.
Drive sensibly –save fuel
Observe the following tips to save fuel:
R
The tires should always be inflated to the rec-
ommended tire pressure.
R
Remove unnecessary loads.
R
Remove roof rackswhen they are not needed.
R
Warm up the engineatlow enginespeeds.
R
Avoid frequentacceleration or braking.
R
Have all maintenancework carried out as
indicated by the serviceintervals in the Main-
tenance Booklet or by the serviceinterval dis-
play.
Fuel consumption also increases when driving in
cold weather, in stop-start traffic and in hilly ter-
rain.
Drinking and driving
G
WARNING
Drinkingand driving and/or takingdrugs and
driving are very dangerous combinations.
Even asmall amount of alcohol or drugs can
affect your reflexes, perceptions and judg-
ment.
The possibility of aserious or even fatal acci-
dent is greatly increased when you drink or
take drugs and drive.
Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
anyone to drive who has been drinking or tak-
ing drugs.
Emission control
G
WARNING
Combustion engines emit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaust gases leads to poisoning. There
is arisk of fatal injury. Thereforenever leave
the enginerunning in enclosed spaces with-
out sufficientventilation.
Certain enginesystems are designed to keep
the level of poisonous componentsinexhaust
fumes within legal limits.
These systems only work at peak efficiency if
they are serviced exactly in accordance with the
manufacturer's specifications.Always have
work on the enginecarried out at aqualified
specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you use an authorized Mercedes-
BenzCenter for this purpose. In particular, work
relevant to safety or on safety-related systems
must be carried out at aqualified specialist
workshop.
The enginesettings must not be changed under
any circumstances. Furthermore, all specific
servicework must be carried out at regular
intervals and in accordance with the Mercedes-
Benzservicerequirements. Details can be found
in the Maintenance Booklet.
146
Driving tips
Driving and parking
ECO display
The ECO display showsyou how economical
your driving style is. The ECO display assists you
in achievingthe mosteconomical driving style
for theselectedsettings and prevailingcondi-
tions.Your driving style can significantly influ-
encethe vehicle's consumption.
:
Acceleration
;
Coasting
=
Constant
?
Additional range achieved
Range ? is shownunder Bonus
fr. Start and
represents theadditional range achievedsince
thebeginningofthe journey as aresult of an
adapted driving style.
If thefuel levelhas dropped intothe reserve
range, the FuelLow
message is showninthe
multifunction display instead of range ?.The
8 warning lamp in theinstrumentcluster
also lightsup(
Y page 231).
The ECO display consistsofthree sections,with
an inner and outer area. The sections corre-
spondtothe followingthree categories:
:
Acceleration (evaluationofthe
accelerationprocesses):
R
theouter area fills up and theinner
area lightsupgreen: moderate
acceleration, especiallyathigher
speeds
R
theouter area empties and the
inner area is gray: sporty acceler-
ation
;
Coasting (evaluationofall decelera-
tionprocesses):
R
theouter area fills up and theinner
area lightsupgreen: anticipatory
driving,keepingyour distanceand
early release of theaccelerator.
The vehicle can coastwithout use
of thebrakes.
R
theouter area empties and the
inner area is gray: frequentheavy
braking
=
Constant(continuous evaluation
overthe entire journey):
R
theouter area fills up and theinner
area lightsupgreen: constant
speedand avoidanceofunneces-
sary accelerationand deceleration
R
theouter area empties and the
inner area is gray: fluctuationsin
speed
The three inner areas display thecurrentdriving
style and light up green as aresult of aparticu-
larly economical driving style. Dependingonthe
driving situation, up to two areas may light up
simultaneously.
At thebeginningofthe journey, thethree outer
areas are emptyand fill up as aresult of eco-
nomical driving.Ahigher levelindicates amore
economical driving style. If thethree outer areas
are completely filledatthe same time, thedriver
has adopted themosteconomical driving style
for theselectedsettings and prevailingcondi-
tions.The ECO display border lightsup.
The ECO display does notindicatethe actual fuel
consumption. The additionally achievedrange
displayed under Bonus fr. Start
does not
indicateafixed consumptionreduction.
Driving tips
147
Driving and parking
Z
In addition to driving style, the actual consump-
tion is affected by other factors, such as:
R
Load
R
Tire pressure
R
Cold start
R
Choice of route
R
Active electrical consumers
These factors are not includedinthe ECO dis-
play.
An economical driving style specially requires
driving at moderate engine speeds.
Achieving ahigher valueinthe categories
"Acceleration" and "Constant":
R
observe the gearshift recommendations.
R
drive the vehicle in drive program C or E
(vehicles with aDYNAMIC SELECT button).
On long journeys at aconstant speed,e.g. on the
highway, only the outer area for "constant" will
change.
The ECO display summarizes the driving style
from the start of the journey to its completion.
Therefore, there are more marked changes in
the outer areasatthe start of ajourney. On lon-
ger journeys, there are fewer changes. For more
marked changes, perform amanualrest
(
Y page 187).
For more information on the ECO display, see
(
Y page 186).
Braking
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you shift down on aslippery road surface in
an attempt to increase the engine's braking
effect, the drive wheelscould lose their grip.
There is an increased danger of skidding and
accidents.
Do not shift down for additional engine brak-
ing on aslippery road surface.
Downhill gradients
!
On long and steep gradients, you must
reduce the load on the brakes by shifting to a
lowergear in good time. This allows you to
take advantage of engine braking. For this you
must first activate manualgearshifting. This
helps you to avoid overheating the brakes and
wearing them out excessively.
When you take advantage of engine braking, it
is possible that adrive wheel willnot rotate for
some time, e.g. on aslippery road surface.
This could cause damage to the drive train.
This type of damage is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz warranty.
Briefly depressing the accelerator pedalon
downhill gradients whilethe manualdrive pro-
gram M is temporarilyactivated: the automatic
transmission may switch to the last active auto-
matic drive program E or S.The automatic trans-
missionmay shift to ahighergear. This can
reduce the engine's braking effect.
Heavy and light loads
G
WARNING
If you rest yourfoot on the brake pedalwhile
driving, the braking system can overheat. This
increases the stopping distance and can even
cause the braking system to fail.There is a
risk of an accident.
Never use the brake pedalasafootrest. Never
depressthe brake pedaland the accelerator
pedalatthe same time.
!
Depressing the brake pedalconstantly
results in excessive and premature wearto
the brake pads.
If the brakes have been subjected to aheavy
load,donot stop the vehicle immediately.Drive
on for ashort while. This allows the airflow to
cool the brakes more quickly.
Wet roads
If you have driven for along time in heavy rain
withoutbraking, there may be adelayed reac-
tion from the brakes when braking for the first
time. This may also occur after the vehicle has
been washed or driven through deep water.
You have to depressthe brake pedalmore
firmly.Maintainagreater distance from the
vehicle in front.
After driving on awet road or having the vehicle
washed, brake firmly whilepaying attention to
the traffic conditions. This willwarm up the
brake discs, thereby drying them more quickly
and protecting them against corrosion.
148
Driving tips
Driving and parking
Limited braking performance on salt-
treated roads
If you driveonsalted roads,alayer of salt resi-
due may formonthe brakediscsand brake
pads. This can result in asignificantly longer
braking distance.
R
In ordertoprevent any salt build-up, apply the
brakes occasionally while paying attention to
thetraffic conditions.
R
Carefully depress thebrakepedal and the
beginningand end of ajourney.
R
Maintain agreater distancetothe vehicle
ahead.
Servicing thebrakes
!
The brakefluid level may be toolow, if:
R
if thered brakewarning lamp lightsupin
theinstrumentcluster and
R
you hear awarning tone while theengine is
running
Observe additional warning messages in the
multifunction display.
The brakefluid level may be toolow due to
brakepad wear or leaking brakelines.
Havethe brakesystem checked immediately.
Consult aqualifiedspecialist workshop to
arrange this.
!
Afunction or performancetestshould only
be carried out on a2-axle dynamometer. If
you wish to operate thevehicle on such a
dynamometer, please consult aqualifiedspe-
cialistworkshop in advance. You could oth-
erwisedamage thedrivetrain or thebrake
system.
!
As theESP
®
system operates automatically,
theengine and theignitionmust be switched
off (theSmartKey must be in position 0 or 1 in
theignitionlock) if:
R
theelectric parking brakeistested on a
brakedynamometer (for amaximum of
ten seconds)
R
thevehicle is towed with thefront axle
raised.
Brakingtriggered automatically by ESP
®
may
seriously damage thebrakesystem.
All checksand maintenancework on thebrake
system must be carried out at aqualifiedspe-
cialistworkshop.
Havebrakepads installedand brakefluid
replaced at aqualifiedspecialist workshop.
If thebrakesystem has onlybeen subject to
moderateloads, you should testthe functional-
ity of your brak
es at regular int
ervals.
You can findadescription of Brake Assist (BAS)
on (
Y page 60).
Mercedes-Benzrecommendsthatyou onlyhave
brakepads/linings installedonyour vehicle
whichhave been approved for Mercedes-Benz
vehiclesorwhichcorrespondtoanequivalent
qualitystandard. Brake pads/linings whichhave
not been approved for Mercedes-Benzvehicles
or whichare not of an equivalent qualitycould
affect your vehicle's operatingsafety.
Mercedes-Benzrecommendsthatyou onlyuse
brakefluid that has been specially approved for
your vehicle by Mercedes-Benz, or whichcorre-
sponds to an equivalent qualitystandard. Brake
fluid whichhas not been approved for
Mercedes-Benzvehiclesorwhichisnot of an
equivalent qualitycould affect your vehicle's
operatingsafety.
Checkingbrake lining thickness
You can measurethe break pad/liningthick-
nessusingatestgage. Color-coding(green or
red) on thetestgage allows you to determine
whether thebrakepad/liningthicknessisstill
sufficient.The testgage is in thevehicle docu-
mentwallet in theglovebox.
Front wheel
Driving tips
149
Driving and parking
Z
Rear wheel
X
Bring thevehicleand wheels intoasuitable
position so that you can attach test gage A.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway
(
Y page 143).
X
Engage park position P.
X
Switchoff theengine.
X
Placetestgage A between thewheel's
spokesonbrakepad/lining =.
X
Hold test gage A verticallyonbrakedisc :
and slidemeasuringpin ; onto brake
disc :.
X
Checkwhichcolor field ? thearrow on
measuringpin ; is pointing to.
Green: thebrakepad/lining thickness is suf-
ficient.
Red: thebrakepad/lining thickness is not
sufficient. Havethe brakepads/lining
checkedataqualified specialist workshop.
To avoidaninaccuratemeasurement:
R
makesureyou position thewheels suitably
R
do notput themeasuringpin on arecess in
thebrakedisc
Driving on wet roads
Hydroplaning
If water has accumulated to acertaindepthon
theroad surface, there is adanger of hydro-
planing occurring, evenif:
R
you driveatlow speeds
R
thetires haveadequatetread depth
Forthisreason,inthe event of heavyrain or in
conditionsinwhichhydroplaning may occur,
you mustdriveinthe followingmanner:
R
lower your speed
R
avoidruts
R
avoidsuddensteering movements
R
brakecarefully
Driving on flooded roads
!
Bear in mindthatvehicles traveling in front
or in theoppositedirection createwaves. This
may causethe maximum permissiblewater
depthtobeexceeded.
Failure to observethese notesmay result in
damagetothe engine, electrical systems and
transmission.
If you havetodriveonstretches of road on which
water has collected, pleasebear in mindthat:
R
in thecaseofstanding water, thewater level
may be no higher than thelower edge of the
vehiclebody
R
you should drivenofasterthanatawalking
pace
Winter driving
G
WARNING
If you shiftdown on aslipperyroad surfacein
an attempttoincreasethe engine's braking
effect, thedrivewheels could lose their grip.
There is an increased danger of skiddingand
accidents.
Do notshiftdown for additional enginebrak-
ing on aslipperyroad surface.
G
DANGER
If theexhaust pipe is blockedoradequate
ventilation is notpossible, poisonous gases
150
Driving tips
Driving and parking
such as carbon monoxide (CO) may enter the
vehicle. This is the case, e.g. if the vehicle
becomes trapped in snow. There is arisk of
fatal injury.
If you leave the engine or the auxiliary heating
running, make sure the exhaust pipe and area
around the vehicle are clear of snow. To
ensure an adequate supply of fresh air, open a
window on the side of the vehicle that is not
facing into the wind.
Have your vehicle winter-proofed at aqualified
specialist workshop at the onset of winter.
Drive particularly carefully on slippery road sur-
faces. Avoid sudden acceleration, steering and
braking maneuvers. Do not use cruise control or
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC.
If the vehicle threatens to skid or cannot be
stopped when moving at low speed:
X
Shift the transmission to position N.
X
Try to bring the vehicle under control using
corrective steering.
The outside temperature indicator is not
designed to serve as an ice-warning device and
is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
Changes in the outside temperature are dis-
played after ashort delay.
Indicated temperatures just above the freezing
point do not guarantee that the road surface is
free of ice. The road may still be icy, especiallyin
wooded areas or on bridges.
You should pay special attention to road condi-
tions when temperatures are around freezing
point.
For more information on driving with snow
chains, see (
Y page 296).
For more information on driving with summer
tires, see (
Y page 295).
Observe the notes in the "Winter operation" sec-
tion (
Y page 295).
Off-road driving
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you drive on asteep incline at an angle or
turn when driving on an incline, the vehicle
could slip sideways, tip and rollover. There is a
risk of an accident.
Always drive on asteep incline in the line of
fall (straight up or down) and do not turn the
vehicle.
G
WARNING
Flammable material such as leaves, grass or
twigs may ignite if they come into contact with
hot parts of the exhaust system. There is arisk
of fire.
When driving off road or on unpaved roads,
check the vehicle's underside regularly. In
particular, remove parts of plants or other
flammable materials which have become
trapped. In the case of damage, contact a
qualified specialist workshop.
!
There is arisk of damage to the vehicle if:
R
the vehicle becomes stuck, e.g. on ahigh
curb or an unpaved road
R
you drive too fast over an obstacle, e.g. a
curb, speed bumps or apothole in the road
R
aheavy object strikes the underbody or
parts of the chassis
In situations like this, the body, the under-
body, chassis parts, wheels or tires could be
damaged without the damage being visible.
Components damaged in this way can unex-
pectedly fail or, in the case of an accident, no
longer withstand the strain they are designed
to.
If the underbody paneling is damaged,com-
bustible materials such as leaves, grass or
twigs can gather between the underbody and
the underbody paneling. If these materials
come in contact with hot parts of the exhaust
system, they can catch fire.
In such situations, have the vehicle checked
and repaired immediately at aqualified spe-
cialist workshop. If on continuing your jour-
ney you notice that driving safety is impaired,
pull over and stop the vehicle immediately,
paying attention to road and traffic condi-
tions. In such cases, consult aqualified spe-
cialist workshop.
The vehicle is only designed for easilynegotiable
off-road terrain and poor road surfaces.
When driving off-road, substances such as sand,
mud and water or water mixed with oil may get
Driving tips
151
Driving and parking
Z
intothe brakes. This could result in areduced
braking effect or in total brakefailure and also in
increased wear and tear.The braking charac-
teristicschange depending on the material
ingressingthe brakes. Clean the brakes after
drivingoff-road. If you detect areduced braking
effect or grinding noises, have the brakesystem
checked in aqualified specialist workshop as
soon as possible.Adapt your drivingstyle to the
differentbraking characteristics.
Drivingoff-road increases the likelihood of dam-
age to the vehicle, which, in turn,can lead to
failure of the mechanical assembly or systems.
Adapt your drivingstyle to suit the terrain con-
ditions. Drive carefully. Have damage to the
vehicle rectified immediately at aqualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Do not switchtotransmission position N when
drivingoff-road. If you trytobrakethe vehicle
using the service brake, you could lose control
of the vehicle. If the gradientistoo steep for your
vehicle, drive back down in reverse gear.
General notes
H
Environmental note
Protection of the environmentisofprimary
importance. Treat nature with respect.
Observe all prohibitingsigns.
Read this section carefully beforedrivingyour
vehicle off-road.
Off-road drivingisonly possible with the
ON&OFFROAD package.
The followingdrivingsystems are specially
adapted for drivingover easily negotiable off-
road terrain:
R
Off-road program (Y page 167)
R
Off-road ABS(Y page 60)
R
Off-road 4ETS (Y page 63)
R
Off-road ESP
®
(Y page 66)
R
DSR(Downhill Speed Regulation)
(
Y page 166)
Observe the followingnotes:
R
Stop the vehicle beforestartingtodrive along
an off-road route. If necessary, activate the
off-road program (
Y page 130).
R
To avoid damagingthe vehicle, make sure
there is always sufficient groundclearance.
R
Check that itemsofluggage and loads are
stowed safely and are well secured
(
Y page 247).
R
Always keep the enginerunning and in gear
when drivingonadownhill gradient. Activate
DSR(
Y page 166).
R
Drive slowly and evenly, if necessary at a
walkingpace.
R
Ensure that the wheels are in contactwith the
groundatall times.
R
Drive with extreme care on unfamiliar off-road
routes where visibilityispoor. For safetyrea-
sons, get out of the vehicle firstand survey
the off-road route.
R
Check the depthofwater beforefording rivers
and streams.
R
Watchout for obstacles.
R
Take care when turning on an uphill or down-
hill slope or when drivingacross aslope. The
vehicle could otherwise tip over.
R
Always keep the side windows and the pano-
rama roof with power tilt/slidingpanel closed
durin
gthe journey.
R
Do not deviatefrommarked routes.
R
Do not use the HOLDfunction when driving
off-road, on steep uphill or downhill gradients
or on slippery or loose surfaces. The HOLD
function cannot hold the vehicle on such sur-
faces.
Checklist beforedriving off-road
X
Engine oil level: checkthe engineoil level
and add oil if necessary.
When drivingonsteep gradients, the engine
oil level must be sufficiently high to ensure a
correctoil supply in the vehicle.
X
Wheels and tires: checkthe tiretread depth
and tirepressure.
X
Check for damage and remove any foreign
objects, e.g. small stones,fromthe wheels/
tires.
X
Replace any missingvalve caps.
X
Replace dented or damaged wheels.
X
Rims: dented or bent rims can result in aloss
of tirepressure and damage the tirebead.
Before drivingoff-road, checkthe wheels and
replacethemifnecessary.
152
Driving tips
Driving and parking
Checklist after driving off-road
!
If you detect damagetothe vehicle after
driving off-road, have thevehicle checked
immediately at aqualified specialist work-
shop.
X
Deactivateoff-road program (Y page 130).
X
DeactivateDSR (Y page 166).
X
Clean theheadlamps and rear lightsand
check for damage.
X
Clean thefront and rear licenseplates.
X
Clean thewheelsand tires withawaterjet
and remove any foreign objects.
X
Clean thewheels, wheel housingsand the
vehicle underside withawaterjet;check for
any foreign objectsand damage.
X
Checkwhether twigs or other partsofplants
have become trapped. Theseincreasethe risk
of fireand can damagefuel pipes,brake
hoses or theair bellows of theaxle jointsand
propeller shafts.
X
Afterthe trip, examinewithout fail theentire
undercarriage, wheels, tires, brakes, body-
work structure, steering,chassis and exhaust
system for damage.
X
Afterdriving in sand, mud, gravel, wateror
similar dirtyconditions, have thefollowing
checked and cleaned:
R
brakediscs
R
wheels
R
brakepads
R
axle joints
X
If you detect strongvibrations after off-road
travel, check for foreign objectsinthe wheels
and drivetrain and remove them if necessary.
Foreign objectscan disturb thebalance and
causevibrations.
Drivingoverpoor road surfaces places greater
demands on your vehicle than
driving on normal
r
oads. Afterdriving off-road, check thevehicle.
This allows you to detect damagepromptly and
reducethe riskofanaccidenttoyourself and
other road users.
Driving on sand
Observethe followingrules when driving on
sand:
R
Activate theoff-road program (Y page 130).
R
Avoid high enginespeeds.
R
Use theleft-hand steering wheel paddle
shiftertoshifttoalower gear appropriateto
theterrain.
R
Drive quickly to overcome therolling resist-
ance. Otherwise thevehicle's wheelscould
become stuck in looseground.
R
Drive in thetracksofother vehiclesifpossi-
ble. Makesure that:
-
thetirerutsare nottoo deep.
-
thesandissufficiently firm.
-
theground clearance of thevehicle is suf-
ficient.
Tirerutsand gravelroads
!
Checkthatthe rutsare nottoo deep and
that your vehicle has sufficient clearance.
Otherwise, your vehicle couldbedamaged or
bottomout and get stuck.
Observethe followingrules when driving along
rutsinoff-road terrain or on roadswithloose
gravel:
R
Activate theoff-road program (Y page 130).
R
Avoid high enginespeeds.
R
Shift to alower gear usingthe left-hand steer-
ing wheel paddle shifter.
R
Drive slowly.
R
Whererutsare toodeep, drivewiththe
wheelsofone side on thecentergrassy area,
if possible.
Traveling uphill
Approach/departureangle
G
WARNING
If you driveonasteep inclineatanangle or
turnwhen driving on an incline, thevehicle
couldslip sideways, tip and rollover. Thereisa
riskofanaccident.
Always driveonasteep inclineinthe lineof
fall (straightupordown)and do notturnthe
vehicle.
R
Observethe warningsfor off-road driving
(
Y page 151).
R
Follow thelineoffall when driving on slopes
and steep inclines.
Driving tips
153
Driving and parking
Z
R
Beforedriving on extreme uphilland downhill
gradients, select the off-road program
(
Y page 130).
R
Drive slowly.
R
Accelerate gentlyand make surethat the
wheels are gripping.
R
Avoid highengine speeds,exceptwhendriv-
ing on sandyand muddy routes with highdriv-
ing resistance.
R
Use the left-hand steering wheel paddle
shifter to shift to alower gearappropriate to
the gradient.
R
Use the left-hand steering wheel paddle
shifter to shift into alower gearingoodtime
on long and steepdownhillgradients.
Hillstart assist will aidyou whenpulling away on
ahill. For further information abouthillstart
assist, see (
Y page 127).
Do not switch to transmission position N when
driving off-road.Ifyou try to brake the vehicle
using the service brake, youcould losecontrol
of the vehicle. If the gradient is too steepfor your
vehicle, drive back downinreverse gear.
Alwaysobserve the approach/departure angle
values(
Y page 326).
Maximum gradient-climbingcapability
Alwaysobserve the maximum gradient climbing
ability values(
Y page 326).
Hilltops
Whendriving up an uphillgradient, slightly
reduce pressure on the accelerator immediately
before reaching the brow of the hill. Make use of
the vehicle'sown impetus to travelover the
brow.
Thisstyleofdriving prevents:
R
the vehicle from lifting off the ground on the
brow of ahill
R
the vehicle from traveling too quickly down
the other side
Drivingdownhill
R
Drive slowly.
R
Do not drive at an angledownsteepinclines.
Steer into the line of falland drive with the
front wheels alignedstraight. Otherwise, the
vehicle could slipsideways, tip and rollover.
R
Shift to alower gearusing the left-hand steer-
ing wheel paddleshifter before tackling steep
downhillgradients.
R
Activate DSR. If this is not sufficient, brake
gently. Whendoing so, make surethat the
vehicle is facing in the directionofthe line of
fall.
R
Check that the brakes are working normally
afteralong downhillstretch.
Off-roadABS is activatedwhenthe off-road pro-
gramisselected.
At speeds below 18 mph (30 km/h), the front
wheels lock cyclicallyduring braking. The dig-
ging-in effect achievedinthe process reduces
the stopping distance on off-road terrain. The
steerability of the vehicle is considerably
reducedifthe wheels lock.
Drivingsystems
Cruise control
General notes
Cruise control maintains aconstant roadspeed
for you. It brakes automaticallyinordertoavoid
exceeding the set speed. On long and steep
downhillgradients, especiallyifthe vehicle is
laden, youmustselect alow gearingoodtime.
You need to haveselected manual drive pro-
gram M (
Y page 138). By doing so, youwillmake
use of the braking effect of the engine. This
relieves the loadonthe brake system and pre-
vents the brakes from overheating and wearing
too quickly.
Whenthe engine is running, youcan use the
cruise control lever to limit the speed to any
speed between 20 mph (30 km/h)and the tech-
nicallypermitted maximum speed of the vehicle.
Use cruise control only if roadand trafficcon-
ditions make it appropriate to maintain asteady
speed for aprolongedperiod.
The speed indicated in the speedometer may
differ slightlyfrom the speed stored.
Important safety notes
If youfailtoadapt your driving style, cruise con-
trol can neither reduce the risk of an accident
nor overridethe laws of physics.Cruise control
cannot take into account the road, trafficand
weatherconditions. Cruise control is only an
aid. You are responsiblefor the distance to the
154
Drivingsystems
Drivingand parking
vehicleinfront, for vehiclespeed, for braking in
good time and for staying in yourlane.
Do not use cruise control:
R
in road and traffic conditions which do not
allow you to maintainaconstant speede.g. in
heavy traffic or on winding roads
R
on slippery road surfaces. Braking or accel-
erating could causethe drive wheels to lose
traction and the vehiclecould then skid
R
in poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy rain or
snow
If there is achange of drivers,advise the new
driver of the speedstored.
Cruise control lever
:
Activates or increasesspeed
;
Activates or reduces speed
=
Deactivates cruise control
?
Activates at the current speed/last stored
speed
When you activate cruise control, the stored
speedisshowninthe multifunction display for
five seconds.
Activation conditions
To activate cruise control, all of the following
activation conditions must be fulfilled:
R
the electric parking brake must be released.
R
ESP
®
must be active, but not intervening.
Storing,maintainingand calling up a
speed
Storing and maintaining the current
speed
You can store the current speedifyou are driv-
ing faster than 20 mph (30 km/h).
X
Accelerate the vehicletothe desired speed.
X
Briefly press the cruise control lever up : or
down ;.
X
Remove yourfoot from the accelerator pedal.
Cruise control is activated.The vehicleauto-
matically maintains the stored speed.
i
Cruise control may be unable to maintain
the stored speedonuphill gradients. The
stored speedisresumedwhen the gradient
evens out. Cruise control maintains the
stored speedondownhill gradients by auto-
matically applying the brakes.
Storing the current speedorcalling up the
last stored speed
G
WARNING
If you call up the stored speedand it differs
from the current speed, the vehicleacceler-
ates or decelerates. If you do not know the
stored speed, the vehiclecouldaccelerate or
brake unexpectedly. There is arisk of an acci-
dent.
Pay attention to the road and traffic condi-
tions before calling up the stored speed. If you
do not know the stored speed, store the
desired speedagain.
X
Briefly pullthe cruise control lever towards
you ?.
X
Remove yourfoot from the accelerator pedal.
The first time cruise control is activated,it
stores the current speedorregulates the
speedofthe vehicletothe previouslystored
speed.
Setting aspeed
Keep in mind that it may take abrief moment
until the vehiclehas accelerated or braked to
the speedset.
X
To adjust the set speedin10km/hincre-
ments:brieflypress cruise control lever : up
beyond the pressure point for ahigherspeed,
or down ; for alower speed.
or
X
Keep the cruise control lever pressedbeyond
the point of resistance until the desired speed
is set. Press cruise control lever up : for a
higherspeedordown ; for alower speed.
Driving systems
155
Driving and parking
Z
X
To adjust the setspeed in1km/hincre-
ments:brieflypress cruisecontrollever up :
to the pressure point for ahigherspeed or
down ; for alower speed.
or
X
Keepthe cruisecontrollever pressedtothe
point of resistance untilthe desired speed is
set. Press cruisecontrollever up : for a
higherspeed or down ; for alower speed.
i
Cruise controlisnot deactivatedifyou
depress the acceleratorpedal. For example, if
youaccelerate brieflytoovertake,cruisecon-
trol adjusts the vehicle's speed to the last
speed stored afteryou have finishedovertak-
ing.
Deactivating cruise control
There are severalwaystodeactivate cruisecon-
trol:
X
Briefly press the cruisecontrollever forwards
=.
or
X
Brake.
Cruise controlisautomaticallydeactivatedif:
R
the vehicleissecured with the electricpark-
ing brake
R
youare driving at less than20mph (30 km/h)
R
ESP
®
intervenes or youdeactivate ESP
®
R
youshift the transmission to position N while
driving
If cruisecontrolisdeactivated, youwillheara
warning tone. Youwillsee the Cruise Con‐
trolOff message in the multifunctiondisplay
for approximatelyfiveseconds.
i
Whenyou switch off the engine, the last
speed stored is cleared.
Distance PilotDISTRONIC
General notes
Distance PilotDISTRONIC regulatesthe speed
and automaticallyhelps youmaintain the dis-
tance to the vehicledetectedinfront. Vehicles
are detectedwiththe aidofthe radar sensor
system.Distance PilotDISTRONIC brakes auto-
maticallytoavoid exceeding the set speed or to
maintain the designated distance from the vehi-
cle in front.
Changeinto alower gearingoodtime on long
and steepdownhillgradients. Thisisespecially
important if the vehicleisladen.Bydoing so, you
will make useofthe braking effect of the engine.
Thisrelieves the load on the brake system and
prevents the brakes from overheating and wear-
ing too quickly.
If Distance PilotDISTRONIC detects thatthereis
ariskofacollision, youwillbewarned visually
and acoustically. Withoutyourintervention, Dis-
tance PilotDISTRONIC cannotprevent acolli-
sion. An intermittent warning tone will then
sound and the distance warning lamp will light
up in the instrument cluster.Brake immediately
in order to increasethe distance from the vehi-
cle in front, or take evasive action, provided it is
safe to do so.
For Distance PilotDISTRONIC to assist you
when driving,the radar sensor system must be
operational.
Distance PilotDISTRONIC operates in the range
between 0m
ph (0 km/h)and
120 mph
(200 km/h).
Do not useDistance PilotDISTRONIC on roads
with steepgradients.
Since Distance PilotDISTRONIC transmits radar
waves,itcan resemble the radar detectorsof
the responsibleauthorities. Youcan refertothe
relevant chapterinthe Operator's Manualif
questions are asked aboutthis.
i
USA only: Thisdevice hasbeenapproved by
the FCC as a"Vehicular RadarSystem".The
radar sensor is intendedfor useinanauto-
motive radar system only. Removal, tamper-
ing,oraltering of the device will voidany war-
ranties, and is not permitted by the FCC.Do
not tamper with, alter, or useinany non-
approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice
could voidthe user'sauthority to operate the
equipment.
i
Canadaonly: Thisdevice complies with
RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following two conditions:
1. Thisdevice maynot cause harmfulinter-
ference, and
2. Thisdevice must accept any interference
received, including interference thatmay
cause undesired operationofthe device.
Removal, tampering, or altering of the device
will voidany warranties, and is not permitted.
156
Driving systems
Driving andparking
Do not tamperwith, alter, or useinany non-
approved way.
Any unauthorized modification to thisdevice
could voidthe user'sauthority to operate the
equipment.
Changeinto alower gear in good time on long
and steepdownhillgradients.Thisisespecially
important if the vehicleisladen.Bydoing so, you
will make useofthe braking effect of the engine.
Thisrelieves the load on the brake system and
prevents the brakes fromoverheating and wear-
ing too quickly.
If Distance PilotDISTRONICdetects thatthere is
ariskofacollision, youwillbewarned visually
and acoustically. Withoutyourintervention, Dis-
tance PilotDISTRONICcannotprevent acolli-
sion. An intermittent warning tone will then
sound and the distance warning lamp will light
up in the instrument cluster.Brake immediately
in order to increase the distance to the vehiclein
front or take evasive action provided it is safe to
do so.
Distance PilotDISTRONICoperates in the range
between 0mph (0 km/h)and 120 mph
(200 km/h).
Do not useDistance PilotDISTRONICwhile driv-
ing on roads with steepgradients.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Distance PilotDISTRONICdoesnot react to:
R
people or animals
R
stationaryobjects on the road, e.g.stopped
or parked vehicles
R
oncomingvehicles and crossing traffic
As aresult, Distance PilotDISTRONICmay
neithergivewarnings nor intervene in such
situations. There is ariskofanaccident.
Alwayspay carefulattentiontothe trafficsit-
uationand be ready to brake.
G
WARNING
Distance PilotDISTRONICcannotalways
clearly identify otherroadusers and complex
trafficsituations.
In such cases, Distance PilotDISTRONICmay:
R
give an unnecessary warning and then
brake the vehicle
R
neithergiveawarning nor intervene
R
accelerate or brake unexpectedly
There is ariskofanaccident.
Continuetodrive carefullyand be ready to
brake, especially if Distance PilotDISTRONIC
warns you.
G
WARNING
Distance PilotDISTRONICbrakes your vehicle
with up to 50% of the maximum possible
deceleration. If thisdecelerationisnot suffi-
cient, Distance PilotDISTRONICalerts you
with avisualand acoustic warning. There is a
riskofanaccident.
Apply the brakes yourselfinthese situations
and try to take evasive action.
!
When Distance PilotDISTRONICorthe
HOLD functionisactivated,the vehicle
brakes automaticallyincertain situations.
To avoiddamagetothe vehicle, deactivate
Distance PilotDISTRONICand the HOLD
functioninthe following or similar situations:
R
when towing the vehicle
R
in the car wash
If youfailtoadapt your drivingstyle,Distance
PilotDISTRONICcan neitherreduce the riskof
an accident nor override the laws of physics.
Distance PilotDISTRONICcannottake into
account road, weather or trafficconditions. Dis-
tance PilotDISTRONICisonlyanaid.You are
responsiblefor the distance to the vehiclein
front, for vehiclespeed, for braking in good time
and for staying in your lane.
Do not useDistance PilotDISTRONIC:
R
in roadand trafficconditions which do not
allowyou to maintain aconstant speed, e.g.in
heavytrafficoronw
inding roads
R
on slippery roadsurfaces.Braking or accel-
erating could cause the drive wheels to lose
tractionand the vehiclecould thenskid
R
when there is poor visibility,e.g.due to fog,
heavyrainorsnow
Driving systems
157
Driving andparking
Z
Distance PilotDISTRONICmay not detect nar-
row vehicles drivinginfront, e.g.motorcycles, or
vehicles drivingonadifferent line.
In particular,the detection of obstaclescan be
impaired if:
R
there is dirt on the sensorsoranything else
coveringthe sensors
R
there is snow or heavyrain
R
there is interferencebyotherradar sources
R
there arestrong radarreflections, for exam-
ple, in parkinggarages
If Distance PilotDISTRONICnolongerdetects a
vehicleinfront, it mayunexpectedly accelerate
to the speedstored.
Thisspeed may:
R
be too high if youare drivinginafilter lane or
an exitlane
R
be so high when drivinginthe right-hand lane
thatyou overtake vehicles in the left-hand
lane
R
be so high in the left lane thatyou pass vehi-
clesdrivinginthe right lane
If there is achange of drivers, advisethe new
driver of the speedstored.
Cruisecontrollever
:
Storesthe current speedorahigherspeed
;
Storesthe current speedoralower speed
=
DeactivatesDistance PilotDISTRONIC
?
Storesthe current speedorcalls up the last
stored speed
A
Sets aspecifiedminimumdistance
ActivatingDistance PilotDISTRONIC
Activationconditions
!
When Distance PilotDISTRONICorthe
HOLD functionisactivated,the vehicle
brakes automaticallyincertain situations.
To avoiddamagetothe vehicle, deactivate
Distance PilotDISTRONICand the HOLD
functioninthe following or similar situations:
R
when towing the vehicle
R
in the car wash
To activate Distance PilotDISTRONIC, the fol-
lowing conditions must be fulfilled:
R
the engine must be started.Itmay take up to
two minutesofdrivingbeforeDistance Pilot
DISTRONICisready for use.
R
the electricparkingbrake must be released.
R
ESP
®
must be active, butnot intervening.
R
ParkingPilot must not be activated.
R
the transmission must be in position D.
R
the driver's door must be closed when you
shift from P to D or your seatbeltmustbe
fastened.
R
the front-passengerdoormustbeclosed.
R
DSR must be deactivated.
R
the vehiclemustnot skid.
Activating
X
Brieflypullthe cruisecontrollever towards
you ?,up : or down ;.
Distance PilotDISTRONICisactivated.
X
Keepthe cruisecontrollever pressedup : or
down ; untilthe desired speedisset.
X
Removeyourfootfromthe accelerator pedal.
Your vehicleadaptsits speedtothatofthe
vehicleinfront, butonlyuptothe desired
stored speed.
i
If youdonot fullyrelease the accelerator
pedal, the Distance Pilot Passive
mes-
sage appearsinthe multifunctiondisplay.The
set distance to aslower-moving vehiclein
front will thennot be maintained. Youwillbe
drivingatthe speedyou determine by the
positionofthe accelerator pedal.
Youcan also activate Distance PilotDISTRONIC
when stationary. The lowest speedthatcan be
set is 20 mph (30 km/h).
158
Driving systems
Driving andparking
DrivingwithDistance PilotDISTRONIC
Activating at thecurrent speed/last
stored speed
G
WARNING
If you callupthe stored speed and it differs
from thecurrentspeed, thevehicle acceler-
ates or decelerates. If you do notknowthe
stored speed, thevehicle could accelerateor
brake unexpectedly. There is ariskofanacci-
dent.
Pay attention to theroadand traffic condi-
tionsbeforecallingupthe stored speed. If you
do notknowthe stored speed, storethe
desiredspeed again.
X
Briefly pull thecruise controllever towards
you ?.
X
Removeyour foot from theaccelerator pedal.
The first time DistancePilotDISTRONIC is
activated, it stores thecurrentspeed or reg-
ulates thespeed of thevehicle to theprevi-
ouslystoredspeed.
Pullingawayand driving
X
If you wanttopullawaywithDistance
PilotDISTRONIC: removeyour foot from the
brake pedal.
X
Briefly pull thecruise controllever towards
you ?.
or
X
If Distance PilotDISTRONICisactivated:
acceleratebriefly.
Your vehicle pulls away and adaptsits speed
to that of thevehicle in front. If no vehicle is
detectedinfront,your vehicle accelerates to
theset speed.
The vehicle can also pull away when it is facing
an unidentifie
dobstacleo
risdrivingonadiffer-
entlinefromanother vehicle. The vehicle then
brakesautomatically. Be ready to brake at all
times.
If there is no vehicle in front, DistancePilot
DISTRONIC operates in thesameway as cruise
control.
If DistancePilotDISTRONIC detects aslower-
movingvehicle in front, it brakesyour vehicle. In
this way, thedistanceyou haveselectedismain-
tained.
If DistancePilotDISTRONIC detects afaster-
movingvehicle in front, it increasesthe driving
speed. However, thevehicle is only accelerated
up to thespeed you havestored.
i
DistancePilotDISTRONIC is deactivated
when you depress thebrake,exceptwhen the
vehicle is stationary.
Selecting thedrive program
DistancePilotDISTRONIC supports asporty
drivingstyle when you selectthe S+ drive pro-
gram (Mercedes-AMGvehicles only), S
(
Y page 136) or themanual drive program
(
Y page 138). Acceleration behindthe vehicle in
frontortothe set speed is then noticeably more
dynamic.Ifyou haveselectedthe E (Mercedes-
AMGvehicles: C)drive program, thevehicle
accelerates more gently. Thisse
tting is recom-
mended in stop-and-start traffic.
Changinglanes
If when drivingonmultilaneroads you wish to
changetothe overtakinglane, DistancePilot
DISTRONIC supports you if:
R
you are drivingfasterthan45mph (70 km/h)
R
Distance PilotDISTRONICismaintaining the
distance to avehicleinfront
R
youswitch on the appropriate turnsignal
R
Distance PilotDISTRONICdoesnot currently
detect adangerofcollision
If these conditions arefulfilled,yourvehicleis
accelerated.Accelerationwillbeinterruptedif
changing lanes takestoo long or if the distance
between your vehicleand the vehicleinfront
becomestoo small.
Stopping
If Distance PilotDISTRONICdetects thatthe
vehicleinfront is stopping, it brakes your vehicle
untilitisstationary.
Once your vehicleisstationary, it remains sta-
tionaryand youdonot needtodepress the
brake.
i
After atime,the electricparkingbrake
secures the vehicleand relieves the service
brake.
i
Depending on the specifiedminimumdis-
tance,yourvehiclewillcome to astandstillat
asufficient distance behind the vehiclein
front. The specifiedminimumdista
nce is set
u
sing the controlonthe cruisecontrollever.
Driving systems
159
Driving andparking
Z
When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is activated,
the transmission is shifted automatically to
position P if:
R
the driver's seat belt is not fastened and the
driver's door is open.
R
the engine is switched off, unless it is auto-
matically switched off by the ECO start/stop
function.
The electric parking brake secures the vehicle
automatically if Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is
activated when the vehicle is stationary and:
R
asystem malfunction occurs.
R
the power supply is insufficient.
If amalfunction occurs,the transmission may
also shift into position P automatically.
Setting aspeed
Keep in mind that it may take abrief moment
until the vehicle has accelerated or braked to
the speed set.
X
Press the cruise control lever up : for a
higher speed or down ; for alower speed.
X
To adjust the set speed in1mphincre-
ments (1 km/hincrements): briefly press
the cruise control lever up : or down ; to
the pressure point.
The last stored speed increases or decreases
in 1mph (1 km/h) increments.
X
To adjust the set speed in5mphincre-
ments (10 km/hincrements): briefly press
the cruise control lever up : or down ; to
the pressure point.
The last stored speed increases or decreases
in 5mph (10 km/h) increments.
i
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is not deactivated
if you depress the accelerator pedal. If you
acceleratetoovertake, Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC adjusts the vehicle's speed to the
last speed stored after you have finished over-
taking.
Setting aspecified minimumdistance
You can set the specified minimum distancefor
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC by varying the time
span between one and two seconds. With this
function you can set the minimum distancethat
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC maintainstothe vehi-
cle in front, dependent on vehicle speed. You
can see this distanceinthe multifunction dis-
play (
Y page 161).
The specified minimum distancecan be
changed while Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is
switched on or off.
i
Make sure that you maintain the minimum
distancetothe vehicle in frontasrequired by
law. Adjust the distancetothe vehicle in front
if necessary.
X
To increase: turn control = in direction ;.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC then maintainsa
greater distancebetween your vehicle and
the vehicle in front.
X
To decrease: turn control = in direction :.
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC then maintainsa
shorter distancebetween your vehicle and
the vehicle in front.
Deactivating Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
There are several ways to deactivateDistance
Pilot DISTRONIC:
X
Briefly press the cruise control lever for-
wards :.
or
X
Brake, unless the vehicle is stationary
When you deactivateDistance Pilot DISTRONIC,
the Distance Pilot Off
message appears in
160
Driving systems
Driving and parking
the multifunctiondisplay for approximately five
seconds.
i
The last speedstored remains stored until
youswitch off the engine.Distance Pilot
DISTRONICisnot deactivated if youdepress
the accelerator pedal.
Distance PilotDISTRONICisautomaticallydeac-
tivated if:
R
youengagethe electricparking brake or if the
vehicleisautomaticallysecured with the elec-
tric parking brake
R
ESP
®
intervenes or youdeactivate ESP
®
R
the transmission is in the P, R or N position
R
youpullthe cruisecontrollever towards you
in order to pull away and the front-passenger
door or one of the reardoors is open
R
the vehicleisskidding
R
youswitch on Parking Pilot
If Distance PilotDISTRONICisautomatically
deactivated,you will hear awarning tone.The
Distance Pilot Off
message appearsinthe
multifunctiondisplay for approximately fivesec-
onds.
Distance PilotDISTRONICisautomaticallydeac-
tivated if youactivate DSR. The à DSR sym-
bolappears in the multifunctiondisplay.
Distance PilotDISTRONIC displaysin
the instrument cluster
Displays in the speedometer
When Distance PilotDISTRONICisactivated and
there arenovehicles detectedinfront, one or
two segments ; in the speedrange setlight up.
If Distance PilotDISTRONICdetects avehiclein
front, segments ; between speedofthe vehi-
cle in front = and stored speed : light up.
i
For design reasons, the speeddisplayed in
the speedometermay differslightlyfromthe
speedset for Distance PilotDISTRONIC.
Display when Distance PilotDISTRONIC is
deactivated
In the Assistance menu (Y page 191)ofthe on-
board computer, you can select the assistance
display.
Assistance graphic
:
Vehicle in front, if detected
;
Distance indicator, current distance to the
vehicleinfront
=
Specified minimumdistance to the vehicle
in front; adjustable
?
Own vehicle
X
Select the Assistance Graphic function
using the on-board computer (
Y page191).
Display whenDistance Pilot DISTRONIC is
activated
You willinitially see the stored speedfor about
five seconds when you activate Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC.
Assistance graphic
:
Vehicle in front, if detected
;
Specified minimumdistance to the vehicle
in front; adjustable
Driving systems
161
Driving and parking
Z
=
Own vehicle
?
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC active (text only
appears when the cruise control lever is
actuated
X
Select the Assistance Graphic function
using the on-board computer (
Y page 191).
Tips for driving with Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC
General notes
Pay particular attention in the following traffic
situations:
R
Cornering, entering and exiting abend: the
ability of Distance Pilot DISTRONIC to detect
vehicles during cornering is limited. Your vehi-
cle may brake unexpectedly or late.
R
Driving on adifferent line: Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC may not detect vehicles which are
not driving in the middle of their lane. The dis-
tance to the vehicle in front will be too short.
R
Other vehicles changing lanes: Distance Pilot
DISTRONIC has not detected the vehicle cut-
ting in yet. The distance to this vehicle will be
too short.
R
Narrow vehicles: Distance Pilot DISTRONIC
has not yet detected the vehicle in front on
the edge of the road because of its narrow
width. The distance to the vehicle in front will
be too short.
R
Obstacles and stationary vehicles: Distance
Pilot DISTRONIC does not brake for obstacles
or stationary vehicles. If, for example, the
detected vehicle turns acorner and an obsta-
cle or stationary vehicle is then revealed, Dis-
tance Pilot DISTRONIC will not brake for
them.
R
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC may mistakenly
detect vehicles that are crossing your lane. If
you activate Distance Pilot DISTRONIC in the
following situations, the vehicle could pull
awayunintentionally:
-
At traffic lights with crossing traffic, for
example.
-
With avehicle ahead on the other side of an
intersection and the HOLD function active.
In such situations, brake if necessary. Distance
Pilot DISTRONIC will then be deactivated.
HOLD function
General notes
The HOLD function can assist the driver in the
following situations:
R
when pulling away, especially on steep slopes
R
when maneuvering on steep slopes
R
when waiting in traffic
The vehicle is kept stationary without the driver
having to depress the brake pedal.
The braking effect is canceled and the HOLD
function deactivated when you depress the
accelerator pedal to pull away.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
When leaving the vehicle, it can still roll away
despite being braked by the HOLD function if:
R
there is amalfunction in the system or in
the voltage supply.
R
the HOLD function has been deactivated by
pressing the accelerator pedal or the brake
pedal,e.g. by avehicle occupant.
R
the electrical system in the engine com-
partment, the battery or the fuses have
been tampered with.
R
the battery is disconnected
There is arisk of an accident.
If you wish to exit the vehicle, always turn off
the HOLD function and secure the vehicle
against rolling away.
!
When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the
HOLD function is activated, the vehicle
brakes automaticallyincertain situations.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and the HOLD
function in the following or similarsituations:
R
when towing the vehicle
R
in the car wash
Deactivating the HOLD function (Y page 163).
162
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Activation conditions
You can activatethe HOLD function if:
R
thevehicleisstationary
R
theengineisrunningorifithas been auto-
matically switched off by theECO start/stop
function
R
thedriver's door is closed or your seat belt is
fastened
R
theelectric parking brakeisreleased
R
DistancePilotDISTRONICisdeactivated
R
thetransmission position D, R or N is engaged
while drivingavehiclewithanautomatic
transmission
Activating theHOLD function
X
Makesurethatthe activation conditionsare
met.
X
Depress thebrakepedal.
X
Quicklydepress thebrakepedal further
until : appearsinthe multifunction display.
The HOLD function is activated. You can
release thebrakepedal.
i
If depressing thebrakepedal thefirst time
does notactivatethe HOLD function,wait
brieflyand then tryagain.
Deactivating theHOLD function
The HOLD function is deactivated automatically
if:
R
you accelerate.Onvehicles withautomatic
transmission:onlywhen thetransmission is in
position D or R.
R
thetransmission is in position P on vehicles
withautomatic transmission.
R
you depress thebrakepedal again withacer-
tainamount of pressureuntil : disappears
from themultifunction display.
R
you activateDistance PilotDISTRONIC.
R
you secure thevehicleusingthe electric park-
ing brake.
i
Afteratime, theelectric parking brake
secures thevehicleand relieves theservice
brake.
When theHOLDfunction is activated, thetrans-
mission is shiftedautomatically to position P if:
R
thedriver's seat belt is notfastenedand the
driver's door is open.
R
theengineisswitched off,unless it is auto-
matically switched off by theECO start/stop
function.
The electric parking brakesecures thevehicle
automatically if theHOLDfunction is activated
when thevehicleisstationary and:
R
asystem malfunction occurs.
R
thepowersupply is insufficient.
Start-off assist (exceptMercedes-
AMG vehicles)
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you use start-off assist,individual wheels
may start to spin and thevehiclemay skid. If
ESP
®
is deactivated, there is agreaterdanger
of skiddingand having an accident. Makesure
that no personsorobstacles are in thevicinity
of thevehicle.
Start-off assist enables optimum acceleration
from astandstill. Forthis, asuitably high-grip
road surfaceisrequired, alongwiththe tires and
vehiclebeinginproper operating condition.
Do notactivatestart-off assist on public roads.
Observethe safetynotes on drivingsafetysys-
tems (
Y page 59).
Be suretoread thesafetynotes and information
on ESP
®
(Y page 63).
Activating start-off assist
X
DeactivateESP
®
(Y page 191).
X
Turn thesteering wheeltothe straight-ahead
position.
X
Depress thebrakepedal hardwithyour left
footand keep it depressed.
X
Shift thetransmission to position D.
X
Use theDYNAMICSELECTbuttontoselect
the S drive program (
Y page 130).
Driving systems
163
Driving and parking
Z
X
Quickly depress the accelerator pedal fully.
X
Take yourfoot off the brake, butkeep the
accelerator pedal depressed.
The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceler-
ation.
i
Activate ESP
®
as soon as the acceleration
process has ended.ESP
®
will otherwise not
be abletostabilize the vehicle if the vehicle
starts to skid or awheel starts to spin.
Canceling start-off assist
X
Remove yourfoot from the accelerator pedal.
X
Reactivate ESP
®
.
RACESTART (Mercedes-AMG vehi-
cles)
Important safety notes
i
RACESTART must not be usedonnormal
roads. RACESTART must only be activated
and usedondedicated road circuits, outside
of publicroad use.
i
RACESTART is only available in
MercedesAMG vehicles.
G
WARNING
If you use RACESTART,individual tires may
start to spinand the vehicle couldskid.
Depending on the selected ESP
®
mode,there
is an increased risk of skidding and having an
accident. Make sure that no persons, animals
or obstacles are within range of the vehicle.
RACESTART enables optimal acceleration from
astanding start. For this, asuitablyhigh-grip
road surface is required,along with the tires and
vehicle being in proper operating condition.
i
Observe the safety notes on driving safety
systems (
Y page59).
Be sure to readthe safety notes and informa-
tion on ESP
®
(Y page63).
Conditions for activation
You can activate RACESTART if:
R
the doors, hood and the trunk lid are closed.
R
the engine is running and the transmission,
all-wheel driveclutch and the engine are at
operating temperature.
R
the steering wheel is in the straight-ahead
position.
R
the vehicle is stationary and the brake pedal is
depressed(left foot).
R
the transmissionisinposition D.
R
one of the driveprograms S, S+ or RACE is
selected. (
Y page131)
ActivatingRACESTART
X
Depress the brake pedal with yourleft foot
and keep it depressed.
X
Pulland holdboth steering wheel paddle shift-
ers.
X
The RACE START Confirm: PaddleUP
Cancel: PaddleDOWN message appearsin
the multifunction display.
X
Release both steering wheel paddle shifters.
i
If the activation conditions are no longerful-
filled,RACESTART is canceled. The RACE
START Not Possible See Operator's
Manual message appearsinthe multifunction
display.
X
To cancel: pull the left steering wheel paddle
shifter (
Y page138).
or
X
To confirm: pull the rightsteering wheel pad-
dle shifter (
Y page138).
The RACE
START Available Depress gas
pedal message appearsinthe multifunction
display.
i
If you do not depress the accelerator pedal
within afew seconds, RACESTART is can-
celed. The multifunction displayshowsthe
RACE START Canceled
message.
X
Fully depress the accelerator pedal.
The engine speed is increased.
The RACE
START Release brake to start
message appearsinthe multifunction display.
i
If you do not release the brake pedal within
ashort time, RACESTART will be canceled.
The multifunction displayshowsthe RACE
START Canceled message.
X
Take yourfoot off the brake, butkeep the
accelerator pedal depressed.
The vehicle pulls away at maximum acceler-
ation.
The RACE
START Active message appearsin
the multifunction display.
164
Drivingsystems
Drivingand parking
RACE START is deactivated when thevehicle
reaches aspeedofapproximately 50 km/h.
RACE START is deactivated immediately if you
release theacceleratorpedal during RACE
START or if any of theactivation conditionsare
no longer fulfilled.The RACESTART Not Pos
sible or RACESTART Canceled message
appearsinthe multifunction display.
i
If RACE START is used repeatedly within a
short period of time, it is only available again
after thevehiclehas been driven acertain
distance.
AMG adaptive sport suspension sys-
tem
General notes
The electronically controlled damping system
works continuously. This improvesdriving
safetyand ride comfort.
The damping is tuned individually to eachwheel
and dependson:
R
your driving style, e.g. sporty
R
theroad surfacecondition,e.g.bumps
R
your individual selection of "Sport"or"Com-
fort"
The suspension setting is adjusted usingthe
corresponding buttoninthe center console.
i
The modecan also be set usingthe AMG
DYNAMIC SELECT controller (
Y page 131).
Eachtimeyou start theenginewiththe Smart-
Key or theStart/Stopbutton, Comfort modeis
activated. Forfurther information about starting
theengine, see (
Y page 125).
Sport mode
The firmer setting of thesuspension tuning in
Sport modeensures evenbettercontactwith
theroad.Selectthismodewhen employinga
sportydriving style, e.g. on windingcountry
roads.
X
Press button :.
Indicatorlamp ; lights up. You haveselected
Sport mode.
The AMG SuspensionSystem SPORT
mes-
sage appearsinthe multifunction display.
Comfortmode
In Comfort mode, thedriving characteristics of
your vehicleare morecomfortable. Selectthis
modeifyou favor amorecomfortable driving
style, but also when driving fastonstraight
roads, e.g. highways.
X
Press button : again so that indicator
lamp ; goes out.
You haveselected Comfort mode.
The AMG
Suspension System COMFORT mes-
sage appearsinthe multifunction display.
4MATIC
!
Never towthe vehiclewithone axleraised.
This may damagethe differential. Damage of
this sortisnot covered by theMercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty. All wheels mustremain
either on theground or be fully raised.
Observethe instructionsfor towingthe vehi-
cle withall wheels in full contact withthe
ground.
4MATIC, together withESP
®
,improvesthe trac-
tion of your vehiclewheneveradrivewheel
spinsdue to insufficientgrip.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, 4MATIC can
neither reduce theriskofaccidentnor override
thelaws of physics.4MATIC cannottake
accountofroad,weather and traffic conditions.
4MATIC is only an aid. You are responsiblefor
thedistancetothe vehicleinfront,for vehicle
speed, for braking in goodtimeand for stayingin
your lane.
If adrivewheelspinsdue to insufficientgrip:
R
Only depress theacceleratorpedal as far as
necessarywhen pullingaway.
R
Accelerate less when driving.
Driving systems
165
Driving and parking
Z
i
In wintry driving conditions, the maximum
effect of 4MATIC can only be achievedifyou
use winter tires (M+S tires), with snow chains
if necessary.
DSR
General notes
i
DSR (DownhillSpeed Regulation) is only
available for vehicleswith the ON&OFFROAD
package.
DSR is an aid to assistyou when driving down-
hill.Itkeeps the speed of travel at the speed
selected on the on-board computer. The steeper
the downhill gradient, the greater the DSR brak-
ing effect on the vehicle.When driving on flat
stretches of road or on an uphill gradient, the
DSR braking effect is minimal or nonexistent.
DSR controls the vehicle’s speed when it is acti-
vated and the transmission is in position D, R or
N.You can drive at ahigher or alowerspeed
than that set on the on-board computer at any
time by accelerating or braking.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If the speed driven and the set speed deviate
and you activate DSR on aslippery road sur-
face, the wheelsmay lose traction. There is an
increased danger of skidding and accidents.
Before switching DSR on, please take into
consideration the road surface and the differ-
ence between driving speed and the set
speed.
If you fail to adapt yourdriving style, DSR can
neither reduce the risk of accident nor override
the lawsofphysics. DSR cannot take account of
road, weather and traffic conditions. DSR is only
an aid.You are responsible for the distance to
the vehicle in front, for vehicle speed,for brak-
ing in good time and for staying in yourlane.
You are always responsible for keeping control
of the vehicle and for assessing whether the
downhill gradient can be managed.DSR may not
always be abletokeep to the set speed,depend-
ing on road surface and tire conditions. Select a
set speed suitable for the prevailing conditions
and when necessary,applythe brakes manually.
Further information about"Driving off-road"
(
Y page 151).
Activating/deactivating DSR
If you activate DSR and no speed has been set,
the vehicle decelerates to 3mph (Canada:
6km/h).
You can only activate DSR when driving at
speedsbelow20mph (Canada: 30 km/h).
Activating DSR
X
Press button :.
Indicator lamp ; lights up.
The status indicator in the multifunction dis-
playshows, e.g. DSR 6km/h
.
If the current vehicle speed is too high, the DSR
symbolappears on the multifunction display.
You willalso see the message: Max. Speed
30 km/h .
If you enter or exit aparking space using Active
Parking Assist, and press button :,indicator
lamp ; flashes. DSR can then not be switched
on.
Deactivating DSR
X
Press button :.
Indicator lamp ; goes out.
The DSR symbolappears in the multifunction
display along with the Off
message.
DSR is deactivated automatically if you drive
faster than 22 mph (Canada: 35 km/h). The DSR
symbolappears in the multifunction display
along with the Off
message. You also hear a
warning tone.
166
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Display in theassistance graphic
X
Selectthe AssistanceGraphic function
usingthe on-boardcomputer(
Y page 191).
WhenDSR is activated symbol : appears in
theassistancegraphics display.
Changingthe set speed whilethe vehi-
cle is in motion
WhenDSR is activated, you can changethe set
speed to avaluebetween 2mph and 11 mph
(Canada: between 4km/hand 18 km/h) while
thevehicle is in motion.
X
To increaseordecreasein1 mphincre-
ments(Canada:1 km/hincrements):
briefly press thecruise controllever to the
pressure point, up : forahigher set speed or
down ; foralowerset speed.
The set valueappears in thestatusindicator
of themultifunction display.
Off-road program
General notes
i
The Off-road program is only available on
vehicles withthe ON&OFFROADpackage.
The off-road program assistsyou in drivingoff-
road. The engine's performancecharacteristics
and thegearshiftingcharacteristics of theauto-
matic transmissionare adapted forthispur-
pose. ABS, ESP
®
and ETSprograms especially
adapted to off-road drivingare also activated.
Do notuse theoff-roadprogram on roads that
are snow-covered or icyorifyou havemounted
snow chainsonyour vehicle.
Forinformation on drivingoff-road, see
(
Y page 151).
To activate/deactivate theoff-road pro-
gram
X
Press DYNAMICSELECTbutton :
(
Y page 130) repeatedly until the Off-road
drive program is selected.
The status icon of theOff-roadprogram is
shown in themultifunction display.
Display in theassistance graphic
Driving systems
167
Driving andparking
Z
X
Select the Assistance Graphic function
using the on-board computer(
Y page 191).
Whenthe off-road programisactivated, sym-
bol : appears in the assistance graphicdis-
play.
Drivingdynamics display (vehicles
with the ON&OFFROADpackage)
General notes
Using the driving dynamics display in the multi-
media system display,you can see the drive
programyou have selected as well as additional
information on the vehicle's operating status.
:
Drive programselected
;
Accelerator pedal position shown in %
=
Brake pedal position shown in %
?
DSR statusindicator
A
Angle of inclination
B
Steering angle
C
Uphillordownhillgradient in percentage
The acceleratorand brake pedal position is only
available in vehicles with the multimediasystem
(COMAND).
Activating the driving dynamics display
X
Switch on the multimediasystem; see the
separate multimediasystem operating
instructions.
X
Press button :.
The driving dynamics display appears in the
multimediasystem display.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Important safety notes
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is an electronic
parking aidwithultrasound. It monitors the area
around your vehicleusing six sensors in the
front bumperand six sensors in the rear
bumper. Parking Assist PARKTRONIC visually
and audiblyindicates the distance between your
vehicleand an object.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is only an aid. It is
not areplacement for your attention to your
immediate surroundings. You are always
responsible for safe maneuvering,parking and
exiting aparking space. Whenmaneuvering,
parking or pulling outofaparking space, make
sure that there are no persons,animalsor
objects in the areainwhich youare maneuver-
ing.
!
Whenparking,pay particularattention to
objects above or below the sensors, such as
flowerpots or trailerdrawbars.Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC doesnot detect such objects
when they are in the immediate vicinity of the
vehicle. You could damagethe vehicleorthe
objects.
The sensors may not detect snow and other
objects that absorb ultrasonic waves.
Ultrasonic sources such as an automatic car
wash, the compressed-air brakes of atruck or
apneumaticdrill could cause Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC to malfunction.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC may not function
correctly on uneven terrain.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is activatedauto-
matically when you:
R
switch on the ignition
R
shift the transmissiontoposition D, R or N
R
release the electricparking brake
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactivated at
speeds above 11 mph (18 km/h). It is reactiva-
ted at lowerspeeds.
168
Drivingsystems
Driving and parking
Rangeofthe sensors
General notes
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC doesnot take into
account obstacles located:
R
below the detection range, e.g. people, ani-
malsorobjects.
R
above the detection range, e.g. overhanging
loads, tailsections or loading ramps of goods
vehicles.
:
Sensors in the front bumper, left-hand side
(example)
The sensors mustbefree from dirt, ice or slush.
Theycan otherwise not function correctly.Clean
the sensors regularly, taking care not to scratch
or damagethem (
Y page 274).
Range
:
Detection rangeoffront sensors
;
Detection rangeofrearsensors
Front sensors
Center Approx. 40 in (approx.
100 cm)
Corners Approx. 24 in (approx.
60 cm)
Rear sensors
Center Approx. 48 in (approx.
120 cm)
Corners Approx. 32 in (approx.
80 cm)
Minimum distance
Center Approx. 8in(approx. 20 cm)
Corners Approx. 6in(approx. 15 cm)
If there is an obstaclewithin this range, the rel-
evant warning displayslight up and awarning
tone sounds. If the distance falls below the min-
imum, the distance may no longer be shown.
Warning displays
:
Segments on the left-hand sideofthe vehi-
cle
;
Segments on the right-hand sideofthe vehi-
cle
=
Segments showing operationalreadiness
The warning displaysshowthe distance
between the sensors and the obstacle. The
warning display for the front areaislocatedon
the dashboard above the center airvents. The
warning display for the rearareaislocatedon
the headlinerinthe rearcompartment.
The warning display for each sideofthe vehicle
is divided into five yellow and two red segments.
Driving systems
169
Driving and parking
Z
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is operational if yel-
low segmentsshowing operational readiness =
light up.
The gear lever position or the transmission posi-
tion of the automatic transmission and the
direction in which the vehicle is rolling deter-
mine which warning display is active when the
engine is running.
Transmission posi-
tion
Warning display
D
Frontarea activated
R, N or the vehicle is
rolling backwards
Rear and frontareas
activated
P
No areas activated
One or more segmentslight up as the vehicle
approaches an obstacle, depending on the vehi-
cle's distancefrom the obstacle.
From the:
R
sixth segment onwards, you will hear an inter-
mittent warning tonefor approximately two
seconds.
R
seventhsegment onwards, you will hear a
warning tonefor approximately two seconds.
This indicates that you have now reached the
minimum distance.
Deactivating or activating Parking
Assist PARKTRONIC
:
Indicator lamp
;
Deactivates or activates Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC
If indicator lamp : is lit, Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC is deactivated.
i
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is automati-
cally activated when you turn the SmartKey to
position 2 in the ignition lock.
170
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Problems with Parking Assist PARKTRONIC
Problem
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Only the red segments in
the Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC warning
displaysare lit. You also
hear awarning tone for
approximately two sec-
onds.
Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC is then
deactivated and the indi-
cator lamp on the
PARKTRONIC button
lights up.
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC has malfunctioned and has been deacti-
vated.
X
If problems persist, have Parking Assist PARKTRONIC checked at a
qualified specialist workshop.
Only the red segments in
the Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC warning
displaysare lit. Parking
Assist PARKTRONIC is
then deactivated.
The Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors are dirty or there is inter-
ference.
X
Clean the Parking Assist PARKTRONIC sensors (Y page 274).
X
Switch the ignition back on.
The problem may be caused by an external source of radio or ultra-
sound waves.
X
Check to see if Parking Assist PARKTRONIC works at adifferent
location.
Parking Pilot
General notes
Parking Pilot is an electronic parking aid with
ultrasound. It measures the road on both sides
of the vehicle. Aparking symbol indicates asuit-
able parking space. Active steering intervention
and brake application can assist you during
parking and when exiting aparking space. Park-
ing Assist PARKTRONIC is also available
(
Y page 168).
Important safety notes
Parking Pilot is only an aid. It is not areplace-
ment for your attention to your immediate sur-
roundings. You are always responsible for safe
maneuvering, parking and exiting aparking
space. Make sure that no persons, animals or
objectsare in the maneuvering range.
When Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is deactiva-
ted, Parking Pilot is also unavailable.
G
WARNING
While parking or pulling out of aparking
space, the vehicle swings out and can drive
onto areas of the oncominglane. This could
result in acollision with another road user.
There is arisk of an accident.
Pay attention to other road users. Stop the
vehicle if necessary or cancel the Parking Pilot
parking procedure.
!
If unavoidable, you should drive over obsta-
cles such as curbs slowly and not at asharp
angle. Otherwise, you may damage the
wheels or tires.
Parking Pilot may also display spaces not suita-
ble for parking, e.g.:
R
where parking or stopping is prohibited
R
in front of driveways or entrances and exits
R
on unsuitable surfaces
Driving systems
171
Driving and parking
Z
Parking tips:
R
On narrow roads, drive as close to the parking
space as possible.
R
Parking spaces that are littered or overgrown
might be identified or measured incorrectly.
R
Parking spaces that are partially occupied by
trailer drawbars might not be identified as
such or be measured incorrectly.
R
Snowfall or heavy rain may lead to aparking
space being measured inaccurately.
R
Pay attention to the warning messages of
Parking Pilot PARKTRONIC during the parking
procedure (
Y page 169).
R
You can intervene to correctthe steeringpro-
cedure at any time. Parking Pilot will then be
canceled.
R
When transportingaload that protrudes from
your vehicle, you must not use Parking Pilot.
R
Never use Parking Pilot when snow chains are
mounted.
R
Make sure that the tire pressures are always
correct. This has adirect influenceonthe
parking characteristics of the vehicle.
Use Parking Pilot for parking spaces that are:
R
that are parallel or at right-angles to the direc-
tion of travel
R
on straight roads, not bends
R
on the same level as the road, e.g. not on the
pavement
Detecting parking spaces
Objectslocated above the detection range of
Parking Pilot will not be detected when the park-
ing space is measured. These are not taken into
account when the parking procedure is calcula-
ted, e.g. overhangingloads, truck overhangs or
loading ramps.
G
WARNING
If there are objectsabove the detection range:
R
Parking Pilot may steer in too early
R
the vehicle may not stop in frontofthese
objects
You may cause acollision as aresult. There is
arisk of an accident.
If objectsare located above the detection
range, stop and deactivate Parking Pilot.
For further information on the detection range
(
Y page 169).
Parking Pilot does not assist you parking in
spaces perpendicular to the direction of travel if:
R
two parking spaces are located directly next
to one another
R
the parking space is directly next to alow
obstacle such as alow curb
R
you forward-park
Parking Pilot does not assist you parking in
spaces parallel or perpendicular to the direction
of travel if:
R
the parking space is on acurb
R
the system reads the parking space as being
blocked, for example by foliage or grass pav-
ing blocks
R
the area is too small for the vehicle to maneu-
ver into
R
the parking space is bordered by an obstacle,
e.g. atree, apost or atrailer
:
Detected parking space on the left
;
Parking symbol
=
Detected parking space on the right
Parking Pilot is activated automatically when
driving forwards. The system is operational at
speeds of up to approximately 22 mph
(35 km/h). While in operation, the system inde-
pendently locates and measures parking spaces
on both sides of the vehicle.
Parking Pilot will only detect parking spaces:
R
that are parallel or at right-angles to the direc-
tion of travel
R
that are parallel to the direction of travel and
at least 59 in (1.5 m) wide
R
that are parallel to the direction of travel and
at least 39.5in(1.0 m) longer than your vehi-
cle
R
that are at right angles to the direction of
travel and at least 39.5in(1.0m)wider than
your vehicle
i
Notethat Parking Pilot cannot measure the
lengthofaparking space if it is at right angles
172
Driving systems
Driving and parking
to the direction of travel.You will needto
judge whether your vehiclewillfit into the
parking space.
When drivingatspeeds below19mph
(30 km/h), youwillsee parking symbol ; as a
status indicator in the instrument cluster. When
aparking space hasbeendetected, an arrow
towards the right or the left also appears. Park-
ing Pilotonlydisplaysparking spacesonthe
front-passengersideasstandard. Parking
spacesonthe driver's side aredisplayed as
soonasthe turnsignalonthe driver's side is
activated.Whenparking on the driver's side,
thismustremainactivated untilyou confirm the
useofParking Pilotbypressing the a button
on the multifunctionsteering wheel. The system
automaticallydetermineswhether the parking
space is parallel or at right-angles to the direc-
tionoftravel.
Aparking space is displayedwhile youare driv-
ing past it, and untilyou areapproximately 50 ft
(15 m) awayfromit.
Parking
G
WARNING
If youleave the vehiclewhenitisonlybeing
braked by Parking Pilot, it could rollawayif:
R
there is amalfunctioninthe systemorin
the voltagesupply.
R
the electricalsysteminthe engine com-
partment, the batteryorthe fusesare tam-
pered with.
R
the batteryisdisconnected.
R
the vehicleisaccelerated,e.g.byavehicle
occupant.
There is ariskofanaccident.
Before leaving the vehicle, always secure it
against rolling away.
i
If Parking AssistPARKTRONICdetects
obstacles, Parking Pilotbrakes automatically
whilst the vehicleisparking. Youare respon-
siblefor braking in good time.
X
Stop the vehiclewhenthe parking spacesym-
bolshows the desired parking spaceinthe
instrumentcluster.
X
Shift the transmission to position R.
The Start ParkingPilot?
Yes:OK No:
% message appearsinthe multifunction
display.
X
To cancel the procedure:press the %
button on the multifunction steering wheelor
pull away.
or
X
To park using ParkingPilot: press the a
button on the multifunction steering wheel.
The ParkingPilot Active Accelerate
and Brake ObserveSurroundings mes-
sage appearsinthe multifunction display.
X
Let go of the multifunction steering wheel.
X
Back up the vehicle, being ready to brake at all
times.Whenbackingup, drive at aspeed
belowapproximately 6mph (10 km/h). Oth-
erwiseParking Pilotiscanceled.
Parking Pilotbrakes the vehicletoastandstill
when the vehicleapproachesthe rearborder
of the parking space.
Maneuvering mayberequired in tight parking
spaces.
The ParkingPilot Active Select D
ObserveSurroundings message appearsin
the multifunction display.
X
Shift the transmission to position D whilethe
vehicleisstationary.
Parking Pilotimmediatelysteers in the other
direction.
The ParkingPilot Active Accelerate
and Brake ObserveSurroundings mes-
sage appearsinthe multifunction display.
i
Youwillachievethe best results by waiting
for the steering proceduretocomplete before
pulling away.
X
Drive forwards and be ready to brake at all
times.
Parking Pilotbrakes the vehicletoastandstill
when the vehicleapproachesthe front border
of the parking space.
Maneuvering mayberequired in tight parking
spaces.
The ParkingPilot Active Select R
ObserveSurroundings message appearsin
the multifunction display.
As soon as the parking procedureiscomplete,
the Parking
Pilot Ended message appearsin
Driving systems
173
Driving andparking
Z
the multifunctiondisplay and awarning tone
sounds.The vehicleisnow parked.
The vehicleiskeptstationarywithoutthe driver
havingtodepress the brake pedal. The braking
effect is canceled when youdepress the accel-
erator pedal.
Parking Pilotnolongersupports youwithsteer-
ing interventions and brake applications. When
Parking Pilotisended,you must steer and brake
againyourself. Parking Assist PARKTRONICis
still available.
Parking tips:
R
The wayyourvehicleispositioned in the park-
ing space after parking is dependent on vari-
ousfactors.These includethe positionand
shape of the vehicles parked in front and
behind it and the conditions of the location. It
maybethe casethatParking Pilotguidesyou
too farinto aparking space,ornot farenough
into it. In somecases,itmay also lead you
across or onto the curb. If necessary,you
shouldabort the parking procedurewithPark-
ing Pilot.
R
Youcan also select preselect transmission
position D.The vehicleredirects and does not
drive as farinto the parking space.Shouldthe
transmission change take place too early,the
parking procedurewil
lbecanceled.Ase
nsi-
bleparking positioncan no longerbeach-
ieved fromthisposition.
Exiting aparking space
In order for Parking Pilottosupport youwhen
exiting the parking space:
R
youneedtohaveparked using Parking Pilot.
R
the borderofthe parking space must be high
enoughatthe front and the rear. Acurbstone
is too small,for example.
R
the borderofthe parking space must not be
too wide,asthe positionofthe vehiclemust
not exceed an angle of 45° to the starting
positionasitismaneuvered into the parking
space.
R
amaneuvering distance of at least3.3 ft
(1.0 m) must be available.
ParkingPilot can assist youwithexiting apark-
ing space onlyifyou have parked the vehicle
parallel to the direction of travel using Parking
Pilot.
i
If Parking Assist PARKTRONICdetects
obstacles, Parking Pilotbrakes automatically
whilst the vehicleisexiting the parking space.
Youare responsiblefor braking in good time.
X
Startthe engine.
X
Releasethe electricparking brake.
X
Switch on the turnsignalinthe direction you
will drive outofthe parking space.
X
Shift the transmission to position D or R.
The Start ParkingPilot?
Yes:OK No:
% message appearsinthe multifunction
display.
X
To cancel the procedure:pressthe %
button on the multifunctionsteering wheelor
pull away.
or
X
To exit aparking spaceusing Parking
Pilot: press the a button on the multi-
functionsteering wheel.
The ParkingPilot Active Accelerate
and Brake ObserveSurroundings mes-
sage appearsinthe multifunctiondisplay.
X
Let go of the multifunctionsteering wheel.
X
Pull away,being ready to brake at alltimes. Do
not exceed amaximum speedofapprox-
imately 6mph (10 km/h)whenexiting apark-
ing space.Otherwise, Parking Pilotiscan-
celed immediately.
X
Depending on the message or as required,
shift the transmission to position D or R.
Parking Pilotimmediatelysteers in the other
direction. The ParkingPilot Active
Accelerateand Brake ObserveSur‐
roundings message appearsinthe multi-
functiondisplay.
i
Youwillachieve the best results by waiting
for the steering proceduretocomplete before
pulling away.
If youbackupafter activation, the steering
wheelismoved to the straight-ahead posi-
tion.
X
Drive forwards and reverseaspromptedby
the Parking Assist PARKTRONICwarning dis-
plays, several times if necessary.
Once youhaveexited the parking space com-
pletely,the steering wheelismoved to the
straight-ahead position. Youhearatone and the
Parking
Pilot Finished message appearsin
the multifunctiondisplay.You will thenhaveto
steer and merge into trafficonyourown.Park-
ing Assist PARKTRONICisstill available. Youcan
take overthe steering beforethe vehiclehas
exited the parking space completely. Thisis
174
Driving systems
Driving andparking
useful, for example when you recognize that it is
alreadypossible to pull out of theparking space.
Canceling Parking Pilot
X
Stop themovement of themultifunction
steering wheel or steer yourself.
Parking Pilot is canceled immediately. The
Parking
Pilot Canceled message appears
in themultifunction display.
or
X
Press thePARKTRONIC button(Y page 170).
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC is switched off
and Parking Pilot is immediately canceled.
The ParkingPilot Canceled
message
appearsinthe multifunction display.
Parking Pilot is canceled automaticallywhen:
R
theelectric parking brakeisengaged
R
transmission position P is selected
R
parking usingParking Pilot is no longer pos-
sible
R
you are driving faster than 6mph (10 km/h)
R
awheel spins, ESP
®
intervenes or fails.In
suchcases the ÷ warning lamp lightsupin
theinstrumentcluster
Awarning tone sounds. The parking symbol dis-
appearsand themultifunction display shows the
ParkingPilot Canceled
message.
When Parking Pilot is canceled, you must steer
and brakeagain yourself.
If asystem malfunctionoccurs, thevehicle is
braked to astandstill. To driveon, depress the
acceleratoragain.
Rearview camera
General notes
Rear view camera : is an optical parking and
maneuveringaid. It shows thearea behindyour
vehicle withguide lines in themultimedia sys-
temdisplay.
The area behindthe vehicle is displayed as a
mirror image,asinthe rear view mirror.
i
The text shown in themultimedia system
display depends on thelanguage setting. The
followingare examplesofrear view camera
messages in themultimedia system display.
Observethe notesoncleaning(
Y page 274).
Important safety notes
The rear view camera is only an aid. It is nota
replacementfor your attentiontoyour immedi-
ate surroundings. You are always responsible
for safe maneuveringand parking.When maneu-
vering or parking,makesure that there are no
persons, animals or objectsinthe area in which
you are maneuvering.
Under thefollowingcircumstances, therear
view camera will notfunction,orwill function in
alimited manner:
R
if thetailgateisopen
R
in heavyrain,snoworfog
R
at night or in verydark places
R
if thecamera is exposedtoverybright light
R
if thearea is lit by fluorescentbulbs or LED
lighting (the display may flicker)
R
if there is asuddenchangeintemperature,
e.g.when driving intoaheated garageinwin-
ter
R
if thecamera lensisdirtyorobstructed
Observethe notesoncleaning
(
Y page 274)
R
if therear of your vehicle is damaged. In this
case, have thecamera positionand setting
checked at aqualified specialist workshop
The fieldofvision and other functionsofthe rear
view camera may be restricted due to additional
accessoriesonthe rear of thevehicle (e.g.
licenseplateholder, bicycle rack).
Driving systems
175
Driving and parking
Z
Activating/deactivating therearview
camera
X
To activate: makesurethatthe SmartKey is
in position 2 in theignition lock.
X
Makesurethatthe ActivationbyRgear
function is selected in themultimedia system;
see theDigital Operator'sManual.
X
Engage reversegear.
The area behind thevehicleisshown with
guide lines in themultimedia system display.
The imagefromthe rear viewcamera is avail-
able throughout themaneuveringprocess.
To deactivate: therear viewcamera deacti-
vates if you shiftthe transmission to P or after
drivingforwardsashort distance.
Messages in themultimediasystem dis-
play
The rear viewcamera may showadistorted view
of obstacles, showthemincorrectlyornot at all.
The rear viewcamera does notshowobjects in
thefollowingpositions:
R
veryclose to therear bumper
R
under therear bumper
R
in thearea immediately abovethe tailgate
handle
!
Objects notatground level may appear to
be further away than they actually are, e.g.:
R
thebumper of aparked vehicle
R
thedrawbar of atrailer
R
theball couplingofatrailer towhitch
R
therear section of an HGV
R
aslantedpost
Use theguidelines only for orientation.
Approach objects no further than thebottom-
mostguideline.
:
Yellowguide lineatadistanceofapprox-
imately 13 ft (4.0m)fromthe rear of the
vehicle
;
Whiteguide linewithout turningthe steering
wheel, vehiclewidthincludingthe exterior
mirrors(static)
=
Yellowguide linefor thevehiclewidth
includingthe exteriormirrors, for current
steering wheelangle (dynamic)
?
Yellowlanemarking of thetires at current
steering wheelangle (dynamic)
A
Yellowguide lineatadistanceofapprox-
imately 3ft(1.0m)fromthe rear of thevehi-
cle
B
Vehiclecenter axle(markerassistance)
C
Bumper
D
Red guide lineatadistanceofapproximately
12 in (0.30m)fromthe rearofthe vehicle
176
Driving systems
Driving andparking
:
Front warning display
;
Additionalmeasurement operational readi-
ness indicator for Parking Assist
PARKTRONIC
=
Rear warning display
WhenParking AssistPARKTRONIC is opera-
tional(
Y page 169), additional measurement
operational readiness indicator ; appears in
the multimedia system display. If the Parking
AssistPARKTRONIC warning displays are active
or light up,warning displays : and = are also
active or light up correspondingly in the multi-
media system display.
"Reverse parking"function
Backing up straight into aparking space
without turningthe steering wheel
:
White guide line withoutturning the steering
wheel, vehicle width including the exterior
mirrors (static)
;
Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steering wheel angle(dynamic)
=
Yellow guide line at adistance of approx-
imately 3ft(1.0 m) from the rearofthe vehi-
cle
?
Redguide line at adistance of approximately
12 in (0.30 m) from the rearofthe vehicle
X
Make sure thatthe rearviewcamera is
switched on (
Y page 176).
The lane and the guidelines areshown.
X
With the help of white guideline :,check
whether the vehiclewillfit into the parking
space.
X
Using white guideline : as aguide,carefully
back up untilyou reach the end position.
Redguide line ? is thenatthe end of the
parking space.The vehicleisalmostparallel
in the parking space.
Reverseperpendicular parking with the
steering wheelatanangle
:
Parking space marking
;
Yellow guidelinefor the vehiclewidth
including the exteriormirrors, for current
steering wheelangle (dynamic)
X
Drivepastthe parking space and bring the
vehicletoastandstill.
X
Make sure thatthe rearviewcamera is
switched on (
Y page 176).
The lane and the guidelines areshown.
X
Whilethe vehicleisatastandstill, turnthe
steering wheelinthe direction of the parking
space untilyellowguide line ; reachespark-
ing space marking :.
X
Keepthe steering wheelinthatpositionand
back up carefully.
Driving systems
177
Driving andparking
Z
:
Yellow guide line for the vehicle width
including the exterior mirrors, for current
steeringwheel angle (dynamic)
X
Stop the vehicle when it is almost exactly in
frontofthe parking space.
The white lane should be as close to parallel
with the parking space marking as possible.
:
Whiteguide line at current steeringwheel
angle
;
Parking space marking
X
Turn the steeringwheel to the center position
while the vehicle is stationary.
:
Red guide line at adistance of approximately
12 in (0.30m)from the rear of the vehicle
;
Whiteguide line without turning the steering
wheel
=
Endofparking space
X
Back up carefully until you have reached the
final position.
Red guide line : is thenatend of parking
space =.The vehicle is almost parallel in the
parking space.
Wide-angle function
:
Symbolfor the wide-angle view function
;
Own vehicle
=
Parking Assist PARKTRONIC warningdis-
plays
Selectthis view when you are drivingout of an
exit and the view of crossingtraffic is restricted,
for example.
ATTENTION ASSIST
Generalnotes
ATTENTIONASSISThelps you during long,
monotonous journeys, such as on highways. It is
active in the 37 mph (60 km/h) to 125 mph
178
Driving systems
Driving and parking
(200 km/h) range. If ATTENTION ASSIST
detects typical indicators of fatigue or increas-
ing lapses in concentration on the part of the
driver,itsuggeststaking abreak.
Important safetynotes
ATTENTION ASSISTisonly an aid to the driver.It
might not always recognizefatigue or increasing
inattentiveness in time or fail to recognizethem
at all. The system is not asubstitute for awell-
rested and attentive driver.
The functionality of ATTENTION ASSISTis
restricted and warnings may be delayed or not
occur at all:
R
if the lengthofthe journey is less than approx-
imately 30 minutes
R
if the road condition is poor, e.g. if the surface
is uneven or if thereare potholes
R
if thereisastrong side wind
R
if you have adopted asportydrivingstyle with
high cornering speeds or high rates of accel-
eration
R
if you are predominantly drivingslower than
37 mph (60 km/h) or faster than 125 mph
(200 km/h)
R
if the timehas been set incorrectly
R
in active drivingsituations,such as when you
change lanes or change your speed
ATTENTIONASSISTisreset when you continue
your journey and starts assessing your tiredness
again if:
R
you switchoff the engine
R
you takeoff your seat belt and open the driv-
er's door, e.g. for achange of drivers or to
takeabreak
Displaying theattention level
You can have current status information dis-
played in the assistancemenu(
Y page 191) of
the on-board computer.
X
Selectthe Assistance display for Attention
Assist using the on-board computer
(
Y page 191).
The followinginformation is displayed:
R
Length of the journey sincethe last break.
R
The Attention Level determined by ATTEN-
TION ASSIST, displayed in abar display in five
levels fromhigh to low
R
If ATTENTIONASSISTisunable to calculate
the attention level and cannot output awarn-
ing, the System Passive
message appears.
The bar display thenchanges the display,
such as when you are drivingataspeed below
37 mph (60 km/h) or above 124 mph
(200 km/h).
Activating ATTENTION ASSIST
X
Activate ATTENTIONASSISTusing the on-
board computer (
Y page 192).
The system determines the attention level of
the driverdepending on the settingselected:
Standard
selected: the sensitivity with which
the system determines the attention level is set
to normal.
Sensitive
selected: the sensitivity is set
higher.The attention level detected by Attention
Assist is adapted accordingly and the driveris
warnedearlier.
When ATTENTIONASSISTisdeactivated, the
é symbol appears in the multifunction dis-
play in the assistancegraphic display.
When ATTENTIONASSISThas been deactivated,
it is automatically reactivated after the engine
has been stopped. The sensitivity selected cor-
responds to the last selection activated (stand-
ard/sensitive).
Warning in themultifunction display
If fatigue or increasinglapses in concentration
are detected, awarningappears in the multi-
function display: ATTENTIONASSIST
Take a
Break!.
In addition to the message shown in the multi-
function display, you will thenhear awarning
tone.
Driving systems
179
Driving and parking
Z
X
If necessary,take abreak.
X
Confirm the message by pressing the a
button on the steering wheel.
On long journeys, take regular breaks in good
time to allow yourself to rest properly. If you do
not take abreak and ATTENTION ASSISTstill
detects increasing lapses in concentration, you
willbewarned again after 15 minutes at the
earliest. This willonly happen if ATTEN-
TION ASSISTstill detects typicalindicators of
fatigueorincreasing lapses in concentration.
Vehicles with the COMAND multimedia sys-
tem: if awarning is outputinthe multifunction
display, aservice station search is performed in
the multimedia system. You can select aservice
station and navigation to this service station will
then begin. This function can be activated or
deactivated in the multimedia system; see the
Digital Operator's Manual.
Lane Tracking package
General notes
The Lane Tracking package consists of Blind
Spot Assist (
Y page 180) and Lane Keeping
Assist (
Y page 181).
Blind Spot Assist
General notes
Blind Spot Assist monitors the areasoneither
side of the vehicle that are not visibletothe
driver with two lateral, rear-facing radarsen-
sors. Awarning display in the exterior mirrors
drawsyourattention to vehiclesdetected in the
monitored area.Ifyou then switch on the cor-
responding turn signal to change lane, you will
also receive an optical and audible warning.
Blind Spot Assist supports you from aspeed of
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h).
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Blind Spot Assist does not react to:
R
vehiclesovertaken too closely on the side,
placing them in the blind spot area
R
vehicleswhich approach with alarge speed
differentialand overtake yourvehicle
As aresult, Blind Spot Assist may not give
warnings in such situations. There is arisk of
an accident.
Alwaysobserve the traffic conditions care-
fully, and maintain asafe lateraldistance.
Blind Spot Assist is only an aid.Itmay fail to
detect some vehiclesand is no substitute for
attentive driving. Alwaysensure that there is
sufficient distance to the side for other road
users and obstacles.
i
USA only:
This device has been approved by the FCC as
a"VehicularRadar System". The radarsensor
is intended for use in an automotive radar
system only. Removing, tampering with, or
altering the device willvoid any warranties,
and is not permitted by the FCC. Do not tam-
per with, alter, or use in any non-approved
way.
Any unauthorized modification to this device
could void the user’sauthority to operate the
equipment.
Radar sensors
The radarsensors for Blind Spot Assist are inte-
grated into the rear bumper. Make sure that the
bumpers are free from dirt, ice or slush. The
sensors must not be covered, for example by
cycle racks or overhanging loads. Following a
severe impact or in the event of damage to the
bumpers, have the function of the radarsensors
checked at aqualifiedspecialist workshop.
Blind Spot Assist may no longer work properly.
Monitoring range of the sensors
In particular, the detection of obstaclescan be
impaired if:
R
there is dirt on the sensors or anything else
covering the sensors
R
there is poor visibility, e.g. due to fog, heavy
rain or snow
R
anarrow vehicle traveling in front, e.g. a
motorbike or bicycle
R
the road has very widelanes
R
the road has narrow lanes
R
you are not driving in the middleofthe lane
R
there are barriers or other road boundaries
Vehiclesinthe monitoring range are then not
indicated.
180
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Blind Spot Assist monitors the areaupto10ft
(3 m) behind your vehicle and directly next to it.
If the lanes are narrow, vehicles driving in the
lane beyond the lane next to your vehicle may be
indicated,especiallyifthe vehicles are not driv-
ing in the middleoftheirlane. Thismay be the
case if the vehicles are driving on the inner side
of theirlane.
Due to the nature of the system:
R
warnings may be issuedinerrorwhendriving
closetocrashbarriers or similar solid lane
borders.
R
warnings may be interrupted whendriving
alongside particularly long vehicles,e.g.
trucks, for aprolongedtime.
Warning display
:
Warning display
Blind Spot Assist is not active at speeds below
approximately 20 mph (30 km/h). Vehicles in
the monitoring rangeare then not indicated.
WhenBlind Spot Assist is activated, indicator
lamp : in the exterior mirrors lights up yellow
at speeds of up to 20 mph (30 km/h). At speeds
above 20 mph (30 km/h), the indicator lamp
goesout and Blind Spot Assist is operational.
If avehicle is detected within the blind spot
monitoring rangeatspeeds above 20 mph
(30 km/h), warning lamp : on the correspond-
ing sidelights up red.Thiswarning is always
emitted whenavehicle enters the blind spot
monitoring rangefrom behind or from the side.
Whenyou overtake avehicle, the warning only
occurs if the difference in speed is lessthan
7mph (12 km/h).
The yellow indicator lamp goesout if reverse
gearisengaged.Inthis event, Blind Spot Assist
is no longer active.
The brightnessofthe indicator/warning lamps
is adjustedautomaticallyaccording to the ambi-
ent light.
Collision warning
If avehicle is detected in the monitoring rangeof
Blind Spot Assist and youswitch on the corre-
sponding turn signal,adoublewarning tone
sounds. Redwarning lamp : flashes. If the turn
signal remains on, vehicles detected are indica-
ted by the flashing of red warning lamp :.
There are no further warning tones.
SwitchingonBlindSpot Assist
X
Make surethat Blind Spot Assist is activated
in the on-board computer (
Y page 192).
X
Turn the SmartKeytoposition 2 in the ignition
lock.
Warning lamps : in the exterior mirrors light
up red for approximately 1.5 seconds and
then turn yellow.
LaneKeeping Assist
General notes
Lane Keeping Assist monitors the areainfront of
your vehicle by means of multifunction cam-
era : which is attached behind the top of the
windshield.Active Lane Keeping Assist detects
lane markings on the roadand can warn you
before youleave your lane unintentionally.
Thisfunction is available in the rangebetween
40 mph and 120 mph (60 km/h and 200 km/h).
Awarning may be given if afront wheel passes
over alanemarking. It will warn youbymeans of
intermittent vibration in the steering wheel for
up to 1.5 seconds.
Drivingsystems
181
Drivingand parking
Z
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
LaneKeepingAssist may notalways clearly
recognize lane markings.
In this case, LaneKeepingAssist may:
R
giveanunnecessarywarning
R
notgiveawarning
Thereisariskofanaccident.
Always pay particularattentiontothe traffic
situation and stay in lane,inparticularif
warned by LaneKeepingAssist.
G
WARNING
The LaneKeepingAssist warning does not
return thevehicle to theoriginal lane.Thereis
ariskofanaccident.
You should always steer,brakeoraccelerate
yourself, in particularifwarned by LaneKeep-
ing Assist.
If you fail to adapt your driving style, LaneKeep-
ing Assist can neither reduce theriskofanacci-
dentnor override thelaws of physics.Lane
KeepingAssist cannottakeintoaccountthe
road,traffic and weather conditions. LaneKeep-
ing Assist is merely an aid. You are responsible
for thedistancetothe vehicle in front, for vehi-
cle speed, for braking in good timeand for stay-
ing in your lane.
The LaneKeepingAssist does notkeepthe vehi-
cle in thelane.
The system may be impaired or may notfunction
if:
R
there is poor visibility, e.g.due to insufficient
illumination of theroad,ordue to snow, rain,
fog or spray
R
there is glare, e.g.fromoncomingtraffic, the
sun or reflectionfromother vehicles(e.g. if
theroad surface is wet)
R
thewindshield is dirty, fogged up, damaged or
covered, for instance by asticker, in thevicin-
ity of thecamera
R
there are no,several or unclear lane markings
for alane,e.g.inareas withroad construction
work
R
thelane markings are worn away, dark or cov-
eredup, e.
g.bydirt or snow
R
thedistancetothe vehicle in frontistoo small
and thelane markings thus cannotbedetec-
ted
R
thelane markings changequickly, e.g. lanes
branch off,cross oneanother or merge
R
theroad is narrow and winding
R
there are highly variable shadeconditionson
theroadway
Switching on Lane Keeping Assist
X
Switch on ActiveLaneKeepingAssist using
theon-board computer; to do so, select
Standard
or Adaptive (Y page 192).
If you driveatspeeds above40mph
(60 km/h) and lane markings are detected,
thelinesinthe assistance graphicsdisplay
(
Y page 191) are showningreen. LaneKeep-
ing Assist is ready for use.
If Standard
is selected, no warning vibration
occurs if:
R
you have switched on theturnsignal. In this
event, thewarningsare suppressedfor acer-
tain period of time.
R
adriving safety system intervenes, e.g.ABS,
BASorESP
®
.
When Adaptive
is selected, no warning vibra-
tionoccurs if:
R
you have switched on theturnsignal. In this
event, thewarningsare suppressedfor acer-
tain period of time.
R
adriving safety system intervenes, e.g.ABS,
BASorESP
®
.
R
you accelerate hard,e.g.kickdown.
R
you brakehard.
R
you steer actively, e.g.swerve to avoid an
obstacle or changelanesquickly.
R
you cut thecorner on asharpbend.
In orderthatyou are warned only when neces-
sary and in good timeifyou cross thelane mark-
ing,the system recognizescertain conditions
and warnsyou accordingly.
The warning vibrationoccurs earlierif:
R
you approach theouter lane markingona
bend.
R
theroad has verywide lanes, e.g.ahighway.
R
thesystem detectssolid lane markings.
The warning vibrationoccurs laterif:
R
theroad has narrow lanes.
R
you cut thecorner on abend.
182
Driving systems
Driving and parking
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipmentintegratedinthe vehi-
cle while driving,you will be distractedfrom
traffic conditions. You could also lose control
of thevehicle. Thereisariskofanaccident.
Only operate theequipmentwhen thetraffic
situation permits. If you are notsurethatthis
is possible,park thevehiclepayingattention
to traffic conditionsand operate theequip-
mentwhen thevehicleisstationary.
You must observethe legal requirements for the
country in whichyou are currentlydriving when
operating theon-board computer.
G
WARNING
If theinstrumentclusterhas failedormal-
functioned, you may notrecognize function
restrictionsinsystems relevanttosafety. The
operating safetyofyour vehiclemay be
impaired.Thereisariskofanaccident.
Drive on carefully. Havethe vehiclechecked
at aqualified specialist workshop immedi-
ately.
The on-board computer only shows messagesor
warningsfromcertainsystems in themultifunc-
tion display. You should thereforemakesure
your vehicleisoperating safely at all times.
If theoperating safetyofyour vehicleis
impaired,pull overassoonasitissafetodoso.
Contactaqualified specialist workshop.
Foranoverview, see theinstrumentpanel illus-
tration (
Y page 32).
Displaysand operation
Instrumentcluster lighting
The lightsensor in theinstrumentclusterauto-
matically controlsthe brightness of themulti-
function display. In daylight, thedisplays in the
instrumentclusterare notilluminated.
The lighting in theinstrumentcluster, in thedis-
plays and thecontrols in thevehicleinterior can
be adjusted usingthe brightness control knob.
The brightness control knob is locatedonthe
bottomleftofthe instrumentcluster
(
Y page 32).
X
Turn thebrightness control knob clockwise or
counter-clockwise.
If thelightswitch is set to the Ã, T or
L position,the brightness is dependent
upon thebrightness of theambientlight.
Speedometer with segments
The speedometer is divided intosegments on
vehicles withDistance Pilot DISTRONIC.
The segments in thespeedometer indicate
whichspeedrange is available.
R
DistancePilot DISTRONICisactivated
(
Y page 156):
Oneortwo segments in theset speedrange
lightup.
R
DistancePilot DISTRONICdetects avehiclein
frontmoving moreslowly than thestored
speed:
The segments between thespeedofthe vehi-
cle in frontand thestoredspeedlightup.
Tachometer
!
Do notdriveinthe overrevving range, as this
could damagethe engine.
The red bandinthe tachometer indicates the
engine's overrevving range.
The engineislimitedwithin arange to protect
theenginewhen thered bandisreached.
Outsidetemperaturedisplay
You should pay special attention to road condi-
tionswhen temperatures are aroundfreezing
point.
Bearinmindthatthe outside temperature dis-
play indicates thetemperature measured and
does notrecord theroad temperature.
The outside temperature display is in themulti-
function display (
Y page 185).
Thereisashort delay before achangeinoutside
temperature appearsinthe multifunction dis-
play.
Displaysand operation
183
On-boardcomputer and displays
Z
Coolanttemperaturegauge
G
WARNING
Opening thehood when theengineisover-
heated or when there is afireinthe engine
compartmentcouldexpose you to hot gases
or other serviceproducts. Thereisariskof
injury.
Let an overheatedenginecooldown before
opening thehood.Ifthere is afireinthe
enginecompartment, keep thehood closed
and contactthe firedepartment.
!
Adisplay message is shown if thecoolant
temperatureistoo high.
If thecoolant temperatureisover248
(120†), do notcontinue driving.The engine
will otherwise be damaged.
The coolant temperaturegage is in theinstru-
mentclusteronthe right-handside (
Y page 32).
The H markinginthe coolant temperaturegauge
corresponds to acoolant temperatureof
approximately 248‡(120†).
Under normal operatingconditionsand at the
correctcoolant level, thecoolant temperature
gauge may risetothe H marking.
Operatingthe on-boardcomputer
Overview
:
Multifunction display
;
Right control panel
=
Leftcontrol panel
X
To activate theon-boardcomputer: turn
theSmartKey to position 1 in theignition lock.
You can control themultifunction display and
thesettings in theon-board computer usingthe
buttons on themultifunction steering wheel.
Left control panel
=
;
R
Calls up themenuand menubar
9
:
Press briefly:
R
Scrollsinlists
R
Selectsasubmenuorfunction
R
In the Audio menu: selectsthe
previous or next station, when the
preset list or stationlist is active,
or an audio track or videoscene
R
In the Tel (telephone)menu:
switches to thephonebook and
selects anameortelephone num-
ber
184
Displays and operation
On-boardcomputer and displays
9
:
Press and hold:
R
In the Audio menu: selects apre-
set list or astation list in the
desired frequency range, or an
audio track or video scene using
rapid scrolling
R
In the Tel (Telephone) menu:
starts rapid scrolling if the phone
book is open
a
R
Confirms the selection or display
message
R
In the Tel (Telephone) menu:
switches to the phone book and
starts dialing the selected number
%
Press briefly:
R
Back
R
Vehicles with Audio 20: switches
off voice-operated control of the
navigation (see manufacturer's
operating instructions)
R
Vehicles with COMAND: switches
off the Voice Control System (see
the separate operating instruc-
tions)
R
Hides display messages or calls up
the last Trip
menu function used
R
Exitsthe telephone book/redial
memory
%
Press and hold:
R
Callsupthe standard display in the
Trip
menu
Right control panel
ó
R
Vehicles with Audio 20:
Switches on voice-operated con-
trol for navigation (see manufac-
turer's operating instructions)
R
Vehicles with COMAND:
Switches off the Voice Control
System (see the separate operat-
ing instructions)
8
R
Mute
W
X
R
Adjusts the volume
~
R
Rejects or ends acall
R
Exitsthe telephone book/redial
memory
6
R
Makes or accepts acall
R
Switches to the redial memory
Multifunction display
:
Permanent display:outside temperature or
speed (
Y page 193)
;
Time
=
Text field
?
Menu bar
A
Drive program (Y page 132)
B
Transmission position (Y page 134)
In Mercedes-AMG vehicles, the indicators in the
lower and upper part of the multifunction display
differ from the displaysshown here.
X
To display menu bar?:press the =
or ; button on the steering wheel.
If you do not press the buttons any longer,
menu bar ? is faded out after afew seconds.
Text field = shows the selected menu or sub-
menu as well as display messages.
i
Set the time using the multimedia system;
see the separate operating instructions.
The following messages may appear in the
multifunction display:
R
Z Gearshift recommendation, when shifting
manually (
Y page 138)
R
j Parking Pilot (Y page 171)
Displays and operation
185
On-board computer and displays
Z
R
CRUISE Cruise control (Y page 154)
R
è ECO start/stop function (Y page 128)
R
ë HOLD function (Y page 162)
R
DSR Downhill Speed Regulation
(
Y page 166)
Menus and submenus
Menu overview
Using the = or ; button on the steering
wheel, open the menu bar.
Operating the on-board computer (
Y page 184).
Depending on the equipment installed in the
vehicle, you can call up the following menus:
R
Trip menu (Y page 186)
R
Navi menu (navigation instructions)
(
Y page 187)
R
Audio menu (Y page 189)
R
Tel menu (telephone) (Y page 189)
R
DriveAssist menu (assistance)
(
Y page 191)
R
Serv. menu (Y page 192)
R
Sett. menu (settings) (Y page 192)
R
AMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
(
Y page 194)
The displays for the Audio
, Navi and Tel menus
may differ slightly to those in your vehicle.
The examples given in this Operator's Manual
apply to vehicles equipped with COMAND.
Trip menu
Standarddisplay
X
Press and hold the % button on the steer-
ing wheel until the Trip
menu with trip odom-
eter : and odometer ; appears.
Trip computer "From Start" or "From
Reset"
:
Distance
;
Driving time
=
Average speed
?
Average fuel consumption
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Trip
menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
From Start
or From Reset.
The valuesinthe From
Start submenu are cal-
culated from the start of ajourney whilst the
valuesinthe From Reset
submenu are calcu-
lated from the last time the submenu was reset
(
Y page 187).
In the following cases, the trip computer is auto-
matically reset From Start
:
R
the ignition has been switched off for more
than four hours.
R
999 hours have been exceeded.
R
9,999 miles have been exceeded.
When 9,999 hours or 99,999 miles have been
exceeded, the trip computer is automatically
reset From Reset
.
ECO display
The ECO displayisnot available in Mercedes-
AMG vehicles.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Trip
menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select ECO
DISPLAY.
If the ignition remains switched off for longer
than four hours, the ECO displaywill be auto-
matically reset.
For more information on the ECO display, see
(
Y page 147).
186
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
Displaying therange andcurrent fuel
consumption
Mercedes-AMG vehicles:the menuonlyshows
range :.
X
Press the = or ; buttononthe steering
wheeltoselectthe Trip
menu.
X
Press 9 or : to selectthe display with
approximaterange : and currentfuelcon-
sumption ;.
Approximaterange : that can be covered is
calculated accordingtoyour currentdriving
style and theamount of fuelinthe tank.If
there is only asmall amount of fuelleftinthe
fueltank, avehicle beingrefueled C
appears instead of approximaterange :.
Recuperation display = shows you if energy
has beenrecuperated from thekinetic energy
in overrun mode and saved in thebattery.
Recuperation display = dependsonthe
engineinstalled and is therefore notavailable
in all vehicles.
Digital speedometer
X
Press the = or ; buttononthe steering
wheeltoselectthe Trip
menu.
X
Press the 9 or : buttontoselectthe
digitalspeedometer ;.
Agear shift recommendation : Z can also
follow.
Observethe information on gearshift recom-
mendation : when shiftingmanually
(
Y page 138).
Mercedes-AMG vehicles:agearshift recom-
mendation is shown in thestatusbar of the
multifunction display and notinthe digital
speedometer display.
Resetting values
X
Press the = or ; buttononthe steering
wheeltoselectthe Trip
menu.
X
Press the 9 or : buttontoselectthe
function that you wish to reset.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press : to select Yes and press a to
confirm.
You can reset thevalues of thefollowingfunc-
tions:
R
Trip odometer
R
"From Start"tripcomputer
R
"From Reset" trip computer
R
ECOdisplay
If you reset thevalues in theECO display, the
values in the"From Start"tripcomputerare also
reset.Ifyou reset thevalues in the"From Start"
trip computer, thevalues in theECO display are
also reset.
Navigation systemmenu
Displaying navigation instructions
In the Navi menu, themultifunction display
shows navigation instructions.
You can findfurther information on navigation in
theseparatemultimedia system operating
instructions.
X
Switchonthe multimedia system (seesepa-
rateoperatinginstructions).
X
Press the = or ; buttononthe steering
wheeltoselectthe Navi
menu.
Route guidance not active
:
Direction of travel
;
Currentroad
Menus andsubmenus
187
On-board computerand displays
Z
Route guidanceactive
No changeofdirection announced
:
Distance to destination
;
Distance to the next change of direction
=
Current road
?
"Follow the road's course"symbol
Changeofdirection without lanerecom-
mendation
:
Road into which the change of direction
leads
;
Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display
=
Change-of-direction symbol
Whenachange of direction is to be made, you
will see symbol = for the change of direction
and distance graphic ;.The distance indicator
shortens towards the top of the display as you
approach the point of the announcedchange of
direction. The change of direction starts once
the distance display reaches zero.
Changeofdirection announcedwitha
lanerecommendation
:
Road into which the change of direction
leads
;
Distance to change of direction and visual
distance display
=
Lanesnot recommended
?
Recommended lane and new lane during a
change of direction
A
Change-of-direction symbol
On multilane roads, new lane recommendations
can be displayed for the next change of direction
if the digital map supports this data. During the
change of direction, new lanes may be added.
Lane not recommended =:you will not be able
to complete the next change of direction if you
stay in this lane.
Recommended lane and new lane during a
change of direction ?:inthis lane youwillbe
able to complete the next two changes of direc-
tion withoutchanging lane.
Otherstatus indicators of the naviga-
tionsystem
The navigation system displaysadditionalinfor-
mation and the vehiclestatus.
Possible displays:
R
New Route... or Calculating Route
Anew route is calculated.
R
Road Not Mapped
The vehicleposition is inside the areaofthe
digital map butthe roadisnot recognized, e.g.
newly builtstreets, car parks or private land.
R
No Route
No route could be calculatedtothe selected
destination.
R
O
Youhavereached the destination or an inter-
mediate destination.
188
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
Audio menu
Selecting aradio station
:
Active station list
;
Station frequency withmemory position
The multifunction display shows station ; with
station frequency or station name. The preset
position is only displayed alongwithstation ; if
this has been stored.
X
Switchonthe multimedia system and select
Radio (see theseparateoperating instruc-
tions).
X
Press the = or ; buttononthe steering
wheeltoselect the Audio
menu.
X
To select apreset list or station list: press
and brieflyhold the 9 or : buttonuntil
thepreset list or station list in thedesired
frequency range is shown.
X
To select astation: brieflypress 9
or :.
i
SIRIUS XM satelliteradiofunctionslikea
normal radio.
You can findfurther information on operation
in the"Satelliteradio" section of theseparate
multimedia system operating instructions.
Operating an audio player or audio
media
:
Currenttitle
Audio datafromvarious audio devicesormedia
can be played,depending on theequipment
installed in thevehicle.
X
Switchonthe multimedia system and then
audio CD or MP3 mode(see theseparate
operating instructions).
X
Press the = or ; buttononthe steering
wheeltoselect the Audio
menu.
X
To select thenext/previoustrack: briefly
press the 9 or : button.
X
To select atrack from thetrack list (rapid
scrolling): press and hold the 9 or :
buttonuntil desired track appears.
If you press and hold 9 or :,the rapid
scrollingspeedisincreased. Not all audio
drives or datacarriers support this function.
If track information is storedonthe audio device
or medium, themultifunction display will show
thenumber and titleofthe track.
Video DVD operation
You can only operate DVDvideos in the Audio
menuinvehicles withCOMAND.
X
SwitchonCOMAND and select video DVD
(see theseparateoperating instructions).
X
Press the = or ; buttononthe steering
wheeltoselect the Audio
menu.
X
To select thenext or previousscene:
brieflypress the 9 or : button.
X
To select ascene from thescene list
(rapid scrolling): press and hold the 9
or : buttonuntil desired scene :
appears.
Telephone menu
Introduction
G
WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipmentintegratedinthe vehi-
Menusand submenus
189
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Z
cle while driving,you will be distracted from
trafficconditions.You could also losecontrol
of the vehicle.There is ariskofanaccident.
Only operate the equipment whenthe traffic
situation permits. If youare not sure that this
is possible,parkthe vehicle paying attention
to trafficconditions and operate the equip-
ment whenthe vehicle is stationary.
Whentelephoning, youmustobserve the legal
requirements for the country in which youare
currently driving.
X
Switch on the mobilephone (seethe manu-
facturer’soperating instructions).
X
Switch on the multimediasystem (seesepa-
rate operating instructions).
X
Establish aBluetooth
®
connection to the mul-
timediasystem; see the separate operating
instructions.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Tel
menu.
You will see one of the following display mes-
sages in the multifunction display:
R
TelephoneREADY or the name of the net-
work provider: the mobilephone hasfound a
network and is ready to receive.
R
Telephone No service:there is no network
available or the mobilephone is searching for
anetwork.
Accepting acall
If someone calls youwhenyou are in the Tel
menu,adisplay messageappears in the multi-
function display.
You can accept acallatany time,evenifyou are
not in the Tel
menu.
X
Press the 6 button on the steering wheel
to accept an incoming call.
Rejecting or ending acall
You can end or reject acallanytime,evenifyou
are not in the Tel
menu.
X
Press the ~ button on the steering wheel
to reject or end acall.
Selecting an entry in the phonebook
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Tel
menu.
X
Press the 9, : or a button to
switch to the phone book.
X
Authorize access to the phone bookonthe
phone.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select the
desiredname.
or
X
To beginrapid scrolling: press and holdthe
9 or : button for longer than one sec-
ond.
Rapidscrolling stopswhenyou release the
button or reach the end of the list.
X
If only onetelephone numberisstoredfor
aname: press the 6 or a button to
startdialing.
or
X
If there is more than onenumberfor a
particular name:press the 6 or a
button to display the numbers.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select the
number youwanttodial.
X
Press the 6 or a button to startdialing.
or
X
If you do notwanttomake acall: press the
~ or % button.
Redialing
The on-board computersaves the last namesor
numbers dialed in the redialmemory.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Tel
menu.
X
Press the 6 button to switch to the redial
memory.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select the
desiredname or number.
X
Press the 6 or a button to startdialing.
or
X
If you do notwanttomake the call: press
the ~ or % button.
190
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
Assistance menu
Introduction
Dependingonthe equipmentinstalled in the
vehicle, you havethe followingoptionsinthe
DriveAssist
menu:
R
Displaying theassistancegraphic
(
Y page 191)
R
Deactivating/activating ESP
®
(except
MercedesAMGvehicles) (
Y page 191)
R
Activating/deactivating Active Brake Assist
(
Y page 192)
R
Activating/deactivating ATTENTION ASSIST
(
Y page 192)
R
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot Assist
(
Y page 192)
R
Activating/deactivating LaneKeepingAssist
(
Y page 192)
Displaying theassistance graphic
X
Press the = or ; buttononthe steering
wheeltoselect the DriveAssist
menu.
X
Press 9 or : to select Assistance
Graphic.
X
Press a to confirm.
The multifunction display shows thedistance
display of DistancePilotDISTRONICinthe
assistancegraphic.
The assistancegraphic displays thestatus of
and information from thefollowingdriving
systems or drivingsafetysystems:
R
DistancePilotDISTRONIC(Y page 156)
R
Active Brake Assist(Y page 61)
R
ATTENTION ASSIST (Y page 178)
R
LaneKeepingAssist(Y page 181)
R
DSR(Y page 166)
R
Off-road program (Y page 167)
R
Rear window wiper (Y page 108)
X
Press : to display theATTENTION ASSIST
assessment.
Deactivating/activating ESP
®
Observethe important safetynotes on ESP
®
(Y page 63).
G
WARNING
If you deactivateESP
®
,ESP
®
no longer sta-
bilizes thevehicle. There is an increased risk
of skiddingand an accident.
Only deactivateESP
®
in thesituationsdescri-
bed in thefollowing.
It may be best to deactivateESP
®
in thefollow-
ing situations:
R
when usingsnowchains
R
in deep snow
R
on sandorgravel
Deactivating/activating ESP
®
in Mercedes-
AMGvehicles (
Y page 65).
Forfurther information about ESP
®
,see
(
Y page 63).
X
Start theengine.
X
Press the = or ; buttononthe steering
wheeltoselect the DriveAssist
menu.
X
Press 9 or : to select ESP.
X
Press a to confirm.
The currentselection appears.
X
To activate/deactivate: press the a but-
tonagain.
ESP
®
is deactivated if the å warning lamp
in theinstrumentclusterlights up continu-
ously when theengineisrunning.
If the ÷ and å warning lampslightup
continuously, ESP
®
is notavailable due to amal-
function.
Observethe information on warning lamps
(
Y page 228).
Observethe information on display messages
(
Y page 198).
Menusand submenus
191
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Z
Activating or deactivating Active Brake
Assist
X
Press the = or ; buttononthe steering
wheeltoselect the DriveAssist
menu.
X
Press the 9 or : buttontoselect
Brake Assist
.
X
Press a to confirm.
The currentselection appears.
X
To activate/deactivate: press the a but-
tonagain.
When Active Brake Assistisdeactivated, the
æ symbol appearsinthe multifunction dis-
play in theassistancegraphic display.
Further information on Active Brake Assist
(
Y page 61).
Activating/deactivating ATTENTION
ASSIST
X
Press the = or ; buttononthe steering
wheeltoselect the DriveAssist
menu.
X
Press the 9 or : buttontoselect
Attention Assist
.
X
Press a to confirm.
The currentselection appears.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 buttontoset Off,
Standard
or Sensitive.
X
Press the a buttontosavethe setting.
When ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated, the
é symbol appearsinthe multifunction dis-
play in theassistancegraphicsdisplay.
Forfurther information about ATTENTION
ASSIST,see (
Y page 178).
Activating/deactivating Blind Spot
Assist
X
Press the = or ; buttononthe steering
wheeltoselect the DriveAssist
menu.
X
Press the 9 or : buttontoselect
Blind SpotAssist
.
X
Press a to confirm.
The currentselection appears.
X
To activate/deactivate: press the a but-
tonagain.
Forfurther information about Blind Spot Assist,
see (
Y page 180).
Activating/deactivating LaneKeeping
Assist
X
Press the = or ; buttononthe steering
wheeltoselect the DriveAssist
menu.
X
Press the 9 or : buttontoselect
LaneKeepingAssist
.
X
Press a to confirm.
The currentselection appears.
X
Press a again to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 buttontoset Off,
Standard
or Adaptive.
X
Press the a buttontosavethe setting.
When LaneKeepingAssistisactivated, the
multifunction display shows thelanemark-
ingsasbright lines in theassistancegraphic.
Forfurther information about LaneKeeping
Assist, see (
Y page 181).
Service menu
Dependingonthe equipmentinstalled in the
vehicle, you havethe followingoptionsinthe
Serv.
menu:
R
Callingupdisplay messagesinmessage
memory (
Y page 197)
R
Restarting thetirepressureloss warning sys-
tem(Canada only) (
Y page 300)
R
Checking thetirepressureelectronically
(USAonly) (
Y page 300)
R
Callingupthe servicedue date
(
Y page 270)
Settings menu
Introduction
Dependingonthe equipmentinstalled in the
vehicle, you havethe followingoptionsinthe
Sett.
menu:
R
Changingthe instrumentclustersettings
R
Changingthe lightsettings
R
Changingthe vehiclesettings
R
Changingthe convenience settings
R
Restoring thefactory settings
192
Menusand submenus
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Instrumentcluster
Selecting thedistance unit
The DisplayUnitSpeed-/Odometer: func-
tion allows you to choosewhether certain dis-
plays appear in kilometers or milesinthe mul-
tifunction display.
X
Press the = or ; buttononthe steering
wheeltoselect the Sett.
menu.
X
Press the : or 9 buttontoselect the
InstrumentCluster
submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 buttontoselect the
DisplayUnitSpeed-/Odometer
function.
You will see theselected setting: km
or miles.
X
Press the a buttontosavethe setting.
The selected unit of measurementfor distance
appliesto:
R
Digital speedometer in the Trip menu
R
Odometer and thetripodometer
R
Tripcomputer
R
Currentfuel consumption and approximate
range
R
Navigation instructionsinthe Navi menu
R
Cruisecontrol
R
DistancePilot DISTRONIC
R
ASSYSTPLUSserviceinterval display
Switchingthe additionalspeedometer
on/off
If theadditional speedometer is switched on,
thespeedisshown in thestatus area of the
multifunction display instead of theoutside tem-
perature.
The speeddisplay is inversetothe speedome-
ter.
X
Press the = or ; buttononthe steering
wheeltoselect the Sett.
menu.
X
Press the : or 9 buttontoselect the
InstrumentCluster
submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 buttontoselect the
Speedometer [km/h]
or Speedometer
[mph] function.
You will see theselected setting: On
or Off.
X
Press the a buttontosavethe setting.
Selecting permanent display
The Permanent Display: function allows you
to choosewhether themultifunction display
always shows theoutside temperature or the
speed.
The speeddisplay is inversetothe speedome-
ter.
X
Press the = or ; buttononthe steering
wheeltoselect the Sett.
menu.
X
Press the : or 9 buttontoselect the
InstrumentCluster
submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 buttontoselect the
Permanent Display:
function.
The currentsetting OutsideTemperature
or Speedometer [km/h]/Speedometer
[mph] appears.
X
Press the a buttontosavethe setting.
Lights
Switchingthe daytimerunninglamps on/
off
This function is notavailable in Canada.
X
Press the = or ; buttononthe steering
wheeltoselect the Sett.
menu.
X
Press the : or 9 buttontoselect the
Light
submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 buttontoselect the
DaytimeRunningLights
function.
If the Daytime
Running Lights function has
been switched on,the multifunction display
shows theconeoflightand the W symbol
in orange.
X
Press the a buttontosavethe setting.
Further information on daytime runninglamps
(
Y page 100).
Vehicle
Activating/deactivating theautomatic
door locking mechanism
X
Press the = or ; buttononthe steering
wheeltoselect the Sett.
menu.
X
Press the : or 9 buttontoselect the
Vehicle
submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
Menusand submenus
193
On-boardcomputer and displays
Z
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Automatic Door Lock
function.
If the Automatic Door Lock
function is
switched on, the multifunction display shows
the doors in orange.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
If you activatethe Automatic door locks
function, the vehicle is centrally locked above a
speed of around 9mph (15 km/h).
For further information on the automatic locking
feature, see (
Y page 76).
Activating/deactivating the acoustic
locking verification signal
If you switch on the Acoustic Lock function, an
acoustic signal sounds when you lock the vehi-
cle.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett.
menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Vehicle
submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Acoustic Lock
function.
If the Acoustic Lock
function is activated,
the multifunction display shows the &
symbol in orange.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
Convenience
Switching the fold-in mirrors when lock-
ing feature on/off
This function is only availableinCanada.
This function is only availablewhen the vehicle is
equipped with the electrical fold-in function.
When you activatethe Auto.
Mirror Folding
function, the exterior mirrors are folded in when
the vehicle is locked. If you unlock the vehicle
and then open the driver's or front-passenger
door, the exterior mirrors fold out again.
If you have switched on the Auto. Mirror
Folding function and you fold in the exterior
mirrors using the button on the door
(
Y page 96), they will not fold out automatically.
The exterior mirrors can then only be folded out
using the button on the door.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett.
menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Convenience
submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Auto. Mirror Folding
function.
If the Auto. Mirror Folding
function is
switched on, the multifunction display shows
the exterior mirror in orange.
X
Press the a button to save the setting.
Restoring the factorysettings
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the Sett.
menu.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select the
Factory Setting
submenu.
X
Press a to confirm.
The Reset All Settings?
function
appears.
X
Press the : or 9 button to select No or
Yes
.
X
Press the a button to confirm the selec-
tion.
If you have selected Yes
,the multifunction
display shows aconfirmation message.
For safety reasons, the Daytime Running
Lights function in the Light submenu is only
reset if the vehicle is stationary.
AMG menu (Mercedes-AMG vehicles)
Warm-up
:
Digital speedometer
;
Gear indicator
=
Upshift indicator
?
Engine oil temperature
A
Coolant temperature
B
Transmission fluid temperature
194
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the AMG
menu.
Upshift indicator: upshift indicator UP
=
indicates that the engine has reached the
overrevving range when in the manual drive
program.
Engine and transmission oil temperature:
when the engine and transmission are at nor-
mal operating temperature, oil tempera-
ture ? and B are displayed in white in the
multifunction display.
If the multifunction display shows oil temper-
ature ? or B in blue, the engine or the
transmission are not yet at normal operating
temperature. Avoid driving at full engine out-
put during this time.
SETUP
:
Drive Comfort/Sport/Sport +
;
Chassis Comfort/Sport/Sport +
=
Transmission D/M
?
ESP
®
On/Off or SPORT handling mode
Sport
SETUPdisplays the following information and
functions:
R
the digital speedometer
R
the gear indicator
R
the drive system setting
R
the suspension mode
R
the transmission position
R
the ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program) status
X
Press = or ; on the steeringwheel to
select the AMG
menu.
X
Press 9 repeatedly until SETUPappears.
RACETIMER
Displaying and starting RACETIMER
:
Lap
;
RACETIMER
The RACETIMERisonly intended for use on a
closed race circuit. Do not use the function on
public roads.
You can start the RACETIMERwhen the engine is
runningorifthe SmartKey is in position 2 in the
ignition lock.
X
Press = or ; on the steeringwheel to
select the AMG
menu.
X
Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
RACETIMERappears.
X
To start: press the a button to start the
RACETIMER.
Displaying the intermediate time
X
Press the = or ; button to select
Interm. Time
.
X
Press a to confirm.
The intermediate time appears for five sec-
onds.
Menus and submenus
195
On-board computer and displays
Z
Starting anew lap
:
RACETIMER
;
Fastest lap time (best lap)
=
Lap
X
Press a to confirm New Lap.
i
It is possible to store amaximum of sixteen
laps. The 16th lap can only be completed with
Finish Lap
.
Stopping the RACETIMER
X
Press the % button on the steering wheel.
X
Confirm Yes with a.
The RACETIMER interruptstiming if you stop the
vehicle and turn the SmartKey to position 1 in
the ignition lock. If you turn the key to position 3
and then press a to confirm Start
,timing is
continued.
Resetting the current lap
X
Stop the RACETIMER.
X
Press the = or ; button to select
Reset Lap
.
X
Press a to reset the lap time to "0".
Deleting all laps
If you switch off the engine, the RACETIMER is
reset to "0" after 30 seconds. All laps are
deleted.
You cannot delete individual stored laps. If you
have stopped 16 laps, the current lap does not
have to be reset.
X
Reset the current lap.
X
Press a to confirm Reset.
Reset Race-Timer?
appears in the multi-
function display.
X
Press the : button to select Yes and press
the a button to confirm.
All laps are deleted.
Overall statistics
:
RACETIMER overall evaluation
;
Total time driven
=
Average speed
?
Distancecovered
A
Maximum speed
This function is shown if you have stored at least
one lap and stopped the RACETIMER.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the AMG
menu.
X
Press the 9 button repeatedly until the
overall evaluation appears.
Lap statistics
:
Lap
;
Lap time
=
Average lap speed
?
Lap length
A
Top speed during lap
196
Menus and submenus
On-board computer and displays
This function is only availableifyou have stored
at least two laps and have stopped the RACE-
TIMER.
X
Press the = or ; button on the steering
wheel to select the AMG
menu.
X
Press 9 repeatedly until alap evaluation
appears.
Each lap appears in aseparate submenu. The
fastest lap is indicated by flashing symbol :.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select adif-
ferent lap evaluation.
Display messages
Introduction
General notes
Display messages appear in the multifunction display.
Display messages with graphic displaysmay be shown in simplified form in the Operator's Manual
and may thereforediffer from the multifunction display.
Please respond in accordancewith the display messages and follow the additional notes in this
Operator's Manual.
Certain display messages are accompanied by an audiblewarning toneoracontinuous tone.
When the ignition is switched off, all display messages are deleted, apart from some high-priority
display messages. Once the causes of the high-prioritydisplay messages have been rectified, the
corresponding display messages are also deleted.
When you stop and park the vehicle, please observe the notes on:
R
HOLD function (Y page 162)
R
Parking (Y page 143)
Hiding display messages
X
Press the a or % button on the steeringwheel.
The multifunction display hides the display message.
The multifunction display shows high-prioritydisplay messages in red. Some high-prioritydisplay
messages cannot be hidden.
The multifunction display shows these messages continuously until the causes for the messages
have been remedied.
Message memory
The on-board computer saves certain display messages in the message memory.You can call up
the display messages:
X
Press the = or ; button on the steeringwheel to select the Serv. menu.
If there are display messages, the multifunction display shows 2Messages
,for example.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select the entry, e.g. 2Messages.
X
Press a to confirm.
X
Press the 9 or : button to scroll through the display messages.
Display messages
197
On-board computer and displays
Z
Safety systems
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Currently Unavaila‐
ble See Operator's
Manual
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System), BAS (Brake Assist), ESP
®
(Electronic
Stability Program), the HOLD function and hill start assist are tempo-
rarily unavailable.
Active Brake Assist may have also failed.
In addition, the !, ÷ and å warning lamps may light up in
the instrumentcluster.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
Possible causes are:
R
Self-diagnosis is not yet complete.
R
The on-board voltage may be insufficient.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake
hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Carefullydrive ashort distance on asuitable stretch of road, making
slight steering movementsataspeed above 12 mph (20 km/h).
If the display message disappears, the functions mentioned above
are available again.
If the multifunction display still shows the display message:
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.
Inoperative See
Operator's Manual
ABS,BAS,ESP
®
,the HOLD function and hill start assist are not avail-
able due to amalfunction.
Active Brake Assist may have also failed.
The !, ÷, å and $ (USA only) or J (Canada only)
warning lamps in the instrumentcluster may also light up.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the
functions listed above. The wheels could therefore lock if you brake
hard, for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.
198
Display messages
On-board computer and displays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
÷
Currently Unavaila‐
ble See Operator's
Manual
ESP
®
,BAS,the HOLD function and hill start assist are temporarily
unavailable.
Active Brake Assistmay havealso failed.
In addition,the ÷ and å warning lampsmay lightupinthe
instrumentcluster.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
The self-diagnosis function might notbecomplete, for example.
G
WARNING
The brakesystem continues to function normally, but without the
functionslisted above.
The braking distanceinanemergencybraking situation can thus
increase.
If ESP
®
is notoperational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilizethe vehicle.
There is an increased riskofskiddingand an accident.
X
Carefully drive asuitable distance, making slight steering move-
ments at aspeed above12mph (20 km/h).
If the display messagedisappears, the functions mentioned above
are available again.
If the multifunction display still shows the display message:
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit aqualifiedspecialist workshop immediately.
÷
Currently Unavaila‐
ble See Operator's
Manual
ESP
®
,BAS, the HOLD function and hill start assist are unavailable due
to amalfunction.
Active Brake Assist may have also failed.
In addition, the ÷ and å warning lampsmay lightupinthe
instrument cluster.
ATTENTION ASSISTisdeactivated.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally,but withoutthe
functions listed above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus
increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational, ESP
®
is unabletostabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit aqualifiedspecialist workshop immediately.
Display messages
199
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
T!
÷
Inoperative See
Operator'sManual
EBD(electronic brakeforce distribution), ABS, BAS, ESP
®
,the HOLD
function and hill start assist are notavailable due to amalfunction.
Active Brake Assistmay havealso failed.
Awarning tone sounds.
In addition,the ÷, å and ! warning lampsmay lightupin
theinstrumentcluster.
G
WARNING
The brakesystem continues to function normally, but without the
functionslisted above. The frontand rear wheels could thereforelock
if you brakehard, for example.
The steerabilityand braking characteristics may be severely affected.
The braking distanceinanemergencybraking situation can increase.
If ESP
®
is notoperational, ESP
®
is unable to stabilizethe vehicle.
There is an increased riskofskiddingand an accident.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.
F(USA
only)
!(Canada
only)
TurnOnthe Igni‐
tion to Release the
ParkingBrake
The red F (USAonly) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp lights
up.
You attemptedtorelease theelectric parking brakewhile theignition
was switched off.
X
SmartKey: turnthe SmartKey to position 1 in theignition lock.
X
KEYLESS-GO: switch on theignition.
F(USA
only)
!(Canada
only)
Please
Release Park‐
ing Brake
The red F (USAonly) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes
and awarning tone sounds. Acondition for automatic release of the
electric parking brakeisnot fulfilled (
Y page 144).
You are drivingwiththe electric parking brakeapplied.
X
Releasethe electric parking brakemanually.
The red F (USAonly) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes
and awarning tone sounds.
You are usingthe electric parking brakefor emergencybraking
(
Y page 144).
F(USA
only)
!(Canada
only)
ParkingBrake See
Operator'sManual
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up.
The electric parking brakeismalfunctioning.
To apply:
X
Switchthe ignition off.
X
Press theelectric parking brakehandle for at least tenseconds.
X
Shift thetransmission to position P.
X
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
200
Display messages
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The yellow ! warning lamp and thered F (USAonly) or !
(Canada only) indicator lamp lightup.
The electric parking brakeismalfunctioning.
To release:
X
Switchoff theignition and turnitbackon.
X
Releasethe electric parking brakemanually.
or
X
Releasethe electric parking brakeautomatically (Y page 144).
If theelectric parking brakestill cannotbereleased:
X
Do notdrive on.
X
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
The red F (USAonly) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes
and theyellow ! warning lamp lights up.
The electric parking brakeismalfunctioning.
To release:
X
Switchoff theignition and turnitbackon.
X
Releasethe electric parking brakemanually.
To apply:
X
Switchoff theignition and turnitbackon.
X
Apply theelectric parking brakemanually.
If thered F (USAonly) or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp con-
tinuestoflash:
X
Do notdrive on.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 313).
X
Shift thetransmission to position P.
X
Turn thefront wheels towardsthe curb.
X
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
Display messages
201
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USAonly)
or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about tenseconds
after theelectric parking brakehas been appliedorreleased. It then
goesout or remainslit.
The electric parking brakeismalfunctioning.
X
Switchoff theignition and turnitbackon.
X
Apply theelectric parking brake.
If it is notpossibletoengage theelectric parking brake:
X
Shift thetransmission to position P.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
If it is notpossibletorelease theelectric parking brakemanually:
X
Releasethe electric parking brakeautomatically (Y page 144).
If theelectric parking brakestill cannotbereleased:
X
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. If you manually apply or
release theelectric parking brake, thered F (USAonly) or !
(Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.
The electric parking brakeismalfunctioning.Itisnot possibletoapply
theelectric parking brakemanually.
X
Shift theselector lever to P,asthe electric parking brakeisnot
appliedautomatically.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
F(USA
only)
!(Canada
only)
ParkingBrake Inop‐
erative
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up. The red F (USAonly)
or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes for about tenseconds
after theelectric parking brakehas been appliedorreleased. It then
goesout or remainslit.
The electric parking brakeismalfunctioning,e.g.because of over-
voltageorundervoltage.
X
Remove thecausefor theovervoltage or undervoltage, e.g. by
charging thebattery or restarting theengine.
X
Engage or release theelectric parking brake.
If it remainsimpossible to apply or release theelectric parking brake:
X
Switchoff theignition and turnitbackon.
X
Engage or release theelectric parking brake.
If theelectric parking brakestill cannotbereleased:
X
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
If theelectric parking brakestill cannotbeapplied:
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
202
Display messages
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
The yellow ! warning lamp lights up and thered F (USAonly)
or ! (Canada only) indicator lamp flashes.
It is notpossibletoapply theelectric parking brakemanually.
X
Shift thetransmission to position P.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
$(USA
only)
J(Canada
only)
Check Brake Fluid
Level
There is notenough brakefluidinthe brakefluid reservoir.
Awarning tone sounds. The $ (USAonly) or J (Canada only)
warning lampsinthe instrumentclustermay also lightup.
G
WARNING
The braking effectmay be impaired.
There is ariskofanaccident.
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonaspossible, paying
attention to roadand traffic conditions. Do notcontinue driving
under any circumstances.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 143).
X
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
X
Do notadd brakefluid.This does notcorrect themalfunction.
#
Check Brake Pad Wear
The brakepads/linings havereached their wear limit.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
G
Inoperative
Oneormoremain features of thembrace system are malfunctioning.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
Active Brake Assist
Functions Currently
LimitedSee Opera‐
tor's Manual
Active Brake Assististemporarily inoperative.
Possiblecauses are:
R
theradar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-
tromagneticradiation emitted by nearby TV or radiostationsor
other sourcesofelectromagneticradiation
R
thesystem is outside theoperating temperature range
R
theon-boardvoltageistoo low
Whenthe causes statedabovenolonger apply, thedisplay message
disappears.
Active Brake Assistisoperational again.
If thedisplay message does notdisappear:
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonaspossible, paying
attention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 143).
X
Restart theengine.
Active Brake
Assist: System Inop‐
erative
Active Brake Assistisunavailable due to amalfunction.Situation-
dependentparking assistancemay also havefailed.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.
Display messages
203
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Radar Sensors Dirty
See Operator'sMan
ual
The radar sensor system is malfunctioning.
Possiblecauses are:
R
Dirt on sensors
R
Heavy rain or snow
R
Whendrivingoninter-urban roads without traffic or infrastructure,
e.g. in desert-like areas
At least onedrivingsystem or drivingsafetysystem is malfunctioning
or is temporarily unavailable:
R
Active Brake Assist
R
DistancePilotDISTRONIC
Awarning tone also sounds.
Once thecauseofthe problem is no longer present, thedrivingand
drive safetysystems will be available again.The display message dis-
appears.
If thedisplay message does notdisappear:
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonaspossible, paying
attention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 143).
X
Switchoff theengine.
X
Clean all sensors(Y page 274).
X
Restart theengine.
The display message disappears.
6
SRS Malfunction Ser
viceRequired
The restraintsystem is malfunctioning.The 6 warning lamp also
lights up in theinstrumentcluster.
G
WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
unintentionally or, in theevent of an accident, may notbetriggered.
There is an increased riskofinjury.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.
Forfurther information about therestraintsystem, see (Y page 39).
6
Front LeftMalfunc‐
tionService
Required or Front
Right Malfunction
ServiceRequired
The restraintsystem is malfunctioning at thefront on theleftorright.
The 6 warning lamp also lights up in theinstrumentcluster.
G
WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
unintentionally or, in theevent of an accident, may notbetriggered.
There is an increased riskofinjury.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.
204
Display messages
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
6
RearLeftMalfunc‐
tionService
Required or Rear
Right Malfunction
ServiceRequired
The rear left-handorright-hand restraintsystem is malfunctioning.
The 6 warning lamp also lights up in theinstrumentcluster.
G
WARNING
The air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggered
unintentionally or, in theevent of an accident, may notbetriggered.
There is an increased riskofinjury.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.
6
LeftSideCurtain
Airbag Malfunction
ServiceRequired or
Right SideCurtain
Airbag Malfunction
ServiceRequired
The left-handorright-hand window curtainair bag is malfunctioning.
The 6 warning lamp also lights up in theinstrumentcluster.
G
WARNING
The leftorright window curtainair bag may either be triggered unin-
tentionally or, in theevent of an accident, may notbetriggered.
There is an increased riskofinjury.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.
Display messages
205
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Front Passenger Air
bag Disabled See
Operator'sManual
The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag are deac-
tivated during thejourney, although:
R
an adult
or
R
aperson of thecorrespondingstatureisonthe front-passenger seat
If additional forcesare appliedtothe seat,the system may interpret
theoccupant's weightaslower than it actually is.
G
WARNING
The front-passenger frontair bag and frontpassenger knee bag may
notbetriggered in theevent of an accident.
There is an increased riskofinjury.
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonaspossible, paying
attention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 143).
X
Switchthe ignition off.
X
Havethe occupant get out of thevehicle.
X
Keepthe seat unoccupied,close thefront-passenger door and
switch on theignition.
X
Observethe PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator lampsinthe center
console and themultifunction display and checkthe following:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
R
aself-diagnosis is carriedout.The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFFand
PASSENGER AIRBAG ON indicator lampsmustlightupsimulta-
neouslyfor approximately six seconds
R
thePASSENGER AIRBAG OFFindicator lamp mustthenlightup
and remain lit after theself-diagnosis.Ifthe indicator lamp is on,
OCS (Occupant Classification System) has disabled thefront-
passenger frontair bag and front-passenger knee bag
(
Y page 47)
R
The Front Passenger Airbag EnabledSee Operator's
Manual or Front Passenger¶AirbagDisabled¶See Opera‐
tor's Manual display messagesmustnot be shown in themul-
tifunction display
X
Wait for aperiod of at least 60 seconds until thenecessarysystem
checks havebeen completed.
X
Makesurethatthe display messagesdonot appear in themulti-
function display.
If these conditionsare fulfilled,the front-passenger seat can be occu-
pied again.Whether thePASSENGER AIRBAG OFForONindicator
lamp remainslit or goesout dependsonhow OCS classifies theoccu-
pant.
If theconditionsare notfulfilled,the system is notoperating correctly.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.
Forfurther information about theOccupant Classification System, see
(
Y page 47).
206
Display messages
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Front Passenger Air
bag EnabledSee
Operator'sManual
The front-passenger air bag and front-passenger knee bag are enabled
during thejourney, eventhough:
R
achild, asmall adult or an objectweighing less than thesystem's
weightthreshold is locatedonthe front-passenger seat
or
R
thefront-passenger seat is unoccupied
The system may detectobjects or forcesapplyingadditional weighton
theseat.
G
WARNING
The front-passenger frontair bag and front-passenger knee bag may
be triggered unintentionally.
There is an increased riskofinjury.
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonaspossible, paying
attention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 143).
X
Switchthe ignition off.
X
Openthe front-passenger door.
X
Remove thechild and thechild restraintsystem from thefront-
passenger seat.
X
Makesurethatthere are no objects on theseat addingtothe
weight.
The system may otherwise detectthe additional weightand inter-
pretthe seat occupant's weightasgreaterthanitactually is.
X
Keepthe seat unoccupied,close thefront-passenger door and
switch on theignition.
X
Observethe PASSENGER AIRBAG indicator lampsinthe center
console and themultifunction display and checkthe fo
llowing:
Seat unoccupied and ignition switched on:
R
aself-diagnosis is carriedout.The PASSENGER AIRBAG OFFand
PASSENGER AIRBAG ON indicator lampsmustlightupsimulta-
neouslyfor approximately six seconds
R
thePASSENGER AIRBAG OFFindicator lamp mustthenlightup
and remain lit after theself-diagnosis.Ifthe indicator lamp is on,
OCS has deactivated thefront-passenger frontair bag and front-
passenger knee bag (
Y page 47)
R
The Front Passenger Airbag EnabledSee Operator's
Manual or Front Passenger Airbag Disabled See Opera‐
tor's Manual display messagesmustnot be shown in themul-
tifunction display
X
Wait for aperiod of at least 60 seconds until thenecessarysystem
checks havebeen completed.
X
Makesurethatthe display messagesdonot appear in themulti-
function display.
If these conditionsare fulfilled,the front-passenger seat can be occu-
pied again.Whether thePASSENGER AIRBAG OFForONindicator
lamp remainslit or goesout dependsonhow OCS classifies theoccu-
pant.
Display messages
207
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
If theconditionsare notfulfilled,the system is notoperating correctly.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.
Forfurther information about theOccupant Classification System, see
(
Y page 47).
Lights
i
Vehicles withLED bulbs in thelightclusters:
The display message for thecorrespondinglamp only appearswhen all of theLEDsinthe lamp
havefailed.
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
b
Check LeftCorner
ing Light or Check
Right Cornering
Light
The leftorright-hand cornering lightisdefective.
X
Checkwhether you are permittedtoreplace thebulb yourself
(
Y page 104).
or
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Left Low Beam
or Check Right Low
Beam
The leftorright-hand low-beam headlamp is defective.
X
Checkwhether you are permittedtoreplace thebulb yourself
(
Y page 104).
or
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
b
Check RearLeft
TurnSignal or
Check RearRight
TurnSignal
The rear left-handorrear right-hand turnsignal is defective.
X
Checkwhether you are permittedtoreplace thebulb yourself
(
Y page 104).
or
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Front Left
TurnSignal or
Check Front Right
TurnSignal
The frontleft-handorfront right-hand turnsignal is defective.
X
Checkwhether you are permittedtoreplace thebulb yourself
(
Y page 104).
or
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
b
Check LeftMirror
TurnSignal or
Check Right Mirror
TurnSignal
The turnsignal in theleft-handorright-hand exteriormirror is defec-
tive.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Center Brake
Lamp
The high-mountedbrakelamp is faulty.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
208
Display messages
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
b
Check LeftBrake
LamporCheck Right
Brake Lamp
The leftorright-hand brakelamp is defective.
X
Checkwhether you are permittedtoreplace thebulb yourself
(
Y page 104).
or
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
b
Check LeftHigh
Beam or Check Right
HighBeam
The leftorright-hand high beam is defective.
X
Checkwhether you are permittedtoreplace thebulb yourself
(
Y page 104).
or
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
b
LicensePlate Lamp
The leftorright-hand license platelamp is faulty.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
b
Check LeftFog
LamporCheck Right
Fog Lamp
The leftorright-hand fog lamp is faulty.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
b
RearFog Lamp
The rear fog lamp is faulty.
X
Checkwhether you are permittedtoreplace thebulb yourself
(
Y page 104).
or
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
b
Check Front Left
ParkingLamp or
Check Front Right
ParkingLamp
The frontleftorfront right parking or standing lamp is defective.
X
Checkwhether you are permittedtoreplace thebulb yourself
(
Y page 104).
or
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
b
Backup Light
The backup lamp is defective.
X
Checkwhether you are permittedtoreplace thebulb yourself
(
Y page 104).
or
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
b
Check LeftTail
Lamp or Check Right
TailLamp
The leftorright-hand taillamp is defective.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
Display messages
209
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
b
Check Front Left
SidemarkerLamp or
Check Front Right
SidemarkerLamp
The frontleft-handorfront right-hand side markerlamp is faulty.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
b
Check RearLeft
SidemarkerLamp or
Check RearRight
SidemarkerLamp
The rear left-handorrear right-hand side markerlamp is faulty.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
b
Check LeftDaytime
RunningLight or
Check
Right Daytime
RunningLight
The leftorright-hand daytime runninglamp is faulty.
X
Checkwhether you are permittedtoreplace thebulb yourself
(
Y page 104).
or
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
b
Active Headlamps
Inoperative
The active lightfunction is faulty.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
b
Malfunction See
Operator'sManual
The exteriorlighting is malfunctioning.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
b
AutoLampFunction
Inoperative
The lightsensor is defective.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
b
Switch Off Lights
The lights are still switched on when you leavethe vehicle. Awarning
tone also sounds.
X
Turn thelightswitch to the à position.
b
Switch On Headlamps
You are drivingwithlow-beam headlampsswitched off.
X
Turn thelightswitch to the L or à position.
210
Display messages
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Engine
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
+
Check Coolant Level
See Operator'sMan‐
ual
The coolant levelistoo low.
!
Avoid making longjourneys with toolittle coolant in theengine
cooling system. The engine will otherwise be damaged.
X
Add coolant,observing thewarning notesbefore doingso
(
Y page 269).
If you have to addcoolantfrequently:
X
Contactaqualified specialist workshop and have theengine cooling
system checked.
?
The fan motor is malfunctioning.
X
At coolant temperatures below 248‡(120 †), drive to the nearest
qualified specialist workshop.
X
Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in moun-
tainousterrainand stop-and-go traffic.
?
CoolantToo Hot
Stop VehicleTurn
Engine Off
The coolant is too hot.
Awarning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
Do not drive whenyourengine is overheated. This can cause some
fluids which may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch
fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which
can occur just by opening the hood.
There is arisk of injury.
X
Pullover and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, pay-
ing attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page143).
X
Waituntil the engine has cooleddown.
X
Make sure that the airsupply to the engine radiator is not blocked,
e.g. by snow, slush or ice.
X
Do not start the engine again until the displaymessage goes out and
the coolant temperature is below 248 ‡(120 †). Otherwise, the
engine couldbedamaged.
X
Pay attention to the coolant temperature gauge.
If the temperature increasesagain:
X
Visitaqualified specialist workshop immediately.
Under normal operating conditions and with the specified coolant
level, the coolant temperature may rise to 248 ‡(120 †).
Display messages
211
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
#
See Operator'sMan
ual
The battery is notbeingcharged.
Awarning tone also sounds.
Possiblecauses are:
R
adefective alternator
R
atornpoly-V-belt
R
amalfunction in theelectronics
!
Do notcontinue driving. The enginecould otherwise overheat.
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely and switch off theengine, pay-
ing attention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 143).
X
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
#
StopVehicleSee
Operator'sManual
The battery is no longer beingcharged and thebattery chargelevel is
toolow.
Awarning tone also sounds.
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely and switch off theengine, pay-
ing attention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 143).
X
Observethe instructionsinthe display message # See Oper‐
ator's Manual.
X
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
4
Check Engine Oil At
NextRefueling
The engineoil level has dropped to theminimum level.
Awarning tone also sounds.
!
Avoid longjourneys withtoo littleengineoil. The enginewill oth-
erwise be damaged.
X
Checkthe oil level when next refueling, at thelatest (Y page 267).
X
If necessary, add engineoil (Y page 268).
If theengineoil needstoppingupmoreoften:
X
Contactaqualified specialist workshop and havethe engine
checked.
Information on approvedengineoils can be obtained from any quali-
fiedspecialist workshop or on theInternetathttp://bevo.mercedes-
benz.com.
æ
FuelLevel Low
The fuel level has dropped intothe reserverange.
X
Refuelatthe nearestgas station.
212
Display messages
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
ç
There is only averysmall amount of fuel in thefuel tank.
X
Refuelatthe nearestgas station without fail.
æ
Gas Cap Loose
The fuel filler cap is notclosed correctlyorthe fuel system is leaking.
X
Checkthatthe fuel filler cap is correctlyclosed.
If thefuelfiller cap is not correctlyclosed:
X
Closethe fuel filler cap.
If thefuelfiller cap is correctlyclosed:
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
Driving systems
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
À
Attention Assist:
TakeaBreak!
Based on certain criteria, ATTENTION ASSIST has detectedfatigue or
alack of concentration on thepart of thedriver.Awarning tone also
sounds.
X
If necessary, takeabreak.
During longjourneys, takeregular breaks in goodtimesoyou get
enough rest.
À
Attention Assist
Inoperative
ATTENTION ASSIST is inoperative.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
Ã
Inoperative
DSR(Downhill Speed Regulation)isdeactivated due to amalfunction.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
ë
Off
The HOLD function is deactivated. thevehicleisskidding.
Awarning tone also sounds.
X
Reactivatethe HOLD function later (Y page 162).
The HOLD function is deactivated. Whenthe brakepedal is firmly
depressed, an activation condition is notfulfilled.
Awarning tone also sounds.
X
Checkthe activation conditionsfor theHOLDfunction
(
Y page 162).
Display messages
213
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Lane Keeping Assist
Currently Unavaila‐
ble See Operator's
Manual
LaneKeepingAssistisdeactivated and temporarily inoperative.
Possiblecauses are:
R
thewindshield in thecamera'sfield of vision is dirty
R
visibilityisimpaireddue to heavyrain,snoworfog
R
there havebeen no lanemarkingsfor an extended period
R
thelanemarkingsare worn, dark or covered, e.g. by dirtorsnow
Whenthe causes statedabovenolonger apply, thedisplay message
disappears.
LaneKeepingAssistisoperational again.
If thedisplay message does notdisappear:
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonaspossible, paying
attention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 143).
X
Clean thewindshield.
Lane Keeping Assist
Inoperative
LaneKeepingAssistisfaulty.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
Blind SpotAssist
Currently Unavaila‐
ble See Operator's
Manual
Blind Spot Assististemporarily inoperative.
Possiblecauses are:
R
theradar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-
tromagneticradiation emitted by nearby TV or radiostationsor
other sourcesofelectromagneticradiation
R
theradar sensor system is outside theoperating temperature range
The yellow 9 indicator lampsalso lightupinthe exteriormirrors.
Whenthe causes statedabovenolonger apply, thedisplay message
disappears.
Blind Spot Assistisoperational again.
If thedisplay message does notdisappear:
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonaspossible, paying
attention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 143).
X
Restart theengine.
Blind SpotAssist
Inoperative
Blind Spot Assistisfaulty.
The yellow 9 indicator lampsalso lightupinthe exteriormirrors.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
ParkingPilot Can
celed
The driver's door is open and thedriver's seat belt has notbeen fas-
tened.
X
Repeat theparking process withthe seat belt fastenedand the
driver's door closed.
214
Display messages
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
You haveinadvertentlytouched themultifunction steering wheelwhile
steering intervention was active.
X
Whilesteering intervention is active,makesurethatthe multifunc-
tion steering wheelisnot touched unintentionally.
The vehiclehas started to skid and ESP
®
has intervened.
X
Use Parking Pilotagain later (Y page 171).
ParkingPilot Inop‐
erative
You havejustcarriedout alargenumber of turningorparking maneu-
vers.
Parking Pilotwill become available again after approximately ten
minutes(
Y page 171).
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonaspossible, paying
attention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Switchoff and restartthe engine.
If themultifunction display still shows thedisplay message:
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
Parking AssistPARKTRONICismalfunctioning.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
ParkingPilot Fin
ished
The vehicleisparked. Awarning tone also sounds.
The display message disappearsautomatically.
Distance Pilot Off
DistancePilotDISTRONICisdeactivated (Y page 156).
If it was notdeactivated by thedriver,awarning tone also sounds.
Distance Pilot Now
Available
DistancePilotDISTRONICisoperational again after having been tem-
porarily unavailable.You can nowreactivateDistance Pilot
DISTRONIC(
Y page 156).
Distance Pilot Cur
rently Unavailable
See Operator'sMan
ual
DistancePilotDISTRONICistemporarily inoperative.
Possiblecauses are:
R
theradar sensor system is temporarily inoperative, e.g. due to elec-
tromagneticradiation emitted by nearby TV or radiostationsor
other sourcesofelectromagneticradiation
R
thesystem is outside theoperating temperature range
R
theon-boardvoltageistoo low
Awarning tone also sounds.
Whenthe causes statedabovenolonger apply, thedisplay message
disappears.
DistancePilotDISTRONICisoperational again.
If thedisplay message does notdisappear:
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonaspossible, paying
attention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 143).
X
Restart theengine.
Display messages
215
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Distance Pilot Inop‐
erative
DistancePilotDISTRONICismalfunctioning.Situation-dependent
parking assistancemay also havefailed.
Awarning tone also sounds.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
Distance Pilot Sus
pended
You havedepressed theacceleratorpedal.Distance PilotDISTRONIC
is no longer controllingthe speed of thevehicle.
X
Remove your footfromthe acceleratorpedal.
Distance Pilot
---mph
Acondition for activating DistancePilotDISTRONIChas notbeen met.
X
Checkthe activation conditionsfor DistancePilotDISTRONIC
(
Y page 156).
Cruise Control Inop‐
erative
Cruisecontrolismalfunctioning.
Awarning tone also sounds.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
Cruise Control
---mph
R
Acondition for activating cruise control has notbeen fulfilled.
You havetried to store aspeed below20mph (30 km/h), for exam-
ple.
R
ESP
®
is deactivated. The yellow ESP
®
OFFwarning lamp is lit.
X
If conditionspermit,drive fasterthan20mph (30 km/h)and store
thespeed.
or
X
Checkthe activation conditionsfor cruise control (Y page 154).
or
X
ReactivateESP
®
(Y page 191).
216
Display messages
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Tires
Display messages
Possible causes/consequencesand M Solutions
Check Tire Pressure
Soon
Canadaonly:
The tire pressure loss warning system hasdetectedasignificant loss
in pressure.
Awarning tone also sounds.
Possiblecauses:
R
youhavechangedthe positions of the wheels and tiresorinstalled
new wheels and tires
R
the tire pressure in one or moretireshas dropped
G
WARNING
Tire pressures thatare too lowposethe following hazards:
R
theymay burst, especially as the load and vehiclespeed increase
R
theymay wear excessivelyand/or unevenly, which maygreatly
impairtire traction.
R
the drivingcharacteristics, as well as steeringand braking,may be
greatlyimpaired
There is ariskofanaccident.
X
Stop the vehiclewithoutmaking any sudden steeringorbraking
maneuvers. Payattentiontothe trafficconditions as youdoso.
X
Secure the vehicleagainst rolling away (Y page 143).
X
Check the tiresand,ifnecessary,followthe instructions for aflat
tire (
Y page 278).
X
Check the tire pressures and,ifnecessary,correct the tire pressure.
X
Restart the tire pressure loss warning system when the tire pres-
sure is correct (
Y page 300).
Check Tire Pressure
ThenRestartRun
FlatIndicator
Canadaonly:
The tire pressure loss warning system generated adisplay message
and hasnot been restarted since.
X
Set the correct tire pressure in allfourtires.
X
Restart the tire pressure loss warning system (Y page 300).
Run FlatIndicator
Inoperative
Canadaonly:
The tire pressure loss warning system is faulty.
X
Visitaqualified specialistworkshop.
Please Correct Tire
Pressure
USA only:
The tire pressure is too lowinatleast one of the tires, or the tire
pressure differencebetween the wheels is too great.
X
Check the tire pressures at the next opportunity (Y page 300).
X
If necessary,correct the tire pressure.
X
Restart the tire pressure monitor (Y page 302).
Displaymessages
217
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Check Tires
USAonly:
The tire pressureinone or moretires has dropped significantly. The
wheelposition appearsinthe multifunction display.
Awarning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
Tirepressures that are toolow posethe followinghazards:
R
they may burst, especially as theload and vehiclespeed increase
R
they may wear excessivelyand/orunevenly, whichmay greatly
impair tire traction.
R
thedrivingcharacteristics,aswell as steering and braking,may be
greatlyimpaired
There is ariskofanaccident.
X
Stop thevehiclewithout making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers.Pay attention to thetraffic conditionsasyou do so.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 143).
X
Checkthe tires and,ifnecessary, follow theinstructionsfor aflat
tire (
Y page 278).
X
Checkthe tire pressure(Y page 300).
X
If necessary, correctthe tire pressure.
WarningTireMal
function
USAonly:
The tire pressureinone or moretires has dropped suddenly. The wheel
position appearsinthe multifunction display.
G
WARNING
Drivingwithaflat tire poses ariskofthe followinghazards:
R
aflat tire affects theabilitytosteer or brakethe vehicle
R
you could lose control of thevehicle
R
continued drivingwithaflat tire will causeexcessive heat build-up
and possiblyafire
There is ariskofanaccident.
X
Stop thevehiclewithout making any sudden steering or braking
maneuvers.Pay attention to thetraffic conditionsasyou do so.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 143).
X
Checkthe tires and,ifnecessary, follow theinstructionsfor aflat
tire (
Y page 278).
Tire Press. Monitor
Currently Unavaila‐
ble
USAonly:
Becausethere is interferencefromastrongsource of radiowaves, no
signals from thetirepressuresensorsare detected. The tire pressure
monitor is temporarily malfunctioning.
X
Drive on.
The tire pressuremonitor restarts automatically as soonasthe
problem has been resolved.
218
Display messages
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
TirePress.Sen
sor(s) Missing
USAonly:
There is no signal from thetirepressuresensor of oneorseveral
wheels. The pressureofthe affectedtiredoes notappear in themul-
tifunction display.
X
Havethe faultytirepressuresensor replacedataqualified special-
ist workshop.
TirePressure Moni‐
tor Inoperative No
Wheel Sensors
USAonly:
The wheels mounteddonot haveasuitable tire pressuresensor.The
tire pressuremonitor is deactivated.
X
Mountwheels withsuitable tire pressuresensors.
The tire pressuremonitor is activated automatically after drivingfor
afew minutes.
Tire Press. Monitor
Inoperative
USAonly:
The tire pressuremonitor is faulty.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
Vehicle
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
DepressBrake to
Start Engine
You haveattemptedtostart theenginewiththe transmission in posi-
tion N without depressing thebrakepedal.
X
Depress thebrakepedal.
To Deselect P or N,
DepressBrake and
Start Engine
You haveattemptedtoshift thetransmission to position R or D with-
out starting theengine.
X
Start theengine.
X
Depress thebrakepedal.
i
It is only possibletoshift thetransmission from position P to the
desiredposition if you depress thebrakepedal.Onlythencan the
parking lockbedeactivated. If you do notdepress thebrakepedal,
theDIRECT SELECT lever can still be moved but theparking lock
remainsengaged.
i
At transmission fluid temperatures below Ò4‡(Ò20 †) you can
only shift out of position P intoanother transmission position when
theengineisrunning.
Apply Brake to
Shift from'P'
You haveattemptedtoshift thetransmission to position R, N or D
without depressing thebrakepedal.
X
Depress thebrakepedal.
Display messages
219
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Transmission Not in
PRiskofVehicle
RollingAway
The driver's door is open or notfullyclosed and thetransmission is in
position R, N or D.
Awarning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
The vehiclemay rollaway.
There is ariskofanaccident.
X
Shift thetransmission to position P.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 143).
X
Closethe driver's door completely.
Service Required Do
Not Shift Gears
Visit Dealer
You cannotchangethe transmission position due to amalfunction.
Awarning tone also sounds.
If transmission position D is selected:
X
Drive to aqualified specialist workshop without shifting thetrans-
mission from position D.
If transmission position R, N or P is selected:
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 143).
X
Notify aqualified specialist workshop or breakdown service.
OnlyShift to 'P'
when Vehicle is Sta
tionary
The vehicleismoving.
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonaspossible, paying
attention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Shift thetransmission to position P.
To Engage Trans‐
miss. Position R
First Depressthe
Brake
You haveattemptedtoshift from position D or N to transmission
position R.
X
Shift thetransmission to position R while depressing thebrake
pedal.
Reversing Not Possi‐
ble Service Required
The automatic transmission is malfunctioning.You cannotbackup.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
Transmission Mal
function
The automatic transmission is malfunctioning.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
Transmission Mal
function Stop
The automatic transmission is malfunctioning.
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonaspossible, paying
attention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 143).
X
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
220
Display messages
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
StopVehicleShift
to PLeave Engine
Running
The automatic transmission has overheated.
X
Drive on carefully.
The automatic transmission is available again when thedisplay
message goesout.
If themultifunction display still shows thedisplay message:
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonaspossible, paying
attention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 143).
X
Wait until theautomatic transmission has cooled down and thedis-
play message has disappeared.
Auxiliary Battery
Malfunction
The auxiliary battery for theautomatic transmission is no longer being
charged.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
X
Untilthen, set thetransmission to position P before you switch off
theengine.
X
Beforeleaving thevehicle, apply theelectric parking brake.
Trans. Oil Overhea‐
ted Drive on with
Care
Mercedes-AMG vehicles: thetransmission oil has overheated.
Manual drive program M and thetemporarily active manual drive pro-
gramare no longer available. The enginepoweroutput is reduced.
X
Allow thevehicletocooldown.
4matic Currently
Unavailable
4MATIC has overheated. The vehicleisonlydriven by thefront wheels.
X
Drive on.
The airflow cools 4MATIC morequickly.
Whenthe display message goesout,4MATIC is available again and
thevehicleisdriven by all fourwheels.
4matic Inoperative
4MATIC is malfunctioning.The vehicleisonlydriven by thefront
wheels.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
A
The tailgateisopen.
G
WARNING
Whenthe engineisrunning, exhaust gasescan enterthe vehicleinte-
riorifthe tailgateisopen.
There is ariskofpoisoning.
X
Closethe tailgate.
Display messages
221
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
?
The hoodisopen.
Awarning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
The open hoodmay blockyour viewwhen thevehicleisinmotion.
There is ariskofanaccident.
X
Pull overand stop thevehiclesafely as soonaspossible, paying
attention to roadand traffic conditions.
X
Securethe vehicleagainst rollingaway (Y page 143).
X
Closethe hood.
C
At least onedoor is open.Awarning tone also sounds.
X
Closeall thedoors.
Ð
Power Steering Mal
function See Opera‐
tor's Manual
The powersteering is malfunctioning.
Awarning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
You will need to use moreforce to steer.
There is ariskofanaccident.
X
Checkwhether you are able to apply theextra force required.
If you areabletosteer safely:
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.
If you areunable to steer safely:
X
Do notdrive on.
X
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
Phone No Service
Your vehicleisoutside thenetwork provider'stransmitter/receiver
range.
X
Wait until themobile phone operational readiness symbol appears
in themultifunction display.
¥
Check Washer Fluid
The washer fluidlevel in thewasher fluidreservoir has dropped below
theminimum.
X
Addwasher fluid(Y page 269).
Wiper Malfunction‐
ing
The windshield wipersare malfunctioning.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
Hazard Warning
Flashers Malfunc‐
tioning
The hazard warning lampsare faulty.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
222
Display messages
On-boardcomputer anddisplays
SmartKey
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Â
Key Does Not Belong
to Vehicle
You have put the wrong SmartKey in the ignition lock.
X
Use the correct SmartKey.
Â
Take Your Key from
Ignition
The SmartKey is in the ignition lock.
Awarning tone sounds
X
Remove the SmartKey.
Â
Obtain aNew Key
The SmartKey needs to be replaced.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
Â
Replace Key Battery
The SmartKey battery is discharged.
X
Change the battery (Y page 72).
Â
Don't Forget Your
Key
The display message is shown for amaximum of 60 seconds and is
only areminder.
You have opened the driver's door with the engine switched off. The
SmartKey is not in the ignition lock. Awarning tone sounds.
X
Take the SmartKey with you when you leave the vehicle.
Â
Key Not Detected
(red display message)
The SmartKey is not in the vehicle.
Awarning tone also sounds.
If the engine is switched off, you can no longer lock the vehicle cen-
trally or start the engine.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 143).
X
Locate the SmartKey.
Because there is interference from astrongsource of radio waves, the
SmartKey is not detected whilst the engine is running.
Awarning tone also sounds.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying
attention to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 143).
X
Insert the SmartKey into the ignition lock and drive in SmartKey
mode.
Display messages
223
On-board computer and displays
Z
Display messages
Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions
Â
Key Not Detected
(whitedisplay message)
The SmartKey is currentlyundetected.
X
Change thelocation of theSmartKey in thevehicle.
If theSmartKey still cannotbedetected:
X
Operatethe vehiclewiththe SmartKey in theignition lock.
Â
Remove 'Start'But
ton and Insert Key
The SmartKey is continually undetected.
The SmartKey detection function has atemporarymalfunction or is
faulty. Awarning tone also sounds.
X
Insertthe SmartKey intothe ignition lockand turnittothe desired
position.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop.
Warning and indicator lamps in theinstrument cluster
Generalnotes
Some systems carry out aself-diagnosis when theignition is switched on.Therefore,someindicator
and warning lampsmay lightuporflashtemporarily. This behaviorisnon-critical.
These indicator and warning lampsonlyindicateamalfunction if they lightuporflashafter starting
theengineorwhilstdriving.
Safety
Seatbelts
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M
Solutions
ü
N Afterstarting theengine, thered seat belt warning lamp lights up for 6seconds.
The seat belt warning lamp remindsthe driver and frontpassenger to fastentheir
seat belts.
X
Fastenyour seat belt (Y page 43).
ü
N Afterstarting theengine, thered seat belt warning lamp lights up. In addition,a
warning tone sounds for up to 6seconds.
The driver's seat belt is notfastened.
X
Fastenyour seat belt (Y page 43).
The warning tone ceases.
224
Warning andindicator lampsinthe instrument cluster
On-board computerand displays
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possiblecauses/consequences and M
Solutions
ü
N The red seat beltwarning lamp lights up after the engine starts, as soon as the
driver's or the front-passengerdoor is closed.
The driverorfront passenger has not fastened their seat belt.
X
Fasten yourseat belt(Y page43).
The warning lamp goes out.
There are objects on the front-passengerseat.
X
Remove the objects from the front-passengerseat and stow them in asecure
place.
The warning lamp goes out.
ü
N The red seat beltwarning lamp flashes and an intermittent audible warning
sounds.
The driverorfront passenger has not fastened their seat belt. The vehicleisbeing
drivenfaster than 15 mph (25 km/h)orhas briefly been drivenfaster than 15 mph
(25 km/h).
X
Fasten yourseat belt(Y page43).
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.
There are objects on the front-passengerseat. The vehicleisbeing drivenfaster
than 15 mph (25 km/h)orhas briefly been drivenfaster than 15 mph (25 km/h).
X
Remove the objects from the front-passengerseat and stow them in asecure
place.
The warning lamp goes out and the intermittent warning tone ceases.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
225
On-board computer and displays
Z
Safety systems
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possible causes/consequences and M
Solutions
é
N The yellow brake system warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
The brake system is malfunctioning.
G
WARNING
The braking characteristics may be affected.
There is arisk of an accident.
X
Drive on taking extracare.
X
Visit aqualified specialist workshop immediately.
$J
N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is lit
while the engine is running. Awarning tone also sounds.
G
WARNING
The brake boosting effect is malfunctioning and the braking characteristics may be
affected.
There is arisk of an accident.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road
and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 143).
X
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
$J
N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp is lit
while the engine is running. Awarning tone also sounds.
There is not enough brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir.
G
WARNING
The braking effect may be impaired.
There is arisk of an accident.
X
Pull over and stop the vehicle safely as soon as possible, paying attention to road
and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page 143).
X
Do not add brake fluid. Adding more will not correct the malfunction.
X
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
X
Observe the additional display messages in the multifunction display.
226
Warning and indicator lampsinthe instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possiblecauses/consequences and M
Solutions
!
N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ABS (Anti-lock Braking System) is deactivated due to amalfunction. BAS (Brake
Assist), Active Brake Assist, ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program), the HOLD func-
tion and hillstart assist are alsodeactivated, for example.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed
above. The wheels couldtherefore lock if you brake hard,for example.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking
distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational,ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Observe the additionaldisplay messages in the multifunction display.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visitaqualified specialist workshopimmediately.
If the ABS control unit is faulty, there is alsoapossibility that other systems,such
as the navigation system or the automatic transmission, willnot be available.
!
N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ABS is temporarily unavailable.BAS, Active Brake Assist, ESP
®
,EBD (Electronic
Brake-force Distribution), the HOLD function and hillstart assist are alsodeacti-
vated, for example.
Possible causes are:
R
Self-diagnosisisnot yet complete.
R
The on-board voltagemay be insufficient.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed
above. The front and rear wheels couldtherefore lock if you brake hard,for exam-
ple.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking
distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational,ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is arisk of an accident.
X
Carefully drive asuitable distance, making slight steering movements at aspeed
above 12 mph (20 km/h).
The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes
out.
If the warning lamp is still on:
X
Observe the additionaldisplay messages in the multifunction display.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visitaqualified specialist workshopimmediately.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
227
On-board computer and displays
Z
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possiblecauses/consequences and M
Solutions
!
N The yellow ABS warning lamp is lit while the engine is running. Awarning tone
alsosounds.
EBD is malfunctioning. ABS, BAS, Active Brake Assist, ESP
®
,the HOLD function
and hillstart assist, for example, are alsounavailable.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed
above. The front and rear wheels couldtherefore lock if you brake hard,for exam-
ple.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking
distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational,ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Observe the additionaldisplay messages in the multifunction display.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visitaqualified specialist workshopimmediately.
!
֌
$J
N $ (USA only), J (Canada only): the red brake system warning lamp and
the yellow ABS, ESP
®
and ESP
®
OFF warning lampsare lit while the engine is
running.
ABS and ESP
®
are malfunctioning. BAS, Active Brake Assist, EBD, the HOLD func-
tion and hillstart assist, for example, are alsounavailable.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed
above. The front and rear wheels couldtherefore lock if you brake hard,for exam-
ple.
The steerability and braking characteristics may be severely affected. The braking
distance in an emergency braking situation can increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational,ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Observe the additionaldisplay messages in the multifunction display.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visitaqualified specialist workshopimmediately.
228
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possiblecauses/consequences and M
Solutions
÷
N The yellow ESP
®
warning lamp flashes while the vehicleisinmotion.
ESP
®
or traction control has intervened because there is arisk of skidding or at
least one wheelhas started to spin.
Cruise control or Distance Pilot DISTRONIC is deactivated.
X
When pulling away, only depress the accelerator pedalasfar as necessary.
X
Ease off the accelerator pedalwhile the vehicleisinmotion.
X
Adapt yourdriving style to suitthe road and weather conditions.
X
Do not deactivate ESP
®
.
In rare cases (
Y page65) ,itmay be best to deactivate ESP
®
.
Observe the important safety notes on ESP
®
(Y page63).
å
N The yellow ESP
®
OFF warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
ESP
®
is deactivated. ESP
®
willnot stabilize the vehicleifitstarts to skid or if a
wheelstarts to spin.
G
WARNING
If ESP
®
is switched off, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
Further driving systems or driving safety systems are thus restricted.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Reactivate ESP
®
.
In rare cases (
Y page65) ,itmay be best to deactivate ESP
®
.
Observe the important safety notes on ESP
®
(Y page63).
X
Adapt yourdriving style to suitthe road and weather conditions.
If ESP
®
cannot be activated:
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Contact aqualified specialist workshopand have ESP
®
checked.
M
N Mercedes-AMG vehicles only:
The yellow SPORT handling mode warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
SPORT handling mode is activated.
G
WARNING
When SPORT handling mode is switched on, ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Only switch to SPORT handling mode in accordance with the conditions descri-
bed in the "Activating/deactivating ESP
®
"section (Y page65).
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
229
On-board computer and displays
Z
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possiblecauses/consequences and M
Solutions
֌
N The yellow ESP
®
and ESP
®
OFF warning lampsare lit while the engine is running.
ESP
®
,BAS, Active Brake Assist, the HOLD function and hillstart assist are not
available due to amalfunction.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed
above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational,ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Observe the additionaldisplay messages in the multifunction display.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visitaqualified specialist workshopimmediately.
֌
N The yellow ESP
®
and ESP
®
OFF warning lampsare lit while the engine is running.
ESP
®
,BAS, the HOLD function and hillstart assist are temporarily unavailable.
Adaptive Brake Assist may alsohave failed.
ATTENTION ASSIST is deactivated.
Self-diagnosisisnot yet complete.
G
WARNING
The brake system continues to function normally, but without the functions listed
above.
The braking distance in an emergency braking situation can thus increase.
If ESP
®
is not operational,ESP
®
is unable to stabilize the vehicle.
There is an increased risk of skidding and an accident.
X
Carefully drive asuitable distance, making slight steering movements at aspeed
above 12 mph (20 km/h).
The functions mentioned above are available again when the warning lamp goes
out.
If the warning lamp is still on:
X
Observe the additionaldisplay messages in the multifunction display.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Visitaqualified specialist workshopimmediately.
230
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possiblecauses/consequences and M
Solutions
!F
N F (USA only), ! (Canada only): the red indicator lamp for the electric
parking brake flashes or lights up and/or the yellow warning lamp for the electric
parking brake lights up.
X
Observe the additionaldisplay messages in the multifunction display.
6
N The red restraint system warning lamp is lit while the engine is running.
The restraint system is malfunctioning.
G
WARNING
The air bagsorEmergency Tensioning Devices may either be triggereduninten-
tionally or, in the event of an accident, may not be triggered.
There is an increased risk of injury.
X
Observe the additionaldisplay messages in the multifunction display.
X
Drive on carefully.
X
Contact aqualified specialist workshopand have the restraint system checked.
For further information about the restraint system, see (Y page39).
Engine
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possiblecauses/consequences and M
Solutions
;
N The yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
There may be amalfunction, for example:
R
in the engine management
R
in the fuel injection system
R
in the exhaust system
R
in the ignitionsystem
R
in the fuel system
The emission limitvalues may be exceededand the engine may be in emergency
mode.
X
Visitaqualified specialist workshopimmediately.
i
In some states, you must immediatelyvisit aqualified specialist workshopas
soon as the yellow Check Engine warning lamp lights up. This is due to the legal
requirements in effect in these states. If in doubt, check whethersuch legal
regulations apply in the state in which you are currently driving.
æ
N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp lights up while the engine is running.
The fuel levelhas dropped into the reserve range.
X
Refuel at the nearestgas station.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
231
On-board computer and displays
Z
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possiblecauses/consequences and M
Solutions
æ
N The yellow reserve fuel warning lamp flashes while the vehicleisinmotion.
In addition, the ; Check Engine warning lamp may light up.
The fuel filler cap is not closed correctly or the fuel system is leaking.
X
Check that the fuel filler cap is correctly closed.
X
If the fuel filler cap is not correctly closed: close the fuel filler cap.
X
If the fuel filler cap is closed: visitaqualified specialist workshop.
?
N The red coolant warning lamp lights up while the engine is running and the
coolant temperature gage is at the start of the scale.
The temperature sensor for the coolant temperature gauge is malfunctioning.
The coolant temperature is no longer being monitored.There is arisk of engine
damage if the coolant temperature is too high.
X
Pullover and stop the vehiclesafelyand switch off the engine, paying attention
to road and traffic conditions. Do not continue driving under any circumstances.
X
Secure the vehicleagainst rolling away(Y page143).
X
Consult aqualified specialist workshop.
232
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possiblecauses/consequences and M
Solutions
?
N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running.
The coolant levelistoo low.
If the coolant leveliscorrect, the airflow to the engine radiator may be blocked or
the electric engine radiator fan may be defective.
The coolant is too hot and the engine is no longer being cooledsufficiently.
X
Observe the additionaldisplay messages in the multifunction display.
X
Pullover and stop the vehiclesafelyand switch off the engine, paying attention
to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicleagainst rolling away(Y page143).
X
Leave the vehicleand keep asafe distance from the vehicleuntil the engine has
cooleddown.
X
Check the coolant leveland add coolant, observing the warning notes
(
Y page269).
X
If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.
X
Make sure that the air supply to the engine radiator is not blocked,e.g. by snow,
slush or ice.
X
Do not start the engine again until the coolant temperature is below 248
(120 †). Otherwise, the engine couldbedamaged.
X
Drive to the nearestqualified specialist workshop.
X
Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain
and stop-and-go traffic.
?
N The red coolant warning lamp comes on while the engine is running. Awarning
tone alsosounds.
The coolant temperature has exceeded248 ‡(120 †). The airflow to the engine
radiator may be blocked or the coolant levelmay be too low.
G
WARNING
The engine is not being cooledsufficiently and may be damaged.
Do not drive whenyourengine is overheated. This can cause some fluids which
may have leaked into the engine compartment to catch fire.
Steam from the overheated engine can also cause serious burns which can occur
just by opening the hood.
There is arisk of injury.
X
Observe the additionaldisplaymessages in the multifunction display.
X
Pullover and stop the vehicle safely and switch off the engine, paying attention
to road and traffic conditions.
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away (Y page143).
X
Leavethe vehicle and keep asafe distance from the vehicle until the engine has
cooleddown.
X
Check the coolant leveland add coolant, observing the warning notes
(
Y page269).
X
If you have to add coolant frequently, have the engine cooling system checked.
X
Make sure that the airsupply to the engine radiator is not blocked, e.g. by snow,
slush or ice.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
233
On-board computer and displays
Z
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possiblecauses/consequences and M
Solutions
X
At coolant temperatures below 248 ‡(120 †), drive to the nearestqualified
specialist workshop.
X
Avoid heavy loads on the engine as you do so, e.g. driving in mountainous terrain
and stop-and-go traffic.
Driving systems
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possiblecauses/consequences and M
Solutions
·
N The red distance warning lamp lights up while the vehicleisinmotion. Awarning
tone alsosounds.
You are approaching avehicleorastationary obstacleinyourline of travel at too
high aspeed.
X
Be prepared to brake immediately.
X
Pay carefulattention to the traffic situation. You may have to brake or take
evasive action.
Further information on the distance warning function of Active Brake Assist
(
Y page61).
234
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
On-board computer and displays
Tires
Warning/
indicator
lamp
N Signal type
Possible causes/consequencesand M
Solutions
h
N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction) is lit.
The tire pressure monitor hasdetectedalossofpressure in at leastone of the tires.
G
WARNING
Tire pressures thatare too lowposethe following hazards:
R
theymay burst, especially as the load and vehiclespeed increase
R
theymay wear excessivelyand/or unevenly, which maygreatlyimpairtire trac-
tion.
R
the drivingcharacteristics, as well as steeringand braking,may be greatly
impaired
There is ariskofanaccident.
X
Stop the vehiclewithoutmaking any sudden steeringorbraking maneuvers. Pay
attentiontothe trafficconditions as youdoso.
X
Secure the vehicleagainst rolling away (Y page 143).
X
Observe the additional displaymessagesinthe multifunctiondisplay.
X
Check the tiresand,ifnecessary,followthe instructions for aflattire
(
Y page 278).
X
Check the tire pressure (Y page 300).
X
If necessary,correct the tire pressure.
h
N The yellow tire pressure monitor warning lamp (pressure loss/malfunction)
flashesfor approximately one minute and thenremains lit.
The tire pressure monitor is faulty.
G
WARNING
The system is possiblyunabletorecognize or register lowtire pressure.
There is ariskofanaccident.
X
Observe the additional displaymessagesinthe multifunctiondisplay.
X
Visitaqualified specialistworkshop immediately.
Warning and indicator lamps in the instrument cluster
235
On-board computer and displays
Z
General notes
The multimedia system section in this Opera-
tor's Manualdescribes the basicprinciples for
operation. More information can be found in the
Digital Operator's Manual.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
municationequipment integrated in the vehi-
cle whiledriving, you willbedistracted from
traffic conditions. You could also lose control
of the vehicle.There is arisk of an accident.
Only operate the equipment when the traffic
situation permits. If you are not sure that this
is possible, park the vehicle paying attention
to traffic conditions and operate the equip-
ment when the vehicle is stationary.
You must observe the legalrequirements for the
country in which you are currently driving when
operating the multimedia system.
The multimedia system calculates the route to
the destination withouttaking the following into
account, for example:
R
traffic lights
R
stop and yield signs
R
parking or stopping restrictions
R
road narrowing
R
other road and traffic rulesand regulations
The multimedia system may give incorrect nav-
igation recommendations if the actual street/
traffic situation does not correspond with the
digital map's data.
For example:
R
adiverted route
R
the road layout or the direction of aone-way
street has been changed
For this reason, you must alwaysobserve road
and traffic rulesand regulations during your
journey. Roadand traffic rulesand regulations
alwayshave priority over multimedia system
driving recommendations.
Navigation announcements are intended to
direct you whiledriving withoutdiverting your
attention from the road and driving.
Please alwaysuse this feature instead of con-
sulting the map display for directions. Looking
at the icons or map display can distract you from
traffic conditions and driving, and increase the
risk of an accident.
This equipment complies with FCC radiation
exposure limits set forth for uncontrolled equip-
ment and meets the FCC radiofrequency (RF)
Exposure Guidelines in Supplement CtoOET65.
This equipment has very low levelsofRFenergy
that is deemedtocomply withoutmaximum
permissive exposure evaluation (MPE). How-
ever, it is recommended
to install it at adista
nce
of at least 8inches (approx. 20 cm) betweenthe
radiation source and aperson's body (not
including limbssuch as hands, wrists, feet and
legs).
G
WARNING
Modifications to electronic components, their
software as wellaswiring can impair their
function and/or the function of other net-
worked components. In particular, systems
relevant to safety could also be affected. As a
result, these may no longer function as inten-
ded and/or jeopardize the operating safety of
the vehicle.There is an increasedrisk of an
accident and injury.
Never tamper with the wiring as wellaselec-
tronic components or their software.You
shouldhave all work to electricaland elec-
tronic equipment carried out at aqualified
specialist workshop.
If you make any changes to the vehicle elec-
tronics, the general operating permit is ren-
dered invalid.
Function restrictions
For safety reasons, some functions are restric-
ted or unavailable whilethe vehicle is in motion.
You willnotice this, for example, because either
you willnot be abletoselect certain menu items
or amessagewillappear to this effect.
236
Function restrictions
Multimedia system
Operating system
Overview
General notes
!
Do not use the space in frontofthe display
for storage. Objects placed here could dam-
age the display or impair its function.Avoid
any direct contact with the display surface.
Pressure on the display surface may result in
impairmentstothe display, which could be
irreversible.
Wearing polarized sunglasses may impair your
ability to read the display.
The display has an automatic temperature-con-
trolled switch-off feature. The brightness is
automatically reduced if the temperature is too
high. The display may temporarily switch off
completely.
Cleaning instructions
!
Do not touch the display. The display has a
very sensitive high-gloss surface; there is a
risk of scratching.Ifyou have to clean the
screen,however, use amild cleaningagent
and asoft,lint-free cloth.
The display must be switched off and have
cooled down before you start cleaning. Do not
apply pressure to the display surface when
cleaningit, as this could cause irreversible dam-
age to the display.
Switching the multimedia system
on/off
X
Press the q control knob.
Adjusting the volume
X
Turn the q control knob.
The volume is adjusted:
R
for the currently selected media source
R
during traffic or navigation announcements
R
in hands-free mode during aphone call
Switching the sound on or off
X
Press the 8 button on the control panel.
If the audio output is switched off, the status
line will show the 8 symbol. If you switch
the media source or set the volume, the sound
is automatically switched on.
i
Navigation announcements will be heard
even if the sound is muted.
Functions
The multimedia system has the following func-
tions:
R
Radio mode
R
Media mode with media search
R
Sound systems
R
Navigation system
COMAND:navigation via the hard drive
Audio 20: navigation via SD card
R
Communication functions
R
SIRIUS Weather (COMAND)
R
Vehicle functionswith system settings
R
Favorites functions
Controller
The controller in the center console lets you:
R
select menu items on the display
R
enter characters
R
select adestination on the map
R
save entries
The controller can be:
R
turned 3
R
slid left or right 1
R
slid forwards or back 4
R
slid diagonally 2
R
pressed briefly or pressed and held 7
Back button
You can use the % button to exit amenu or to
call up the basic display of the currentoperating
mode.
X
To exit the menu: briefly press the %
button.
The multimedia system changes to the next
higher menu level in the currentoperating
mode.
X
To call up the basic display: press the %
button for longer than two seconds.
The multimedia system changes to the basic
display of the currentoperatingmode.
Operating system
237
Multimedia system
Z
Favorites
Calling up and exiting favorites
X
To call up: press the g buttononthe con-
troller.
X
Selectafavorite,e.g. Vehicle.
The favoritesare displayed.
X
To exit: press the g buttonagain.
Adding favorites
Adding apredefined favorite
:
Adds anew favorite
;
Renames aselected favorite
=
Moves aselected favorite
?
Deletes aselected favorite
X
Press the g button.
X
Slide 6 thecontroller.
The menubar is shown.
X
Select Reassign.
The categories are displayed.
X
Selectacategory.
The favoritesare displayed.
X
Selectafavorite.
X
Addafavorite at thedesired position.
If afavorite has already been added at this
position,itwill be overwritten.
Adding yourown favorite
X
Select VehicleQClimate Control.
X
Press and hold the g buttonuntil the
favoritesare displayed.
X
Addafavorite at thedesired position.
If afavorite has already been added at this
position,itwill be overwritten.
Navigation mode
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you operate information systems and com-
munication equipmentintegratedinthe vehi-
cle while driving,you will be distractedfrom
traffic conditions. You could also lose control
of thevehicle. Thereisariskofanaccident.
Only operate theequipmentwhen thetraffic
situation permits. If you are notsure that this
is possible,park thevehiclepayingattention
to traffic conditionsand operate theequip-
mentwhen thevehicleisstationary.
You must observethe legal requirements for the
country in whichyou are currentlydriving when
operating thenavigation system.
General notes
Amongother things, correct functioning of the
navigation system dependsonGPS reception.In
certainsituations, GPS reception may be
impaired,there may be interferenceorthere
may be no reception at all, e.g. in tunnels or
parking garages.
Audio 20 is equipped withGarmin
®
MAPPILOT
(see themanufacturer'soperating instructions).
The Garmin
®
MAPPILOT operating instructions
are storedonthe SD cardasaPDF file.The SD
cardbox contains aquickguide.
The followingdescriptionsapply to navigation
withCOMAND.Further information can be
foundinthe Digital Operator's Manual.
Selecting aroute type and route options
Multimedia system:
X
Select NaviQNavigation.
The map shows thevehicle's currentposition.
X
Slide 6 thecontroller.
X
Select OptionsQRouteSettings.
Notes for routetypes:
R
Eco Route
R
DynamicTrafficRoute
Traffic reportsonthe routefor therouteguid-
anceare taken intoaccount(notavailable in
all countries).
238
Operating system
Multimedia system
R
Dynamic TRF. Route After Request
You can decide whether or not current traffic
reports should be included in the route cal-
culation (not available in all countries).
R
Calculate Alternative Routes
Different routes are being calculated. In order
to do so, instead of Start
,select the menu
item Continue
.
X
To avoid/use route options: select Avoid
Options.
X
Select aroute option.
Notes for route options:
R
Use Toll Roads
The route calculation includes roads which
require you to pay ausage fee (toll).
R
Number of Occupants in the Vehicle:
(only available in the USA)
Prerequisite: your vehicle meets the access
conditions for carpool lanes.
Carpool lanes will be included if the carpool
lanes option is activated.
Entering an address
Multimediasystem:
X
Select NaviQNavigation.
The map shows the vehicle's current position.
X
Slide 6 the controller.
X
Select DestinationQAddress Entry.
Enter an address, e.g. as follows:
R
city or ZIP code, street, house number
R
state/province, city or ZIP code
R
city or ZIP code, center
R
street, city or ZIP code, intersection
X
Select City.
The city in which the vehicle is currently loca-
ted (current vehicle position) is at the top.
Below this, you will see locations for which
route guidance has already been carried out.
X
Enter the city.
The G symbol: the location is contained on
the digital map multiple times.
X
To switch to the list: slide the 5 control-
ler.
X
Select the location.
If available, the ZIP code is shown. If there are
different ZIP codes available for the location,
the corresponding digits are displayed with an
X
.
X
Enter the street and house number.
The address is in the menu.
Further options for destination entry:
R
search for akeyword
The keyword search finds destinations using
fragments of words.
R
select the last destination
R
select acontact
R
select aPOI
You can search for aPOI by location, name or
telephone number.
R
select destination on the map
R
enter intermediate destination
You can map the route to the destination
yourselfwith up to four intermediate destina-
tions.
R
select destinations from Mercedes-Benz
Apps
R
select geo-coordinates
Calculating the route
Prerequisite: the address has been entered and
is in the menu.
X
Select Start or Continue.
The route is calculated with the selected route
type and the selected route options.
If route guidance has already been activated,
aprompt will appearasking whether you wish
to end the current route guidance.
X
Select Cancel Active Route Guidance or
Set as Intermediate Destination
.
Cancel Active Route Guidance
cancels
the current route guidance and starts route
calculation to the new destination.
Set as Intermediate Destination
adds
the new destination in addition to the existing
destination and opens the intermediate des-
tinations list.
Connecting amobile phone
Prerequisites
For telephony via the Bluetooth
®
interface, you
require aBluetooth
®
-capable mobile phone. The
mobile phone must support Hands-Free Profile
1.0 or above.
Operating system
239
Multimedia system
Z
Multimedia system:
X
Select VehicleQSystem Set‐
tingsQActivate Bluetooth.
X
Activate Bluetooth
®
O.
Mobile phone:
X
Activate Bluetooth
®
and, if necessary, Blue-
tooth
®
visibility for other devices (see the
manufacturer's operating instructions).
The Bluetooth
®
device names for all of one man-
ufacturer's products might be identical. To
make it possible to clearly identify your mobile
phone, change the device name (see the man-
ufacturer's operating instructions).
If the mobile phone supports the PBAP (Phone
Book Access Profile) and MAP (Message
Access Profile) Bluetooth
®
profiles, the follow-
ing information will be transmitted after you
connect:
R
Phone book
R
Call lists
R
Text messages and e-mail
i
Further information on suitable mobile
phones can be found at: http://
www.mercedes-benz.com/connect
i
In the USA, you can get in touch with the
Mercedes-BenzCustomer AssistanceCenter
on 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372).
In Canada,you can get in touch with the Cus-
tomer Relations Center on 1-800-387-0100.
Searching for and authorizing (connect-
ing) amobile phone
Before using your mobile phone with the multi-
media system for the first time, you will need to
search for the phone and then authorize (con-
nect)it. Depending on the mobile phone, author-
ization either takes place by means of Secure
Simple Pairing or by enteringapasskey. The
multimedia system automatically makes the
procedure that is relevant for your mobile phone
available. The mobile phone is always connec-
ted automatically after authorization. Further
information on using amobile phone with the
multimedia system (see the Digital Operator's
Manual).
If the multimedia system does not detect your
mobile phone, this may be due to particular
security settings on your mobile phone (see the
manufacturer's operating instructions).
Only one mobile phone can be connected to the
multimedia system at any one time.
Searching for amobile phone
Multimedia system:
X
Select Tel/®QConnect
DeviceQSearch for PhonesQStart
Search.
The available mobile phones are displayed.
Symbols in the device list
Sym-
bol
Explanation
Ï
New mobile phone found, not yet
authorized.
Ñ
Mobile phone is authorized, but is
not connected
#
Mobile phone is authorized and
connected
Connecting amobile phone
Authorization using Secure Simple Pairing:
X
Select mobile phone.
Acode is displayed in the multimedia system
and on the mobile phone.
X
If codes match: select Yes on the multimedia
system.
X
Confirm code on the mobile phone. Depend-
ing on the mobile phone used, confirm the
connection to the multimedia system and for
the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth
®
profiles. The
prompt to confirm may take up to two
minutes to be displayed (see the manufactur-
er's operating instructions).
X
If the codes are different: select No on the
multimedia system.
The process is canceled.
Repeatauthorization.
Authorization by enteringapasskey (passcode):
X
Select the Bluetooth
®
name of the mobile
phone.
The input menu for the passkey is displayed.
X
Choose aone to sixteen-digit number combi-
nation as apasskey.
X
Enter the passkey on the multimedia system.
X
Press ¬ to confirm.
X
Enter and confirm the passkey on the mobile
phone. Depending on the mobile phone used,
confirm the connection to the multimedia sys-
240
Operating system
Multimedia system
tem and for the PBAP and MAP Bluetooth
®
profiles.The prompt to confirm maytake up
to two minutestobedisplayed (see the man-
ufacturer's operating instructions).
Switchingbetween mobilephones
If youhaveauthorizedmorethanone mobile
phone,you can switch between the individual
phones.
Multimedia system:
X
Select ConnectDevice.
X
Select amobilephone fromthe devicelist.
Media mode
General notes
If youwishtoplayexternalmedia sources,the
defaultdisplay must already be turned on. Fur-
therinformation on media mode(seethe Digital
Operator'sManual).
The following externalmedia sources can be
used:
R
Apple
®
devices (e.g. iPhone
®
)
R
USB devices (e.g. USB stick, MP3player)
(
Y page 241)
R
CD
R
DVD (COMAND)
R
SD cards
R
via devices connected by Bluetooth
®
i
InformationonsingleCD/DVDdrive or DVD
changer(seethe DigitalOperator'sManual).
Usingthe devicelist
Multimedia system:
X
Select MediaQDevices.
The availablemedia sources will be shown.
The # dotindicates the current setting.
X
Select the media source.
Playable files areplayed.
Inserting/removing an SD card
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
SD cards aresmall parts. They can be swal-
lowedand cause choking.This poses an
increased risk of injuryorevenfatal injury.
Keepthe SD cardout of the reach of children.
If aSDcardisswallowed,seekmedicalatten-
tionimmediately.
!
If youare no longerusing the SD card, you
shouldremove it and storeitoutside the vehi-
cle.Hightemperatures can damage the card.
InsertinganSDcard
The SD cardslotisonthe control panel.
X
Insert the SD cardinto the SD cardslotuntil
the SD cardengages.The sidewiththe con-
tacts must face downwards.
Removing an SD card
X
Press the SD card.
TheSDcardisejected.
X
Removethe SD card.
ConnectingUSB devices
There aretwo USB ports in the stowagespace
under the armrest.
X
Connect the USB devicetothe USB port.
X
Select the media source (Y page 241).
Operatingsystem
241
Multimedia system
Z
Loading guidelines
G
WARNING
If objects, luggage or loads are not secured or
not secured sufficiently, they could slip, tip
over or be flungaroundand therebyhit vehicle
occupants. Thereisarisk of injury, particu-
larly in theeventofsudden braking or asud-
den change in direction.
Always store objectssothattheycannot be
flungaround. Secure objects, luggage or
loads against slippingortipping before the
journey.
G
WARNING
Combustionenginesemit poisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. If thetailgate
is open when theengine is running, particu-
larly if thevehicle is moving,exhaust fumes
could enter thepassengercompartment.
Thereisarisk of poisoning.
Turn off theengine before opening thetail-
gate. Never drivewith thetailgate open.
G
WARNING
The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can
become veryhot.Ifyou comeintocontact
with these partsofthe vehicle,you could burn
yourself. Thereisarisk of injury.
Always be particularly careful aroundthe
exhaust tail pipe and thetail pipe trim. Allow
these componentstocooldown before touch-
ing them.
The handlingcharacteristicsofaladen vehicle
are dependentonthe distribution of theload
within thevehicle.
Observe thefollowing notes on loadingand
transporting aload:
R
Never exceed themaximum permissible
gross vehicle mass or thegross axle weight
rating for thevehicle (includingoccupants).
The values are specified on thevehicle iden-
tification plateonthe B-pillar of thedriver's
door.
R
The cargo compartmentisthe preferred place
to carry objects.
R
Position heavy loads as far forwards as pos-
sible and as low down in thecargo compart-
mentaspossible.
R
The load must not protrude above theupper
edge of theseat backrests.
R
Always place theload against therear or front
seat backrests.Makesure that theseat
backrests are securely locked intoplace.
R
Always place theload behindunoccupied
seatsifpossible.
R
Use thecargo tie-down rings and theparcel
netstotransport loads and luggage.
R
Use cargo tie-down rings and fastening mate-
rials appropriatefor theweight and sizeofthe
load.
R
The maximum load capacity of thestowage
well underthe c
argo compartmentflooris
55 lbs (25 kg).
R
Secure theload with sufficiently strongand
wear-resistant tie-downs.Pad sharpedges for
protection.
!
Do not position theload on one part of the
folding cargo compartmentflooronly. The
maximum load capacity of thefolding cargo
compartmentflooris220 lbs (100kg).Dis-
tribute the weight evenly to avoid damaging
thecargo compartmentfloor. Place asolid
board under theload if necessary. Please
notethatthe load on thecargo compartment
floorwill be increasedwhen theload is lashed
down.
Stowage areas
Stowage spaces
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you transport objectsinthe vehicle interior
and these are not adequately secured, they
could slip or be flungaroundand thereby
strikevehicle occupants. In addition, cup
holders, open stowage spaces and mobile
phonebracketsmay not always be able to
hold theobjectsplaced in them in theeventof
an accident. Thereisarisk of injury, particu-
larly in theeventofsharp braking or sudden
changes of direction.
242
Stowage areas
Stowage and features
R
Alwaysstow objects in such away thatthey
cannotbetossed aboutintheseorsimilar
situations.
R
Alwaysmakesurethatobjects do not pro-
trudeout of the stowagespaces,luggage
nets or stowagenets.
R
Ensure thatclosablestowagespaces are
shutbefore beginning your journey.
R
Alwaysstow and secureheavy,hard, poin-
ted,sharp-edged,fragile or large objects in
the cargo compartment.
Observethe loading guidelines(
Y page 242).
Stowage compartments in the front
Glove box
X
To open: pull handle : and open glove box
flap ;.
X
To close: foldglove boxflap ; upwards until
it engages.
There is apen holderatthe top of the glove box
flap.
Eyeglassescompartment
X
To open: press marking :.
Make sure thatthe eyeglassescompartment is
always closed whilethe vehicleisinmotion.
Stowage compartmentinthe frontcenter
console
X
To open: press the marking on cover :.
i
Depending on the vehicleequipment,there
maybeanashtrayinthe centerconsole
insteadofastoragecompartment.
Stowage compartmentinfrontofthe arm-
rest(vehicles with automatic transmis-
sion)
X
To open: press the marking on cover :.
i
Youcan remove the non-slip matand the
insert for cleaning. Whenremoving the insert
youwillhavetoovercomesomeslight resist-
ance.
Stowage areas
243
Stowageand features
Z
Stowage compartment under the armrest
X
To open: on vehicles with movable armrests,
make sure that the armrest is in the rearmost
position.
X
Press button : and fold the armrest up.
Depending on the vehicle equipment, the arm-
rest can be moved backwards or forwards in a
longitudinal direction.
Depending on the vehicle's equipment, the fol-
lowing may be in the stowage compartment: a
multimedia connector unit with an SD card slot
and 2USB ports, e.g. for use with an iPod
®
,
iPhone
®
or MP3 player; see the separate oper-
ating instructions.
Stowage compartment under the driver's
seat and front-passenger seat
G
WARNING
If you exceed the maximum load for the stow-
age compartment, the cover may not be able
to restrain the items. Items may be thrown out
of the stowage compartmentand hit vehicle
occupants. There is arisk of injury, particu-
larly in the event of sudden braking or asud-
den change in direction.
Never exceed the maximum permissible load
for the stowage compartment. Stow and
secure heavy objectsinthe cargo compart-
ment.
The maximum permissible load of the stowage
compartmentis2.6 lbs (1.2 kg).
X
To open: pull handle : up and fold cover ;
forwards.
Stowage space in the rear
Stowage compartment in the rear center
console
X
To open: pull down the top of stowage com-
partment : by the edge of the handle.
i
Depending on the vehicle's equipment,
there may be an open stowage space above
the stowage compartment.
Parcel nets
Stowage nets are located:
R
in the front-passenger footwell
R
on the back of the driver's and the front-
passenger seat
R
on the left and right-hand side in the cargo
compartment
Observe the loading guidelines (
Y page 242)
and the safety notes regarding stowage spaces
(
Y page 242).
244
Stowage areas
Stowage and features
Folding backrestonthe front-
passenger seat
G
WARNING
If thebackrest of thefront-passenger seat is
folded forward, rear seat passengerscan
come in contact withpartsofthe seat mech-
anism. particularly in theevent of an accident,
heavybraking or asuddenchangeofdirec-
tion.Thereisariskofinjury.
If apassenger travelsinthe vehiclewhile the
front-passenger seat is folded forward, they
must sit in therear seat behind thedriver.
The backrest of thefront-passenger seat can be
folded forwards to increasethe cargo compart-
mentcapacity.
Once you no longer need thebackrest on the
front-passenger side to be used as aload sur-
face, foldthe backrest backintoplace.
X
To fold forward: gentlypush thebackrest
back.
X
Pull release handle : and foldthe backrest
fully onto theseat cushion until it engages.
X
To fold back: gentlypush thebackrest down
and pull release handle :.
X
Fold theseat backrest backuntil it engages.
Through-loading facilityinthe rear
X
To open: folddown seat armrest :.
X
Pull thecenterhead restraint on therear
bench seat intothe uppermostposition
(
Y page 92).
X
Slide lockingmechanism = in thedirection
of thearrow.
X
Swing flap ; fully to theside.
Flap ; is held open by amagnet.
X
To close: swingflap ; in thecargo compart-
mentbackuntil it engages.
X
Fold armrest : up fully if necessary.
Observethe loadingguidelines (
Y page 242).
Cargo compartment enlargement
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If therear bench seat/rear seat and seat
backrest are notengagedtheycould foldfor-
wards,e.g.when braking suddenly or in the
event of an accident.
Stowage areas
245
Stowage and features
Z
R
The vehicle occupant would thereby be
pushed into the seat belt by the rear bench
seat/rear seat or by the seat backrest.The
seat belt can no longer offer the intended
level of protection and could even cause
injuries.
R
Objectsorloads in the trunk/cargo com-
partmentcannot be restrained by the seat
backrest.
There is an increased risk of injury.
Before every trip, make sure that the seat
backrestsand the rear bench seat/rear seat
are engaged.
!
Before folding the backrest in the rear com-
partmentforwards, make sure that the rear
compartment armrest and the cupholder are
folded in. They may otherwise be damaged.
Observe the loading guidelines (
Y page 242).
The left-hand and right-hand rear seat backrests
can be folded forwards separately to increase
the cargo compartment capacity.
Folding the rear seat backrest forwards
and back
Folding the rear seat backrests forward
X
Fully insert the backrest head restraints if
necessary (
Y page 93).
X
Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
forward if necessary.
X
Pull left-hand or right-hand release handle ;
of the seat backrest forwards.
Corresponding seat backrest : is released.
X
Fold backrest : forwards.
X
Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
back if necessary.
X
Insert the seat belt into seat-belt holder :.
Folding the rear seat backrest back
!
Make sure that the seat belt does not
become trapped when folding the rear seat
backrest back. Otherwise, it could be dam-
aged.
X
Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
forward if necessary.
X
Fold seat backrest : back until it engages.
Red lock status indicator ; is no longer visi-
ble.
X
Adjust the head restraints if necessary
(
Y page 93).
X
Move the driver's or front-passenger seat
back if necessary.
246
Stowage areas
Stowage and features
Adjusting theangle of therearseat backr-
ests(cargo position)
Vehicles withthe cargo compartmentpackage:
to enlargethe cargo compartment, you can
adjust therear seat backreststoa1 steeper
angle (cargo position).
X
Fold theseat backrest forward (Y page 246).
X
Movehandle : in thedirection of thearrow.
X
Push backseat backrest ; as far as han-
dle : until thebackrest engages.
The backrest is nowinthe cargo position.
Securing loads
Cargo tie-down rings
General notes
Observethe followingnotes on securingloads:
R
Observethe loadingguidelines (Y page 242).
R
Securethe load usingthe cargo tie-down
rings.
R
Distributethe load on thecargo tie-down
rings evenly.
R
Do notuse elastic straps or nets to secure a
load, as these are only intended as an anti-slip
protection for lightloads.
R
Do notroutetie-downsacross sharpedgesor
corners.
R
Pad sharpedgesfor protection.
Cargo compartment
:
Cargo tie-down rings
Baghook
G
WARNING
The bag hooks cannotrestrain heavyobjects
or items of luggage. Objectsoritems of lug-
gage could be flungaroundand thereby hit
vehicleoccupantswhen braking or abruptly
changing directions. Thereisariskofinjury.
Only hanglightobjectsonthe bag hooks.
Never hanghard,sharp-edgedorfragile
objectsonthe bag hooks.
!
The bag hookcan bear amaximum load of
6.6lbs (3kg) and should notbeused to secure
aload.
:
Bag hook
Parcel shelf
!
The maximum load whichmay be placed on
theparcel shelf is 3.3lbs (1.5 kg).
Stowageareas
247
Stowageand features
Z
X
To remove: detach straps : from the tail-
gate.
X
Foldthe parcel shelf downwards.
X
Pull the parcel shelf outtothe rear ;.
X
To install: place the parcel shelf on the guide
rails on the left and right.
X
Push the parcel shelf evenly forwardsusing
both hands untilitengages.
X
Foldthe parcel shelf up.
X
Attach straps : to the tailgate.
Cargonet
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
On its own, the cargo net cannotsecure or
restrainheavy objects, items of luggage and
heavy loads. Youcould be hitbyanunsecured
load during sudden changes in direction,
braking or in the event of an accident. There is
an increased riskofinjury or evenfatalinjury.
Alwaysstoreobjects so thatthey cannotbe
flung around.Secure objects, luggage or
loadsagainst slipping or tipping over, e.g.by
using tie downs,evenifyou are using the
cargo net.
It is important to useacargo net if youloadthe
vehiclewithsmall objects above the seatbackr-
ests.For safety reasons,alwaysuse acargo net
when transporting loads.
Damaged cargo nets can no longer fulfilltheir
protective functionand must be replaced.Visit a
qualified specialist workshop.
Attachingand tighteningthe cargonet
Youhavetwo options for hooking in the cargo
net:
R
with cargo compartment enlargement: the
brackets are behind the Bpillar and the cargo
tie-down ringstotension the net are on the
sidesofthe rear-compartment footwell.
R
withoutcargo compartment enlargement: the
brackets are behind the C-pillarand the cargo
tie-down ringstotension the net are in the
cargo compartment (
Y page 247).
The cargo net is locatedinthe stowagespace
under the cargo compartment floor
(
Y page 249).
X
OpenbothVelcro fastenersand remove the
cargo net.
X
Unroll and unfold the cargo net.
The joints on the upperand lowerguide rod
shouldengage audibly.
Cargo net (with cargo compartment enlargement)
Cargo net (withoutcargo compartment enlarge-
ment)
248
Stowage areas
Stowageand features
X
To attachand tighten: insert guiderod :
into bracket ;.
X
Attach belt hook ? to the cargo tie-down ring
and pull down on the loose end of the lashing
strapuntilthe cargo net is taut.
X
Foldupthe two Velcro fastenersonthe ends
of the lashing straps and press them firmly
onto the lashing straps above the belt clamps.
X
After driving ashort distance, check the ten-
sion of the cargo net and retightenitifnec-
essary.
X
To loosen and detach: pull belt clamp = up
to reduce the tension in the lashing strap.
X
Unhook belt hook ? from the cargo tie-down
ring.
X
Detach guiderod : from bracket ;.
X
To stow:pressthe red button on the upper
and lowerguide rod.
X
Foldthe cargo net and rollitup.
X
Close the two Velcro fastenersonthe cargo
net holder.
Stowage well underthe cargocom-
partmentfloor
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If youdrive when the cargo compartment floor
is open, objects could be flung around,thus
striking vehicleoccupants. There is ariskof
injury,particularly in the event of sudden
braking or asuddenchange in direction.
Alwaysclose the cargo compartment floor
before ajourney.
!
The maximumloadcapacity of the stowage
well under the cargo compartment floor is
55 lbs(25 kg).
There is astowageareafor TIREFIT, the vehicle
tool kit, afolding box, etc. underneath the cargo
compartment floor.
Opening/closing the cargocompart-
mentfloor
X
To open: open the tailgate.
X
Holding ribbing ;,press handle : down-
wards.
Handle : folds up.
X
Using handle :,swing the cargo compart-
ment floor upwards as far as side flaps =,
then overcomethe resistance of flaps =.
X
Place the cargo compartment floor on side
flaps =.
Roofcarrier
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Whenyou load the roof, the centerofgravity
of the vehiclerises and the driving character-
istics change. If youexceed the maximumroof
load,the driving characteristics, as well as
steering and braking,willbegreatlyimpaired.
There is ariskofanaccident.
Never exceed the maximumroofloadand
adjustyourdriving style.
Stowage areas
249
Stowageand features
Z
!
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you only
use roof carriers that have been tested and
approved for Mercedes-Benz vehicles. This
helps to prevent damage to the vehicle.
Position the load on the roof rack in such a
way that the vehicle will not sustain damage
even when it is in motion.
Ensure that, depending on the vehicle's
equipment, you can raise the panorama roof
with power tilt/sliding panel fully and open
the tailgate fully when the roof carrier is
installed.
You will find information on the maximum roof
load in the "Technical data" section
(
Y page 325).
An incorrectly secured roof carrier or roof load
may become detached from the vehicle. You
must therefore ensure that you observe the roof
carrier manufacturer's installation instructions.
Attaching the roof carrier
X
Secure the roof carrier to the roof rails. In
doing so, observe the manufacturer's instal-
lation instructions.
Features
Cup holder
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
The cup holder cannot hold acontainer secure
whilst traveling. If you use acup holder whilst
traveling, the container may be flung around
and liquid may be spilled. The vehicle occu-
pants may come into contact with the liquid
and if it is hot, they may be scalded. You may
be distracted from the traffic conditions and
you could lose control of the vehicle. There is
arisk of an accident and injury.
Only use the cup holder when the vehicle is
stationary. Only use the cup holder for con-
tainers of the right size. Alwaysclose the con-
tainer, particularlyifthe liquid is hot.
G
WARNING
If you transport objects in the vehicle interior
and these are not adequately secured, they
could slip or be flung around and thereby
strike vehicle occupants. In addition, cup
holders, open stowage spaces and mobile
phone brackets may not always be able to
hold the objects placed in them in the event of
an accident. There is arisk of injury, particu-
larly in the event of sharp braking or sudden
changes of direction.
R
Alwaysstow objects in such away that they
cannot be tossed aboutinthese or similar
situations.
R
Alwaysmake sure that objects do not pro-
trude out of the stowage spaces, luggage
nets or stowage nets.
R
Ensure that closable stowage spaces are
shut before beginning your journey.
R
Alwaysstow and secure heavy, hard, poin-
ted, sharp-edged, fragile or large objects in
the cargo compartment.
!
Only use the cup holders for containers of
the right size and which have lids. The drinks
could otherwise spill.
Observe the loading guidelines (
Y page 242).
The stowage compartmentsinthe doors provide
space for bottles:
R
front:capacity up to 34 fl. oz. (1.0 l)
R
rear: capacity up to 17 fl. oz. (0.5 l)
Cup holder in the front center console
:
Cup holder
250
Features
Stowage and features
The cup holder and the rubber mat underneath
can be removed for cleaning. Clean them with
clean, lukewarm water only.
X
To remove: carefully pull in upper sectionsof
cup holder : on the driver's and front-
passenger sides until they release.
X
Lift the cup holder upwards ; until it can be
removed.
X
To install: insert cup holder into lateral
curved sections ; in the stowage compart-
ment.Insert the cup holder so that the wedge
of the upper section of cup holder : faces
forwards.
X
Press the cup holder downwards until it
engages on the right and left-hand sides.
Cup holder in the rear seat armrest
!
Do not sit on or support your body weight on
the rear seat armrest when it is folded down,
as you could otherwise damage it.
!
Close the cup holder before folding the rear
seat armrest up. Otherwise, the cup holder
could be damaged.
X
Fold down the rear seat armrest.
X
To open: press the front of cup holder :
or ;.
Cup holder : or ; extends automatically.
X
To close: slide cup holder : or ; back until
it engages.
Sun visors
Overview
G
WARNING
If the mirror cover of the vanity mirror is folded
up when the vehicle is in motion,you could be
blinded by incident light. There is arisk of an
accident.
Always keep the mirror cover folded down
while driving.
:
Mirror light
;
Bracket
=
Retaining clip, e.g. for acar park ticket
?
Vanity mirror
A
Mirror cover
Features
251
Stowage and features
Z
Vanity mirrorinthe sun visor
Mirror light : onlyfunctions if the sunvisor is
clipped into bracket ; and mirror cover A has
been foldedup.
Glare from the side
X
Folddownthe sunvisor.
X
Pull the sunvisor outofretainer ;.
X
Swing the sunvisor to the side.
Ashtray
Front ashtray
!
The stowagespace under the ashtrayisnot
heatresistant. Before placing litcigarettes in
the ashtray, make sure thatthe ashtrayis
properly engaged.Otherwise, the stowage
space could be damaged.
X
Vehicles with astowage compartment
cover: press the lowersection of cover :.
The stowagecompartment opens.
X
To remove the insert: lift insert = up ; and
out.
X
To re-install the insert: press insert = into
the holderuntilitengages.
i
If youremove the ashtrayinsert, youcan use
the resulting compartment for stowage.
Rear compartmentashtray
X
To open: pull cover = outbyits top edge.
X
To remove: pull insert ; by recess : in the
direction of arrow ? untilitaudibly releases.
X
Liftinsert ; up and out.
X
To installthe insert: installinsert ; from
above into the holderand press down untilit
engages.
Cigarette lighter
G
WARNING
Youcan burn yourselfifyou touch the hot
heating element or the socketofthe cigarette
lighter.
In addition, flammablematerialscan ignite if:
R
the hot cigarette lighterfalls
R
achild holds the hot cigarette lighterto
objects, for example
There is ariskoffireand injury.
Alwaysholdthe cigarette lighterbythe knob.
Alwaysmakesurethatthe cigarette lighteris
outofreach of children. Never leave children
unsupervised in the vehicle.
Your attentionmustalwaysbefocused on the
traffic conditions. Onlyuse the cigarette lighter
when roadand traffic conditions permit.
252
Features
Stowageand features
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 124).
X
Vehicles with astowage compartment
cover: press the lower section of cover :.
The stowage compartment opens.
X
Press in cigarettelighter ;.
Cigarette lighter ; will pop out automatically
when the heating element is red-hot.
12 Vsockets
General notes
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 124).
The socketscan be used for accessories with a
maximum draw of 180 W(15 A). Accessories
include such items as chargers for mobile
phones.
If you use the socketsfor long periods when the
engine is switched off, the battery may dis-
charge.
An emergencycut-out ensures that the on-
board voltage does not drop too low. If the on-
board voltage is too low, the power to the sock-
ets is automatically cut. This ensures that there
is sufficient power to start the engine.
Socket in the front center console
X
Vehicles with astowage compartment
cover: press the lower section of the cover.
The stowage compartment opens.
X
Lift up the cover of the socket.
Socket in the rear compartment center
console
X
Pull the cover out by the top of the handle
edge.
X
Lift up the cover of the socket.
Socket in the cargo compartment
X
Lift up the cover of socket :.
mbrace
General notes
You must have alicense agreement to activate
the mbrace service. Make sure that your system
is activated and operational. To log in, press the
ï MB Info call button.Ifany of the steps
mentioned are not carried out, the system may
not be activated.
If you have questions about the activation,con-
tact one of the following telephone hotlines:
R
USA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372)or1-866-990-9007
R
Canada: Customer Serviceat
1-888-923-8367
Shortly after successfully registeringwith the
service, auser ID and password will be sent to
you by post.
USA only: you can use this password to log onto
the mbrace area under "Owners Online" at
http://www.mbusa.com.
The system is available if:
R
it has been activated and is operational
R
the corresponding mobile phone network is
available for transmittingdata to the Cus-
tomer Center
Features
253
Stowage and features
Z
R
aservicesubscription is available
R
thestarter battery is sufficiently charged
i Determiningthe locationofthe vehicle on a
map is only possible if:
R
GPS reception is available.
R
thevehicle position can be forwarded to
theCustomerAssistanceCenter.
Thembrace system
To adjustthe volumeduringacall, proceed as
follows:
X
Pressthe W or X button on themulti-
function steering wheel.
or
X
Use themultimedia system'svolumecontrol.
The system offers various services, e.g.:
R
Automatic and manual emergency call
R
RoadsideAssistancecall
R
MB Info call
USAonly: you can findinformationand a
description of all availablefeatures under"Own-
ers Online"athttp://www.mbusa.com.
System self-test
Afteryou have switched on theignition,the sys-
temcarries out aself-diagnosis.
Amalfunctioninthe system has been detected
if oneofthe followingoccurs:
R
The indicator lamp in theSOS button does not
comeonduringthe system self-test.
R
The indicator lamp in the F Roadside
Assistancebutton does notlight up during
self-diagnosis of thesystem.
R
The indicator lamp in the ï MB Info call
button does notlight up duringself-diagnosis
of thesystem.
R
The indicator lamp in oneormoreofthe fol-
lowingbuttonscontinues to light up red after
thesystem self-diagnosis:
-
SOSbutton
-
F RoadsideAssistancecall button
-
ï MB Info call button
R
Afterthe system self-diagnosis,the Inoper‐
ative or Service Not Activated message
appearsinthe multifunction display.
If amalfunctionisindicated as outlinedabove,
thesystem may notoperate as expected. In the
eventofanemergency, help will have to be
summoned by other means.
Havethe system checked at thenearest
Mercedes-BenzServiceCenter or contactthe
followingservicehotlines:
R
USA: Mercedes-BenzCustomerAssistance
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372)or1-866-990-9007
R
Canada: Customer Service at
1-888-923-8367
Emergency call
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
It can be dangerous to remain in the vehicle,
even if you have pressed the SOS button in an
emergencyif:
R
you see smoke inside or outside of the vehi-
cle, e.g. if there is afire after an accident
R
the vehicle is on adangerous section of
road
R
the vehicle is not visible or cannot easily be
seen by other road users, particularly when
dark or in poor visibility conditions
There is arisk of an accident and injury.
Leave the vehicle immediately in this or simi-
lar situations as soon as it is safe to do so.
Move to asafe location along with other vehi-
cle occupants. In such situations, secure the
vehicle in accordancewith national regula-
tions, e. g. with awarning triangle.
You must have alicense agreement to activate
the mbrace service. Make sure that your system
is activated and operational. To register, press
the ï MB Info call button.Ifany of the steps
mentioned are not carried out, the system may
not be activated.
If you have questions about the activation,con-
tact one of the following telephone hotlines:
R
USA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
R
Canada: Customer Service at
1-888-923-8367
254
Features
Stowage and features
General notes
An emergency call is dialed automaticallyifan
air bag or Emergency Tensioning Device is trig-
gered.
i
You cannot end an automaticallytriggered
emergency call yourself.
An emergency call can also be initiated man-
ually.
As soon as the emergency call has been initi-
ated, the indicator lamp in the SOS button
flashes. The Connecting Call
message
appears in the multifunction display.
The audio outputismuted.
Once the connection has been made, the Call
Connected messageappears in the multifunc-
tion display.
All important information on the emergency is
transmitted, for example:
R
current locationofthe vehicle (as determined
by the GPS system)
R
vehicle identification number
R
information on the severity of the accident
Shortly after the emergency call has been initi-
ated, avoice connection is automaticallyestab-
lished betweenthe Customer Assistance Center
and the vehicle occupants.
R
If the vehicle occupants respond, the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
attempts to get more information on the
emergency.
R
If there is no response from the vehicle occu-
pants, an ambulance is immediately sent to
the vehicle.
If no voice connection can be established to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
the system has been unabletoinitiate an emer-
gency call.
This can occur, for example, if the relevant
mobilephone network is not available. The indi-
cator lamp in the SOS button flashes continu-
ously.
The Call Failed
messageappears in the mul-
tifunction display and must be confirmed.
In this case, summon assistance by other
means.
Making an emergency call
X
To initiate an emergency call manually:
press cover : brieflytoopen.
X
Press SOS button ; briefly.
The indicator lamp in SOS button ; flashes
until the emergency call is concluded.
X
Waitfor avoice connection to the Mercedes-
Benz Customer Assistance Center.
X
After the emergency call,close cover :.
i
If the mobilephone network is unavailable,
mbrace willnot be abletomake the emer-
gency call.Ifyou leave the vehicle immedi-
ately after pressing the SOS button, you will
not know whether mbrace placed the emer-
gency call.Inthis case, alwayssummon assis-
tance by other means.
Roadside Assistance button
X
Press breakdown assistance call button :.
This initiates acall to the Mercedes-Benz Cus-
tomer Assistance Center.
The indicator lamp in breakdown assistance
button : flashes whilethe call is active. The
Connecting Call
messageappears in the
multifunction display.The audio outputis
muted.
Features
255
Stowage and features
Z
If aconnection can be made, the Call Con‐
nected messageappears in the multifunction
display.
If amobilephone network and GPS reception
are available, the system transfers data to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
for example:
R
current location of the vehicle
R
vehicle identification number
i
The display of the multimedia system indi-
cates that acall is active. During the call, you
can change to the navigation menu by press-
ing the NAVI button on the multimedia sys-
tem, for example.
Voice outputisnot available.
Avoice connection is established between the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
and the vehicle occupants.
From the remote malfunction diagnosis, the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
can ascertain the nature of the problem
(
Y page 259).
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Cen-
ter either sends aqualifiedMercedes-Benz tech-
nician or makes arrangements for yourvehicle
to be transported to the nearest Mercedes-Benz
Service Center.
You may be charged for services such as repair
work and/or towing.
Further detailsare available in yourmbrace
manual.
i The system has not been abletoinitiate a
breakdownassistance call, if:
R
the indicator lamp for breakdownassis-
tance call button : is flashing continu-
ously.
R
no voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center was estab-
lished.
This can occur if the relevant mobilephone
network is not available, for example.
The Call Failed
message appears in the
multifunction display.
X
To end acall: press the ~ button on the
multifunction steering wheel.
or
X
Press the corresponding multimedia system
button for ending aphone call.
MB Info call button
X
Press MB Info call button :.
This initiates acall to the Mercedes-Benz Cus-
tomer Assistance Center.
The indicator lamp in MB Info call button :
flasheswhilethe connection is being made.
The Connecting call
messageappears in
the multifunction display. The audio system is
muted.
If aconnection can be made, the Call con‐
nected messageappears in the multifunction
display.
If amobilephone network and GPS reception
are available, the system transfers data to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center,
for example:
R
current location of the vehicle
R
vehicle identification number
i
The display of the multimedia system indi-
cates that acall is active. During the call, you
can change to the navigation menu by press-
ing the NAVI button on the multimedia sys-
tem, for example.
Voice outputisnot available.
Avoice connection is established betweenthe
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
and the vehicle occupants.
You receive information aboutoperating your
vehicle,aboutthe nearest Mercedes-Benz Ser-
vice Center and aboutother products and serv-
ices from Mercedes-Benz.
USA only: you can find further information on
the mbrace system under "Owners Online" at
http://www.mbusa.com.
256
Features
Stowageand features
i The system has not been able to initiate an
MB Info call, if:
R
the indicator lamp in MB Info call button :
is flashing continuously.
R
no voice connection to the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center was estab-
lished.
This can occur if the relevant mobile phone
network is not available, for example.
The Call failed
message appears in the
multifunction display.
X
To end acall: press the ~ button on the
multifunction steeringwheel.
or
X
Press the corresponding multimedia system
button for ending aphone call.
Call priority
When service calls are active, e.g. Roadside
Assistance or MB Info calls, an emergencycall
can still be initiated. In this case, an emergency
call will take priority and override all other active
calls.
The indicator lamp of the respective button
flashes until the call is ended.
An emergencycall can only be terminated by the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center.
All other calls can be ended by pressing:
R
the ~ button on the multifunction steering
wheel
R
the corresponding multimedia system button
for ending aphone call
i
When acall is initiated, the audio system is
muted. The mobile phone is no longer con-
nected to the multimedia system. However, if
you want to use your mobile phone, do so only
when the vehicle is stationary and in asafe
location.
Downloading destinations in COMAND
Downloading destinations
Downloading destinations gives you access to a
database with over 15 million points of interest
(POIs). These can be downloaded on the navi-
gation system in your vehicle. If you know the
destination, the address can be downloaded.
Alternatively, you can obtain the location of
Points of Interest (POIs)/important destinations
in the vicinity.
Furthermore, you can download routes with up
to 20 way points.
You are prompted to confirm route guidance to
the address entered.
The system calculates the route and subse-
quently startsthe route guidance with the
address entered.
i
If you select No,the address can be saved in
the address book.
i
The Destination Download function is avail-
able if the relevant mobile phone network is
available and data transfer is possible.
i
The Destination Download function can only
be used if the vehicle is equipped with anav-
igation system.
Route Assistance
This service is part of the mbrace PLUS Package
and cannot be purchased separately.
i
You can also use the Route Assistance func-
tion if your vehicle is not equipped with anav-
igation system.
Within the framework of this service, you receive
aprofessional and reliable form of navigation
support without having to leave your vehicle.
The customer service representative finds a
suitable route depending on your vehicle's cur-
rent position and the desired destination. You
will then be guided live through the current route
section.
Search &Send
General notes
i
To use "Search &Send", your vehicle must
be equipped with mbrace and anavigation
system. Additionally, an mbrace service sub-
scription must be completed.
"Search &Send" is adestination entryservice. A
destination address found on Google Maps™
can be transferred via mbrace directly to your
vehicle's navigation system.
Features
257
Stowage and features
Z
Specifying and sending the destination
address
X
Go to the website http://
www.maps.google.com and enter adestina-
tion address into the entryfield.
X
To send the destination address to the e-
mail address of your mbrace account:
click on the correspondingbutton on the web-
site.
i
Example:
If you select 'Send to vehicle' and then
'Mercedes-Benz', the destination address will
be sent to your vehicle.
X
When the "Send" dialog window appears:
Enter the e-mail address you specified when
settingupyour mbrace account into the cor-
responding field.
X
Click "Send".
i
Information on specific commands such as
"Address entry" or "Send" can be found on the
website.
Calling up destination addresses
X
Switch on the ignition.
The destination address is loaded into the
vehicle's navigation system.
Adisplay message appears, asking whether
navigation should be started.
X
Select Yes by turning cVd or sliding XVY the
controller and confirm with W.
The system calculates the route and subse-
quently starts the route guidance with the
address entered.
i
If you select No,the address can be saved in
the address book.
i
If you have sent more than one destination
address, each individual destination must be
confirmed separately.
i
Destination addresses are loaded in the
same order as the order in which they were
sent.
If you own multiple Mercedes-Benzvehicles
with mbrace and activated mbrace accounts:
If multiple vehicles are registered under the
same e-mail address, the destination will be
sent to all the vehicles.
Vehicle remote opening
You can use the vehicle remote opening if you
have unintentionally locked your vehicle and a
replacement SmartKey is not available.
The vehicle can be opened by the Mercedes-
Benz Customer AssistanceCenter.
The vehicle can be immediately opened
remotely within four days of the ignition being
turned off. After this time, the remote unlocking
may be delayed by 15 to 60 minutes. After
30 days, the vehicle can no longer be opened
remotely.
X
Contact the following service hotlines:
R
USA: Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assistance
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
R
Canada: Customer Service at
1-888-923-8367
You will be asked for your password.
X
Return to your vehicle at the time agreed upon
with the Mercedes-BenzCustomer Assis-
tance Center.
USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can be
opened via:
R
the Internet, under the "Owners Online" sec-
tion
R
telephone applications (e.g. for iPhone
®
,
Android™)
To do this, you will need your identification num-
ber and password.
i
Vehicle remote opening is only possible if
the correspondingmobile phone network is
accessible.
Vehicle remote closing
The valet locking feature can be used when you
have forgotten to lock the vehicle and you are no
longer nearby.
The vehicle can then be locked by the Mercedes-
Benz Customer AssistanceCenter.
The vehicle can be immediately remotely locked
within four days of the ignition being turned off.
After this time, remote closing may be delayed
by 15 to 60 minutes. After 30 days the vehicle
can no longer be valet locked remotely.
X
Contact the following service hotlines:
258
Features
Stowage and features
R
USA: Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Centerat1-800-FOR-MERCedes
(1-800-367-6372) or 1-866-990-9007
R
Canada: Customer Service at
1-888-923-8367
You will be asked for your password.
The nexttime you are inside the vehicle and you
switchonthe ignition, the Doors Locked
Remotelyol message appears in the multifunc-
tion display.
USA only: alternatively, the vehicle can be
locked via:
R
the Internet,under the "Owners Online" sec-
tion
R
telephoneapplications(e.g. for iPhone
®
,
Android™)
To do this, you will need your identification num-
ber and password.
i
The vehicle remoteclosingfeature is avail-
able when the relevant mobile phone network
is available and data connection is possible.
Stolen vehicle recovery service
If your vehicle has been stolen:
X
Notifythe police.
The police will issue anumberedincident
report.
X
This number will be forwarded to the
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
together with your PIN.
The Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Centerthen tries to locate the system. The
Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance Center
contactsyou and the local law enforcement
agency if the vehicle is located.
However,only the law enforcement agency is
informed of the location of the vehicle.
i
If the anti-theftalarm system is activated for
longer than 30 seconds, the Mercedes-Benz
Customer Assistance Center is automatically
notified.
Vehicle remote malfunction diagnosis
With the Vehicle Health Check, the Customer
Assistance Center can provide improved sup-
port for problems with your vehicle. Duringan
existing call, vehicle data is transferred to the
Customer Assistance Center.The customer ser-
vice representative can use the received data to
decide what kindofassistance is required. You
are then,for example, guided to the nearest
Mercedes-Benz Service Centerorarecovery
vehicle is called.
If vehicle data needs to be transferred during an
MB Infocall or aRoadside Assistance call, this is
initiated by the Customer Assistance Center.
You will see the Roadside Assistance Con‐
nected message in the multimedia system dis-
play. If the vehicle remotemalfunction diagnosis
can be started, the Requestfor vehicle
diagnosis received. Start vehicle
diagnosis? message appears in the display.
X
Confirm the message with Yes.
X
When the Vehiclediagnosis: Please
start ignition message appears, turn the
SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition lock
(
Y page 124).
X
When the Please follow the instruc‐
tions received by phone and move
your vehicletoasafe position mes-
sage appears, follow the customer service
representative's instructions.
The message in the display disappears.
If you select Cancel
the remotemalfunction
diagnosis is canceled completely.
The vehicle operatingstatecheckbegins. You
will see the Vehicle
diagnosis activated
message.
When the diagnosis is completed, the Trans‐
fer vehiclediagnostics data (Voice
connection may be interrupted during
data transfer) message appears. The vehicle
data can now be sent to the Customer Assis-
tancecenter.
X
Press OK to confirm the message.
The voice connection with the Customer
Assistance Centeristerminated.
You will see the Vehiclediagnosis:
Transferring data... message.
The vehicle data is sent to the Customer
Assistance Center.
Depending on what the customer servicerep-
resentative agreed with you, the voice connec-
tion is re-established after the transfer is com-
plete. If necessary, you will be contacted at a
later time by another means, e.g. by e-mail or
phone.
Another function of the Vehicle Health Check is
the transfer of servicedata to the Customer
Assistance Center. If aserviceisdue, the mul-
timedia system display shows amessage to this
Features
259
Stowage and features
Z
effecttogether with information about any spe-
cial offers at your workshop.
USA only: this information can also be called up
under "Owners Online" at http://
www.mbusa.com.
Information on Roadside Assistance
(
Y page 26).
Downloading routes
Downloadingroutes allows you to transfer and
save predefined routes in the navigation sys-
tem. To do this, an SD memory card must be
inserted into the multimedia system. If no SD
memory card is inserted, you must insert the
card into the card slot on the multimedia system
before saving the route.
Aroute can be prepared and sent either by a
customer servicerepresentativeorvia the
mbrace portal on the Internet.
Each route can include up to 20 way points.
Oncearoute has been received by the naviga-
tion system, you will see the <route name>
has been saved to memory card. Do you
want to start route guidance? message in
the multimedia system display. The route is
saved to the SD memory card.
X
To startrouteguidance: select Yes.
An overview of the route is shown in the dis-
play.
i
If you select No,the saved route can be
called up later via the navigation menu.
X
Select Start.
Route guidance starts.
i
Downloaded and saved routes can be called
up again in the multimedia system.
You can find information about this in the
separate operatinginstructions.
Speed alert
You can define the upper speed limit, which
must not be exceeded by the vehicle.
If this selected speed is exceeded by the vehicle,
amessage will be sent to the Customer Assis-
tanceCenter.The Customer Assistance Center
then forwards this information to you.
You can select the way in which you receive this
information beforehand. Possible options
include textmessage, e-mail or an automated
call.
The data you receive contains the following
information:
R
the location where the speed limit was excee-
ded
R
the time at which the speed limit was excee-
ded
R
the selected speed limit which was exceeded
Geo fencing
Geo fencing allows you to select areas which the
vehicle should not enter or leave. You will be
informed if the vehicle crosses the boundaries
of the selected areas. You can select the way in
which you receive this information beforehand.
Possible optionsinclude textmessage, e-mail or
an automated call.
The area can be determined as either acircle or
apolygon with amaximum of ten corners. You
can specify up to ten areas simultaneously. Dif-
ferentsettings are possible for each area.
USA only: these settings can be called up under
"Owners Online" at http://www.mbusa.com.
Alternatively, you can trigger an MB Infocall and
informthe customer servicerepresentativethat
you wish to activategeo fencing.
Currently inactive areas can be activated by text
message.
Triggering the vehicle alarm
With this function,you can trigger the vehicle's
panic alarm via textmessage. An alarm sounds
and the exterior lighting flashes. Depending on
the setting, the panic alarm lasts five or ten sec-
onds. Afterwards, the alarm switches off.
Garage door opener
General notes
The HomeLink
®
garage door opener integrated
in the rear-view mirror allows you to operate up
to three differentdoor and gate systems.
Use the integrated garage door opener only on
garage doors that:
R
have safety stop and reverse features and
R
meet currentU.S.federal safety standards
Onceprogramed, the integrated garage door
opener in the rear-view mirror will assume the
function of the garage door system's remote
260
Features
Stowage and features
control.Please also readthe operating instruc-
tions for the garagedoorsystem.
Whenprogramming agaragedooropener, park
the vehicle outsidethe garage. Do not leave the
engine running while programming.
Certaingaragedoordrives are incompatible
with the integratedgaragedooropener. If you
have difficulty programing the integratedgarage
dooropener, contact aMercedes-Benz Service
Center.
Alternatively,you can callthe following tele-
phone assistance services:
R
USA: Mercedes-Benz CustomerAssistance
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes
R
Canada: CustomerService at
1-800-387-0100
R
HomeLink
®
hotline 1-800-355-3515 (freeof
charge)
More information on HomeLink
®
and/or com-
patibleproducts is also available online at
http://www.homelink.com.
Notes on the declaration of conformity
(
Y page 26).
USA: FCC ID: CB2HMIHL4
Canada: IC: 279B-HMIHL4
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Whenyou operate or programthe garagedoor
with the integratedgaragedooropener, per-
sons in the rangeofmovement of the garage
doorcan become trapped or struck by the
garagedoor. There is ariskofinjury.
Whenusing the integratedgaragedoor
opener, always make sure that nobody is
within the rangeofmovement of the garage
door.
G
WARNING
Combustionengines emitpoisonous exhaust
gases such as carbon monoxide. Inhaling
these exhaustgases leadstopoisoning. There
is ariskoffatalinjury. Therefore never leave
the engine running in enclosed spaces with-
outsufficient ventilation.
Programming
Programming the buttons
Payattention to the "Important safety notes"
(
Y page 261).
Garagedoorremote control A is not included
with the integratedgaragedooropener.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 124).
X
Select one of buttons ; to ? to control the
garagedoordrive.
X
To start program mode: press and holdone
of buttons ; to ? on the integratedgarage
dooropener.
The garagedooropener is now in program
mode. After ashort time,indicator lamp :
lights up yellow.
Indicator lamp : lights up yellow as soonas
button ;, = or ? is storedfor the firsttime.
If the selected button hasalready beenpro-
gramed,indicator lamp : will only light up
yellow afterten seconds have elapsed.
X
Release button ;, = or ?.Indicator
lamp : flashesyellow.
X
To program the remote control: point
garagedoorremote control A towards but-
tons ; to ? on the rear-viewmirror at adis-
tance of 2to8in (5 to 20 cm).
X
Press and holdbutton B on remote control
A untilindicator lamp : lights up green.
Whenindicator lamp : lights up green: pro-
gramming is finished.
Whenindicator lamp : flashesgreen: pro-
gramming wassuccessful.The next step is to
synchronize the rolling code (
Y page 262).
X
Release button B on remote control A for
the garagedoordrive system.
If indicator lamp : lights up red:repeatthe
programi
ng procedure for the corresponding
button on the rear-viewmirror. Whendoing
Features
261
Stowage and features
Z
so, vary the distance between remote control
A and the rear-view mirror.
The required distance between remote con-
trol A and the integrated garage door opener
depends on the garage door drive system.
Several attempts might be necessary. You
should test every position for at least
25 seconds before trying another position.
Synchronizing the rolling code
Pay attention to the "Important safety notes"
(
Y page 261).
If the garage door system uses arolling code,
you will also have to synchronize the garage
door system with the integrated garage door
opener in the rear-view mirror. To do this you will
need to use the programming button on the door
drive control panel. The programming button
may be located in different places depending on
the manufacturer. It is usually located on the
door drive unit on the garage ceiling.
Familiarize yourselfwith the garage door drive
operating instructions, e.g. under "Program-
ming additional remote controls", before carry-
ing out the following steps.
Your vehicle must be within reach of the garage
door or gate opener drive. Make sure that nei-
ther your vehicle nor any persons/objectsare
present within the sweep of the door or gate.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 124).
X
Get out of the vehicle.
X
Press the programming button on the door
drive unit.
Usually, you now have 30 seconds to initiate
the next step.
X
Get into the vehicle.
X
Press previously programed button ;, =
or ? on the integrated garage door opener
repeatedly and in quick succession until the
door closes.
The rolling code synchronization is then com-
plete.
Notes on programming the remote con-
trol
Canadian radio frequency laws require a"break"
(or interruption) of the transmission signals
after broadcasting for afew seconds. Therefore,
these signals may not last long enough for the
integrated garage door opener. The signal is not
detected during programming. Comparable with
Canadian law, some U.S. garage door openers
also feature a"break".
Proceed as follows:
R
if you live in Canada
R
if you have difficulties programming the
garage door opener (regardless of where you
live) as you follow the programming steps.
X
Press and hold one of buttons ; to ? on the
integrated garage door opener.
After ashort time, indicator lamp : lights up
yellow.
X
Release the button.
Indicator lamp : flashes yellow.
X
Press button B of garage door remote con-
trol A for two seconds, then release it for two
seconds.
X
Press button B againfor two seconds.
X
Repeatthis sequence on button B of remote
control A until indicator lamp : lights up
green.
When indicator lamp : lights up green: pro-
gramming is finished.
When indicator lamp : flashes green: pro-
gramming was successful. The next step is to
synchronize the rolling code.
X
Release button B of remote control A of the
garage door drive.
If indicator lamp : lights up red: repeat the
programming process for the corresponding
button on the rear-view mirror. When doing
so, vary the distance between remote control
A and the rear-view mirror.
The required distance between remote con-
trol A and the integrated garage door opener
depends on the garage door drive system.
Several attempts might be necessary. You
should test every position for at least
25 seconds before trying another position.
Problems when programming
If you are experiencing problems programming
the integrated garage door opener on the rear-
view mirror, take note of the following instruc-
tions:
R
Check the transmitter frequency used by
garage door drive remote control A and
whether it is supported. The transmitter fre-
quency can usually be found on the back of
remote control A for the garage door drive.
The integrated garage door opener is com-
patible with devices that have units which
262
Features
Stowage and features
operate in the frequency range of 280 to
433 MHz.
R
Replace the batteries in garage door remote
control A.This increases the likelihood that
garage door remote control A will transmit a
strongand precise signal to the integrated
garage door opener.
R
When programming, hold remote control A
at varying distances and angles from but-
tons ; to ? which you are programming. Try
various angles at adistance between 2and
8inches (5to 20 cm) or at the same angle but
at varying distances.
R
If another remote control A is available for
the same garage door drive, repeat the same
programming steps with this remote control
A.Before performingthese steps, make sure
that new batteries have been installed in
garage door drive remote control A.
R
Note that some remote controls only transmit
for alimited amount of time (the indicator
lamp on the remote control goes out). Press
button B on remote control A again before
transmission ends.
R
Align the antenna cable of the garage door
opener unit. This can improve signal recep-
tion/transmission.
Opening/closing the garage door
After it has been programmed, the integrated
garage door opener performs the function of the
garage door system remote control. Please also
read the operating instructions for the garage
door system.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 124).
X
Press button ;, = or ? which you have
programmed to operate the garage door.
Garage door system with afixed code: indi-
cator lamp : lights up green.
Garage door system with arolling code: indi-
cator lamp : flashes green.
The transmitter will transmit asignal as long
as the button is pressed. The transmission is
halted after amaximum of ten seconds and
indicator lamp : lights up yellow.
X
Press button ;, = or ? again if necessary.
Clearing the memory
Make sure that you clear the memory of the
integrated garage door opener before selling the
vehicle.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 124).
X
Press and hold buttons ; and ?.
The indicator lamp initially lights up yellow
and then green.
X
Release buttons ; and ?.
The memory of the integrated garage door
opener in the rear-view mirror is cleared.
Compass
Calling up the compass
:
Rear-view mirror
;
Compass display
=
Opening
The compass displaysinwhich compass direc-
tion the vehicle is currently traveling: N
, NE, E,
SE
, S, SW, W or NW.
To receive acorrectcompass display reading,
the magnetic field zone must be set and the
compass calibrated.
Features
263
Stowage and features
Z
Setting the compass
X
Set your location using the magnetic field
zone maps (
Y page 264).
X
Push around pen into opening = for approx-
imately three seconds.
The magnetic field zone currently selected
appears in compass display ;.
X
To selectthe magnetic field zone: push a
round pen into opening = until the desired
magnetic field zone is selected.
If, after afew seconds, the display in compass
display ; changes direction, the magnetic
field zone has been selected.
Calibrating the compass
Notes
In order to calibrate the compass correctly, do
the following:
R
calibrate the compass in the open and not in
the vicinity of steel structures or high-voltage
transmission lines.
R
switch off electrical consumers such as the
climate control, windshield wipers or rear win-
dow defroster.
R
close all doors and the tailgate.
Calibrating
X
Make sure that there is sufficient space for
you to drive in acircle without impeding traf-
fic.
X
Switch on the ignition.
X
Push around pin into opening = for approx-
imately six seconds, until symbol C
is shown in
compass display ;.
X
Drive your vehicle in afull circle at approx-
imately 3mph (5 km/h)to6mph (10 km/h).
When the calibration has been successfully
completed, the current direction is shown in
compass display ;.
Magnetic field zone maps
NorthAmerica
South America
Floormats
G
WARNING
Objectsinthe driver's footwell can restrict the
pedal travel or obstruct adepressed pedal.
The operating and road safety of the vehicle is
jeopardized. There is arisk of an accident.
Make sure that all objectsinthe vehicle are
stowed correctly, and that they cannot enter
264
Features
Stowage and features
the driver's footwell.Install the floormats
securelyand as specifiedinorder to ensure
sufficient clearance for the pedals.Donot use
loose floormats and do not place floormats on
top of one another.
X
Slide the seat backwards.
X
To install: place the floormat in the footwell.
X
Press safety catchknobs : onto retain-
ers ;.
X
To remove: pull the floormat off retainers ;.
X
Removethe floormat.
Features
265
Stowageand features
Z
Engine compartment
Hood
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If thehood is unlatched, it may open up when
thevehicle is in motion and blockyour view.
Thereisarisk of an accident.
Never unlatch thehood while driving.Before
everytrip, ensure that thehood is locked.
G
WARNING
When opening and closingthe hood,itmay
suddenly fall intothe closed position.Thereis
arisk of injury to personswithin range of
movementofthe hood.
Open and close thehood only when no oneis
within its range of movement.
G
WARNING
Opening thehood when theengine is over-
heated or when there is afireinthe engine
compartmentcouldexpose you to hot gases
or other serviceproducts. Thereisarisk of
injury.
Let an overheatedengine cooldown before
opening thehood.Ifthere is afireinthe
engine compartment, keep thehood closed
and contactthe firedepartment.
G
WARNING
The engine compartmentcontainsmoving
components. Certain components, suchas
theradiator fan,may continue to run or start
again suddenly when theignition is off.There
is arisk of injury.
If you needtodoany work inside theengine
compartment:
R
switch off theignition
R
never reachintothe area wherethere is a
risk of danger from moving components,
suchasthe fan rotationarea
R
remove jewelry and watches
R
keep items of clothing and hair, for exam-
ple, away from moving parts
G
WARNING
The ignition system and thefuel injection sys-
temwork underhigh voltage. If you touch
componentswhichare undervoltage, you
couldget an electric shock. Thereisarisk of
injury.
Never touch componentsofthe ignition sys-
temorfuel injection system when theignition
is switched on.
Opening thehood
G
WARNING
Certain componentsinthe engine compart-
ment, suchasthe engine,radiator and parts
of theexhaust system, can become veryhot.
Workinginthe engine compartmentposesa
risk of injury.
Wherepossible, let theengine cooldown and
touch only thecomponentsdescribedinthe
following.
G
WARNING
When thehood is open and thewindshield
wipersare set in motion,you can be injured by
thewiper linkage. Thereisarisk of injury.
Always switch off thewindshield wipersand
theignition before opening thehood.
!
Makesure that thewindshield wipersare
notfolded away from thewindshield. You
couldotherwise damagethe windshield wip-
ers or thehood.
266
Engine compartment
Maintenance and care
X
Make sure that the windshield wipers are
switched off.
X
Pull release lever : on the hood.
The hood is released.
X
Reach into the gap between the hood and the
radiator trim and press hood catch lever ; to
the left.
X
Raise the hood.
X
Pull support strut ? out of bracket A.
X
Lift up support strut ? and insert it into yel-
low retaining clip =.
Closing the hood
X
Raise the hood slightly and, at the same time,
remove support strut ? from yellow retaining
clip =.
X
Swing support strut ? down and press it into
bracket A until it engages.
X
Lower the hood and let it fall from aheight of
approximately 8in(20 cm).
X
Check that the hood has engaged properly.
If the hood can be raised slightly, it is not
properly engaged. Do not press the hood
closed. Open the hood again and close it with
alittle more force.
Engine oil
General notes
Depending on your driving style, the vehicle
consumes up to 0.9 US qt (0.8 liters) of oil per
600 miles (1,000 km). The oil consumption may
be higher than this when the vehicle is new or if
you frequently drive at high engine speeds.
Depending on the engine, the oil dipstick may be
in adifferent location.
When checking the oil level:
R
park the vehicle on alevel surface.
R
the engine should be switched off for approx-
imately five minutes if the engine is at normal
operating temperature.
R
if the engine is not at normal operating tem-
perature, e.g. if the engine was only started
briefly, wait about 30 minutes before carrying
out the measurement.
Checking the oil level using the oil dip-
stick
G
WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Working in the engine compartmentposes a
risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
following.
Engine compartment
267
Maintenance and care
Z
X
Pull oil dipstick : out of the dipstick guide
tube.
X
Wipe off oil dipstick :.
X
Slowly slide oil dipstick : into the guide tube
to the stop, and take it out again.
If the level is between MIN mark = and MAX
mark ;,the oil level is correct.
X
If the oil level has dropped to MIN mark = or
below, add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of engine oil.
Adding engine oil
G
WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment,such as the engine, radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become very hot.
Workinginthe engine compartment poses a
risk of injury.
Where possible, let the engine cool down and
touch only the components described in the
following.
G
WARNING
If engine oil comes into contact with hot com-
ponentsinthe engine compartment,itmay
ignite. There is arisk of fire and injury.
Make sure that engine oil is not spilled next to
the filler neck.Let the engine cool down and
thoroughly clean the engine oil off the com-
ponentsbefore starting the engine.
H
Environmentalnote
When adding oil, take care not to spill any. If
oil entersthe soil or waterways, it is harmful to
the environment.
!
Use only engine oils and oil filters that are
approved for vehicles with aservice system. A
list of the engine oils and oil filters that have
been tested and approved in accordancewith
Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Service
Products is availableatany authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
The following cause engine failure or damage
to the exhaust system:
R
Use of engine oils and oil filters that have
not been expressly approved for the service
system
R
Replacement of engine oil and oil filter after
the replacement interval specified by the
service system has expired
R
Use of engine oil additives
!
Do not add too much oil. adding too much
engine oil can result in damage to the engine
or to the catalytic converter. Have excess
engine oil siphoned off.
Example: engine oil cap
X
Turn cap : counter-clockwise and remove it.
X
Add engine oil.
If the oil level is at or below the MIN mark on
the oil dipstick,add 1.1 US qt (1.0 liter) of
engine oil.
X
Replace cap : on the filler neck and turn
clockwise.
Ensure that the cap locks into place securely.
X
Check the oil level again with the oil dipstick
(
Y page 267).
Further information on engine oil (Y page 322).
268
Engine compartment
Maintenance and care
Checking and addingother service
products
Checking coolantlevel
G
WARNING
The coolingsystem is pressurized, particularly
when themotor is warm.Ifyou open thecap,
you couldbescalded if hot coolant sprays out.
Thereisariskofinjury.
Let theenginecooldown before you open the
cap. Wear gloves and eye protection.Slowly
open thecap to relieve pressure.
!
The coolant may only be checked and cor-
rectedwhen theengineiscool(coolanttem-
peraturebelow 104‡(40 †).Checkingthe
coolantwhen thecoolanttemperatureis
above104 ‡(40 †) mayresult in damage to
theengineortothe enginecoolingsystem.
X
Parkthe vehicleonalevel surface.
Only checkthe coolantlevel when thevehicle
is on alevel surfaceand theenginehas cooled
down.
X
Turn theSmartKey to position 2 in theignition
lock(
Y page 124).
X
Checkthe coolanttemperature display in the
instrumentcluster.
The coolanttemperature mustbebelow
104‡(40 †).
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 0 (Y page 124)
in the ignition lock.
X
Slowlyturncap : counter-clockwise and to
relieve excess pressure.
X
Turn cap : furthercounter-clockwise and
remove it.
If the coolant is at the level of marker bar =
in the fillerneck when cold, there is enough
coolant in coolant expansiontank ;.
X
If necessary,add coolant thathas been tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X
Replace cap : and turnitclockwise as faras
it will go.
For furtherinformation on coolant, see
(
Y page 323).
Windshieldwashersystem
G
WARNING
Certain components in the engine compart-
ment, such as the engine,radiator and parts
of the exhaust system, can become veryhot.
Working in the engine compartment posesa
riskofinjury.
Where possible, letthe engine cooldownand
touch onlythe components describedinthe
following.
G
WARNING
Windshieldwasherconcentrate could ignite if
it comesinto contact with hot engine compo-
nents or the exhaust system. There is ariskof
fireand injury.
Make sure thatnowindshieldwashercon-
centrate is spillednext to the fillerneck.
X
To open: pull cap : upwards by the tab.
X
Add the premixed washerfluid.
X
To close: press cap : onto the fillerneck
untilitengages.
If the washerfluid level drops belowthe recom-
mended minimum of 1liter, amessage appears
in the multifunctiondisplay prompting youto
addwasherfluid (
Y page 222).
Furtherinformation on windshieldwasherfluid/
antifreeze (
Y page 324).
Engine compartment
269
Maintenance and care
Z
ASSYSTPLUS
Service message
The ASSYSTPLUSserviceinterval display
informsyou of thenextservicedue date.
You can findinformation on thetypeofservice
and serviceintervals in theMaintenance Book-
let.
You can obtain further information from an
authorizedMercedes-Benz Centerorat
http://www.mbusa.com(USAonly).
i
The ASSYSTPLUSserviceinterval display
does notshowany information on theengine
oil level. Observethe notesonthe engineoil
level (
Y page 267).
The multifunction display shows aservicemes-
sage for several seconds, e.g.:
R
ServiceAin..days
R
ServiceAdue
R
ServiceAoverdueby..days
Dependingonthe operating conditionsofthe
vehicle, theremaining time or distanceuntil the
next servicedue dateisdisplayed.
The letter A
or B,possiblyinconnectionwitha
number or another letter, indicates thetypeof
service. A
standsfor aminor serviceand B for a
major service.
You can obtain further information from an
authorizedMercedes-Benz Center.
The ASSYSTPLUSserviceinterval display does
nottakeintoaccountany periods of time during
whichthe battery is disconnected.
Maintainingthe time-dependentservicesched-
ule:
X
Notedown theservicedue datedisplayed in
themultifunction display before disconnect-
ing thebattery.
or
X
Afterreconnecting thebattery, subtractthe
battery disconnection periods from theser-
vicedateshown on thedisplay.
Hiding aservice message
X
Press the a or % buttononthe steering
wheel.
Displaying service messages
X
Switchonthe ignition.
X
Press the = or ; buttontoselect the
Serv.
menu.
X
Press the 9 or : buttontoselect the
ASSYST
PLUS submenuand confirm by press-
ing the a button.
The servicedue dateappearsinthe multi-
function display.
Information aboutService
Resetting theASSYSTPLUS service
interval display
!
If theASSYSTPLUSserviceinterval display
has been inadvertentlyreset,thissetting can
be correctedataqualified specialist work-
shop.
Haveserviceworkcarriedout as described in
theMaintenance Booklet.This may otherwise
lead to increased wear and damagetothe
major assemblies or thevehicle.
Aqualified specialist workshop,e.g.anauthor-
ized Mercedes-Benz Center, will reset the
ASSYSTPLUSserviceinterval display after the
serviceworkhas been carriedout.You can also
obtain further information on maintenance
work, for example.
Special service requirements
The specifiedmaintenance interval takes only
thenormaloperation of thevehicleinto
account. Under arduous operating conditionsor
increased load on thevehicle, maintenance
workmustbecarriedout morefrequently, for
example:
R
regular citydrivingwithfrequentintermediate
stops
R
if thevehicleisprimarily used to travel short
distances
R
use in mountainous terrain or on poor road
surfaces
R
if theengineisoften leftidlingfor longperiods
R
in particularly dustyconditions, or if air-recir-
culation modeisfrequentlyused
In these or similar operating conditions, have
theinterior filter, engineair cleaner, engineoil
and oil filter, for example, changed morefre-
270
ASSYST PLUS
Maintenance and care
quently. Under arduous operatingconditions,
the tires must be checked more often. Further
information can be obtained at aqualified spe-
cialist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-
BenzCenter.
Driving abroad
An extensive Mercedes-Benz Service network is
also available in other countries. You can obtain
further information from any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
Care
General notes
H
Environmental note
Dispose of empty packagingand cleaning
cloths in an environmentally responsible man-
ner.
!
For cleaningyour vehicle, do not use any of
the following:
R
dry, rough or hard cloths
R
abrasive cleaningagents
R
solvents
R
cleaningagentscontainingsolvents
Do not scrub.
Do not touch the surfaces or protective films
with hard objects, e.g. aring or ice scraper.
You could otherwise scratch or damage the
surfaces and protective film.
!
Do not park your vehicle for along period of
time directly after cleaning, particularly after
cleaningthe wheel rim with wheel cleaner.
Wheel cleaner can lead to the increased cor-
rosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore,
drive for afew minutes after cleaning. By
heating up the brakes, the brake discs and
pads dry. The vehicle can then be parked for a
long period of time.
Regular care of your vehicle is acondition for
retaining the quality in the long term.
Use care productsand cleaningagentsrecom-
mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Washing the vehicle and cleaning the
paintwork
Automatic car wash
G
WARNING
Braking efficiency is reduced after washing
the vehicle. There is arisk of an accident.
After the vehicle has been washed, brake
carefully while paying attention to the traffic
conditionsuntil full brakingpower is restored.
!
When Distance Pilot DISTRONIC or the
HOLD function is activated, the vehicle
brakes automatically in certain situations.
To avoid damage to the vehicle, deactivate
Distance Pilot DISTRONIC and the HOLD
function in the following or similar situations:
R
when towing the vehicle
R
in the car wash
!
Never clean your vehicle in aTouchless
Automatic Car Wash as these use special
cleaningagents. These cleaningagentscan
damage the paintworkorplastic parts.
!
Make sure that the automatic transmission
is in position N when washing your vehicle in
atow-through car wash. The vehicle could be
damaged if the transmission is in another
position.
!
Make sure that:
R
the side windows and the sliding sunroof
are fully closed.
R
the ventilation/heating is switched off (the
OFF buttonhas been pressed/the airflow
control is set to position 0).
R
the windshield wiper switch is in position 0.
Otherwise, the vehicle might be damaged.
You can wash the vehicle in an automatic car
wash from the very start.
If the vehicle is very dirty, pre-wash it before
cleaningitinanautomatic car wash.
After using an automatic car wash, wipe off wax
from the windshield and the wiper blades. This
will preventsmears and reduce wiping noises
caused by residue on the windshield.
Care
271
Maintenance and care
Z
Washing by hand
In some countries,washing by hand is only
allowedatspeciallyequipped washing bays.
Observe the legalrequirements in each country.
X
Do not use hot water and do not wash the
vehicleindirect sunlight.
X
Use asoft sponge to clean.
X
Use amild cleaning agent, such as acar
shampoo approved by Mercedes-Benz.
X
Thoroughly hose downthe vehiclewith agen-
tle jet of water.
X
Do not point the water jet directly towards the
air inlet.
X
Use plenty of water and rinse out the sponge
frequently.
X
Rinse the vehiclewith cleanwater and dry
thoroughly with achamois.
X
Do not let the cleaning agent dry on the paint-
work.
Carefully remove all deposits of road saltas
soon as possible whendriving in winter.
Power washers
G
WARNING
The water jet from acircular jet nozzle (dirt
blasters) can causeinvisible exterior damage
to the tires or chassiscomponents. Compo-
nents damaged in this waymay fail unexpect-
edly. There is arisk of an accident.
Do not use power washers with circular jet
nozzles to cleanthe vehicle. Have damaged
tires or chassiscomponents replaced imme-
diately.
!
Always maintain adistance of at least
11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicleand the
power washer nozzle. Informationabout the
correct distance is available from the equip-
ment manufacturer.
Move the power washer nozzle around when
cleaning yourvehicle.
Do not aim directly at any of the following:
R
Tires
R
Door gaps, roof gaps, joints, etc.
R
Electrical components
R
Battery
R
Connectors
R
Lamps
R
Seals
R
Trim
R
Ventilation slots
Damaged seals or electrical components can
leadtoleaks or failures.
!
Vehicles with decorative film: parts of your
vehicleare covered with adecorative film.
Maintain adistance of at least 27.5 in (70 cm)
between the parts of the vehiclecovered with
the film and the nozzle of the high pressure
cleaner.
Informationabout the correct distance is
available from the equipment manufacturer.
Move the power washer nozzle around when
cleaning yourvehicle.
Cleaningthe paintwork
!
Do not affix:
R
stickers
R
films
R
magneticplates or similar items
to painted surfaces. You couldotherwise
damage the paintwork.
Scratches, corrosive deposits, areasaffected by
corrosion and damage caused by inadequate
care cannot alwaysbecompletely repaired.In
such cases,visitaqualified specialist workshop.
X
Remove dirt immediately,where possible,
while avoiding rubbing too hard.
X
Soak insect remains with insect remover and
rinse off the treated areasafterwards.
X
Soak bird droppings with water and rinse off
the treated areasafterwards.
X
Remove coolant, brake fluid, tree resin, oils,
fuelsand greases by rubbing gently with a
cloth soakedinpetroleum ether or lighter
fluid.
X
Use tar remover to remove tar stains.
X
Use silicone remover to remove wax.
If water no longerforms "beads"onthe paint
surface, use the paint care products recommen-
ded and approved by Mercedes-Benz. This is the
case approximately every three to five months,
depending on the climate conditions and the
care product used.
If dirt has penetrated the paint surface or if the
paint has become dull, the paint cleaner recom-
272
Care
Maintenance and care
mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz
should be used.
Do not use these care products in the sun or on
the hood whilethe hood is hot.
X
Use asuitable touch-up stick, e.g. MB Touch-
Up Stick, to repair slight damage to the paint-
work quickly and provisionally.
Matte finish care
!
Never polish the vehicleorthe lightalloy
wheels. Polishing causesthe finish to shine.
!
The following may cause the paint to
become shiny and thus reduce the matte
effect:
R
strong rubbing of the paintwork with
unsuitable materials
R
frequent use of automatic car washes
R
washing the vehicleindirect sunlight
!
Never use paint cleaner, buffing or polishing
products, or gloss preserver, e.g. wax, for the
purpose of paintwork care. These products
are only suitable for high-gloss surfaces. Their
use on vehicles with matte paintwork leads to
considerable surface damage or, more spe-
cifically, to shiny,spotted areas.
Always have paintwork repairs carried out at a
qualified specialist workshop.
!
Do not use washprograms with ahot wax
treatment under any circumstances.
Observe these notes if yourvehiclehas aclear
matte finish. This willhelp you to avoiddamage
to the paintwork due to incorrect treatment.
These notes alsoapply to lightalloy wheels with
aclear matte finish.
The vehicleshould ideally be washed by hand
using asoft sponge, car shampoo and plenty of
water.
Use only insect remover and car shampoo from
the range of approved Mercedes-Benz care
products.
Cleaning the vehicle parts
Cleaning the wheels
G
WARNING
The water jet from acircularjet nozzle (dirt
blasters) can cause invisible exterior damage
to the tires or chassiscomponents. Compo-
nents damaged in this way may fail unexpect-
edly.There is arisk of an accident.
Do not use powerwashers with circularjet
nozzles to clean the vehicle. Have damaged
tires or chassiscomponents replaced imme-
diately.
!
Do not use acidicwheelcleaning products
to remove brake dust. This could damage
wheelbolts and brake components.
!
Do not park yourvehiclefor along periodof
time directly after cleaning, particularlyafter
cleaning the wheelrim with wheelcleaner.
Wheel cleaner can leadtothe increasedcor-
rosion of the brake discs and pads. Therefore,
drive for afew minutes after cleaning. By
heating up the brakes, the brake discs and
padsdry. The vehiclecan then be parked for a
long periodoftime.
Cleaning the windows
G
WARNING
You could become trappedbythe windshield
wipers if they start moving whilecleaning the
windshieldorwiper blades. There is arisk of
injury.
Always switch off the windshieldwipers and
the ignitionbefore cleaning the windshieldor
wiper blades.
!
Only fold the windshieldwipers awayfrom
the windshieldwhen vertical.Otherwise, you
willdamage the hood.
!
Do not use dry cloths, abrasive products,
solvents or cleaning agents containing sol-
vents to clean the inside of the windows. Do
not touch the insidesofthe windows with
hard objects, e.g. an ice scraper or ring. There
is otherwise arisk of damaging the windows.
Care
273
Maintenance and care
Z
!
Cleanthe water drainage channels of the
windshieldand the rear window at regular
intervals. Deposits such as leaves, petals and
pollen may under certain circumstances pre-
vent water from draining away. This can lead
to corrosion damage and damage to elec-
tronic components.
X
Cleanthe inside and outside of the windows
with adamp cloth and acleaning product that
is recommended and approved by Mercedes-
Benz.
Cleaning wiper blades
G
WARNING
You could become trapped by the windshield
wipers if they start moving while cleaning the
windshieldorwiper blades. There is arisk of
injury.
Alwaysswitch off the windshieldwipers and
the ignition before cleaning the windshieldor
wiper blades.
!
Only fold the windshieldwipers awayfrom
the windshieldwhen vertical. Otherwise, you
will damage the hood.
!
Do not pull the wiper blade.Otherwise, the
wiper blade could be damaged.
!
Do not clean wiper bladestoo often and do
not rub them too hard. Otherwise, the graph-
ite coating could be damaged. This could
cause wiper noise.
!
Hold the wiper arm securely when folding
back. The windshieldcould be damagedifthe
wiper arm smacks against it suddenly.
X
Fold the windshieldwiper arms awayfrom the
windshield.
X
Carefully clean the wiper bladeswith adamp
cloth.
X
Fold the windshieldwiper arms back again
before switching on the ignition.
Cleaning the exterior lighting
!
Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths
which are suitablefor plastic light lenses.
Unsuitable cleaning agents or cleaning cloths
could scratch or damage the plastic light len-
ses.
X
Cleanthe plastic lenses of the exterior lights
with awet sponge and amild cleaning agent,
e.g. Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning
cloths.
Cleaning the mirror turnsignals
!
Only use cleaning agents or cleaning cloths
that are suitablefor plastic lenses. Unsuitable
cleaning agents or cleaning cloths could
scratch or damage the plastic lenses of the
mirror turn signals.
X
Cleanthe plastic lenses of the mirror turn sig-
nals in the exterior mirror housing using awet
sponge and mild cleaning agent, e.g.
Mercedes-Benz car shampoo or cleaning
cloths.
Cleaning the sensors
!
If you clean the sensors with apower
washer, make sure that you keep adistance
of at least 11.8 in (30 cm) between the vehicle
and the power washer nozzle. Information
aboutthe correct distance is available from
the equipment manufacturer.
X
Cleansensors : of the driving systems with
water, car shampoo and asoft cloth.
Cleaning the rear view camera
!
Do not clean the camera lens and the area
around the rear view camera with apower
washer.
274
Care
Maintenance and care
X
Make sure that the vehicle is stationary and
that the SmartKey is in position 2 in the igni-
tion lock.
X
Open the camera cover for cleaning via the
multimedia system (see the separate operat-
ing instructions).
X
To clean the rear view camera: use clear
water and asoft cloth to clean camera
lens :.
Cleaningthe exhaust pipes
G
WARNING
The exhaust tail pipe and tail pipe trim can
become very hot. If you come into contact
with these parts of the vehicle, you could burn
yourself. There is arisk of injury.
Always be particularly careful around the
exhaust tail pipe and the tail pipe trim. Allow
these components to cool down before touch-
ing them.
!
Do not clean the exhaust pipe with acid-
based cleaning agents, such as bathroom
cleaner or wheel cleaner.
!
Mercedes-AMG vehicles with black exhaust
pipes: the black-chrome tailpipe finishers
should not be polished with achrome polish.
They will otherwise lose their black sheen. For
optimal care, the faceplates should be rubbed
with alightly oiled cloth after every car wash.
Commercially available engine and care oils
are suitable for this.
For heavier soiling, you can apply afine paint-
work polish with amicrofiber cloth. Remove
the excess polish residue after polishing.
Impurities combined with the effectsofroad grit
and corrosive environmental factors may cause
flash rust to form on the surface. You can
restore the original shine of the exhaust pipe by
cleaning it regularly,especially in winter and
after washing.
X
Clean the exhaust pipe with acare product
tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Interior care
Cleaningthe display
!
For cleaning, do not use any of the following:
R
alcohol-based thinner or gasoline
R
abrasive cleaning agents
R
commercially-availablehousehold cleaning
agents
These may damage the display surface. Do
not put pressure on the display surface when
cleaning. This could lead to irreparable dam-
age to the display.
X
Before cleaning the display,make sure that it
is switched off and has cooled down.
X
Clean the display surface using acommer-
cially available microfiber cloth and TFT/LCD
display cleaner.
X
Dry the display surface using adry microfiber
cloth.
Cleaningthe plastic trim
G
WARNING
Care products and cleaning agents containing
solvents cause surfaces in the cockpit to
become porous. As aresult, plastic parts may
come loose in the event of air bag deploy-
ment. There is arisk of injury.
Do not use any care products and cleaning
agents to clean the cockpit.
!
Do not affix the following to plastic surfaces:
R
stickers
R
films
R
scented oil bottles or similar items
You can otherwise damage the plastic.
!
Do not allow cosmetics, insect repellent or
sunscreen to come into contact with the plas-
tic trim. This maintains the high-quality look of
the surfaces.
Care
275
Maintenance and care
Z
X
Wipe the plastic trim with adamp, lint-free
cloth, e.g. amicrofiber cloth.
X
Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-
ucts recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
The surface may change color temporarily.
Wait until the surface is dry again.
Cleaning the steering wheel and gear or
selector lever
X
Thoroughly wipe with adamp cloth or use
leather care agents that have been recom-
mended and approved by Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning genuine wood and trim ele-
ments
!
Do not use solvent-based cleaning agents
such as tar remover,wheel cleaners, polishes
or waxes. There is otherwise arisk of damag-
ing the surface.
!
Do not use chromepolish on trim pieces.
The trim pieces have achromelook but are
mostly made of anodized aluminum and can
lose their shine if chromepolish is used. Use
adamp, lint-free cloth instead when cleaning
the trim pieces.
If the chrome-plated trim pieces are very
dirty, you can use achromepolish. If you are
unsure as to whether the trim pieces are
chrome-plated or not,consult an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.
X
Wipe the wooden trim and trim pieces with a
damp, lint-free cloth, e.g. amicrofiber cloth.
X
Heavy soiling: use care and cleaning prod-
ucts recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Cleaning the seat covers
General notes
!
Do not use amicrofiber cloth to clean covers
made out of real leather, artificial leather or
DINAMICA. If used often,these can damage
the cover.
Note that regular care is essential to ensure that
the appearance and comfort of the covers is
retained over time.
Genuine leather seat covers
!
To retain the natural appearance of the
leather, observe the following cleaning
instructions:
R
Clean genuine leather covers carefully with
adamp cloth and then wipe the covers
down with adry cloth.
R
Make sure that the leather does not
become soaked. It may otherwise become
rough and cracked.
R
Only use leather care agents that have
been tested and approved by Mercedes-
Benz.You can obtain these from aqualified
specialist workshop.
Leather is anatural product.
It exhibits natural surface characteristics, for
example:
R
differences in the texture
R
marks caused by growth and injury
R
slight nuances of color
These are characteristicsofleather and not
material defects.
Seat covers of other materials
!
Observe the following when cleaning:
R
clean artificial leather covers with acloth
moistened with asolution containing 1%
detergent(e.g. dish washing liquid).
R
clean cloth covers with amicrofiber cloth
moistened with asolution containing 1%
detergent(e.g. dish washing liquid). Rub
carefully and alwayswipe entire seat sec-
tions to avoid leaving visible lines. Leave
the seat to dry afterwards. Cleaning results
depend on the type of dirt and how long it
has been there.
R
clean DINAMICA covers with adamp cloth.
Make sure that you wipe entire seat sec-
tions to avoid leaving visible lines.
Cleaning the seat belts
G
WARNING
Seat belts can become severely weakened if
bleached or dyed. This could cause the seat
belts to tear or fail, for instance, in the event of
an accident.This poses an increased risk of
injury or fatal injury.
Never bleach or dye the seat belts.
276
Care
Maintenance and care
!
Do not clean the seat belts using chemical
cleaning agents. Do not dry the seat belts by
heating at temperatures above 176 ‡(80 †)
or in direct sunlight.
X
Use clean, lukewarm water and soapsolution.
Cleaning the headliner and carpets
X
Headliner: if it is very dirty,use asoft brushor
dry shampoo.
X
Carpets: use the carpetand textile cleaning
agents recommended and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.
Care
277
Maintenanceand care
Z
Where will Ifind...?
Vehicle tool kit
General notes
Vehicles with aTIREFIT kit: the TIREFIT kit is
located in the stowage wellunder the cargo
compartment floor.
Vehicles with atire-change tool kit: the tire-
change tool kit is in the stowage wellunder the
cargo compartment floor.
Apart from certain country-specificvariations,
the vehicles are not equipped with atire-change
tool kit. Some tools for changing awheelare
specific to the vehicle. For more information on
which tire changing tools are required and
approved to perform awheelchange on your
vehicle, consultaqualified specialist workshop.
Toolsrequired for changing awheelmay
include, for example:
R
Jack
R
Wheelchock
R
Lug wrench
R
Alignment bolt
Vehicles with aTIREFIT kit
:
Tire inflation compressor
;
Towing eye
=
Tire sealant filler bottle
X
Open the tailgate.
X
Lift the cargo compartment floor upwards
(
Y page249).
X
Use the TIREFIT kit (Y page280) or remove it.
Towing eye = is located under tire inflation
compressor :.
Vehicles with atire-change tool kit
X
Open the tailgate.
X
Lift the cargo compartment floor upwards
(
Y page249).
X
Remove the tire-change tool kit.
The tire-change tool kit contains:
R
Jack
R
Lug wrench
R
One pairofgloves
R
Folding wheel chock
Flat tire
Preparing the vehicle
Yourvehiclemay be equipped with:
R
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flatproper-
ties) (
Y page279)
Vehicle preparation is not necessary on vehi-
cles with MOExtended tires
R
aTIREFIT kit (Y page278)
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
not equipped with aTIREFIT kit at the factory.It
is therefore recommendedthat you additionally
equip yourvehiclewith aTIREFIT kit if you mount
tires that do not feature run-flatproperties, e.g.
winter tires. ATIREFIT kit may be obtained from
aqualified specialist workshop.
Informationonchanging and mounting wheels
(
Y page312).
X
Stop the vehicleonsolid, non-slippery and
levelground, as far away as possible from
traffic.
X
Switch on the hazard warning lamps.
X
Secure the vehicleagainst rolling away
(
Y page143).
X
If possible,bring the front wheels into the
straight-aheadposition.
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function
or KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door.
The vehicleelectronics now have status 0.
This is the same as the SmartKey having been
removed.
278
Flat tire
Breakdown assistance
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function
or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stopbut-
ton from the ignition lock (
Y page 124).
X
Make sure that the engine cannotbestarted
via your smartphone (
Y page 125).
X
Make sure that the passengersare not endan-
gered as they do so. Make sure that no one is
nearthe danger areawhile awheel is being
changed.Anyone whoisnot directlyassisting
in the wheel change should, for example,
stand behind the barrier.
X
Getout of the vehicle. Payattention to traffic
conditions when doing so.
X
Close the driver'sdoor.
MOExtended tires(tires with run-flat
properties)
General notes
With MOExtended tires(tires with run flatchar-
acteristics),you can continuetodrive your vehi-
cle evenifthere is atotal loss of pressure in one
or more tires. The affected tire mustnot show
any clearlyvisible damage.
Youcan recognize MOExtended tiresbythe
MOExtended marking which appears on the
sidewallofthe tire.You will find this marking
next to the tire size designation, the load-bear-
ing capacity and the speed index (
Y page 307).
MOExtended tiresmay be used only in conjunc-
tion with an activatedtire pressure loss warning
system (Canada only)ortire pressure monitor
(USA only).
If apressure loss warningmessageappears
in the multifunctiondisplay:
R
observe the instructions in the display mes-
sages (
Y page 217).
R
check the tire for damage.
R
if driving on, observe the following notes.
The driving distance possible in run-flatmodeis
approximately 50 miles (80 km)whenthe vehi-
cle is partiallyladen. Whenthe vehicleisfully
laden it is approximately 19 miles (30 km).
In addition to the vehicleload, the driving dis-
tance possible depends upon:
R
Vehiclespeed
R
Road condition
R
Outsidetemperature
The driving distance possible in run-flatmode
may be reducedbyextreme driving conditions
or maneuvers, or it can be increased through a
moderate style of driving.
The
driving distance possible in run-flatmo
deis
counted from the moment the tire pressure loss
warning appears in the multifunction display.
Youmustnot exceedamaximum speed of
50 mph (80 km/h).
Whenreplacing one or alltires, please observe
the following specifications for your vehicle's
tires:
R
size
R
typeand
R
the "MOExtended" marking
If atire hasgone flatand cannotbereplaced
with aMOExtended tire,astandard tire may be
used as atemporary measure. Make sure that
youuse the proper size and type(summer or
winter tire).
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tiresare
not equipped with aTIREFIT kit at the factory. It
is therefore recommended thatyou additionally
equip your vehiclewithaTIREFIT kit if youmount
tiresthat do not feature run-flatproperties,e.g.
winter tires. ATIREFIT kit may be obtainedfrom
aqualified specialist workshop.
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Whendriving in emergency mode, the driving
characteristics deteriorate,e.g. when corner-
ing, accelerating quicklyand when braking.
There is ariskofanaccident.
Do not exceedthe statedmaximum speed.
Avoidabruptsteering and driving maneuvers,
and driving overobstacles (curbs,potholes,
off-road). Thisapplies in particulartoaladen
vehicle.
Stop driving in emergency modeif:
R
youhearbanging noises.
R
the vehiclestarts to shake.
R
yousee smoke and smell rubber.
R
ESP
®
is intervening constantly.
R
there are tears in the sidewalls of the tire.
After driving in emergency mode, have the
wheel rimscheckedataqualified specialist
Flat tire
279
Breakdown assistance
Z
workshop with regardtotheir further use. The
defectivetiremust be replaced in everycase.
TIREFIT kit
Important safety notes
TIREFIT is atiresealant.
You can use TIREFITtoseal punctures of up to
0.16 in (4 mm), particularly those in thetire
tread. You can use TIREFIT at outside tempera-
tures down to Ò4‡(Ò20 †).
G
WARNING
In thefollowing situations, thetiresealantis
unable to provide sufficientbreakdown assis-
tance, as it is unable to seal thetireproperly:
R
there are cutsorpunctures in thetirelarger
than those mentioned above.
R
thewheel rim is damaged.
R
you have driven at verylow tirepressures or
on aflat tire.
Thereisarisk of an accident.
Do not drivethe vehicle. Contact aqualified
specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
The tiresealantisharmful and causes irrita-
tion. It must not comeintocontactwith your
skin, eyes or clothingorbeswallowed. Do not
inhale TIREFIT fumes. Keep tiresealantaway
fromchildren.Thereisarisk of injury.
If you comeintocontactwith thetiresealant,
observe thefollowing:
R
Rinse off thetiresealantfromyour skin
immediately with water.
R
If thetiresealantcomes intocontactwith
your eyes, immediately rinse them thor-
oughly with clean water.
R
If tiresealantisswallowed, immediately
rinse your mouthout thoroughly and drink
plenty of water.Donot inducevomiting,
and seek medical attention immediately.
R
Immediately change out of clothingwhich
has comeintocontactwith tiresealant.
R
If an allergic reactionoccurs, seek medical
attention immediately.
!
Residue fromthe tiresealantmay comeout
of thefiller hose after use. This could cause
stains.
Therefore, place thefiller hose in theplastic
bag which contained theTIREFITkit.
H
Environmentalnote
Have theused tiresealantbottle disposed of
professionally, e.g.ataqualified specialist
workshop.
!
Do not operate thetireinflationcompressor
for longer than eight minutes at atimewithout
abreak.Itmay otherwise overheat.
The tireinflationcompressor can be operated
again onceithas cooled down.
Comply with themanufacturer’s safetyinstruc-
tions on thesticker on thetireinflationcom-
pressor.
Using theTIREFIT kit
X
Do not remove any foreign objectswhich have
penetrated thetire, e.g.screws or nails.
X
Removethe tiresealantbottle, theaccompa-
nyingTIREFITsticker and thetireinflation
compressor fromthe stowage well under-
neaththe cargo compartmentfloor
(
Y page 278).
X
Affix part : of theTIREFITsticker to the
instrumentcluster within thedriver's field of
vision.
X
Affix part ; of theTIREFITsticker near the
valve on thewheel with thedefectivetire.
280
Flat tire
Breakdown assistance
X
Pull connector ? with the cable and hose A
out of the tire inflation compressor housing.
X
Screw hose A ontoflange B of tire sealant
bottle :.
X
Place tire sealant bottle : head downwards
into recess ; of the tire inflation compres-
sor.
X
Remove the cap from valve C on the faulty
tire.
X
Screw filler hose D ontovalve C.
X
Insert plug ? into a12Vsocket in your vehi-
cle.
Observe the notes on sockets (
Y page 253).
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 1 in the ignition
lock (
Y page 124).
X
Press on and off switch = on the tire inflation
compressor to I.
The tire inflation compressor is switched on.
The tire is inflated.
First,tire sealant is pumped into the tire. The
pressure can briefly rise to approximately
500 kPa (5 bar/73 psi).
Do not switch off the tire inflation com-
pressor during this phase.
X
Let the tire inflation compressor run for a
maximum of five minutes. The tire should then
have attained apressure of at least 180 kPa
(1.8 bar/26 psi).
If apressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has
been attained after five minutes, see "Tire pres-
sure reached" (
Y page 281).
If atire pressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has
not been attained after five minutes, see "Tire
pressure not reached" (
Y page 281).
If tire sealant has escaped, clean it off affected
areas as quickly as possible. Use plain water if
possible.
If your clothes are soiled with tire sealant, have
them cleaned with perchloroethylene at adry
cleaner as soon as possible.
Tire pressure not reached
If apressure of 180 kPa (1.8 bar/26 psi) has not
been attained after five minutes:
X
Switchoff the tire inflation compressor.
X
Unscrew the filler hose from the valve of the
faulty tire.
Note that tire sealant may escape when you
unscrew the filler hose.
X
Very slowly drive forwards or reverse approx-
imately 30 ft (10 m).
X
Pump up the tire again.
After amaximum of five minutes the tire pres-
sure must be at least 180 kPa (1.8 bar/
26 psi).
G
WARNING
If the required tire pressure is not reached
after the specified time, the tire is too badly
damaged. The tire sealant cannot repair the
tire in this instance. Damaged tires and atire
pressure that is too low can significantly
impair the vehicle's braking and driving char-
acteristics. There is arisk of accident.
Do not continue driving. Contact aqualified
specialist workshop.
Tire pressure reached
G
WARNING
Atire temporarily sealed with tire sealant
impairs the driving characteristics and is not
suitable for higher speeds. There is arisk of
accident.
Flat tire
281
Breakdown assistance
Z
You should therefore adapt your drivingstyle
accordingly and drive carefully. Do not exceed
the specified maximum speed with atirethat
has been repaired using tiresealant.
The maximum permissible speed for atire
sealed with tiresealant is 50 mph (80 km/h).
The upper part of the TIREFIT sticker must be
affixed to the instrumentcluster in the driver's
field of vision.
If atirepressure of 180 kPa (1.8bar/26 psi) has
been attained afterfive minutes:
X
Switch off the tireinflation compressor.
X
Unscrewthe filler hose from the valve of the
faulty tire.
Notethat tiresealant may escape when you
unscrew the filler hose.
X
Stow the tiresealant bottle and the tireinfla-
tion compressor.
X
Pull away immediately.
X
Stop afterdrivingfor approximately ten
minutes and checkthe tirepressure with the
tireinflation compressor.
The tirepressure must now be at least
130 kPa (1.3bar/19psi).
G
WARNING
If the required tirepressure is not reached
afterdrivingfor ashortperiod, the tireistoo
badly damaged. The tiresealant cannot repair
the tireinthis instance. Damagedtires and a
tirepressure that is too low can significantly
impair the vehicle's braking and drivingchar-
acteristics. There is arisk of accident.
Do not continue driving. Contact aqualified
specialistworkshop.
i
In cases such as the one mentioned above,
contactanauthorized Mercedes-BenzCen-
ter.Orcall 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the
USA)or1-800-387-0100(in Canada).
X
Correctthe tire pressureifitisstill at least
130 kPa (1.3 bar/19 psi). See the Tire and
Loading Information placard on the driver's
side B-pillar or the tire pressuretable in the
fuel filler flap for values.
X
To increase the tirepressure: switchonthe
tire inflation compressor.
X
To reduce the tirepressure: depress pres-
sure release button : nexttopressure
gauge ;.
X
When the tire pressureiscorrect,unscrew the
filler hose from the valve of the sealed tire.
Notethat tire sealant may escape when you
unscrew the filler hose.
X
Screw the valve cap ontothe tire valve of the
sealed tire.
X
Pull the tire sealant bottle out of the tire infla-
tion compressor.
The filler hose remainsattached to the tire
sealant bottle.
X
Drivetothe nearestqualified specialist work-
shop and have the tire changed there.
X
Have the tire sealant bottle replaced as soon
as possible at aqualified specialist workshop.
X
Have the tire sealant bottle replaced every
four years at aqualified specialist workshop.
Battery (vehicle)
Important safetynotes
Special tools and expertknowledge are required
when workingonthe battery, e.g. removal and
installation. You should therefore have all work
involving the battery carried out at aqualified
specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
Work carried out incorrectly on the battery
can lead, for example, to ashort circuit and
thus damage the vehicle electronics. This can
lead to function restrictions applying to
safety-relevant systems, e.g the lightingsys-
tem,the ABS(anti-lockbrakingsystem)orthe
282
Battery (vehicle)
Breakdown assistance
ESP
®
(Electronic Stability Program). The oper-
ating safety of your vehiclemay be restricted.
Youcould lose controlofthe vehicle, for
example:
R
when braking
R
in the event of abrupt steeringmaneuvers
and/or when the vehicle's speedisnot
adapted to the roadconditions
There is ariskofanaccident.
In the event of ashort circuitorasimilar inci-
dent, contact aqualified specialistworkshop
immediately. Do not drive any further. You
shouldhaveall work involvingthe battery car-
riedout at aqualified specialistworkshop.
For furtherinformationabout ABS and ESP
®
,
see (
Y page 60)and (Y page 63).
G
WARNING
Electrostaticbuild-upcan lead to the creation
of sparks, which could ignite the highlyexplo-
sive gases of abattery.There is ariskofan
explosion.
Before handling the battery,touch the vehicle
body to remove any existing electrostatic
build-up.
The highlyflammablegas mixtureforms when
charging the battery as well as when jump-start-
ing.
Alwaysmakesurethatneitheryou nor the bat-
tery is electrostaticallycharged. Abuild-upof
electrostatic charge can be caused,for exam-
ple:
R
by wearing clothing made fromsynthetic
fibers
R
duetofrictionbetween clothing and seats
R
if youpushorpullthe battery across the car-
petorothersynthetic materials
R
if yourub the battery with acloth
G
WARNING
During the charging process, abattery produ-
ces hydrogengas.Ifashort circuitoccurs or
sparks arecreated,the hydrogengas can
ignite.There is ariskofanexplosion.
R
Make sure thatthe positive terminalofa
connected battery does not come into con-
tact with vehicleparts.
R
Never place metalobjects or toolsonabat-
tery.
R
It is important thatyou observe the descri-
bedorder of the battery terminals when
connecting and disconnecting abattery.
R
When jump-starting,makesurethatthe
battery poleswithidentical polarity are
connected.
R
It is particularly important to observe the
describedorder when connecting and dis-
connecting the jumpercables.
R
Never connect or disconnect the battery
terminals whilethe engine is running.
G
WARNING
Battery acidiscaustic. There is ariskofinjury.
Avoidcontact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do
not inhaleany battery gases.Donot lean over
the battery.Keepchildren away frombatter-
ies. Wash away battery acidimmediatelywith
plenty of clean water and seekmedicalatten-
tion.
H
Environmental note
Batteriescontain dangerous
substances. It is against the
lawtodispose of themwith
the householdrubbish.They
must be collected separately
and recycledtoprotect the
environment.
Dispose of batteries in an
environmentallyfriendly
manner. Take discharged
batteries to aqualified spe-
cialist workshop or aspecial
collectionpoint for used bat-
teries.
!
Havethe battery checked regularly at a
qualified specialistworkshop.
Battery (vehicle)
283
Breakdownassistance
Z
Observe the service intervals in the Mainte-
nance Booklet or contact aqualified specialist
workshop for more information.
!
You should have all work involving the bat-
tery carried out at aqualified specialist work-
shop. In the exceptional case that it is neces-
sary for you to disconnect the battery your-
self, make sure that:
R
you switch off the engine and remove the
key. On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, ensure
that the ignition is switched off. Check that
all the indicator lamps in the instrument
cluster are off. Otherwise, electronic com-
ponents, such as the alternator, may be
damaged.
R
you first remove the negative terminal
clamp and then the positive terminal
clamp. Never swap the terminal clamps.
Otherwise, the vehicle's electronic system
may be damaged.
R
in vehicles with automatic transmission,
the transmission is locked in position P
after disconnecting the battery. The vehicle
is secured against rolling away. You can
then no longer move the vehicle.
The battery and the cover of the positive ter-
minal clamp must be installed securely during
operation.
Comply with safety precautions and take pro-
tective measures when handling batteries.
Risk of explosion.
Fire, open flames and smoking are
prohibited when handling the bat-
tery. Avoid creating sparks.
Battery acid is caustic. Avoid contact
with skin, eyes or clothing.
Wear suitableprotective clothing,
especially gloves, apron and face-
guard.
Rinse any acid spills immediately
with clear water. Contact aphysician
if necessary.
Wear eye protection.
Keep children away.
Observe this Operator's Manual.
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you only use batteries which have
been tested and approved for your vehicle by
Mercedes-Benz.These batteries provide
increased impact protection to prevent vehicle
occupants from suffering acid burns should the
battery be damaged in the event of an accident.
In order for the battery to achieve the maximum
possible service life, it must always be suffi-
ciently charged.
Like other batteries, the vehicle battery may
discharge over time if you do not use the vehicle.
In this case, have the battery disconnected at a
qualified specialist workshop. You can also
charge the battery with acharger recommended
by Mercedes-Benz.Contact aqualified special-
ist workshop for further information.
Have the battery condition of charge checked
more frequently if you use the vehicle mainly for
short trips or if you leave it standing idle for a
lengthy period. Consult aqualified specialist
workshop if you wish to leave your vehicle
parked for along period of time.
Only replace abattery with abattery that has
been recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
Remove the SmartKey if you park the vehicle
and do not require any electrical consumers.
The vehicle will then use very little energy, thus
conserving battery power.
If the power supply has been interrupted, e.g. if
you reconnectthe battery, you will have to:
R
set the clock using the multimedia system;
see the separate operating instructions.
R
reset the function for folding the exterior mir-
rors in/out automatically, by folding the mir-
rors out once (
Y page 96).
Charging the battery
G
WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive
gases can escape from the battery. There is a
risk of an explosion.
284
Battery (vehicle)
Breakdown assistance
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient
ventilation while charging and jump-starting.
Do not lean over abattery.
G
WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is arisk of injury.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do
not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over
the battery. Keep children away from batter-
ies. Wash away battery acid immediately with
plenty of clean water and seek medical atten-
tion.
G
WARNING
Adischarged battery can freeze at tempera-
tures below freezingpoint. When jump-start-
ing the vehicle or charging the battery, gases
can escape from the battery. There is arisk of
an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before
charging it or jump-starting.
!
Only use battery chargers with amaximum
charging voltage of 14.8V.
!
Only charge the battery using the jump-
starting connection point.
The jump-starting connection point is in the
engine compartment (
Y page 285).
X
Open the hood.
X
Connectthe battery charger to the positive
terminal and ground point in the same order
as when connectingthe donor battery in the
jump-starting procedure (
Y page 285).
If the indicator/warning lamps do not light up in
the instrument cluster at low temperatures, it is
very likely that the discharged battery has fro-
zen. In this case you may neither jump-start the
vehicle nor charge the battery. The service life of
athawed-out battery may be shorter.The start-
ing characteristics can be impaired, particularly
at low temperatures. Have the thawed-out bat-
tery checked at aqualified specialist workshop.
Only charge the installed battery with abattery
charger which has been tested and approved by
Mercedes-Benz.Abattery charger unit specially
adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz is availableas
an accessory. It permits the charging of the bat-
tery in its installed position. Contact an author-
ized Mercedes-Benz Center for further informa-
tion and availability. Read the battery charger's
operating instructionsbefore charging the bat-
tery.
Jump-starting
For the jump-starting procedure, use only the jump-starting connection point, consisting of apos-
itive terminal and aground point, in the engine compartment.
G
WARNING
Battery acid is caustic. There is arisk of injury.
Avoid contact with skin, eyes or clothing. Do not inhale any battery gases. Do not lean over the
battery. Keep children away from batteries. Wash away battery acid immediately with plenty of
clean water and seek medical attention.
G
WARNING
During charging and jump-starting, explosive gases can escape from the battery. There is arisk
of an explosion.
Particularly avoid fire, open flames, creatingsparks and smoking. Ensure there is sufficient ven-
tilation while charging and jump-starting. Do not lean over abattery.
Jump-starting
285
Breakdown assistance
Z
G
WARNING
During the charging process,abattery produces hydrogen gas. If ashort circuitoccurs or sparks
are created,the hydrogen gas can ignite. There is arisk of an explosion.
R
Make sure that the positive terminal of aconnected battery does not come into contact with
vehicleparts.
R
Never place metal objects or tools on abattery.
R
It is important that you observe the described order of the battery terminalswhen connecting
and disconnecting abattery.
R
When jump-starting, make sure that the battery poleswith identical polarity are connected.
R
It is particularlyimportant to observe the described order when connecting and disconnecting
the jumper cables.
R
Never connect or disconnect the battery terminalswhile the engine is running.
G
WARNING
Adischarged battery can freeze at temperatures below freezing point. When jump-starting the
vehicleorcharging the battery,gasescan escapefrom the battery.There is arisk of an explosion.
Allow the frozen battery to thaw out before charging it or jump-starting.
!
Avoid repeated and lengthy starting attempts. Otherwise, the catalytic converter couldbe
damaged by the non-combusted fuel.
If the indicator/warning lampsdonot light up in the instrument cluster at low temperatures, it is very
likelythat the discharged battery has frozen. In this case you may neither jump-start the vehiclenor
charge the battery.Let the battery thaw first. The service life of athawed-out battery may be shorter.
The starting characteristics can be impaired,particularlyatlow temperatures. Have the thawed-out
battery checked at aqualified specialist workshop.
Do not start the vehicleusing arapidcharging device. If yourvehicle's battery is discharged, the
engine can be jump-started from another vehicleorfrom asecond battery using jumper cables.
Observe the following points:
R
The battery is not accessible in all vehicles. If the other vehicle's battery is not accessible,jump-
start the vehicleusing asecond battery or ajump-starting device.
R
You may only jump-start the vehiclewhen the engine and exhaust system are cold.
R
Do not start the engine if the battery is frozen. Let the battery thaw first.
R
Only jump-start from batterieswith a12Vvoltagerating.
R
Only use jumper cables that are not damaged and have asufficient cross-section and insulated
terminal clamps.
R
Make sure that the two vehicles do not touch.
Make sure that:
R
The jumper cables are not damaged.
R
Non-insulated parts of the terminal clampsdonot come into contact with other metal parts while
the jumper cables are connected to the battery
R
The jumper cables cannot come into contact with parts that can move when the engine is running,
such as the V-belt pulley or the fan
X
Secure the vehiclebyapplying the electric parking brake.
X
Shift the transmission to position P.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 0in the ignitionlock and remove it.
286
Jump-starting
Breakdown assistance
X
Switch off allelectrical consumers,e.g. rearwindow defroster, lighting, etc.
X
Openthe hood.
Position number B identifiesthe chargedbattery of the othervehicleoranequivalent jump-starting
device.
X
Press together cover : of positive clamp ; and slide it back.
X
Connect positive terminal ; on your vehicletopositive terminal = of donorbattery B using the
jumper cable,beginning with your ownbattery.
X
Start the engine of the donorvehicleand run it at idling speed.
X
Connect negative terminal ? of donorbattery B to ground point A of your vehicleusing the
jumper cable,connecting the jumper cable to battery of othervehicle B first.
X
If the battery is fully discharged, leave the battery that is being used to jump-startconnectedfor
afew minutes before attempting to start. Thischargesthe battery slightly.
X
Start the engine.
X
Before disconnecting the jumper cables, letthe engine run for several minutes.
X
First, remove the jumper cablesfrom ground point A and negative terminal ?,then from pos-
itive clamp ; and positive terminal =.Begineachtime at the contacts on your ownvehiclefirst.
X
Close cover : of positive terminal ; afterremoving the jumper cables.
X
Close the hood.
X
Have the battery checkedataqualified specialist workshop.
i
Jump-starting is not considered to be anormaloperating condition.
i
Jumpercablesand further information regarding jump-starting can be obtainedatany qualified
specialist workshop.
Jump-starting
287
Breakdown assistance
Z
Towingand tow-starting
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Functions relevant to safety arerestricted or
no longeravailable if:
R
the engine is not running.
R
the brake system or the powersteeringis
malfunctioning.
R
there is amalfunctioninthe voltagesupply
or the vehicle's electrical system.
If your vehicleisbeing towed,muchmore
force maybenecessary to steerorbrake.
There is ariskofanaccident.
In such cases, useatow bar. Before towing,
make sure thatthe steeringmoves freely.
G
WARNING
Youcan no longersteerthe vehicleifthe
steeringwheel lock hasbeenengaged.There
is ariskofanaccident.
Alwaysswitch off the ignition when towing the
vehiclewithatow cable or atow bar.
G
WARNING
When towing or tow-startinganothervehicle
and its weight is greaterthanthe permissible
gross weight of your vehicle, the:
R
the towing eyecould detach itself
R
the vehicle/trailer combinationcould roll-
over.
There is ariskofanaccident.
When towing or tow-startinganothervehicle,
its weight shouldnot be greaterthanthe per-
missiblegross weight of your vehicle.
Detailsonthe permissiblegross vehicleweight
of your vehiclecan be found on the vehicleiden-
tification plate (
Y page 319).
!
When ActiveBrake Assist, Distance Pilot
DISTRONICorthe HOLD functionisactivated,
the vehiclebrakes automaticallyincertain
situations.
To avoiddamagetothe vehicle, deactivate
these systemsinthe following or similar sit-
uations:
R
when towing the vehicle
R
in the car wash
!
Make sure thatthe electricparkingbrake is
released.Ifthe electricparkingbrake is faulty,
visit aqualified specialistworkshop.
!
Onlysecurethe tow ropeortow baratthe
towing eyes. Otherwise, the vehiclecould be
damaged.
!
Do not usethe towing eyes for recoverypur-
poses as thiscould damage the vehicle. If in
doubt,
recover the vehiclewithacrane
.
!
When towing,pullawayslowly and
smoothly. If the tractivepower is too high, the
vehicles could be damaged.
!
The vehiclecan be towed amaximum of
30 miles (50km). The towing speedof30mph
(50km/h) must not be exceeded.
If the vehiclehas to be towed morethan
30 miles (50km), the front axlemustberaised
or the entire vehicleraisedand transported.
!
Do not tow with sling-typeequipment.This
could damage the vehicle.
!
When towing vehicles with KEYLESS-GO,
usethe key insteadofthe Start/Stop button.
Otherwise, the automatic transmission may
shift to position P when the driver's or front-
passengerdoorare opened, which could lead
to damage to the transmission.
!
Vehicles with automatic transmission must
not be started by tow-starting. Thiscould oth-
erwisedamagethe transmission.
It is better to have the vehicletransportedthan
to have it towed away.
If the vehiclecan no longerbedriven because of
an accident or breakdown, youhavethe follow-
ing options:
R
transporting the vehicle
As arule, youshouldhavethe vehicletrans-
ported.
R
towing the vehiclewithatow ropeortow bar
Onlytow the vehicleinexceptionalcases.
288
Towingand tow-starting
Breakdownassistance
The battery must be connected and charged.
Otherwise, you:
R
cannot turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the
ignition lock
R
cannot release the electric parking brake
R
cannot move the transmission to position N
The function of the electric parking brake and
the parking lock is dependent on the on-board
voltage.
If the on-board voltage is low or if there is asys-
tem malfunction:
R
the electric parking brake may not be applied
in certain circumstances, or
R
the transmission may not be shifted to P
Switch off non-essential consumers, e.g. the
radio.
Disarm the automatic lockingfeature before the
vehicle is towed (
Y page 193). You could other-
wise be locked out when pushing or towing the
vehicle.
Installing/removing the towing eye
Installing the towing eye
The bracketsfor the screw-in towing eye are
located in the bumpers. They are at the rear and
at the front,under covers :.
X
Remove the towing eye from the stowage
space.
The towing eye is located with the vehicle tool
kit under the cargo compartment floor
(
Y page 278).
Vehicles with the TIREFIT kit: the towing eye is
beneath the tire inflation compressor.
X
Press the mark on cover : inwards in the
direction of the arrow.
X
Take cover : off the opening.
X
Screw in the towing eye clockwise to the stop.
Removing the towing eye
X
Unscrew and remove the towing eye.
X
Attach cover : to the bumper and press until
it engages.
X
Place the towing eye in the stowage well
beneath the cargo compartment floor in the
cargo compartment (
Y page 278).
X
Vehicles with the TIREFIT kit: put back the tire
inflation compressor.
Towing the vehicle with the front axle
raised
Observe the important safety notes when tow-
ing your vehicle with the front axle raised
(
Y page 288).
Only vehicles without 4MATIC can be towed
with the front axle raised.
!
Vehicles with 4MATICmust not be towed
with either the front or the rear axle raised, as
doing so will damage the transmission.
Vehicles with 4MATICmay either be towed away
with both axles on the ground or be loaded up
and transported.
!
The ignition must be switched off if the vehi-
cle is being towed with the front axle raised.
Otherwise, ESP
®
may intervene and damage
the brake system.
X
On vehicles with KEYLESS-GO or the KEY-
LESS-GO startfunction: you must use the
SmartKey instead of the Start/Stop button
(
Y page 125).
X
Make sure that the vehicle is stationary.
X
Turn the SmartKey to position 2 in the ignition
lock.
X
When the vehicle is stationary, depress the
brake pedal and keep it depressed.
X
Shift the automatic transmission to posi-
tion P.
X
Release the brake pedal.
Towing and tow-starting
289
Breakdown assistance
Z
X
Releasethe electric parking brake.
X
Switchoff theautomatic locking
(
Y page 193).
X
Switchonthe hazard warning lamps
(
Y page 102).
X
Turn theSmartKey in theignition locktoposi-
tion 0 and leavethe SmartKey in theignition
lock.
Towing avehicle with bothaxles on
theground
It is important that you observethe safety
instructionswhen towingaway your vehicle
(
Y page 288).
X
On vehicles with KEYLESS-GOorthe KEY-
LESS-GO startfunction: you mustuse the
SmartKey instead of theStart/Stopbutton
(
Y page 125).
The automatic transmission automatically shifts
to position P when you open thedriver'sorfront-
passenger door or when you remove theSmart-
Key from theignition lock. In order to ensure
that theautomatic transmission stays in posi-
tion N when towingthe vehicle, you must
observethe followingpoints:
X
Makesurethatthe vehicleisstationary.
X
Turn theSmartKey to position 2 in theignition
lock.
X
Depress and hold thebrakepedal.
X
Shift theautomatic transmission to position
N.
X
Leavethe SmartKey in position 2 in theigni-
tion lock.
X
Releasethe brakepedal.
X
Releasethe electric parking brake.
X
Switchonthe hazard warning lamps
(
Y page 102).
i
In order to signal achangeofdirection when
towingthe vehiclewiththe hazard warning
lampsswitched on,use thecombination
switch as usual. In this case, only theindicator
lampsfor thedirection of travel flash. After
resetti
ng thecombi
nation switch,the hazard
warning lamp startsflashingagain.
Transporting thevehicle
4MATIC vehicles or vehicles with auto-
matictransmission
!
When thevehicleisloadedfor transport, the
frontand rear axles mustbestationary and on
thesametransportation vehicle. Positioning
overthe connection pointofthe transport
vehicleisnot permitted. The drivetrain may
otherwise be damaged.
All vehicles
!
You may only secure thevehiclebythe
wheels, notbypartsofthe vehiclesuchas
axleorsteering components. Otherwise, the
vehiclecould be damaged.
X
Turn theSmartKey to position 2 in theignition
lock(
Y page 124).
X
Shift thetransmission to position N.
As soon as thevehicle hasbeen loaded:
X
Preventthe vehiclefromrollingaway by
applyingthe electric parking brake.
X
Shift thetransmission to position P.
X
Turn theSmartKey to position 0in theignition
lockand remove it.
X
Securethe vehicle.
The towingeye can be used to pull thevehicle
onto atrailer or transporterfor transporting pur-
poses.
Notes on 4MATIC vehicles
!
Vehicles with4MATIC must notbetowed
witheither thefront or therear axleraised, as
doingsowill damagethe transmission.
290
Towingand tow-starting
Breakdown assistance
Vehicles with 4MATIC may only either be towed
awaywith both axles on the ground or be loaded
up and transported.
If the vehicle's transmission, front, or rear axle is
damaged, have the vehicle transported on a
truck or trailer.
In the event of damage to the electrical sys-
tem:
If the battery is defective, the automatic trans-
mission will be locked in position P.Toshift the
automatic transmission to position N,you must
provide power to the vehicle's electrical system
in the same way as when jump-starting
(
Y page 285).
Have the vehicle transported on atransporter or
trailer.
Tow-starting (emergency engine
starting)
!
Vehicles with automatic transmission must
not be tow-started. You could otherwise dam-
age the automatic transmission.
i
You can find information on "Jump-starting"
under (
Y page 285).
Fuses
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If you manipulate or bridge afaulty fuse or if
you replace it with afuse with ahigher amper-
age, the electric cables could be overloaded.
This could result in afire. There is arisk of an
accident and injury.
Alwaysreplace faulty fuses with the specified
new fuses having the correct amperage.
!
Only use fuses that have been approved for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles and which have the
correct fuse rating for the system concerned.
Only use fuses marked with an "S". Other-
wise, components or systems could be dam-
aged.
!
Make sure that no moisture can enter the
fuse box when the cover is open.
!
When closing the cover, make sure that it is
lying correctly on the fuse box. Moisture seep-
ing in or dirt could otherwise impairthe oper-
ation of the fuses.
The fuses in yourvehicle serve to close down
faulty circuits. If afuse blows,all the compo-
nents on the circuit and their functions stop
operating.
Blown fuses must be replaced with fuses of the
same rating, which you can recognize by the
color and value. The fuse ratings are listed in the
fuse allocation chart.
The fuse allocation chart is in the fuse box in the
front-passenger footwell (
Y page 292).
If anewly inserted fuse also blows,have the
cause traced and rectified at aqualified special-
ist workshop, e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Before changingafuse
X
Secure the vehicle against rolling away
(
Y page 143).
X
Switch off all electrical consumers.
X
Vehicleswithout KEYLESS-GO: remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X
Vehicleswith KEYLESS-GO start-function
or KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door.
The vehicle electronics now have status 0.
This is the same as the SmartKey having been
removed.
The fuses are located in variousfuse boxes:
R
Fuse box in the engine compartment on the
left-hand side of the vehicle, when viewed in
the direction of travel
R
Fuse box in the front-passenger footwell
The fuse allocation chart is on the fuse box in the
front-passenger footwell (
Y page 292).
Fuse box in the engine compartment
G
WARNING
When the hood is open and the windshield
wipers are set in motion, you can be injured by
the wiperlinkage. There is arisk of injury.
Alwaysswitch off the windshield wipers and
the ignition before opening the hood.
Fuses
291
Breakdown assistance
Z
X
Open the hood.
X
Use adry cloth to remove any moisture from
the fuse box.
X
To open: open clamps ;.
X
Fold up cover : in the direction of the arrow
and remove it.
X
To close: check whether the seal is lying cor-
rectly in cover :.
X
Insert cover : at the back into openings =
on the fuse box.
X
Fold down cover :.
X
Hook clamps ; into the fuse box and close.
X
Close the hood.
Fuse box in the front-passengerfoot-
well
X
To open: open the front-passenger door.
X
Remove the floormat.
X
Fold out perforated floor covering : in the
direction of the arrow.
X
To release cover =,press retaining
clamp ;.
X
Fold out cover = in the direction of the arrow
to the catch.
X
Remove cover = forwards.
Fuse allocation chart ? is located on the
lower right-hand side of cover =.
X
To close: insert cover = on the left-hand side
of the fuse box into the retainer.
Cover = engages in the retainers.
X
Fold down cover = until clamps ; lock audi-
bly.
X
Fold back perforated floor covering :.
X
Install the floormats.
292
Fuses
Breakdown assistance
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If wheels and tires of thewrong sizeare used,
thewheelbrakes or suspension components
may be damaged. Thereisariskofanacci-
dent.
Always replace wheels and tires withthose
that fulfill thespecificationsofthe original
part.
When replacing wheels, makesuretouse the
correct:
R
designation
R
model
When replacing tires,makesuretouse the
correct:
R
designation
R
manufacturer
R
model
G
WARNING
Aflat tire severely impairs thedriving,steer-
ing and braking characteristics of thevehicle.
Thereisariskofaccident.
Tires without run-flat characteristics:
R
do notdrivewithaflat tire.
R
immediately replace theflat tire withyour
emergencysparewheelorsparewheel, or
consult aqualified specialist workshop.
Tires withrun-flat characteristics:
R
pay attention to theinformation and warn-
ing noticesonMOExtended tires (tireswith
run-flat characteristics).
Accessories that are notapprovedfor your vehi-
cle by Mercedes-Benzorare notbeingused cor-
rectlycan impair theoperating safety.
Before purchasing and usingnon-approved
accessories, visit aqualified specialist work-
shopand inquire about:
R
suitability
R
legal stipulations
R
factory recommendations
Further information regarding wheels and tires
can be foundunder "Wheel/tire combinations"
(
Y page 316).
You can ask for information regarding permitted
wheel-tire combinationsatanauthorized
Mercedes-BenzCenter.
Information on tire pressurecan be found:
R
on theTireand Loading Information placard
on theB-pillar on thedriver'sside
(
Y page 303)
R
in thetirepressuretable in thefuel filler flap
(
Y page 141)
R
under "Tirepressure" (Y page 296)
Operation
Information on driving
Checkthe tire pressurewhen thevehicleis
heavily laden and adjust priortoatrip.
While driving,pay attention to vibrations, noises
and unusual handlingcharacteristics,e.g.pull-
ing to oneside.This may indicatethatthe
wheels or tires are damaged. If you suspectthat
atireisdefective, reduce your speedimmedi-
ately. Stop thevehicleassoonaspossible to
checkthe wheels and tires for damage. Hidden
tire damagecould also be causing theunusual
handlingcharacteristics.Ifyou findnosignsof
damage, havethe tires and wheels checkedata
qualified specialist workshop.
When parking your vehicle, makesurethatthe
tires do notget deformed by thecurborother
obstacles. If they cannotbeavoided, driveover
obstacles suchascurbs slowly and at an obtuse
angle. Otherwise, you may damagethe wheels
or tires.
Regularchecking of wheels and tires
G
WARNING
Damaged tires can causetireinflation pres-
sureloss.Asaresult,you could lose control of
your vehicle. Thereisariskofaccident.
Checkthe tires regularly for signsofdamage
and replace any damaged tires immediately.
Operation
293
Wheels and tires
Z
Checkwheelsand tires for damageatleast once
amonth.Checkwheelsand tires after driving
off-road or on roughroads. Damaged wheels
can causealoss of tirepressure. Pay particular
attentiontodamagesuchas:
R
cutsinthe tires
R
punctures in thetires
R
tears in thetires
R
bulges on tires
R
deformationorsevere corrosiononwheels
Regularly check thetiretread depthand the
conditionofthe tread across thewhole widthof
thetire(
Y page 294). If necessary, turnthe
frontwheelstofull lockinorder to inspectthe
inner side of thetiresurface.
All wheelsmust have avalvecap to protect the
valveagainst dirt and moisture. Do notmount
anythingontothe valveother than thestandard
valvecap or other valvecaps approved by
Mercedes-Benzfor your vehicle.Donot use any
other valvecaps or systems,e.g.tirepressure
monitoringsystems.
Regularly check thepressureofall thetires par-
ticularly priortolongtrips. Adjustthe tirepres-
sure as necessary (
Y page 296).
The servicelife of tires depends, amongother
things, on thefollowingfactors:
R
Drivingstyle
R
Tire pressure
R
Distance covered
Notes on tiretread
G
WARNING
Insufficient tiretread will reduce tiretraction.
The tireisnolonger able to dissipatewater.
This meansthatonwet road surfaces,the risk
of hydroplaning increases, in particular where
speedisnot adapted to suit thedriving con-
ditions. Thereisariskofaccident.
If thetirepressureistoo high or toolow, tires
may exhibit different levels of wear at differ-
entlocations on thetiretread. Thus,you
should regularly check thetread depthand
theconditionofthe tread across theentire
widthofall tires.
Minimum tiretread depthfor:
R
Summer tires: â in (3 mm)
R
M+S tires: ã in (4 mm)
For safety reasons, replace thetires before
thelegally prescribedlimit for theminimum
tiretread depthisreached.
Marking : shows wherebar indicator ; for
tread wear is integratedintothe tiretread.
Treadwear indicators (TWI)are required by law.
Six indicators are positionedonthe tiretread.
They are visible once atread depthofapprox-
imately á in (1.6mm) has been reached. If this
is thecase, thetireissoworn that it must be
replaced.
Selecting, mounting and replacing
tires
G
WARNING
Exceedingthe statedtireload-bearing capa-
cityand theapprovedmaximum speedcould
lead to tiredamageorthe tirebursting. There
is ariskofaccident.
Therefore, only use tiretypesand sizes
approvedfor your vehicle model. Observethe
tireload rating and speedrating required for
your vehicle.
R
Only mounttires and wheelsofthe same type
and make.
Exception: it is permissible to install adiffer-
enttype or makeinthe event of aflat tire.
Observeherethe "MOExtended tires (tires
294
Operation
Wheels and tires
with run-flat characteristics)"section
(
Y page 279).
R
Only mounttires of thecorrectsizeontothe
wheels.
R
Break in new tires at moderatespeeds for the
first60miles (100km).The newtires only
reachtheir full performanceafter this dis-
tance.
R
Do not drivewith tires which have too little
tread depth, as this significantly reduces the
traction on wet roads (hydroplaning).
R
Replace thetires after six years at thelatest,
regardless of wear.
MOExtended tires (tires with run-flat
properties)
With MOExtended tires (tires with run flat char-
acteristics),you can continue to driveyour vehi-
cle even if there is atotal loss of pressure in one
or moretires.
MOExtended tires may only be used in conjunc-
tionwith an activated tirepressure loss warning
system (Canada only) or tirepressure monitor
(USAonly) and only on wheels specifically tes-
ted by Mercedes-Benz.
Notes on driving with MOExtended tires with a
flat tire(
Y page 279).
Vehicles equipped with MOExtended tires are
not equipped with aTIREFIT kit at thefactory. It
is therefore recommended that you additionally
equip your vehicle with aTIREFIT kit if you mount
tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.
winter tires. ATIREFITkit may be obtained from
aqualified specialist workshop.
Winter operation
General notes
Have your vehicle winter-proofed at aqualified
specialist workshop at theonset of winter.
Observe thenotes in the"Changing awheel"
section(
Y page 312).
Driving with summer tires
At temperatures below 45 ‡(+7 †), summer
tires lose elasticityand therefore traction and
braking power.Changethe tires on your vehicle
to M+S tires. Usingsummer tires at verycold
temperatures could cause crackstoform,
thereby damagingthe tires permanently.
Mercedes-Benzcannot accept responsibilityfor
this type of damage.
G
WARNING
Damaged tires can cause tireinflationpres-
sure loss. As aresult,you could lose control of
your vehicle. Thereisarisk of accident.
Checkthe tires regularly for signsofdamage
and replaceany damaged tires immediately.
M+S tires
G
WARNING
M+S tires with atiretread depthofless than
ã in (4 mm)are notsuitable for use in winter
and do notprovide sufficient traction.Thereis
arisk of an accident.
M+S tires with atread depthofless than ã in
(4 mm) must be replaced immediately.
At temperatures below 45 ‡(+7 †), use winter
tires or all-season tires. Both typesoftire are
identified by the M+S marking.
Only winter tires bearing the i snowflake
symbol in addition to the M+S marking provide
the best possiblegrip in wintry road conditions.
Only these tires willallow driving safety systems
such as ABS and ESP
®
to function optimally in
winter. Thesetires have beendeveloped specif-
ically for driving in snow.
Use M+S tires of the same make and tread on all
wheels to maintain safe handling characteris-
tics.
Always observe the maximumpermissible
speedspecified for the M+S tires you have
mounted.
When you have mounted the M+S tires:
X
Check the tire pressures (Y page296).
X
Restart the tire pressure monitor (USA only)
(
Y page302).
X
Restart the tire pressure loss warning system
(Canada)(
Y page300)
Winteroperation
295
Wheels and tires
Z
Snow chains
G
WARNING
If snow chains are mounted on the rear
wheels, the snow chains could cause abrasion
to the vehicle body or to chassis components.
This could cause damage to the vehicle or the
tires. There is arisk of an accident.
To avoid hazardous situations:
R
never mount snow chains on the rear
wheels
R
only mount snow chains in pairs on the
front wheels.
!
On some tire sizes there is not enough space
for snow chains. To avoid damage to the vehi-
cle or tires, observe the "Wheel and tire com-
binations" section under "Tires and wheels".
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benz recom-
mends that you only use snow chains that have
been specially approved for your vehicle by
Mercedes-Benz, or are of acorresponding
standard of quality. For more information,
please contact aqualified specialist workshop.
If you intendtomount snow chains, please bear
the following points in mind:
R
Snow chains may not be mounted on all
wheel/tire combinations.Permissible wheel-
tire combinations(
Y page 316).
R
Only use snow chains when driving on roads
completely covered by snow. Remove the
snow chains as soon as possible when you
come to aroad that is not snow-covered.
R
Local regulations may restrict the use of snow
chains. Observe the appropriate regulations if
you wish to mount snow chains.
R
Do not exceed the maximum permissible
speed of 30 mph (50 km/h).
R
Do not use Parking Pilot when snow chains
are installed (
Y page 171).
You may wish to deactivate ESP
®
(Y page 63)
when pulling away with snow chains installed .
You can thereby allow the wheels to spin in a
controlled manner, achieving an increased driv-
ing force (cuttingaction).
Tire pressure
Tire pressurespecifications
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Underinflated or overinflated tires pose the
following risks:
R
the tires may burst, especially as the load
and vehicle speed increase.
R
the tires may wear excessively and/or
unevenly, which may greatly impair tire
traction.
R
the driving characteristics, as well as steer-
ing and braking, may be greatly impaired.
There is arisk of an accident.
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures
and check the pressure of all the tires includ-
ing the spare wheel:
R
monthly, at least
R
if the load changes
R
before beginning along journey
R
under different operating conditions, e.g.
off-road driving
If necessary, correct the tire pressure.
i
The data on the Tire and Loading Informa-
tion placard and tire pressure table shown
here are examples. Tire pressure specifica-
tions are vehicle-specific and may deviate
from the data shown here. The tire pressure
specifications that are valid for your vehicle
can be found on the Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard and tire pressure table on the
vehicle.
General notes
The recommended tire pressures for the tires
mounted at the factory can be found on the
labels described here.
Further information on tire pressures can be
obtained at aqualified specialist workshop.
296
Tire pressure
Wheels and tires
Tire and LoadingInformationplacard
:
Recommended tire pressures
The Tire and Loading Informationplacard is on
the B-pillar on the driver's side (
Y page 303).
The Tire and Loading Informationplacard con-
tains the recommendedtire pressures for cold
tires. The recommendedtire pressures arevalid
for the maximum permissibleloadand up to the
maximum permissiblevehiclespeed.
Tire pressure table
The tire pressure table is on the insideofthe fuel
fillerflap. It shows the tire pressure for alltires
permitted at the factory for thisvehicle; see
illustration(example).
The tire pressure table contains the recommen-
dedpressures for coldtiresfor various operat-
ing conditions, i.e.differingloadand speedcon-
ditions.
If atire size precedes atire pressure, the fol-
lowing tire pressure informationisonlyvalid for
thattire size; see illustration(example).
The load conditions "partiallyladen"and "fully
laden" aredefinedinthe table for different num-
bers of occupants and amounts of luggage.The
actual numberofseats maydiffer.
Some tire pressure tablesshowonlythe rim
diameters insteadofthe full tire size, e.g. R18.
Rimdiameterispartofthe tire size and can be
found on the tire sidewall (
Y page 307).
If the tire pressures have been set to the lower
values for lighterloads and/or lowerroad
speeds,the pressures shouldbereset to the
highervalues:
R
if youwanttodrive with an increased load
and/or
R
if youwanttodrive at higherspeeds
i
The tire pressures for increased loadsand/
or higherroadspeeds, shown in the tire pres-
sure table,may have anegative effect on driv-
ing comfort.
If the tire pressure is not set correctly, thiscan
lead to an excessive buildupofheatand asud-
denlossofpressure.
For moreinformation, contact aqualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Tire pressure
297
Wheelsand tires
Z
Important notes on tire pressure
G
WARNING
If thetirepressuredrops repeatedly, the
wheel, valveortiremay be damaged. Tire
pressurethatistoo low may result in atire
blow-out.Thereisariskofanaccident.
R
Checkthe tire for foreign objects.
R
Checkwhether thewheelislosing air or the
valveisleaking.
If you are unable to rectify thedamage, con-
tactaqualified specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
If you fit unsuitable accessories onto tire
valves, thetirevalves may be overloaded and
malfunction,whichcan causetirepressure
loss.Due to their design,retrofittedtirepres-
suremonitors keep thetirevalveopen.This
can also result in tire pressureloss.Thereisa
riskofanaccident.
Only screw thestandard valvecap or other
valvecapsapprovedbyMercedes-Benzfor
your vehicleontothe tire valve.
Use asuitable pressuregauge to checkthe tire
pressure. The outer appearanceofatiredoes
notpermit any reliable conclusionabout thetire
pressure. On vehicles equipped withthe elec-
tronic tire pressuremonitor, thetirepressure
can be checkedinthe on-board computer.
The tire temperature and pressureincrease
when thevehicleisinmotion.This is dependent
on thedriving speedand theload.
Therefore, you should only correcttirepres-
sures when thetires are cold.
The tires are cold:
R
if thevehiclehas been parked withthe tires
out of direct sunlightfor at least three hours
and
R
if thevehiclehas been driven less than 1mile
(1.6 km)
Thetiretemperaturechanges dependingonthe
outside temperature, thevehicle speedand the
tireload. If thetiretemperaturecha
nges by
18 ‡(1
0 †), thetirepressure changes by
approximately 10 kPa(0.1bar/1.5 psi). Take
this intoaccountwhen checking thepressure of
warm tires. Only correctthe tirepressure if it is
toolow for thecurrentoperatingconditions. If
you check thetirepressure when thetires are
warm,the resultingvalue will be higher than if
thetires were cold. This is normal. Do not
reducethe tirepressure to thevalue specified
for coldtires. The tirepressure would otherwise
be toolow.
Observethe recommended tirepressuresfor
coldtires:
R
on theTire and Loading Information placard
on theB-pillar on thedriver'sside
R
in thetirepressure table in thefuel fillerflap
(
Y page 141)
Underinflated or overinflated tires
Underinflated tires
G
WARNING
Tireswith pressure that is toolow can over-
heat and burstasaconsequence. In addition,
they also suffer from excessive and/or irreg-
ular wear, whichcan severelyimpair thebrak-
ing properties and thedriving characteristics.
Thereisarisk of an accident.
Avoid tirepressuresthatare toolow in all the
tires, includingthe sparewheel.
Underinflatedtires may:
R
overheat, leadingtotiredefects
R
adversely affect handling
R
wear excessively and/or unevenly
R
have an adverse effect on fuel consumption
Overinflated tires
G
WARNING
Tireswith excessively high pressure can burst
because they are damagedmoreeasily by
road debris, potholes etc. In addition,they
also suffer from irregular wear, whichcan
severelyimpair thebraking properties and the
driving characteristics.Thereisarisk of an
accident.
Avoid tirepressuresthatare toohigh in all the
tires, includingthe sparewheel.
298
Tirepressure
Wheels and tires
Overinflated tires may:
R
increase the braking distance
R
adversely affect handling
R
wear excessively and/or unevenly
R
have an adverse effect on ride comfort
R
be more susceptible to damage
Maximum tire pressures
:
Example: maximum permissibletire pres-
sure
Never exceed the maximum permissibletire
inflation pressure. Alwaysobserve the recom-
mended tire pressure for your vehicle when
adjusting the tire pressure (
Y page 296).
i
The actual valuesfor tires are vehicle-spe-
cific and may deviate from the valuesinthe
illustration.
Checking the tire pressures
Important safety notes
Observe the notes on tire pressure
(
Y page 296).
Information on air pressure for the tires on your
vehicle can be found:
R
on the vehicle's Tire and Loading Information
placard on the B-pillar
R
in the tire pressure table in the fuel filler flap
(
Y page 141)
R
in the "Tire pressure" section
Checking tire pressures manually
To determine and set the correct tire pressure,
proceed as follows:
X
Remove the valve cap of the tire that is to be
checked.
X
Press the tire pressure gauge securely onto
the valve.
X
Read the tire pressure and compare it to the
recommended value on the Tire and Loading
Information placard or the tire pressure table
(
Y page 296).
X
If the tire pressure is too low, increase the tire
pressure to the recommended value.
X
If the tire pressure is too high, release air. To
do so, press down the metal pin in the valve,
using the tip of apen for example. Then check
the tire pressure againusing the tire pressure
checker.
X
Screw the valve cap onto the valve.
X
Repeatthese steps for the other tires.
Tire pressure loss warning system
(Canada only)
General notes
While the vehicle is in motion, the tire pressure
loss warning system monitors the set tire pres-
sure using the rotational speed of the wheels.
This enables the system to detect significant
pressure loss in atire. If the speed of rotation of
awheel changes as aresult of aloss of pressure,
acorresponding warning message will appearin
the multifunction display.
You can recognize the tire pressure loss warning
by the Run Flat Indicator Active Press
'OK' to Restart message in the multifunction
displayinthe Serv.
menu. Information on the
message displaycan be found in the "Restarting
the tire pressure loss warning system" section
(
Y page 300).
Important safety notes
The tire pressure warning system does not warn
you of an incorrectly set tire pressure. Observe
the notes on the recommended tire pressure
(
Y page 296).
The tire pressure loss warning does not replace
the need to regularly check the tire pressure. An
even loss of pressure on several tires at the
Tire pressure
299
Wheels and tires
Z
same time cannot be detected by the tire pres-
sure loss warning system.
The tire pressure monitor is not able to warn you
of asudden loss of pressure, e.g. if the tire is
penetrated by aforeign object. In the event of a
sudden loss of pressure, bring the vehicle to a
halt by braking carefully.Avoid abrupt steering
movements.
The function of the tire pressure loss warning
system is limited or delayed if:
R
snow chains are mounted on your vehicle's
tires.
R
road conditions are wintry.
R
you are driving on sand or gravel.
R
you adopt avery sporty driving style (corner-
ing at high speeds or driving with high rates of
acceleration).
R
you are driving with aheavy load (in the vehi-
cle or on the roof)
Restarting the tire pressure loss warn-
ing system
Restart the tire pressure loss warning system if
you have:
R
changed the tire pressure
R
changed the wheels or tires
R
mounted new wheels or tires
X
Before restarting, make sure that the tire
pressures are set properly on all four tires for
the respective operating conditions.
The recommended tire pressure can be found
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the B-pillar. Additionally, atire pressure
table is attached to the fuel filler flap. The tire
pressure loss warning system can only give
reliable warnings if you have set the correct
tire pressure. If an incorrect tire pressure is
set, these incorrect values will be monitored.
X
Also observe the notes in the section on tire
pressures (
Y page 296).
X
Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2
in the ignition lock (
Y page 124).
X
Press = or ; on the steering wheel to
select the Serv.
menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
Tire Pressure
.
X
Press the a button.
The Run Flat Indicator Active Press
'OK' to Restart message appears in the
multifunction display.
If you wish to confirm the restart:
X
Press the a button.
The Tire Pressure Now OK?
message
appears in the multifunction display.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select Yes.
X
Press the a button.
The Run Flat Indicator Restarted
mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
After ateach-in period, the tire pressure loss
warning system will monitor the set tire pres-
sures of all four tires.
If you wish to cancel the restart:
X
Press the % button.
or
X
If the Tire Pressure Now OK? message
appears, press the 9 or : button to
select Cancel
.
X
Press the a button.
The tire pressure values stored at the last
restart will continue to be monitored.
Tire pressure monitor
General notes
If atire pressure monitor is installed, the vehi-
cle's wheels have sensors that monitor the tire
pressures in all four tires. The tire pressure mon-
itor warns you if the pressure drops in one or
more of the tires. The tire pressure monitor only
functions if the corresponding sensors are
installed in all wheels.
Information on tire pressures is displayed in the
multifunction display. After afew minutes of
driving, the current tire pressure of each tire is
shown in the Serv.
menu of the multifunction
display, see illustration (example).
For information on the message display, refer to
the "Checking the tire pressure electronically"
section (
Y page 302).
300
Tire pressure
Wheels and tires
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Eachtire, includingthe spare(if provided),
should be checkedatleast once every two
weekswhen cold and inflated to thepressure
recommended by thevehiclemanufacturer
on theTireand Loading Information placard
on thedriver'sdoor B-pillar or thetirepres-
surelabel on theinside of thefuel filler flap.If
your vehiclehas tires of adifferentsizethan
thesizeindicated on theTireand Loading
Information placard or, if available, thetire
pressurelabel, you should determine the
proper tire pressurefor those tires.
As an added safetyfeature, your vehiclehas
been equipped withatirepressuremonitoring
system (TPMS) that illuminatesalow tire pres-
suretelltale when oneormoreofyour tires
are significantly underinflated. Accordingly,
when thelow tire pressuretelltale lights up,
you should stop and checkyour tires as soon
as possible,and inflatethemtothe proper
pressure. Drivingonasignificantly underin-
flated tire causes thetiretooverheat and can
lead to tire failure.
Underinflation also reducesfuel efficiency
and tire tread life,and may affectthe vehicle's
handlingand stopping ability. Pleasenotethat
theTPMSisnot asubstitutefor proper tire
maintenance,and it is th
edriver'sre
sponsi-
bilitytomaintaincorrect tire pressure, evenif
underinflation has notreached thelevel to
triggerillumination of theTPMSlow tire pres-
suretelltale.
Your vehiclehas also been equipped witha
TPMSmalfunction indicator to indicatewhen
thesystem is notoperating properly. The
TPMSmalfunction indicator is combined with
thelow tire pressuretelltale. When thesys-
temdetects amalfunction,the warning lamp
will flashfor approximately aminute and then
remain continuously illuminated. This
sequencewill be repeated every time thevehi-
cle is started as longasthe malfunction
exists. When themalfunction indicator is illu-
minated, thesystem may notbeable to detect
or signal low tire pressureasintended.
TPMSmalfunctionsmay occur for avarietyof
reasons, includingthe installation of incom-
patible replacementoralternate tires or
wheels on thevehiclethatpreventthe TPMS
from functioning properly. Always checkthe
TPMSmalfunction telltale after replacing one
or moretires or wheels on your vehicleto
ensurethatthe replacementoralternate Tires
and wheels allow theTPMStocontinue to
function properly.
It is thedriver'sresponsibilitytoset thetire
pressuretothatrecommended for cold tires
whichissuitable for theoperating situation
(
Y page 296). Notethatthe correcttirepressure
for thecurrentoperating situation must first be
taught-in to thetirepressuremonitor. If asub-
stantial loss of pressureoccurs, thewarning
threshold for thewarning message is aligned to
thetaught-in referencevalues. Restart thetire
pressuremonitor after adjusting thepressureof
thecoldtires (
Y page 302). The currentpres-
sures are saved as newreferencevalues. As a
result,awarning message will appear if thetire
pressuredrops significantly.
The tire pressuremonitor does notwarn you
of
an
incorrectlyset tire pressure. Observethe
notesonthe recommended tire pressure
(
Y page 296).
The tire pressuremonitor is notable to warn you
of asuddenloss of pressure, e.g. if thetireis
penetrated by aforeign object. In theevent of a
suddenloss of pressure, bringthe vehicletoa
halt by braking carefully. Avoid abruptsteering
movements.
The tire pressuremonitor has ayellow warning
lamp in theinstrumentclusterfor indicating
pressureloss or amalfunction.Whether the
warning lamp flashes or lights up indicates
whether atirepressureistoo low or thetire
pressuremonitor is malfunctioning:
R
if thewarning lamp is lit continuously, thetire
pressureonone or moretires is significantly
toolow. The tire pressuremonitor is notmal-
functioning.
R
if thewarning lamp flashes for arounda
minute and then remainslit constantly, the
tire pressuremonitor is malfunctioning.
In addition to thewarning lamp,amessage
appearsinthe multifunction display. Observe
Tire pressure
301
Wheels and tires
Z
the information on displaymessages
(
Y page 217).
It maytake up to ten minutesfor amalfunction
of the tire pressure monitor to be indicated.A
malfunctionwillbeindicated by the tire pres-
sure warning lamp flashing for approximately
one minute and thenremaining lit. When the
malfunctionhas been rectified, the tire pressure
warning lamp goes outafter afew minutesof
driving.
The tire pressure values indicated by the on-
boardcomputermay differfromthosemeas-
ured at agas stationwithapressure gauge. The
tire pressures shown by the on-board computer
refer to thosemeasured at sealevel.Athigh
altitudes, the tire pressure values indicated by a
pressure gaugeare higherthanthoseshown by
the on-board computer. In thiscase, do not
reduce the tire pressures.
The operationofthe tire pressure monitor can
be affectedbyinterferencefromradio transmit-
ting equipment (e.g. radioheadphones, two-way
radios) thatmay be being operated in or nearthe
vehicle.
Checkingthe tire pressure electroni-
cally
X
Make sure thatthe SmartKeyisinposition 2
in the ignition lock (
Y page 124).
X
Press = or ; on the steering wheelto
select the Serv.
menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
TirePressure
.
X
Press the a button.
The current tire pressure of each tire is shown
in the multifunctiondisplay.
If the vehiclewas parked for longerthan
20 minutes, the Tirepressure willbe
displayed after drivingafew minutes
message is shown.
After ateach-inprocess, the tire pressure mon-
itorautomaticallydetects new wheels or new
sensors. As long as aclear allocation of the tire
pressure valuetothe individual wheels is not
possible, the Tire
Pressure Monitor Active
message is shown insteadofthe tire pressure
display. The tire pressures arealready being
monitored.
Tire pressure monitorwarning mes-
sages
If the tire pressure monitor detects apressure
loss in one or moretires, awarning message is
shown in the multifunctiondisplay.The yellow
tire pressure warning lamp thenlights up.
R
If the Please CorrectTirePressure
message appearsinthe multifunctiondisplay,
the tire pressure in at leastone tire is too low.
The tire pressure must be correctedwhenthe
opportunity arises.
R
If the Check TirePressure message
appearsinthe multifunctiondisplay,the tire
pressure in one or moretireshas dropped
significantly. The tiresmustbechecked.
R
If the Tire Pressure Warning Tire Fail‐
ure message appears, the tire pressure in one
or moretireshas dropped suddenly. The tires
must be checked.
Observe the instructions and safety notesinthe
displaymessagesinthe "Tires" section
(
Y page 217).
If the wheelpositions on the vehicleare rotated,
the tire pressures maybedisplayed for the
wrong positions for ashort time. Thisisrectified
after afew minutesofdriving, and the tire pres-
sures aredisplayed for the correct positions.
Restartingthe tire pressure monitor
When yourestartthe tire pressure monitor, all
existing warning messagesare deleted and the
warning lamps go out. The monitor uses the cur-
rentlyset tire pressures as the reference values
for monitoring. In mostcases,the tire pressure
monitor will automaticallydetect the new refer-
ence values after youhavechangedthe tire
pressure. However, youcan also setreference
values manuallyasdescribedhere. The tire
pressure monitor thenmonitors the new tire
pressure values.
X
Set the tire pressure to the valuerecommen-
dedfor the corresponding drivingsituationon
the Tire and Loading Informationplacard on
the driver's side B-pillar (
Y page 296).
Youcan findmoretire pressure values for
various operating conditions in the tire pres-
sure table insidethe fuel fillerflap
(
Y page 141).
X
Make sure thatthe tire pressure is correct on
allfourwheels.
302
Tire pressure
Wheelsand tires
X
Make sure that the SmartKey is in position 2
in the ignition lock (
Y page 124).
X
Press = or ; on the steering wheel to
select the Serv.
menu.
X
Press the 9 or : button to select
Tire Pressure
.
X
Press the a button.
The multifunction display shows the current
tire pressure for each tire or the Tire pres‐
sure will be displayed after driving
afew minutes message.
X
Press the : button.
The multifunction display shows the Use
Current Pressures as New Reference
Values message.
If you wish to confirm the restart:
X
Press the a button.
The Tire
Press. Monitor Restarted mes-
sage appears in the multifunction display.
After driving for afew minutes, the system
checkswhether the current tire pressures are
within the specified range. The new tire pres-
sures are then accepted as referencevalues
and monitored.
If you wish to cancel the restart:
X
Press the % button.
The tire pressure values stored at the last
restart will continue to be monitored.
Radio type approval for the tire pres-
sure monitor
Country Radio type approval number
USA FCC ID: MRXMW2433A
FCC ID: MRXGG4
FCC ID: MRXMC34MA4
Canada IC: 2546A-MW2433A
IC: 2546A-GG4
IC: 2546A-MC34MA4
Loading the vehicle
Instruction labels for tires and loads
G
WARNING
Overloaded tires can overheat, causing a
blowout. Overloaded tires can also impair the
steering and driving characteristics and lead
to brake failure. There is arisk of accident.
Observe the load rating of the tires. The load
rating must be at least half of the GAWR of
your vehicle. Never overload the tires by
exceeding the maximum load.
Two instruction labels on your vehicle show the
maximum possible load.
(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard is
on the B-pillar on the driver's side. The Tire
and Loading Information placard shows the
maximum permissible number of occu-
pants and the maximum permissible vehicle
load. It also contains details of the tire sizes
and corresponding pressures for tires
mounted at the factory.
(2) The vehicle identification plate is on the B-
pillaronthe driver's side. The vehicle iden-
tification plate informs you of the gross
vehicle weight rating. It is made up of the
vehicle weight, all vehicle occupants, the
fuel and the cargo. You can also find infor-
mation about the maximum gross axle
weight rating on the front and rear axle.
The maximum gross axle weight rating is
the maximum weight that can be carried by
one axle (front or rear axle). Never exceed
the maximum load or the maximum gross
axle weight rating for the front or rear axle.
:
B-pillar, driver's side
Loading the vehicle
303
Wheels and tires
Z
Maximum permissible gross vehicle
weight rating
X
Specification for maximumgross vehicle
weight : is listed in the Tire and Loading
Informationplacard: "The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed
XXX kilograms or XXX lbs."
The gross weight of all vehicleoccupants, load
and luggage must not exceed the specified
value.
i
The specifications shownonthe Tire and
Loading Informationplacard in the illustration
are examples. The maximumpermissible
gross vehicleweight rating is vehicle-specific
and may differfrom that in the illustration.
You can find the validmaximumpermissible
gross vehicleweight rating for yourvehicleon
the Tire and Loading Informationplacard.
Number of seats
Maximumnumber of seats : indicates the
maximumnumber of occupants allowedto
travel in the vehicle. This information can be
found on the Tire and Loading Informationplac-
ard.
i
The specifications shownonthe Tire and
Loading Informationplacard in the illustration
are examples. The number of seats is vehicle-
specific and can differfrom the details shown.
The number of seats in yourvehiclecan be
found on the Tire and Loading Information
placard.
Determiningthe correct load limit
Step-by-stepinstructions
The following steps have been developed as
required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
CodeofU.S. FederalRegulations, Part 575 pur-
suant to the "National Trafficand Motor Vehicle
Safety Act of 1966".
X
Step 1: Locate the statement "The combined
weight of occupants and cargo should never
exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs." on yourvehicle’s
Tire and Loading Informationplacard.
X
Step 2: Determine the combined weight of
the driverand passengers that willberiding in
yourvehicle.
X
Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of the
driverand passengers from XXX kilograms or
XXX lbs.
X
Step 4: The resulting figure equals the avail-
ableamount of cargo and luggage loadcapa-
city. For example, if the "XXX"amount equals
1400 lbs and there willbefive 150-lb pas-
sengers in yourvehicle, the amount of avail-
ablecargo and luggage loadcapacity is
650 lbs (1400 -750 (5 x150) = 650 lbs).
X
Step 5: Determine the combined weight of
luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehi-
cle. That weight may not safelyexceed the
available cargo and luggage loadcapacity cal-
culated in step 4.
Example:steps 1to3
The following table showsexamples on how to calculate total and cargo loadcapacities with varying
seating configurations and number and size of occupants. The following examples use aloadlimitof
304
Loading the vehicle
Wheels and tires
1500 lbs (680 kg). This is for illustration purposes only. Make sure you are using the actualload
limitfor yourvehicle stated on yourvehicle's Tire and Loading Information placard (
Y page303).
The greater the combined weight of the occupants, the lower the maximumluggage load.
Step 1
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
Combinedmaximum
weight of occupants
and cargo (data from
the Tire and Loading
Information placard)
1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg) 1500 lbs (680 kg)
Step 2
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
Number of peoplein
the vehicle (driverand
occupants)
5 3 1
Distributionofthe
occupants
Front: 2
Rear: 3
Front: 1
Rear: 2
Front: 1
Weight of the occu-
pants
Occupant 1: 150 lbs
(68 kg)
Occupant 2: 180 lbs
(82 kg)
Occupant 3: 160 lbs
(73 kg)
Occupant 4: 140 lbs
(63 kg)
Occupant 5: 120 lbs
(54 kg)
Occupant 1: 200 lbs
(91 kg)
Occupant 2: 190 lbs
(86 kg)
Occupant 3: 150 lbs
(68 kg)
Occupant 1: 150 lbs
(68 kg)
Gross weight of all
occupants
750 lbs (340 kg) 540 lbs (245 kg) 150 lbs (68 kg)
Step 3
Example 1 Example 2 Example 3
Permissibleload (maxi-
mum gross vehicle
weight rating from the
Tire and Loading Infor-
mation placard minus
the gross weight of all
occupants)
1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò
750 lbs (340 kg) =
750 lbs (340 kg)
1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò
540 lbs (245 kg)
=960 lbs (435 kg)
1500 lbs (680 kg) Ò
150 lbs (68 kg) =
1350 lbs (612 kg)
Vehicle identification plate
Even if you have calculated the total cargo care-
fully,you should still make sure that the gross
vehicle weight rating and the gross axle weight
rating are not exceeded. Detailscan be found on
the vehicle identification plate on the B-pillar on
the driver's side of the vehicle (
Y page303).
Loading the vehicle
305
Wheels and tires
Z
Permissible Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
(GVWR): the gross weight of the vehicle, all pas-
sengers, load and trailer load/noseweight (if
applicable) must not exceed the permissible
gross vehicle weight.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): the maxi-
mum permissible weight that can be carried by
one axle (front or rear axle).
To ensure that your vehicle does not exceed the
maximum permissible values (gross vehicle
weight and maximum gross axle weight rating),
have your loaded vehicle (including driver, occu-
pants, cargo, and full trailer load if applicable)
weighed on asuitable vehicle weighbridge.
All about wheelsand tires
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Stand-
ards
Overview of Tire Quality Grading Stand-
ards
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards are U.S.
governmentspecifications. Their purpose is to
provide drivers with uniform reliable information
on tire performance data. Tire manufacturers
have to grade tires using three performance fac-
tors: : tread wear grade, ; traction grade and
= temperature grade. These regulations do not
apply to Canada. Nevertheless, all tires sold in
North America are provided with the corre-
sponding quality grading markings on the side-
wall of the tire.
Quality grades can be found, where applicable,
on the tire sidewallbetween tread shoulder and
maximum section width.
Example:
R
Treadwear grade: 200
R
Traction grade: AA
R
Temperaturegrade: A
All passenger car tires must conformtothe stat-
utory safety requirements in addition to these
grades.
i
The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-
cific and may deviate from the values in the
illustration.
Treadwear
The treadwear grade is acomparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditionsonaspecified U.S.
governmentcourse. For example, atire graded
150 would wear one and one-half times as well
on the governmentcourse as atire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends upon
the actual conditionsoftheir use, however, and
may depart significantly from the norm due to
variations in driving habits, service practices
and differences in road characteristics and cli-
mate.
Traction
G
WARNING
The traction grade assigned to this tire is
based on straight-ahead braking traction
tests, and does not include acceleration, cor-
nering, hydroplaning, or peak traction char-
acteristics.
!
Avoid wheelspin. This can lead to damage to
the drive train.
The traction grades –from highest to lowest
are AA, A, Band C. Those grades represent the
tire's ability to stop on wet pavement as meas-
ured under controlled conditionsonspecified
governmenttest surfaces of asphalt and con-
crete. Atire marked Cmay have poor traction
performance.
The safe speed on awet, snow covered or icy
road is always lower than on dry road surfaces.
You should pay special attention to road condi-
tions when temperatures are around freezing
point.
Mercedes-Benzrecommends aminimum tread
depth of ã in (4 mm) on all four winter tires.
306
All about wheels and tires
Wheels and tires
Observe the legally required minimum tire tread
depth (
Y page 294). Winter tires can reduce the
braking distance on snow-covered surfaces in
comparison with summer tires. The braking dis-
tance is still much further than on surfaces that
are not icy or covered with snow. Take appro-
priate care when driving.
Further information on winter tires (M+S tires)
(
Y page 295).
Temperature
G
WARNING
The temperature grade for this tire is estab-
lished for atire that is properly inflated and
not overloaded.Excessive speed, underinfla-
tion, or excessive loading, either separately or
in combination, can cause excessive heat
build-up and possible tire failure.
The temperature grades are A(the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire's resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions
on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sus-
tained high temperature can cause the material
of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire
failure. The grade Ccorresponds to alevel of
performance which all passenger car tires must
meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety
Standard No. 109. Grades Band Arepresent
higher levels of performance on the laboratory
test wheel than the minimum required by law.
Tire labeling
Overview
:
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
(
Y page 311)
;
Department of Transportation, Tire Identifi-
cation Number (
Y page 310)
=
Maximum load rating (Y page 309)
?
Maximum tire pressures (Y page 299)
A
Manufacturer
B
Tire material (Y page 310)
C
Tire size designation, load-bearing capacity
and speed rating (
Y page 307)
D
Load index (Y page 309)
E
Tire name
The markings described above are on the tire in
addition to the tire name (sales designation) and
the manufacturer's name.
i
Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
from the data in the example.
Tire size designation, load-bearing
capacity and speed rating
G
WARNING
Exceeding the stated tire load-bearing capa-
city and the approved maximum speed could
lead to tire damage or the tire bursting. There
is arisk of accident.
Therefore, only use tire types and sizes
approved for your vehicle model. Observe the
All about wheels and tires
307
Wheels and tires
Z
tire load rating and speedrating required for
your vehicle.
:
Tire width
;
Nominalaspectratio in %
=
Tire code
?
Rimdiameter
A
Loadbearing index
B
Speed rating
General: depending on the manufacturer's
standards,the size imprinted in the tire wall may
not contain any letters or maycontain one letter
thatprecedes the size description.
If there is no letter preceding the size descrip-
tion(as shown above): these arepassenger
vehicletiresaccording to Europeanmanufac-
turing standards.
If "P"precedes the size description: these are
passengervehicletiresaccording to U.S. man-
ufacturingstandards.
If "LT" precedes the size description: these are
light truck tiresaccording to U.S. manufacturing
standards.
If "T"precedes the size description: compact
emergency wheels with high tire pressure that
areonlydesignedfor temporary useinanemer-
gency.
Tire width:tire width : shows the nominal tire
width in millimeters.
Aspectratio: aspect ratio ; is the size ratio
between the tire height and tire width and is
shown in percent. The aspect ratio is calculated
by dividing the tire width by the tire height.
Tire code:tire code = specifiesthe tire type.
"R"represents radial tires; "D" represents diag-
onalt
ires
; "B" represents diagonalra
dial tires.
Optionally,tireswithamaximum speedofover
149 mph (240 km/h)may have "ZR" in the size
description, depending on the manufacturer
(e.g. 245/40ZR18).
Rim diameter: rim diameter ? is the diameter
of the bead seat, not the diameterofthe rim
flange.The rimdiameterisspecifiedin
inches (in).
Load-bearingindex: load-bearing index A is a
numerical codethatspecifiesthe maximum
load-bearing capacity of atire.
Do not overload the tiresbyexceeding the
specifiedloadlimit.The maximumpermissible
load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Informationplacard on the B-pillar on
the driver's side (
Y page 303).
Example:
Load-bearingindex 91 indicates amaximum
load of 1,356 lb (615kg) thatthe tirescan bear.
For furtherinformation on the maximum tire
load in kilograms and lbs, see(
Y page 309).
For furtherinformation on the load bearing
index, see"Load index" (
Y page 309).
Speed rating:speedrating B specifiesthe
approved maximum speedofthe tire.
i
Tire data is vehicle-specific and maydeviate
fromthe data in the example.
Regardlessofthe speedrating,alwaysobserve
the
speedlimits. Drive carefullyand adaptyour
drivingstyle to the trafficconditions.
Summertires
Index Speed rating
Q up to 100 mph (160km/h)
R up to 106 mph (170km/h)
S up to 112 mph (180km/h)
T up to 118 mph (190km/h)
H up to 130 mph (210km/h)
V up to 149 mph (240km/h)
W up to 168 mph (270km/h)
Y up to 186 mph (300km/h)
ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300km/h)
ZR...(..Y) over186 mph (300 km/h)
ZR over149 mph (240 km/h)
R
Optionally,tireswithamaximum speedof
over149 mph (240km/h)may have "ZR" in
308
Allabout wheels andtires
Wheelsand tires
the size description, depending on the man-
ufacturer (e.g. 245/40ZR18).
The service specification is made up of load-
bearing index A and speedrating B.
R
If the size description of your tire includes
"ZR" and there arenoservice specifications,
askthe tire manufacturer in order to findout
the maximum speed.
If aservice specification is available, the max-
imum speedislimited according to the speed
rating in the service specification. Example:
245/40ZR1897Y.Inthis example,"97 Y" is
the service specification. The letter "Y" rep-
resents the speed rating. The maximum
speed of the tire is limited to 186 mph
(300 km/h).
R
The size descriptionfor all tires with maxi-
mum speedsofover 186 mph (300 km/h)
must include "ZR" and the service specifica-
tion must be given in parentheses.Example:
275/40 ZR 18 (99 Y).Speed rating "(Y)" indi-
cates that the maximum speed of the tire is
over 186 mph (300 km/h). Ask the tire man-
ufacturer aboutthe maximum speed.
All-weather tires and winter tires
Index Speed rating
QM+S
1
up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
TM+S
1
up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
HM+S
1
up to 130 mph (210 km/h)
VM+S
1
up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
i
Not all tires with the M+S marking provide
the driving characteristics of winter tires. In
addition to the M+S marking, winter tires also
have the i snowflake symbolonthe tire
wall. Tires with this marking fulfill the require-
ments of the Rubber Manufacturers Associa-
tion (RMA) and the Rubber Association of
Canada (RAC) regarding the tire traction on
snow. They have been especially developed
for driving on snow.
An electronic speed limiter prevents yourvehi-
cle from exceeding aspeed of 130 mph
(210 km/h).
The speed rating of tires mounted at the factory
may be higher than the maximum speed that the
electronic speed limiter permits.
Make sure that yourtires have the required
speed rating, e.g. when buying new tires. The
required speed rating for yourvehicle can be
found in the "Tires" section (
Y page 316).
Further information aboutreading tire data can
be obtained from any qualifiedspecialist work-
shop.
Load index
In addition to the load-bearing index, load
index : may be imprinted after the letters that
identify speed rating on the sidewall of the tire.
Speed rating (
Y page 307).
R
If no specification is given: no text (as in the
example above), represents astandard load
(SL) tire
R
XL or ExtraLoad: represents areinforced tire
R
Light Load: represents alightload tire
R
C, D, E: represents aload range that depends
on the maximum load that the tire can carry at
acertain pressure
i
Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
from the data in the example.
Maximum load rating
1
Or M+S i for winter tires.
Allabout wheels and tires
309
Wheelsand tires
Z
Maximum tire load : is the maximum permis-
sible weight for which the tire is approved.
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
specified load limit. The maximum permissible
load can be found on the vehicle's Tire and
Loading Information placard on the B-pillar on
the driver's side (
Y page 303).
i
The actual values for tires are vehicle-spe-
cific and may deviate from the values in the
illustration.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)
US tire regulations stipulate that every tire man-
ufacturer or retreader must imprint aTIN in or on
the sidewall of each tire produced.
The TIN is aunique identification number. The
TIN enables the tire manufacturers or retreaders
to inform purchasers of recalls and other safety-
relevant matters. It makes it possible for the
purchaser to easily identify the affected tires.
The TIN is made up of manufacturer identifica-
tion code ;,tire size =,tire type code ? and
manufacturing date A.
DOT (Department of Transportation): tire
symbol : marks that the tire complies with the
requirements of the U.S. DepartmentofTrans-
portation.
Manufacturer identification code: manufac-
turer identification code ; provides details on
the tire manufacturer. New tires have acode
with two symbols. Retreaded tires have acode
with four symbols.
For further information about retreaded tires,
see (
Y page 316).
Tire size: identifier = describes the tire size.
Tire type code: tire type code ? can be used by
the manufacturer as acode to describe specific
characteristics of the tire.
Date of manufacture: date of manufacture A
provides information about the age of atire. The
first and second positions represent the week of
manufacture, startingwith "01" for the first cal-
endar week. Positions three and four represent
the year of manufacture. For example, atire that
is marked with "3208", was manufactured in
week 32 in 2008.
i
Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
from the data in the example.
Tire characteristics
This information describes the type of tire cord
and the number of layers in sidewall : and
under tire tread ;.
i
Tire data is vehicle-specific and may deviate
from the data in the example.
Definition of termsfor tires and loading
Tire ply composition and material used
Describes the number of plies or the number of
layers of rubber-coated fabric in the tire tread
and sidewall. These are made of steel, nylon,
polyester and other materials.
Bar
Metric unit for tire pressure. 14.5038 pounds
per square inch (psi) and 100 kilopascals (kPa)
are the equivalent of 1bar.
DOT (Department of Transportation)
DOT-marked tires fulfill the requirements of the
USDepartmentofTransportation.
Normal occupant weight
The number of occupants for which the vehicle
is designed multiplied by 68 kilograms (150 lbs).
310
All about wheels and tires
Wheels and tires
Uniform TireQualityGrading Standards
Auniformstandard to grade the quality of tires
with regards to tread quality, tire traction and
temperature characteristics. The quality grad-
ing assessmentismade by the manufacturer
following specificationsfrom the U.S.govern-
ment.The ratings are molded intothe sidewall of
the tire.
Recommended tirepressures
The recommended tire pressure applies to the
tires mounted at the factory.
The Tire and Loading Information placard con-
tains the recommended tire pressures for cold
tires on afully loaded vehicle and for the maxi-
mum permissible vehicle speed.
The tire pressure table contains the recommen-
ded pressures for cold tires for various operat-
ing conditions, i.e. differingload and speed con-
ditions.
Increased vehicle weight due to optional
equipment
The combined weight of all standard and
optional equipment available for the vehicle,
regardless of whether it is actually installed on
the vehicle or not.
Rim
This is the part of the wheel on which the tire is
mounted.
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
The GAWR is the maximum gross axle weight
rating. The actual load on an axle must never
exceed the gross axle weight rating. The gross
axle weight ratingcan be found on the vehicle
identification plate on the B-pillar on the driver's
side.
Speed rating
The speed ratingispart of the tire identification.
It specifies the speed range for which the tire is
approved.
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
The gross vehicle weight includes the weight of
the vehicle includingfuel, tools, the spare wheel,
accessories installed, occupants, luggage and
the drawbar noseweight,ifapplicable. The gross
vehicle weight must not exceed the gross vehi-
cle weight ratingGVWR as specified on the vehi-
cle identification plate on the B-pillar on the
driver'sside.
GVWR(Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
The GVWR is the maximum permissible gross
weight of afully loaded vehicle (the weight of the
vehicle includingall accessories, occupants,
fuel, luggage and the
drawbar noseweight,if
applicable).
The gross vehicle weight ratingis
specified on the vehicle identification plate on
the B-pillar on the driver'sside.
Maximum loaded vehicle weight
The maximum weight is the sum of:
R
the curb weight of the vehicle
R
the weight of the accessories
R
the load limit
R
the weight of the factory installed optional
equipment
Kilopascal (kPa)
Metric unit for tire pressure. 6.9 kPa corre-
sponds to 1psi. Another unit for tire pressure is
bar. 100 kilopascals (kPa) are the equivalent of
1bar.
Load index
In addition to the load-bearingindex,the load
index may also be imprinted on the sidewall of
the tire. This specifies the load-bearingcapacity
more precisely.
Curb weight
The weight of avehicle with standard equipment
includingthe maximum capacityoffuel, oil and
coolant.Italso includes the air-conditioningsys-
tem and optional equipment if these are instal-
led in the vehicle, but does not include passen-
gers or luggage.
Maximum load rating
The maximum tire load is the maximum permis-
sible weight in kilogramsorlbs for which atire is
approved.
Maximum permissible tirepressure
Maximum permissible tire pressure for one tire.
Maximum load on one tire
Maximum load on one tire. This is calculated by
dividing the maximum axle load of one axle by
two.
All about wheels and tires
311
Wheels and tires
Z
PSI (pounds per squareinch)
Astandard unit of measure for tire pressure.
Aspect ratio
Relationship between tire height and tire width
in percent.
Tire pressure
This is pressure inside the tire applying an out-
ward force to each square inch of the tire's sur-
face. The tire pressure is specified in pounds per
square inch (psi), in kilopascal (kPa) or in bar.
The tire pressure should only be corrected when
the tires are cold.
Cold tire pressure
The tires are cold:
R
if the vehicle has been parked with the tires
out of direct sunlight for at least three hours
and
R
if the vehicle has not been driven further than
1mile (1.6 km)
Tread
The part of the tire that comes into contact with
the road.
Bead
The tire bead ensures that the tire sits securely
on the wheel. There are several steel wires in the
bead to prevent the tire from coming loose from
the wheel rim.
Sidewall
The part of the tire between the tread and the
bead.
Weight of optional extras
The combined weight of those optional extras
that weigh more than the replaced standard
parts and more than 2.3 kg (5 lbs). These
optional extras, such as high-performance
brakes, level control, aroof rack or ahigh-per-
formancebattery, are not included in the curb
weight and the weight of the accessories.
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
This is aunique identifier which can be used by
atire manufacturer to identify tires, for example
for aproduct recall, and thus identify the pur-
chasers. The TIN is made up of the manufactur-
er's identity code, tire size, tire type code and
the manufacturing date.
Load bearing index
The load bearing index (also load index) is acode
that contains the maximum load bearing capa-
city of atire.
Traction
Traction is the result of friction between the tires
and the road surface.
Treadwear indicators
Narrow bars (tread wear bars) that are distrib-
uted over the tire tread. If the tire tread is level
with the bars, the wear limit of á in (1.6 mm)
has been reached.
Occupant distribution
The distribution of occupants in avehicle at their
designated seating positions.
Total load limit
Nominal load and luggage load plus 68 kg
(150lbs)multiplied by the number of seats in
the vehicle.
Changing awheel
Flat tire
The "Breakdown assistance" section
(
Y page 278) contains information and notes on
how to deal with aflat tire. Information on driv-
ing with MOExtended tires in the event of aflat
tire can be found under "MOExtended tires (tires
with run-flat characteristics" (
Y page 279).
Rotating the wheels
G
WARNING
Interchanging the front and rear wheels may
severely impair the driving characteristics if
the wheels or tires have different dimensions.
The wheel brakes or suspension components
may also be damaged. There is arisk of acci-
dent.
Rotate front and rear wheels only if the wheels
and tires are of the same dimensions.
!
On vehicles equippedwith atire pressure
monitor,electronic components are located
in the wheel.
312
Changing awheel
Wheels and tires
Tire-mounting tools should not be used near
the valve. This could damage the electronic
components.
Only have tires changed at aqualified spe-
cialist workshop.
Observe the instructions and safety notes in the
"Changing awheel" section (
Y page 312).
The wear patternsonthe front and rear tires
differ, depending on the operating conditions.
Rotate the wheels before aclear wear pattern
has formed on the tires. Fronttires typically
wear more on the shoulders and the rear tires in
the center.
On vehicles that have the same size front and
rear wheels, you can rotatethe wheels accord-
ing to the intervals in the tire manufacturer's
warranty book in your vehicle documents. If no
warranty book is available, the tires should be
rotated every 3,000 to 6,000 miles (5,000 to
10,000km).Dependingontire wear, this may
be required earlier. Do not change the direction
of wheel rotation.
Clean the contact surfaces of the wheel and the
brake disc thoroughly every time awheel is rota-
ted. Check the tire pressure and, if necessary,
restart the tire pressure loss warning system
(Canada only) or the tire pressure monitor (USA
only).
Direction of rotation
Tires with aspecified direction of rotation have
additional benefits,e.g. if there is arisk of hydro-
planing. These advantages can only be gained if
the tires are installed corresponding to the
direction of rotation.
An arrow on the sidewall of the tire indicates its
correctdirection of rotation.
Storing wheels
Storewheels that are not being used in acool,
dry and preferably dark place. Protectthe tires
from oil, grease, gasoline and diesel.
Mounting awheel
Preparing the vehicle
X
Stop the vehicle on solid, non-slippery and
level ground.
X
Apply the electric parking brake manually.
X
Bring the front wheels into the straight-ahead
position.
X
Shift the transmission to position P.
X
Switch off the engine.
X
Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: remove the
SmartKey from the ignition lock.
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function
or KEYLESS-GO: open the driver's door.
The vehicle electronics now have status 0.
This is the same as the SmartKey having been
removed.
X
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO start-function
or KEYLESS-GO: remove the Start/Stop but-
ton from the ignition lock (
Y page 124).
X
Make sure that the engine cannot be started
via your smartphone(
Y page 125).
X
If included in the vehicle equipment, remove
the tire-change tool kit from the vehicle.
X
Safeguard the vehicle against rolling away
(
Y page 143).
Securing the vehicle to prevent it from
rolling away
If your vehicle is equipped with awheel chock,it
can be found in the tire-change tool kit
(
Y page 278).
The folding wheel chock is an additional safety
measure to prevent the vehicle from rolling
away,for example when changing awheel.
Changing awheel
313
Wheels and tires
Z
X
Fold both plates upwards :.
X
Fold outlower plate ;.
X
Guide the lugs on the lower plate fully into the
openings in base plate =.
X
Place chocks or other suitableitems under
the front and rearofthe wheel that is diago-
nally opposite the wheel youwishtochange.
Raising the vehicle
G
WARNING
If youdonot positionthe jack correctly at the
appropriate jacking point of the vehicle, the
jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.
There is arisk of injury.
Only positionthe jack at the appropriate jack-
ing point of the vehicle. The base of the jack
mustbepositioned vertically,directly under
the jacking point of the vehicle.
!
The jack is designedexclusively for jacking
up the vehicle at the jacking points. Other-
wise, your vehicle could be damaged.
Observe the following whenraising the vehi-
cle:
R
To raise the vehicle, only use the vehicle-spe-
cificjack that has beentested and approved
by Mercedes-Benz. If usedincorrectly,the
jack could tip over with the vehicle raised.
R
The jack is designedonly to raise and holdthe
vehicle for ashorttime while awheel is being
changed. It mustnot be usedfor performing
maintenance workunder the vehicle.
R
Avoid changing the wheel on uphilland down-
hillslopes.
R
Beforeraising the vehicle, secure it from roll-
ing away by applying the parking brake and
inserting wheel chocks. Do not disengage the
parking brake while the vehicle is raised.
R
The jack mustbeplaced on afirm, flatand
non-slipsurface.Onaloose surface,alarge,
flat, load-bearing underlay mustbeused. On a
slippery surface,anon-slipunderlay mustbe
used, e.g. rubber mats.
R
Do not use wooden blocks or similarobjects
as ajack underlay.Othe
rwise, the jack will not
be able to achieve its load-bearing capacity
duetothe restricted height.
R
Make surethat the distance between the
underside of the tires and the ground doesnot
exceed1.2 in (3 cm).
R
Neverplace your handsand feet under the
raised vehicle.
R
Do not lieunder the vehicle.
R
Do not start the engine whenthe vehicle is
raised.
R
Neveropenorcloseadoororthe tailgate
whenthe vehicle is raised.
R
Make surethat no persons are present in the
vehicle whenthe vehicle is raised.
X
Using lugwrench :,loosen the bolts on the
wheel youwishtochangebyabout one full
turn. Do not unscrewthe bolts completely.
Jacking points
314
Changing awheel
Wheels and tires
The jacking points are located just behind the
front wheel housings and just in front of the rear
wheel housings (arrows).
X
Take ratchet wrench ? out of the vehicle tool
kit and place it on the hexagon nut of jack =
so that the letters AUF are visible.
X
Position jack = at jacking point ;.
X
Make sure the foot of the jack is directly
beneath the jacking point.
X
Turn ratchet wrench ? until jack = sits
completely on jacking point ; and the base
of the jack lies evenly on the ground.
X
Turn ratchet wrench ? until the tire is raised
amaximum of 1.2 in (3 cm)from the ground.
Removing awheel
!
Do not place wheel bolts in sand or on adirty
surface. The bolt and wheel hub threads could
otherwise be damaged when you screw them
in.
X
Unscrew the wheel bolts.
X
Remove the wheel.
Mounting anew wheel
G
WARNING
Oiled or greased wheel bolts or damaged
wheel bolts/hub threads can cause the wheel
bolts to come loose. As aresult, you could
lose awheel while driving. There is arisk of
accident.
Never oil or grease wheel bolts. In the event of
damage to the threads, contact aqualified
specialist workshop immediately. Have the
damaged wheel bolts or hub threads
replaced/renewed. Do not continue driving.
G
WARNING
If you tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is raised, the jack could tip
over. There is arisk of injury.
Only tighten the wheel bolts or wheel nuts
when the vehicle is on the ground.
Always pay attention to the instructions and
safety notes in the "Changing awheel" section
(
Y page 312).
Only use wheel bolts that have been designed
for the wheel and the vehicle. For safety rea-
sons, Mercedes-Benz recommends that you
only use wheel bolts which have been approved
for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and the respective
wheel.
!
To prevent damage to the paintwork,hold
the wheel securely against the wheel hub
while screwing in the first wheel bolt.
Changing awheel
315
Wheels and tires
Z
X
Clean thewheel and wheel hub contact sur-
faces.
X
Placethe newwheel on thewheel hub and
push it on.
X
Tightenthe wheel boltsuntil they are finger-
tight.
Lowering thevehicle
G
WARNING
The wheelscould work looseifthe wheel nuts
and boltsare nottightened to thespecified
tightening torque. Thereisariskofaccident.
Havethe tightening torque immediately
checked at aqualified specialist workshop
after awheel is changed.
X
Placethe ratchet wrench onto thehexagon
nut of thejacksothatthe letters AB are visi-
ble.
X
Turn theratchet wrench until thevehicle is
once again standing firmly on theground.
X
Placethe jacktoone side.
X
Tightenthe wheel boltsevenly in acrosswise
pattern in thesequenceindicated (: to A).
The specifiedtightening torque is 96 lb-ft
(130 Nm).
X
Turn thejackback to its initial position.
X
Stow thejackand therestofthe vehicle tools
in thevehicle again.
X
Mercedes-AMGvehicles and vehicles
with AMG equipment: insert thecover into
theouter sill.
X
Checkthe tirepressureofthe newly mounted
wheel and adjust it if necessary.
Observethe recommended tirepressure
(
Y page 296).
Canada only: as longasyou are driving withthe
emergencysparewheel mounted, thetirepres-
sure loss warning system cannotfunction relia-
bly. Only restartthe tirepressureloss warning
system when thedefective wheel has been
replacedwithanew wheel.
Vehicles with tirepressure monitor(USA
only): all mountedwheelsmust be equipped
withfunctioning sensors.
Wheel and tirecombinations
General notes
You can ask for informationregardingpermitted
wheel/tire combinations at an authorized
Mercedes-BenzCenter.
You should regularly check thepressureofthe
emergencysparewheel,particularly priorto
longtrips, and correct thepressureasneces-
sary (
Y page 296). The value on thewheel is
valid.
!
For safety reasons, Mercedes-Benzrecom-
mends that you only use tires and wheels
whichhave been approvedbyMercedes-Benz
specifically for your vehicle.
Thesetires have been specially adapted for
use withthe control systems,suchasABS or
ESP
®
,and are markedasfollows:
R
MO = Mercedes-BenzOriginal
R
MOE = Mercedes-BenzOriginal Extended
(tires featuringrun-flat characteristics)
R
MO1 = Mercedes-BenzOriginal (only cer-
tain AMGtires)
Mercedes-BenzOriginal Extendedtires may
only be used on wheelsthathave been spe-
cificallyapprovedbyMercedes-Benz.
Only use tires, wheelsoraccessoriestested
and approvedbyMercedes-Benz. Certain
characteristics, e.g.handling, vehicle noise
emissionsorfuel consumption,may other-
wise be adversely affected. In addition,when
driving withaload, tiredimension variations
could causethe tires to come intocontact
withthe bodywork and axle components. This
could result in damaget
othe tires or theveh
i-
cle.
Mercedes-Benzacceptsnoliabilityfor dam-
age resulting from theuse of tires, wheelsor
accessoriesother than those tested and
approved.
316
Wheel and tirecombinations
Wheels and tires
Information on tires, wheelsand approved
combinations can be obtained from any quali-
fied specialist workshop.
!
Retreaded tires are neither tested nor rec-
ommended by Mercedes-Benz, since previ-
ous damage cannot always be detected on
retreaded tires. As aresult, Mercedes-Benz
cannot guarantee vehicle safety if retreaded
tires are mounted. Do not mount used tires if
you have no information abouttheir previous
usage.
The recommended pressures for variousoper-
ating conditions can be found:
R
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
on the B-pillaronthe driver's side
R
in the tire pressure table in the fuel fillerflap
Observe the notes on recommended tire pres-
sures under variousoperating conditions
(
Y page 296).
Check tire pressures regularly,and only when
the tires are cold. Complywith the maintenance
recommendations of the tire manufacturerin
the vehicle document wallet.
Notes on the vehicle equipment –always equip
the vehicle:
R
with tires of the same size on agiven axle (left
and right)
R
with the same type of tire (summertires,
MOExtended tires, winter tires)
Exception: it is permissible to install adiffer-
ent type or make in the event of aflat tire.
Observe the "MOExtended tires (tires with
run-flat characteristics" section (
Y page 279).
Vehiclesequipped with MOExtended tires are
not equipped with aTIREFIT kit at the factory. It
is therefore recommended that you additionally
equipyourvehicle with aTIREFIT kit if you mount
tires that do not feature run-flat properties, e.g.
winter tires. ATIREFIT kit may be obtained from
aqualifiedspecialist workshop.
Wheel and tire combinations
317
Wheelsand tires
Z
Information regardingtechnicaldata
i
The datastatedherespecifically refers to a
vehiclewithstandard equipment. Consult an
authorizedMercedes-BenzCenterfor the
datafor all vehiclevariants and trim levels.
Vehicle electronics
Installing two-way radiosand mobile
phones (RF transmitters)
G
WARNING
The electromagneticradiation from modified
or incorrectlyretrofittedRF-transmitters can
interfere withthe vehicleelectronics.This can
compromise theoperational safetyofthe
vehicle. Thereisariskofanaccident.
You should haveall worktoelectrical and
electronic equipmentcarried out at aqualified
specialist workshop.
G
WARNING
The electromagneticradiation from incor-
rectlyoperatedRFtransmitters can interfere
withthe vehicleelectronics,for example:
R
if theRFtransmitterisnot connectedwith
an exteriorantenna
R
theexteriorantenna has been installed
incorrectlyorisnot alow-reflection type
This can compromise theoperational safety
of thevehicle. Thereisariskofanaccident.
Havethe low-reflection exteriorantenna
mountedataqualified specialist workshop.
When operating RF transmitters in thevehi-
cle,always connectthemwiththe low-reflec-
tion exteriorantenna.
!
The operating permit may be invalidated if
theinstructionsfor installation and use of RF
transmitters are notobserved.
In particular, thefollowingconditionsmust be
complied with:
R
only approvedwavebands may be used.
R
observethe maximum permissible output
in these wavebands.
R
only approvedantenna positionsmay be
used.
Excessivelevels of electromagneticradiation
may causedamagetoyour healthand thehealth
of others. Using an exteriorantenna takes into
accountcurrentscientific discussionsrelating
to thepossible healthhazards that may result
from electromagneticfields.
Approved antenna positions
:
Frontroofarea
;
Rear roofarea
=
Rear fender
i
On vehicles withpanoramaroofwithpower
tilt/slidingpanel, installinganantenna to the
frontorrear roofarea is notpermitted.
On therear fenders, it is recommended to
position theantenna on theside of thevehicle
closesttothe center of theroad.
Use theTechnical Specification ISO/TS 21609
when retrofitting RF transmitters (Road Vehicles
-EMC guidelines for installation of aftermarket
radiofrequency transmitting equipment).
Observethe legal requirements for accessory
parts.
If your vehiclehas installationsfor two-way radio
equipment, use thepower supplyorantenna
connectionsintended for use withthe basic wir-
ing.Besuretoobservethe manufacturer'sSup-
plementwhen installing.
Deviationswithrespecttofrequency bands,
maximum transmission outputsorantenna
positionsmust be approvedbyMercedes-Benz.
318
Vehicle electronics
Technical data
The maximum transmission output (PEAK)atthe
base of the antenna must not exceed the fol-
lowing values:
Frequency band Maximum
transmission
output
Short wave
3-54MHz
100 W
4mwaveband
74 -88MHz
30 W
2mwaveband
144 -174 MHz
50 W
Trunked radio system/
Tetra
380 -460 MHz
10 W
70 cm waveband
400 -460 MHz
35 W
Mobile communications
(2G/3G/4G)
10 W
The following can be used in the vehicle without
restrictions:
R
RF transmitters with amaximum transmis-
sion output of up to 100 mW
R
RF transmitters with transmitter frequencies
in the 380 -410 MHz frequency band and a
maximum transmission output of up to 2W
(trunked radio system/Tetra)
R
Mobile phones (2G/3G/4G)
There is no restriction for antenna positions on
the outside of the vehicle for the following fre-
quency bands:
R
Trunked radio system/Tetra
R
70 cm waveband
R
2G/3G/4G
Identification plates
Vehicle identification platewith vehi-
cle identification number (VIN)
X
Open the driver's door.
You will see vehicle identification plate :.
Example: vehicle identification plate (USA only)
:
VIN
;
Paint code
Example: vehicle identification plate (Canada only)
:
VIN
;
Paint code
i
The data shown on the vehicle identification
plate is used only as an example. This data is
Identification plates
319
Technical data
Z
differentfor every vehicle and can deviate
from the data shown here. You can find the
data applicable to your vehicle on the vehicle
identification plate.
Vehicle identification number (VIN)
X
Slide the right-handfrontseat to its rearmost
position.
X
Fold floor covering : upwards.
You will see VIN ;.
The VIN can also be found on the vehicle iden-
tification plate (
Y page 319).
The VIN can also be found at the lower edge of
the windshield (
Y page 320).
Engine number
:
Emission control information plate, includ-
ing the certification of both federal and Cali-
fornian emissionsstandards
;
VIN (on the lower edge of the windshield)
=
Engine number (stamped intothe crank-
case)
Service productsand filling capaci-
ties
Important safetynotes
G
WARNING
Service productsmay be poisonous and haz-
ardous to health. There is arisk of injury.
Comply with instructions on the use, storage
and disposal of serviceproductsonthe labels
of the respective original containers. Always
storeserviceproductssealed in their original
containers. Always keep serviceproductsout
of the reach of children.
H
Environmental note
Dispose of serviceproductsinanenviron-
mentally responsible manner.
Service productsinclude the following:
R
Fuels
R
Lubricants (e.g. engineoil, transmission oil)
R
Coolant
R
Brakefluid
R
Windshield washer fluid
R
Climate control system refrigerant
Components and serviceproductsmust match.
Only use productsrecommended by Mercedes-
Benz. Damage which is caused by the use of
productswhich have not been recommended is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz warrantyor
goodwill gestures.They are listed in this
Mercedes-Benz Operator's Manual in the appro-
priate section.
Information on tested and approved products
can be obtained at aMercedes-Benz Service
Center or on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
You can recognizeservice products approvedby
Mercedes-Benzbythe followinginscription on
the containers:
R
MB-Freigabe (e.g. MB-Freigabe 229.51)
R
MB-Approval (e.g. MB-Approval 229.51)
Other designationsorrecommendations indi-
catealevel of quality or aspecification in
accordancewith an MB SheetNumber (e.g. MB
229.5). They have not necessarily been
approvedbyMercedes-Benz.
320
Service productsand filling capacities
Technical data
Other identifications, for example:
R
0W-30
R
5W-30
R
5W-40
Fuel
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Fuel is highly flammable. If you handle fuel
incorrectly, there is arisk of fire and explo-
sion.
You must avoid fire, open flames, creating
sparks and smoking. Switch off the engine
and, if applicable, the auxiliary heating before
refueling.
G
WARNING
Fuel is poisonous and hazardous to health.
There is arisk of injury.
You must make sure that fuel does not come
into contact with your skin, eyes or clothing
and that it is not swallowed. Do not inhale fuel
vapors. Keep fuel awayfrom children.
If you or others come into contact with fuel,
observe the following:
R
Wash awayfuel from skin immediately
using soap and water.
R
If fuel comes into contact with your eyes,
immediately rinse them thoroughly with
clean water. Seek medical assistance with-
out delay.
R
If fuel is swallowed, seek medical assis-
tance without delay.Donot induce vomit-
ing.
R
Immediately change out of clothing which
has come into contact with fuel.
Tank capacity
Model Total capa-
city
Models with 4MATIC
14.8 US gal
(56.0 l)
Allother models
13.2 US gal
(50.0 l)
Model Of which
reserve
MercedesAMGvehicles
Approx.
2.1 US gal
(8.0 l)
All other models
Approx.
1.6 US gal
(6.0 l)
Gasoline
Fuel grade
!
Do not use diesel to refuelvehicles with a
gasoline engine. Do not switch on the ignition
if you accidentally refuelwith the wrong fuel.
Otherwise, the fuel willenter the fuel system.
Even smallamounts of the wrong fuel could
resultindamage to the fuel system and the
engine. Notify aqualified specialist workshop
and have the fuel tank and fuel lines drained
completely.
!
Only refuelusing unleaded premium grade
gasoline with at least 91 AKI/95 RON.
i
E10 fuel contains up to 10% bioethanol.
YourvehicleisE10-compatible. You can
refuelyourvehicleusing E10 fuel.
!
Only use the fuel recommended. Operating
the vehiclewith other fuelscan leadtodam-
age to the fuel system, engine and exhaust
system.
!
Do not use the following:
R
E15 (gasoline with 15% ethanol)
R
E85 (gasoline with 85% ethanol)
R
E100 (100% ethanol)
R
M15 (gasoline with 15% methanol)
R
M30 (gasoline with 30% methanol)
R
M85 (gasoline with 85% methanol)
Service products and fillingcapacities
321
Technical data
Z
R
M100 (100% methanol)
R
Gasoline with metalliferous additives
R
Diesel
Do not mix such fuelswith the fuel recom-
mended for yourvehicle.
!
To ensure the longevity and fullperform-
ance of the engine, only premium-grade
unleadedgasoline must be used.
If standard unleadedgasoline is unavailable
and you have to refuelwith unleadedgasoline
of alower grade, observe the following pre-
cautions:
R
Only fill the fuel tank to halffullwith regular
unleadedgasoline and fill the rest with pre-
mium-gradeunleadedgasoline as soon as
possible.
R
Do not drive at the maximumspeed.
R
Avoid sudden acceleration and engine
speeds over 3,000 rpm.
You willusually find information about the fuel
gradeonthe pump.Ifyou cannot find the label
on the pump,ask the staff for assistance.
i
For further information, consultaqualified
specialist workshop or visit
http://www.mbusa.com (USA only).
GLA 250,GLA 250 4MATIC: as atemporary
measure, if the recommended fuel is not avail-
able, you may also use regularunleadedgaso-
line with an octane rating of 88 AKI/93 RON.
All other models: as atemporary measure, if
the recommended fuel is not available,you may
also use regularunleadedgasoline with an
octane rating of 87 AKI/91 RON. This may
reduce engine performance and increase fuel
consumption. Avoid driving at fullthrottle and
sudden acceleration. Never refuelusing gaso-
line with alower AKI.
Information on refueling (
Y page141).
Additives
!
Operating the engine with fuel additives
added later can leadtoengine failure. Do not
mix fuel
additiveswi
th fuel.This does not
include additivesfor the removaland preven-
tion of residue buildup. gasoline must only be
mixed with additivesrecommended by
Mercedes-Benz. Comply with the instructions
for use on the product label.More information
about recommended additivescan be
obtained from any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Mercedes-Benz recommendsthat you use bran-
ded fuelsthat have additives.
The fuel quality available in some countriesmay
not be sufficient. Residuecouldbuild up in the
fuel injection system as aresult. In such cases,
and in consultation with an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, the fuel may be mixed
with the cleaning additive recommended by
Mercedes-Benz. You must observe the notes
and mixing ratiosspecified on the container.
Engine oil
General notes
!
Never use engine oil or an oil filterofaspec-
ification other than is necessary to fulfill the
prescribed service intervals. Do not change
the engine oil or oil filterinorder to achieve
longerreplacement intervalsthan those pre-
scribed. You couldotherwise cause engine
damage or damage to the exhaust gas after-
treatment.
Follow the instructions in the service interval
displayregarding the oil change.Otherwise,
you may damage the engine and the exhaust
gas aftertreatment.
When handling engine oil,observe the important
safety notes on service products (
Y page320).
The engine oilsare matched to the performance
of Mercedes-Benz engines and service intervals.
You should thereforeonly use engine oilsand oil
filters that are approved for vehicles with main-
tenance systems.
For alistofapproved engine oilsand oil filters,
consultanauthorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Or visitthe website
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
The tableshowswhich engine oilshave been
approved for yourvehicle.
322
Service products and fillingcapacities
Technical data
Model MB-Freigabe or
MB-Approval
All models
229.5
Use only SAE 0W-40 or SAE 5W-40 engine oils
for Mercedes-AMG vehicles.
i
MB approval is indicated on the oil contain-
ers.
Fillingcapacities
The following values refer to an oil change
including the oil filter.
Model Capacity
MercedesAMGvehicles
5.8 US qt (5.5 l)
All other models
5.9 US qt (5.6 l)
Additives
!
Do not use any additives in the engine oil.
This could damage the engine.
Brake fluid
G
WARNING
The brake fluidconstantly absorbs moisture
from the air. This lowers the boiling point of
the brake fluid. If the boiling point of the brake
fluidistoo low,vaporpockets may form in the
brake system when the brakes are applied
hard. This would impair braking efficiency.
There is arisk of an accident.
You should have the brake fluidrenewedat
the specified intervals.
When handling brake fluid, observe the impor-
tant safety notes on service products
(
Y page320).
The brake fluidchange intervalscan be found in
the Maintenance Booklet.
Only use brake fluidapproved by Mercedes-
Benz in accordance with MB-Freigabe or MB-
Approval331.0.
Information about approved brake fluidcan be
obtained at any qualified specialist workshop or
on the Internet at
http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
i
Have the brake fluidregularlyreplaced at a
qualified specialist workshop and the replace-
ment confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.
Coolant
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
If antifreeze comes into contact with hot com-
ponents in the engine compartment, it may
ignite. There is arisk of fire and injury.
Let the engine cool down before you add anti-
freeze. Make sure that antifreeze is not spilled
next to the filler neck. Thoroughly cleanthe
antifreeze from components before starting
the engine.
!
Only add coolant that has been premixed
with the desired antifreeze protection. You
couldotherwise damage the engine.
Further information on coolants can be found
in the Mercedes-Benz Specifications for Ser-
vice Products, MB BeVo 310.1, e.g. on the
Internet at http://bevo.mercedes-benz.com.
Or contact aqualified specialist workshop.
!
Always use asuitable coolant mixture, even
in countries where high temperatures prevail.
Otherwise, the engine cooling system is not
sufficiently protected from corrosionand
overheating.
i
Have the coolant regularlyreplaced at a
qualified specialist workshop and the replace-
ment confirmed in the Maintenance Booklet.
Comply with the important safety precautions
for service products when handling coolant
(
Y page320).
The coolant is amixture of water and corrosion
inhibitor/antifreeze concentrate. It performs
the following tasks:
R
Anti-corrosion protection
R
Antifreeze protection
R
Raising the boiling point
If the coolant has antifreeze protection down to
-35 ‡(-37 †), the boiling point of the coolant
during operation is approximately266
(130 †).
Serviceproducts and filling capacities
323
Technical data
Z
The antifreeze concentrate/corrosion inhibitor
concentration in the engine cooling system
should:
R
be at least 50%. This will protectthe engine
cooling system against freezingdown to
approximately -35 ‡(-37 †)
R
not exceed 55% (antifreezeprotection down
to -49 ‡[-45 †]).Otherwise,heatwill notbe
dissipated as effectively
Mercedes-Benzrecommends acoolantorcor-
rosioninhibitor/antifreezeconcentratein
accordance with
MB Specificationsfor ServiceProducts 310.1.
i
When the vehicle is first delivered, it is filled
with acoolant mixture that ensures adequate
antifreeze and anti-corrosion protection.
i
The coolant is checked with every mainte-
nanceinterval at aqualified specialist work-
shop.
Filling capacities
Model Capacity
MercedesAMG
vehicles
Approx.12.6USqt
(11.9l)
Allother models
Approx. 8.2 US qt
(7.8 l)
Windshield washersystem
Important safety notes
G
WARNING
Windshieldwasher concentrate couldignite if
it comes into contact with hot engine compo-
nents or the exhaust system.There is arisk of
fire and injury.
Make sure that no windshield washer con-
centrate is spilled next to the filler neck.
!
Only MB SummerFitand MB WinterFit
washer fluidshould be mixed together. The
spraynozzles may otherwise become
blocked.
Do not use distilledorde-ionized water. Other-
wise, the levelsensor may give afalsereading.
When handling washer fluid, observe the impor-
tant safety notes on service products
(
Y page320).
At temperatures above freezing:
X
Fill the washer fluidreservoir with amixture of
water and windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB
SummerFit.
Add 1part MB SummerFitto100 parts water.
At temperatures below freezing:
X
Fill the washer fluidreservoir with amixture of
water and washer fluid, e.g. MB WinterFit.
For the correct mixing ratio refer to the infor-
mation on the antifreeze reservoir.
i
Add windshield washer fluid, e.g. MB Sum-
merFit or MB WinterFit, to the washer fluidall
yearround.
Climate control system refrigerant
Important safety notes
The climate control system of yourvehicleisfil-
led with refrigerant R134a.
The instruction label regarding the refrigerant
type usedcan be found on the left, on the under-
side of the hood.
!
Only the refrigerant R134a and the PAG oil
approved by Mercedes-Benz may be used.
The approved PAG oil may not be mixed with
any other PAG oil that is not approved for
R-134a refrigerant. Otherwise, the climate
control system may be damaged.
Service work, such as refilling with refrigerant or
replacing component parts, may only be carried
out by aqualified specialist workshop. All appli-
cableregulations, as wellasSAE standard J639,
must be adhered to.
Always have work on the climate control system
carriedout at aqualified specialist workshop.
324
Service products and filling capacities
Technical data
Refrigerant instructionlabel
Example:refrigerant instruction label
:
Warning symbol
;
Refrigerant filling capacity
=
Applicablestandards
?
PAG oilpartnumber
A
Type of refrigerant
Warning symbol : advises youabout:
R
Possible dangers
R
Having service work carriedout at aqualified
specialist workshop
Fillingcapacities
MercedesAMG
vehicles
Capacity
Refrigerant
23.6 ±0.4 oz
(670 ±10g)
PAGoil
4.2 oz
(120 g)
All other models Capacity
Refrigerant
22.9 ±0.4 oz
(650 ±10g)
PAGoil
4.2 oz
(120 g)
Vehicledata
General notes
Please note that for the specified vehicle data:
R
the heights specified may vary as aresultof:
-
Tires
-
Load
-
Condition of the suspension
-
Optional equipment
R
optional equipment reducesthe maximum
payload.
Dimensions and weights
Model
:
Maximum
headroom
;
Opening
height
Mercedes-
AMG vehicles
73.5 in
(1866 mm)
79.5 in
(2019 mm)
All other mod-
els
75.4 in
(1914 mm)
82.0 in
(2083 mm)
Missing values were not available at time of
going to print.
MercedesAMG
vehicles
Vehiclelength
175.0 in
(4445 mm)
Vehiclewidth
including exterior
mirrors
79.6 in
(2022 mm)
Vehicleheight
58.2 in
(1479 mm)
Vehicle data
325
Technical data
Z
MercedesAMG
vehicles
Wheelbase
106.3 in
(2699 mm)
Minimum ground
clearance
Turning radius
38.7 ft
(11.8 m)
Maximum roof load
165.3 lb
(75 kg)
Maximum trunk
load
220.5 lb
(100 kg)
All other models
Vehicle length
173.9 in
(4417 mm)
Vehicle width
including exterior
mirrors
79.6 in
(2022 mm)
Vehicle height
60.3 in
(1532 mm)
Minimum ground
clearance
8.0 in
(204 mm)
Wheelbase
106.3 in
(2699 mm)
Turning radius
38.7 ft
(11.8 m)
Maximum roof load
165.3 lb
(75 kg)
Maximum trunk
load
220.5 lb
(100 kg)
Vehicle data for off-road driving
Approach/departure angle
Missing values were not available at time of
going to print.
: ;
Approach
and depar-
ture angles
when the
vehicleisloa-
ded and
readytodrive
When the vehicleisloaded and readytodrive, it
has afull tank, all fluids have been refilled and
the driver is in the vehicle.
For further information about approach/depar-
ture angles, see (
Y page153).
Maximum gradient-climbing capabil-
ity
Note that the vehicle's gradient-climbing capa-
bility depends on the off-road conditions and the
road surface conditions.
GLA 250:the maximumgradient climbing abil-
ity is 40%.
GLA 250 4MATIC: the maximumgradient
climbing ability is 65%.
Missing values for the
MercedesAMG GLA 45 4MATIC were not avail-
ableatthe time of going to print.
Accelerate carefully and make sure that the
wheels do not spin when driving on steep ter-
rain.
326
Vehicle data for off-road driving
Technical data
If the load on the front axle is reduced when
pulling awayonasteep uphill slope,the front
wheelshave atendency to spin. 4ETS recogni-
zes this and brakes the wheelsaccordingly.The
rear wheel torque is increased,making it easier
to drive off.
For further information aboutthe maximum gra-
dient climbing ability, see (
Y page 154).
Vehicledata for off-road driving
327
Technical data
Z
328
308


Need help? Post your question in this forum.

Forumrules


Report abuse

Libble takes abuse of its services very seriously. We're committed to dealing with such abuse according to the laws in your country of residence. When you submit a report, we'll investigate it and take the appropriate action. We'll get back to you only if we require additional details or have more information to share.

Product:

For example, Anti-Semitic content, racist content, or material that could result in a violent physical act.

For example, a credit card number, a personal identification number, or an unlisted home address. Note that email addresses and full names are not considered private information.

Forumrules

To achieve meaningful questions, we apply the following rules:

Register

Register getting emails for Mercedes GLA 2017 at:


You will receive an email to register for one or both of the options.


Get your user manual by e-mail

Enter your email address to receive the manual of Mercedes GLA 2017 in the language / languages: English as an attachment in your email.

The manual is 8,92 mb in size.

 

You will receive the manual in your email within minutes. If you have not received an email, then probably have entered the wrong email address or your mailbox is too full. In addition, it may be that your ISP may have a maximum size for emails to receive.

Others manual(s) of Mercedes GLA 2017

Mercedes GLA 2017 Additional guide - English - 202 pages


The manual is sent by email. Check your email

If you have not received an email with the manual within fifteen minutes, it may be that you have a entered a wrong email address or that your ISP has set a maximum size to receive email that is smaller than the size of the manual.

The email address you have provided is not correct.

Please check the email address and correct it.

Your question is posted on this page

Would you like to receive an email when new answers and questions are posted? Please enter your email address.



Info